JP2019217506A - Casting facility and casting method - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a casting facility and a casting method that facilitate tracing and extraction of measurement data over a plurality of steps.SOLUTION: A casting facility 1 comprises a control device 11 that acquires unique data on casting of one frame for a plurality of steps of the casting facility 1 and associates the unique data of each step for casting of one frame.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a casting facility and a casting method.

Generally, in a casting facility, a casting is cast by molding a casting mold with a casting sand, pouring a molten metal into the casting mold, cooling the casting mold, and removing the casting. When casting a casting having a cavity, a core is placed in a mold. The mold sand separated from the casting by separating the mold is kneaded and adjusted after foreign matter removal and sand cooling are performed, and is repeatedly used for molding the mold.
Patent Document 1 discloses a casting method and a casting line as described above.

JP-A-2004-9101

Problems may occur in castings cast by casting equipment due to problems with the casting equipment and the like. Further, in order to improve the quality of the casting, the operating environment of the casting facility may be changed. In such a case, in order to analyze defects and identify problems in the casting equipment, and to extract changes in the casting equipment that are effective for quality improvement, various data on the casting equipment are measured by various measuring instruments. Must be measured and analyzed.
However, as described above, a number of different steps are performed in a casting facility. Therefore, for example, when a defect occurs in a casting, it is not easy to track and extract measurement data related to the casting in each process.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a casting facility and a casting method that can easily track and extract measurement data across a plurality of processes.

  The present invention employs the following means in order to solve the above problems. That is, the present invention includes a control device that acquires specific data for one frame of a mold for a plurality of processes of the casting facility and associates the unique data of each process with each mold for one frame. I will provide a.

  Further, the present invention provides a casting method for acquiring unique data for one frame of a mold for a plurality of processes of a casting facility, and associating the unique data of each process for each mold of one frame.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a casting facility and a casting method that can easily track and extract measurement data across a plurality of processes.

It is a schematic plan view of the casting equipment in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram of the above-mentioned casting equipment. It is a partial expansion perspective view of the said casting equipment. FIG. 3A is a plan view and FIG. 3B is a side view of a platen cart used in the casting facility. It is explanatory drawing of the mold release apparatus in the said casting equipment. It is explanatory drawing of the sand processing equipment in the said casting equipment. It is explanatory drawing of the product information table stored in the control apparatus of the said casting equipment. It is explanatory drawing of the template data table stored in the said control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the molding data table stored in the said control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the core data table stored in the said control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the pouring data table stored in the said control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the molten metal conveyance data table stored in the said control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the cooling conveyance data table stored in the said control apparatus. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a post-processing data table stored in the control device. It is explanatory drawing of the sand processing data table stored in the said control apparatus. It is a flowchart of the casting method performed by the said casting equipment. It is a schematic structure figure of the 1st modification of the above-mentioned embodiment. It is a block diagram of a control device in the above-mentioned 1st modification. It is a flowchart of the collection | recovery sand cooling method in the said 1st modification. It is a flowchart of the collection | recovery sand cooling method in the said 1st modification. It is a flowchart of the collection | recovery sand cooling method in the said 1st modification. It is a flowchart of the collection | recovery sand cooling method in the said 1st modification. It is a schematic structure figure of the 2nd modification of the above-mentioned embodiment. It is a block diagram of a control device in the above-mentioned 2nd modification. It is a flowchart of the collection | recovery sand cooling method in the said 2nd modification. It is a flowchart of the collection | recovery sand cooling method in the said 2nd modification. It is a schematic structure figure of the 3rd modification of the above-mentioned embodiment. It is a block diagram of a control device in the above-mentioned 3rd modification. It is a schematic structure figure of the 4th modification of the above-mentioned embodiment. It is a block diagram of a control device in the above-mentioned 4th modification. FIG. 14 is a partial cross-sectional front view showing a configuration of a fifth modified example of the embodiment. It is a partial sectional left side view showing the configuration of the fifth modification. It is a front view showing the composition of the sand radiation device in the above-mentioned 5th modification. It is a left view which shows the structure of the sand radiation apparatus in the said 5th modification. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow direction of the flowing air in the said 5th modification, and the radiation direction of the molding sand radiated | emitted from a sand radiating device. It is a schematic structure figure showing the 6th modification of the above-mentioned embodiment. It is a schematic structure top view which shows the type shift detection apparatus in the said 6th modification. It is a front view which shows a part of frameless molding line in the said 6th modification. It is a top view which shows a part of frameless molding line in the said 6th modification, and is a figure which shows the state which extruded the upper and lower mold. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the example which estimates the generation | occurrence | production source of the type shift in the said 6th modification. FIG. 16 is a partial schematic diagram for explaining a blanking operation in the sixth modification. It is a partial front view explaining the blanking molding line as a 7th modification of the above-mentioned embodiment. FIG. 43 is a partial plan view of the blanking molding line shown in FIG. 42. It is a top view of a blanking molding line in the above-mentioned seventh modification. It is a side view which shows the structure of the apparatus which measures the temperature of the casting sand supplied to the blanket molding machine in the said 7th modification. It is a partial plan view explaining the circumference of the lower squeeze board of the frame making machine in the seventh modification. It is a partial side view explaining the periphery of the lower squeeze board of the frame making machine in the seventh modification. It is a front view explaining a heater and a thermometer of a lower squeeze board in the 7th modification. FIGS. 7A and 7B are views for explaining the frame releasing operation in the seventh modified example, in which FIG. 7A shows a mode in which the upper and lower molds are pushed out by a molding frame cylinder before the mold receiving plate contacts the upper and lower molds, and FIG. A mode in which the upper and lower molds are pushed out by a mold blanking cylinder after contacting the upper and lower molds is shown. It is a side view explaining the scraper seen from the direction perpendicular to the conveyance direction of the conveyance means of the upper and lower molds in the seventh modification. It is a front view explaining the detail of the scraper seen from the direction orthogonal to FIG. It is a top view explaining the cleaning means different from the scraper of FIG. FIG. 53 is a side view of the cleaning unit of FIG. 52. It is a top view explaining the type shift detection device in the above-mentioned 7th modification. It is a flowchart of the operation (adjustment process) which optimizes the permissible range of unique data in the seventh modification. It is a flowchart of the operation (adjustment process) which optimizes the permissible range of unique data in the seventh modification. It is a flowchart of the operation (adjustment process) which optimizes the permissible range of unique data in the seventh modification. It is a flowchart of the operation (adjustment process) which optimizes the permissible range of unique data in the seventh modification. It is a flowchart of the operation (adjustment process) which optimizes the permissible range of unique data in the seventh modification. It is a flowchart of the operation (adjustment process) which optimizes the permissible range of unique data in the seventh modification. It is a flowchart of the operation (adjustment process) which optimizes the permissible range of unique data in the seventh modification. It is a flowchart of the operation (adjustment process) which optimizes the permissible range of unique data in the seventh modification. It is a flowchart of the operation (adjustment process) which optimizes the permissible range of unique data in the seventh modification. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of an operation (prevention step) for preventing occurrence of a mold shift using an optimized allowable range in the seventh modified example. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of an operation (prevention step) for preventing occurrence of a mold shift using an optimized allowable range in the seventh modified example. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of an operation (prevention step) for preventing occurrence of a mold shift using an optimized allowable range in the seventh modified example. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of an operation (prevention step) for preventing occurrence of a mold shift using an optimized allowable range in the seventh modified example. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of an operation (prevention step) for preventing occurrence of a mold shift using an optimized allowable range in the seventh modified example. It is a flowchart explaining the change of the adjustment process and the prevention process in the said 7th modification. It is a top view showing the composition of the casting mold line with a frame in the 8th modification of the above-mentioned embodiment. It is a front view which shows the casting frame with which the impact sensor in the said 8th modification was attached, the surface plate trolley, and the conveyance rail. It is a left view which shows the casting frame with which the impact sensor in the said 8th modification was attached, the surface plate trolley, and the conveyance rail. It is a left view which shows the casting frame with which the impact sensor in the said 8th modification was attached, the surface plate trolley, and the conveyance rail. It is a front view which shows the roller conveyor to which the impact sensor in the said 8th modification was attached. It is a side view which shows the roller conveyor which attached the impact sensor in the said 8th modification. It is a block diagram which shows the control means of the casting line in the said 8th modification. It is a lineblock diagram showing roughly the casting system containing the inspection device in the 9th modification of the above-mentioned embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the mold control table in the 9th modification. FIG. 77 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the inspection device shown in FIG. 77. (A) is a perspective view schematically showing an appearance of a housing of the inspection device shown in FIG. 79, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an arrangement of an imaging device and a lighting device shown in FIG. 79. It is. It is a perspective view showing roughly the circumference of the inspection area in the 9th modification. FIG. 78 is a process diagram illustrating a manufacturing process of a casting in the casting system illustrated in FIG. 77. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a series of processes performed by a controller of the inspection device in the inspection process shown in FIG. 82. 84 is a flowchart illustrating the image acquisition processing illustrated in FIG. 83 in detail. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the inspection processing shown in FIG. 83 in detail. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing in detail a reflection removal process by the release agent shown in FIG. 85. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pattern matching model according to the ninth modification. It is a figure showing an example of an inspection field and a mask field in the 9th modification. It is a figure showing an example of the display image in the 9th modification. It is a figure for explaining the difference of the irradiation range of light by the upper irradiation pattern and the middle irradiation pattern in the 9th modification. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the difference of the defect detection by an upper irradiation pattern and a middle irradiation pattern, (b) is a top view of the casting mold irradiated with light by an upper irradiation pattern, (c) is a plan view of the mold irradiated with light in the middle irradiation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the height of the casting_mold | template and the casting formed in the casting_mold | template injected | thrown-in to the casting_mold | die separating apparatus which concerns on the 10th modification of the said embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the height of the casting_mold | type and the casting formed in the casting_mold | template injected | thrown-in to the casting_mold | die unmolding apparatus which concerns on the said 10th modification. FIG. 93 is a plan view showing the positional relationship of the casting shown in FIG. 92 in the mold. It is the schematic which shows the casting line including the mold release apparatus which concerns on the said 10th modification. It is a figure which shows the 1st procedure of mold release in the mold removal apparatus which concerns on the said 10th modification. It is a figure which shows the 2nd procedure of mold release in the mold removal apparatus which concerns on the said 10th modification. FIG. 97 is an example of a side view showing details of the process shown in FIG. 96 in the tenth modification. FIG. 97 is an example of a side view showing the details of the process shown in FIG. 96 in an eleventh modification of the above embodiment. FIG. 97 is an example of a side view showing details of a step shown in FIG. 96 in a twelfth modification of the above embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the height of the casting_mold | type and the casting formed inside the casting_mold | template which are injected | thrown-in to the casting_mold | die separating apparatus which concerns on the 13th modification of the said embodiment. FIG. 102 is a plan view showing a positional relationship of the casting shown in FIG. 101 in a mold. It is the schematic which shows the casting line containing the mold release apparatus which concerns on the said 13th modification. It is a figure showing the 1st procedure of mold separation in the mold separation device concerning the 13th modification. It is a figure which shows an example (comparative example) of mold release performed by suspending a casting on a hanger hook which hangs on a hanger provided in the casting. FIG. 104 is an example of a side view showing details of the step shown in FIG. 104 in the thirteenth modification. It is a figure which shows the 2nd procedure of mold release in the mold removal apparatus which concerns on the said 13th modification. FIG. 105 is an example of a side view showing details of a step shown in FIG. 104 in a fourteenth modification of the above embodiment. FIG. 105 is an example of a side view showing details of a step shown in FIG. 104 in a fifteenth modified example of the above embodiment. FIG. 105 is an example of a side view showing details of a step shown in FIG. 104 in a sixteenth modification of the above embodiment. FIG. 110 is a plan view of a configuration in which a wedge is formed on the mold in the HX-HX of FIG. 110. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the casting_mold | mold formed in the casting_mold | template and the casting_mold | type injected | thrown-in to the casting_mold | die unmolding apparatus in 17th modification of the said embodiment. It is a cross-sectional view of the casting mold and the casting. It is the schematic which shows the casting line including the mold release apparatus in the said 17th modification. FIG. 17A is a side view of the mold releasing device according to the seventeenth modification, and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 17A illustrating the relationship between a hanger hook, a mold, and a casting. (A) of the mold separating device in the seventeenth modified example is a side view in which mold sand is removed, (b) is an explanatory view of a mold and a casting, and (c) is a side view of a state in which the mold is transported. It is. It is a side view of the casting mold separation device in the 18th modification of the above-mentioned embodiment. (A) is a side view and (b) is a plan view of a mold release device in a nineteenth modification of the above embodiment. (A) is a side view and (b) is a plan view of a mold release device in a twentieth modification of the above embodiment. It is an explanatory view of a mold release device in a twenty-first modification of the embodiment. It is an explanatory view of a mold release device in a twenty-second modification of the above embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the functional structure of the green sand processing equipment monitoring system which concerns on the 23rd modification of the said embodiment. It is a figure showing the composition of the green sand processing equipment concerning the above-mentioned 23rd modification. FIG. 39 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a diagnostic device according to a twenty-third modification. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the green sand processing equipment monitoring system which concerns on the said 23rd modification. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring method of the green sand processing equipment using the green sand processing equipment monitoring system which concerns on the said 23rd modification. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a screen for setting a management value displayed on the display unit J54 according to the twenty-third modification. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of measurement data received by the diagnostic device according to the twenty-third modification. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of measurement data received by the diagnostic device according to the twenty-third modification. It is a block diagram showing the functional structure of the green sand processing equipment monitoring system which concerns on the 24th modification of the said embodiment. It is a figure showing the composition of the green sand processing equipment concerning the above-mentioned 24th modification. FIG. 47 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a diagnostic device according to a twenty-fourth modification. FIG. 47 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a diagnosis result receiving device according to a twenty-fourth modification. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring method of the green sand processing equipment using the green sand processing equipment monitoring system which concerns on the said 24th modification. It is a block diagram showing the functional structure of the green sand processing equipment monitoring system which concerns on the 25th modification of the said embodiment. It is a figure showing the composition of the green sand processing equipment concerning the above-mentioned 25th modification. FIG. 47 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a diagnostic device according to a twenty-fifth modification. FIG. 39 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a diagnosis result receiving device according to a twenty-fifth modification. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of map information displayed on a display unit according to the twenty-fifth modification. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating another example of the map information displayed on the display unit according to the twenty-fifth modification. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the green sand processing equipment monitoring system which concerns on the said 25th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring method of the green sand processing equipment using the green sand processing equipment monitoring system which concerns on the said 25th modification. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of a report created by a control unit of the diagnostic device according to the twenty-fifth modification. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a screen displayed on the display unit according to the twenty-fifth modification. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing another example of the screen displayed on the display unit according to the twenty-fifth modification. It is a top view showing the composition of the casting equipment concerning the 26th modification of the above-mentioned embodiment, receiving hot water from a furnace with a processing ladle, replacing it with a pouring ladle, and pouring it into a mold molded from the pouring ladle. This shows the casting equipment to be used. FIG. 147 is an enlarged view of a KA section in FIG. 146. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a mold feed pusher that conveys a mold and a sensor that detects an operation thereof in the 26th modification. It is a side view of the hot water receiving trolley with an empty change function in the said 26th modification. It is a side view of the pouring ladle carrier in the 26th modification. It is a side view of the pouring machine in the 26th modification. It is a block diagram which shows the data acquired in each unit of the casting equipment in the said 26th modification, and the communication of the data between units. It is a schematic diagram explaining a mode that the template serial number in the said 26th modification is shifted. It is a schematic diagram explaining the position of a ladle in the said 26th modification, a ladle serial number, and the molten metal state data associated with a ladle serial number. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the data in the casting equipment in the said 26th modification. FIG. 47 is a plan view showing a configuration of a casting facility according to a twenty-seventh modification of the embodiment, showing casting facility for receiving molten metal from a furnace into a pouring ladle and pouring the molten metal into a mold molded from the ladle. FIG. 156 is an enlarged view of a KB portion in FIG. 156. It is a side view of the pouring ladle transfer trolley with a raising / lowering function in the said 27th modification. It is a block diagram showing the functional structure of the casting equipment monitoring system which concerns on the 28th modification of the said embodiment. FIG. 51 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a diagnostic device according to the twenty-eighth modification. It is a figure showing the outline of the casting equipment monitoring system in the 28th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring method of the casting equipment using the casting equipment monitoring system which concerns on the said 28th modification. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of measurement data received by the diagnostic device in the twenty-eighth modification. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of a report created by a control unit of the diagnostic device in the twenty-eighth modification. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating another example of the report created by the control unit of the diagnostic device in the twenty-eighth modification. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating another example of the report created by the control unit of the diagnostic device in the twenty-eighth modification. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating another example of the report created by the control unit of the diagnostic device in the twenty-eighth modification. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating another example of the report created by the control unit of the diagnostic device in the twenty-eighth modification. It is a block diagram showing the functional structure of the casting equipment monitoring system concerning the 29th modification of the said embodiment. FIG. 47 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a diagnostic device according to a twenty-ninth modification. FIG. 51 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a diagnosis result receiving device according to the twenty-ninth modification. It is a figure showing the catalog explaining the casting equipment monitoring system in the 29th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring method of the casting equipment using the casting equipment monitoring system which concerns on the said 29th modification. It is a block diagram showing the functional composition of the casting equipment monitoring system concerning the 30th modification of the above-mentioned embodiment. FIG. 39 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a diagnostic device according to a thirtieth modification. FIG. 39 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a diagnosis result receiving device according to the thirtieth modification. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of map information displayed on a display unit in a thirtieth modification. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating another example of the map information displayed on the display unit in the thirtieth modification. It is a figure showing the outline of the casting equipment monitoring system in the 30th modification. It is a flow chart which shows the monitoring method of the casting equipment using the casting equipment monitoring system concerning the 30th modification. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of a report created by a control unit of the diagnostic device according to the thirtieth modification. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed on a display unit in the thirtieth modification. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating another example of the screen displayed on the display unit in the thirtieth modification. It is a perspective view which shows the portable terminal which is a part of apparatus inspection system which concerns on the 31st modification of the said embodiment, and the barcode seal stuck on the components. FIG. 39 is a perspective view showing the relationship between a portable terminal, a personal computer, and a printer, which are part of the device inspection system according to the thirty-first modification. It is a block diagram showing the system configuration of the device inspection system concerning the 31st modification. It is a block diagram showing an apparatus inspection system concerning the 31st modification. It is a flow chart which shows the processing flow of the device inspection system concerning the 31st modification. FIG. 188 (A) shows a processing flow at the time of device inspection. FIG. 188 (B) shows a processing flow at the time of data transfer. FIG. 188 (C) shows a processing flow after saving the transfer data in the personal computer. It is a front view showing the modeling machine which is the 1st inspection object device of the device inspection system concerning the 31st modification. It is a figure which shows the hydraulic unit which comprises some molding machines which are the 1st inspection target apparatuses of the apparatus inspection system which concerns on the said 31st modification, and shows the top view of a hydraulic unit. It is a figure which shows the hydraulic unit which comprises a part of molding machine which is the 1st inspection object apparatus of the apparatus inspection system which concerns on the said 31st modification, and shows the front view of a hydraulic unit. It is a figure which shows the hydraulic unit which comprises some molding machines which are 1st inspection target apparatuses of the apparatus inspection system which concerns on the said 31st modification, and shows a side view of a hydraulic unit. It is a front view showing the granulator which is the 2nd inspection object device of the device inspection system concerning the 31st modification. It is a front view showing the brush polish device which is the 3rd inspection object device of the device inspection system concerning the 31st modification. It is a side view showing the brush polisher which is the 3rd inspection object device of the device inspection system concerning the 31st modification. It is a block diagram showing an apparatus inspection system concerning a 33rd modification of the above-mentioned embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the whole processing flow of the device inspection system concerning the 33rd modification. 197 is a flowchart showing a processing flow for checking a component to be checked in the process of FIG. 197. It is a front view showing the modeling machine which is the 1st inspection object device of the device inspection system concerning the 33rd modification. It is a figure which shows the hydraulic unit which comprises some molding machines which are 1st inspection target apparatuses of the apparatus inspection system which concerns on the said 33rd modification, and shows the top view of a hydraulic unit. It is a figure which shows the hydraulic unit which comprises some molding machines which are 1st inspection target apparatuses of the apparatus inspection system which concerns on the said 33rd modification, and shows the front view of a hydraulic unit. It is a figure which shows the hydraulic unit which comprises some molding machines which are 1st inspection target apparatuses of the apparatus inspection system which concerns on the said 33rd modification, and shows a side view of a hydraulic unit. It is a front view showing the granulator which is the 2nd inspection object device of the device inspection system concerning the 33rd modification. It is a front view showing the brush polish device which is the 3rd inspection object device of the device inspection system concerning the 33rd modification. It is a side view showing a brush polishing device which is the 3rd inspection object device of the device inspection system concerning the 33rd modification. It is sectional drawing of the casting_mold | die and the casting formed in the casting_mold | template supplied to the casting_mold | die demolding apparatus in the 34th modification of the said embodiment. It is a cross-sectional view of the above-mentioned casting mold and castings in the 34th modification. It is a schematic structure figure of the casting line including the mold separation device in the 34th modification. FIG. 3A is a side view and FIG. 3B is a plan cross-sectional view of a separating portion in the mold separating device. FIG. 3 is a side view of a mold sand removing device in the mold separating device. It is an enlarged plan view which shows the detail of the said mold sand removal apparatus. It is a figure which shows the optical sensor of the said mold sand removal apparatus, a casting, and the positional relationship of mold sand. It is an explanatory view about how to give vibration to a casting in the above-mentioned cast sand removal device. It is a side view which shows the modification of a mold sand removal apparatus. It is a figure which shows another modification of a mold sand removal apparatus, (a) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the contact member of a vibration device or a casting receiver, (b) shows the example of use of a contact member. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the said contact member. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the said contact member. It is a side view which shows another modification of a mold sand removal apparatus. It is a schematic block diagram which shows the principal part of the casting line including the mold release apparatus in the 35th modification of the said embodiment. It is a schematic block diagram which shows the principal part of the casting line including the mold release device in the 36th modification of the said embodiment. It is a schematic plan view of the casting equipment provided with the marking device in the 37th modification of the above-mentioned embodiment. It is a figure which shows the casting used as the object of marking of the said marking device, (a) is a top view, (b) is a front view. It is a block diagram of the above-mentioned marking device. (A) is a plan view showing a state in which foreign matter is attached to a casting to be stamped, and (b) is a plan view showing an example of a regular marking place and an alternative marking place set on the casting. It is a flowchart which shows the stamping location and stamping control of the casting in the said 37th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the stamping location and stamping control of the casting in the said 37th modification. FIG. 47 is a plan view of a casting according to a thirty-eighth modification of the embodiment. FIG. 51 is a front view of the casting in the thirty-eighth modification. 227 is a QB-QB line view of FIG. 227. FIG. FIG. 47 is a side view of the casting in the thirty-eighth modification. (QC-QC diagram of FIG. 227) FIG. 229 is a diagram illustrating an area of a main part of FIG. 227. FIG. 47 is a schematic plan view of a casting facility according to a thirty-eighth modification. FIG. 229 is an explanatory view showing a state where the casting of FIG. 227 is separated by a mold separating device. FIG. 39 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a state where the casting according to the thirty-eighth modification is mounted on a housing. FIG. 39 is a plan view showing a state where the casting according to the thirty-eighth modification is mounted on a housing. It is a top view of the casting in the 39th modification of the above-mentioned embodiment. It is a front view of the casting in the 39th modification. FIG. 236 is a QB-QB line view of FIG. 236. It is a side view of the casting in the 39th modification. (QC-QC diagram of FIG. 236) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the state which mounted the casting in the said 39th modification in a storage body. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the mold making apparatus in the fortieth modification of the embodiment. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the state which defined the mold making space in the said fortieth modification. FIG. 47 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a squeezed state of the mold sand after the mold sand is filled in the fortieth modification. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a mounting position of a sensor on a pattern plate. It is a flowchart for explaining the control method of the mold making device in the 40th modification. It is a flowchart for explaining the control method of the mold making device in the 40th modification. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the mold making apparatus in the 41st modification of the said embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment]
The casting facility in the present embodiment is provided with a control device that acquires unique data of one frame for a plurality of processes, and associates the unique data of each process with each mold of one frame.

FIG. 1 is a schematic plan view of a casting facility 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the casting facility 1.
In the following description, when specifying the direction of the casting facility 1 in the horizontal plane, the right direction in FIG. I do.

In the casting facility 1, when casting a casting, a plurality of steps including a molding step, a core setting step, a cooling and conveying step, a pouring step, a post-processing step, and a sand processing step are executed. The casting facility 1 includes a molding facility 2, a core installation facility 3, a cooling and conveying facility 4, a pouring facility 7, a post-treatment facility 8, and a sand treatment facility 10 corresponding to each of these steps.
The molding facility 2 molds a mold from the mold sand processed by the sand processing facility 10. The core installation equipment 3 installs a core in a mold. The pouring equipment 7 produces molten metal and pours it into a mold. The cooling and transporting equipment 4 transports the mold molded in the molding equipment 2 to the pouring equipment 7. The cooling / conveying equipment 4 also conveys the casting mold into which the molten metal has been cast in the pouring equipment 7 while cooling it, separates the casting mold, takes out the casting, and further cools the taken-out casting to the post-processing equipment 8 while cooling. Transport. The post-processing equipment 8 performs post-processing such as stamping on a casting and folding of the casting. The sand processing equipment 10 processes the mold sand used for molding the mold.
Further, the casting facility 1 is provided with a control device 11 for controlling and executing these facilities.

First, the molding facility 2 and the core installation facility 3 will be described.
The molding equipment 2 molds a mold from mold sand. In the molding equipment 2, an upper mold and a lower mold are formed. Each of the upper mold and the lower mold is formed by introducing mold sand into a space surrounded by a squeeze board and a match plate on the upper and lower sides and a space surrounded by an upper frame or a lower frame on the sides and squeezing with a squeeze board.
In the present embodiment, the molding equipment 2 is a frameless type, and the molded upper mold and lower mold are framed from the upper frame and the lower frame.
In the present embodiment, the core installation equipment 3 for installing the core in the mold is provided in the molding equipment 2. That is, the formed upper mold and lower mold are once separated up and down in the molding equipment 2, and after the core is installed, they are matched and discharged to the cooling and transporting equipment 4.
In the present embodiment, a mold is formed and discharged basically at a predetermined casting cycle, for example, at a speed of about one every 40 seconds at a processing timing instructed by the control device 11 described later. Here, the casting cycle is one processing unit in which processing for one frame of a mold is performed in each step of the casting equipment 1.

The molding equipment 2 includes a control device (not shown) and a timer for measuring the time when the mold is molded. The timer measures the time when the squeeze of the upper mold and the lower mold is completed by the squeeze board of the molding equipment 2 for the mold of one frame, that is, the pair of the upper mold and the lower mold that have been matched, as the molding time. Then, the data is transmitted to the control device of the molding equipment 2.
More specifically, the molding time can be set as, for example, a time at which the squeeze pressure reaches a peak or a time at which the squeeze board returns to the standby position after the squeeze is completed.
The molding time may be a time at which the mold is molded and discharged to the cooling and transporting equipment 4. However, for example, due to a failure of the cooling and transporting equipment 4, a waiting time may be generated between the molding and discharging in the molding equipment 2. In order to make the time at which the mold is molded more accurate, it is more desirable to set the molding time to the time at which the squeezing is completed as described above, rather than to the discharge time from the molding equipment 2.
The control device of the molding equipment 2 transmits the molding time for each mold to the control device 11 as unique data for each mold.

  The molding equipment 2 includes an upper frame board set complete position, an upper frame mold thickness (mold thickness), an upper frame compression ratio (mold compression ratio), a lower frame board set complete position, a lower frame mold thickness (mold thickness), and a lower frame compression. Rate (mold compression ratio), upper frame squeeze pressure peak (squeeze pressure), lower frame squeeze pressure peak (squeeze pressure), aeration pressure and sand tank pressure when aeration is completed, aeration pressure and sand tank pressure when exhaust is completed, molding It is equipped with various measuring instruments for measuring mold data such as machine cycles. The control device of the molding equipment 2 receives these mold data measured by various measuring instruments, and transmits the data to the control device 11 as unique data for each mold.

  The control device of the molding equipment 2 further includes an upper frame mold thickness target position, an upper frame board set position, a lower frame mold thickness target position, a lower frame board set position, a pattern thickness, an upper mold spraying wait number in the frame, and an upper Mold spraying time, lower mold spraying wait time in frame, lower mold spraying time in frame, aeration pattern, execution of chiller set, squeeze pressure, presence of gas hole, turntable speed, match plate type, gate number, aeration Time of upper frame board operation time, upper frame board operation position during aeration, lower frame board operation time during aeration, lower frame board operation position during aeration, pouring pattern number, number of outside spray waits, outside spray time, etc. The conditions are stored as molding data. The control device of the molding equipment 2 transmits these molding data to the control device 11 as unique data for each mold.

The core installation facility 3 includes a control device (not shown) and a timer for measuring the time at which the core is installed. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the core installation equipment 3 is provided in the molding equipment 2, these control devices and timers share the same control equipment and timer as those of the molding equipment 2. You may use it. The timer measures the time at which the core was installed in the mold for one frame, that is, the paired upper and lower molds, as the core installation time, and the core installation equipment 3 to the control device.
The timer of the core installation equipment 3 further measures the core insertion time required for core installation.
The control device of the core installation equipment 3 receives the core installation time and the core insertion time, and transmits to the control device 11 as unique data for each mold, that is, core data.

The cooling and conveying equipment 4 includes a primary cooling and conveying device 5, a secondary cooling and conveying device 6, a mold separating device 65, a mold sand removing device 68, and a control device (not shown). The primary cooling and conveying device 5 receives the mold molded by the molding equipment 2 and conveys it to the pouring equipment 7, and cools the mold poured by the pouring equipment 7 through the mold unpacking device 65 while cooling the mold. The separated casting is transported to the secondary cooling transport device 6.
Here, first, the primary cooling and conveying device 5 will be described, and then the pouring equipment 7 will be described, and then the mold separating device 65, the mold sand removing device 68, and the secondary cooling and conveying device 6 will be described. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the vicinity of the primary cooling and conveying device 5 of the casting facility 1.

The primary cooling and conveying device 5 includes a first line 50 and a second line 51.
The primary cooling and conveying device 5 further includes a first pusher 56A, a second pusher 56B, a first traverser 57A, a second traverser 57B, and a weight transfer device 58.

  The first line 50 is provided with a pair of mold rails 55A adjacent to the molding equipment 2 and extending in the first direction X1. A plurality of surface carriers 52 are provided on the mold rail 55A so as to contact each other. FIGS. 4A and 4B are a plan view and a side view, respectively, of the trolley 52. The platen cart 52 includes a base 53 having a substantially square shape when viewed in a plan view, and wheels 54 provided rotatably with respect to the base 53 and corresponding to each of the pair of mold rails 55A. I have. Thus, the surface plate carrier 52 is configured to be able to run on the mold rail 55A and the mold rail 55B of the second line 51 described later.

  The second line 51 includes a pair of mold rails 55 </ b> B provided substantially parallel to the first line 50 on a side of the first line 50 opposite to the molding equipment 2. Similarly to the first line 50, a plurality of platen carts 52 are provided on the mold rail 55B so as to be in contact with each other.

The first pusher 56A is, for example, an air cylinder, and is provided at an end of the first line 50 on the second direction X2 side. The first pusher 56A is arranged such that the platen cart 52 located at the end of the first line 50 on the second direction X2 side in the first direction X1 has a length of one platen cart 52 at every predetermined casting cycle. It is controlled by the control device of the cooling and transporting equipment 4 so that it is pushed by the minute.
As described above, the platen carrier 52 continues to be pushed in the first direction X1 from the end in the second direction X2 by the first pusher 56A, thereby receiving the mold 19A from the molding equipment 2 and moving in the first direction X1. Transport.

The weight transfer device 58 is provided so as to straddle the first line 50 and the second line 51. In the first line 50, the platen cart 52 on which the mold 19A is placed reaches the weight transfer device 58 by being pushed by the first pusher 56A.
The weight transfer device 58 removes the weight and the jacket from the weight mounting mold 19C into which the molten metal is cast, which will be described later, and is transported on the first line 50. Place it on the mold 19A. The jacket suppresses displacement of the upper and lower molds formed of the mold sand and deformation of the mold at the time of pouring, so that the mold does not collapse. The weight is for suppressing the upper mold from floating due to buoyancy during pouring.
In FIG. 3, the weight placing mold 19B to which the weight and the jacket are transferred by the weight transfer device 58 is drawn at a higher height than the mold 19A discharged from the molding equipment 2.

  The platen cart 52 on which the weight placing mold 19B is placed reaches the pouring equipment 7 to be described later from the weight transfer device 58 by being further pushed by the first pusher 56A. The molten metal is cast into the weight placing mold 19B by the pouring equipment 7. The weight placing mold 19B in which the molten metal is cast is referred to as a weight placing pouring mold 19C. In FIG. 3, the weight placing casting mold 19 </ b> C is shown in a dot pattern in the shape of the weight placing mold 19 </ b> B.

The platen cart 52 on which the weight placing and pouring mold 19C is placed reaches the end of the first line 50 in the first direction X1 direction by being further pushed by the first pusher 56A.
A first traverser 57A is provided at an end of the first line 50 and the second line 51 in the first direction X1 direction. The first traverser 57 </ b> A transfers the base plate carrier 52 from the first line 50 to the second line 51. That is, the platen cart 52 that has reached the end of the first line 50 in the first direction X1 direction is transferred to the second line 51 by the first traverser 57A.
The first traverser 57A is controlled by the control device of the cooling and transporting equipment 4 so as to transfer the surface plate carrier 52 to the second line 51 at every predetermined casting cycle.

The second pusher 56B is, for example, an air cylinder, and is provided at an end of the second line 51 on the first direction X1 side. The second pusher 56B is arranged such that the platen truck 52 located at the end of the second line 51 on the side of the first direction X1 in the second casting X direction has a length of one platen truck 52 at every predetermined casting cycle. It is controlled by the control device of the cooling and conveying equipment 4 so that it is pushed by the minute.
As described above, the platen carrier 52 is continuously pushed in the second direction X2 from the end on the first direction X1 side by the second pusher 56B, so that the weight placing pouring mold 19C is oriented in the second direction X2. Transport.

In the second line 51, the platen cart 52 on which the weight placement pouring mold 19 </ b> C is placed reaches the weight transfer device 58 again by being pushed by the second pusher 56 </ b> B.
The weight transfer device 58 removes the weight and the jacket from the weight placing mold 19C and replaces the weight and the jacket on the mold 19A conveyed on the first line 50. The mold into which the molten metal has been cast, from which the weight and the jacket have been removed, is referred to as a pouring mold 19D.
In FIG. 3, the pouring mold 19D is shown by being painted in a dot pattern in the shape of the mold 19A.

  The platen carrier 52 on which the pouring mold 19D is placed is further pushed by the second pusher 56B, and reaches the mold separating device 65 from the weight transfer device 58. The pouring mold 19D on the trolley 52 that has reached the mold separating device 65 is transferred to the mold separating device 65 by a pusher 67 (see FIG. 5) described later.

The platen cart 52 in which the pouring mold 19D is transferred to the mold unpacking device 65 and nothing is placed on the pouring mold 19D is further pushed by the second pusher 56B. It reaches the end in two directions X2 direction.
A second traverser 57B is provided at an end of the first line 50 and the second line 51 in the second direction X2 direction. The second traverser 57 </ b> B transfers the base plate carrier 52 from the second line 51 to the first line 50. That is, the platen truck 52 that has reached the end of the second line 51 in the second direction X2 direction is transferred to the first line 50 by the second traverser 57B.
The second traverser 57B is controlled by the control device of the cooling and conveying equipment 4 so as to transfer the platen carrier 52 to the first line 50 at every predetermined casting cycle.

As described above, each of the platen carts 52 is basically controlled by the first pusher 56A, the second pusher 56B, the first traverser 57A, and the second traverser 57B at the processing timing instructed by the control device 11 described later. In each of the above-mentioned predetermined casting cycles, the first line 50 and the second line 51 are moved so as to circulate in the first line 50 and the second line 51 for one frame of the mold, that is, for one platen carrier 52. That is, before each platen carrier 52 is moved to the next position, work for one frame of the mold in the molding equipment 2, the core setting equipment 3, the weight transfer device 58, the pouring equipment 7, and the like. Is executed.
After the molten metal is cast into the mold by the pouring equipment 7, the mold is cooled and solidified over time before the platen carrier 52 on which the mold is placed reaches the mold separating device 65. This time is called a primary cooling time.

Next, the pouring equipment 7 will be described with reference to FIG. The pouring equipment 7 includes a furnace 70, a ladle 71, and an automatic pouring device 72.
In the present embodiment, the pouring equipment 7 includes three furnaces 70. The furnace 70 is, for example, an induction furnace, and melts the metal charged therein by Joule heat. Various inoculants are added to the molten metal as needed.
The molten metal produced by the furnace 70 is once received by a ladle 71 and transported to an automatic pouring device 72 provided adjacent to the first line 50 of the primary cooling and conveying device 5.
The automatic pouring device 72 pours the mold 19A conveyed on the first line 50 basically at the predetermined casting cycles at the processing timing instructed by the control device 11.
The automatic pouring device 72 also collects a certain amount of molten metal from the ladle 71 to create a test piece. The test piece is used for material inspection of the molten metal.

  The pouring equipment 7 includes a control device (not shown) and a timer for measuring the time at which the molten metal is cast. The timer measures the time at which the molten metal was cast into one pair of the molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as a casting time, and transmits the time to the control device of the pouring equipment 7. .

  The pouring equipment 7 is provided with various measuring instruments for measuring the casting weight, the casting time, the added amount of the inoculant, the elapsed time of the hot water, the casting temperature, and the like. The control device of the pouring equipment 7 receives these measured values measured by various measuring instruments, and together with a ladle lot number (a ladle number), a material number, and a casting time corresponding to the poured ladle. These are transmitted to the control device 11 as unique data for each mold, that is, pouring data.

  Pouring equipment 7 includes a weighing scale that measures the amount of hot water from ladle 70 to ladle 71. The control device of the pouring equipment 7 receives the amount of hot water measured by the weighing scale, and, together with the tapping furnace number, material number, and tapping time corresponding to the ladle, transmits these data to each mold as unique data, that is, the molten metal transport. The data is transmitted to the control device 11 as data.

Next, the secondary cooling / conveying device 6, the mold separating device 65, and the mold sand removing device 68 will be described. The secondary cooling and conveying device 6 includes a casting rail 60, a plurality of suspension devices 61, and a driving unit (not shown).
The casting rail 60 is disposed on the opposite side of the molding equipment 2 of the primary cooling and conveying device 5 so as to be located in the air above the surface plate carrier 52 of the primary cooling and conveying device 5. The casting rail 60 includes a first rail portion 60a, a second rail portion 60b, a third rail portion 60c, and a fourth rail portion 60d.

The first rail portion 60a and the third rail portion 60c are linear rails, and are provided so as to extend in the first direction X1 in parallel with each other. The first rail portion 60a is provided closer to the primary cooling and conveying device 5 than the third rail portion 60c.
The second rail portion 60b and the fourth rail portion 60d are semicircular rails. The second rail portion 60b is provided so as to connect the first rail portion 60a and the end of the third rail portion 60c on the second direction X2 side. The fourth rail portion 60d is provided so as to connect the first rail portion 60a and the end of the third rail portion 60c on the first direction X1 side.
Thus, the casting rail 60 is formed in an annular shape.

  Each of the plurality of suspension devices 61 is provided to be suspended from the casting rail 60 at equal intervals. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS of FIG. 1, and shows a side view of the suspension device 61 and the mold release device 65. At the lower end of each suspension device 61, a hanger hook 62 is provided. The hanger hook 62 is formed so as to be curved, and its tip 62 a is provided so as to face the outside of the circulation path of the casting rail 60. The hanger hook 62 has a tip 62a at a height between the upper surface 52a of the surface plate carrier 52 of the primary cooling and conveying device 5 and the upper surface 19b of the lower mold of the pouring mold 19D placed on the surface plate carrier 52. Is provided so as to be located.

The mold release device 65 is provided between the first rail portion 60a and the second line 51 of the primary cooling and conveying device 5.
The mold release device 65 includes a table 66 and a pusher 67.
The table 66 is provided adjacent to the second line 51.
The pusher 67 pushes the pouring mold 19D from the second line 51 toward the table 66, and conveys and places the casting mold 19D on the table 66.
The table 66 is supported rotatably in the vertical direction with the end on the second line 51 side as a rotation shaft 66a. Therefore, the table 66 is moved from the pouring mold 19D placed on the table 66 by rotating the end 66b of the table 66 on the opposite side to the rotating shaft 66a in the lower direction R1. It has a detachable structure.

Here, the horizontal position of the hanger hook 62 is such that its tip 62a is located below the hanger portion 19a formed partially on the casting 19E in the pouring mold 19D placed on the table 66. Has been adjusted.
Therefore, when the table 66 is separated from the pouring mold 19D, the pouring mold 19D separated from the table 66 falls by its own weight, and the hanger portion 19a of the casting 19E in the pouring mold 19D is attached to the hanger hook 62. It has a hanging configuration. Most of the mold sand forming the pouring mold 19D is separated from the casting 19E by the impact due to the drop at this time.

  Each of the plurality of suspension devices 61 shown in FIG. 1 is controlled by the control device of the cooling and conveying equipment 4 so that the drive unit transfers the casting rail 60 counterclockwise. Therefore, the casting 19E (indicated by a triangle in FIG. 1) hung on the suspension device 61 by the mold release device 65 moves counterclockwise together with the suspension device 61.

The mold sand removing device 68 is provided on the first rail portion 60a on the second direction X2 side with respect to the mold separating device 65. The casting 19E hung on the suspension device 61 by the mold releasing device 65 moves counterclockwise as described above, and reaches the mold sand removing device 68.
The mold sand removing device 68 includes a vibration device 68a for applying vibration to the casting 19E and a casting receiver 68d for receiving the vibrating casting 19E.
The vibration device 68a includes a contact member 68b, a cylinder 68c, and a vibrator (not shown). The casting receiver 68d includes a contact member 68e and a cylinder 68f. The vibrating device 68a and the casting receiver 68d are provided at positions opposing each other with the casting 19E conveyed on the casting rail 60 interposed therebetween and separated from the casting 19E. The cylinders 68c and 68f are provided so that the corresponding contact members 68b and 68e can be moved to a position where they contact the casting 19E.

When the casting 19E is conveyed on the casting rail 60 and is located between the vibration device 68a and the casting receiver 68d, the cylinders 68c and 68f are driven, and the contact members 68b and 68e move to a position where they come into contact with the casting 19E. When the vibrator of the vibration device 68a is driven in this state, vibration energy is transmitted to the casting 19E via the contact member 68b of the vibration device 68a, and the casting 19E vibrates. At this time, the casting 19E is pushed out by the contact member 68b, moves toward the casting receiver 68d, collides with the contact member 68e of the casting receiver 68d, and is rebounded. The casting 19E returned to the vibrating device 68a further collides with the contact member 68b of the vibrating device 68a and is bounced back toward the casting receiver 68d, and this operation is repeated.
Thus, the mold sand removing device 68 vibrates the casting 19E, so that the mold sand remaining on the casting 19E without being removed by the mold releasing device 65 is removed.

  The casting 19E from which the mold sand has been removed by the mold sand removing device 68 is further conveyed counterclockwise along the casting rail 60 and is adjacent to the first rail portion 60a on the first direction X1 side of the mold removing device 65. Reaches the robot 81 described later, and is removed from the suspension device 61 by the robot 81. The suspension device 61 from which the casting 19E has been removed is further transported counterclockwise to reach the mold releasing device 65 again, where the casting 19E is hung.

At the processing timing instructed by the control device 11, the control device of the cooling and transporting equipment 4 basically sets each of the suspension devices 61 for one frame of mold, that is, the adjacent suspension at every predetermined casting cycle. The drive unit is controlled so as to move on the casting rail 60 by the distance between the devices 61.
That is, until the suspension device 61 is moved to the next position, the work for one frame of the mold in the mold releasing device 65, the mold sand removing device 68, the robot 81, and the like is executed.
After the mold is released by the mold releasing device 65, the mold is cooled over time before the suspension device 61, which suspends the casting in the mold, reaches the robot 81. This time is called a secondary cooling time.

  The cooling and conveying equipment 4 includes a timer (not shown) that measures the time when the mold is separated. The timer measures the time when the mold is released for one frame, that is, for the paired upper and lower molds that have been matched, as the mold release time, and sends it to the control device of the cooling and transporting equipment 4. Send.

  The timer of the cooling and transporting equipment 4 measures a cooling time, which is a sum of the primary cooling time and the secondary cooling time, for each casting. That is, the timer is for one frame of the mold, that is, for a pair of upper mold and lower mold that have been matched, the time when the casting provided in the mold was cooled is measured as a cooling time, This is transmitted to the control device of the cooling and transporting equipment 4. The control device of the cooling / transporting facility 4 transmits the cooling time for each mold and the mold release time to the control device 11 as unique data for each mold, that is, cooling / conveying data.

Next, the post-processing equipment 8 will be described with reference to FIG. The post-processing equipment 8 includes a robot 81, a shot blast device 82, a conveyor 83, a marking device 84, and a control device (not shown).
The robot 81 is, for example, a vertical articulated 6-axis robot. The robot 81 is provided adjacent to the first rail portion 60a of the secondary cooling and transporting device 6, and transfers the casting 19E transported by the secondary cooling and transporting device 6. It is grasped from the suspension device 61.
The robot 81 places the grabbed casting 19E in the shot blast device 82.

The shot blast device 82 has a two-stage configuration in the present embodiment. More specifically, the shot blast device 82 includes a rotating wall 82a. In FIG. 1, the two wall surfaces of the rotating wall 82a facing each other face in a direction orthogonal to the first direction X1 and the second direction X2 in a horizontal plane. Each of the two wall surfaces facing each other is provided with a suspension portion (not shown) that can suspend the casting 19E.
The rotating wall 82a is provided so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction around a rotating shaft 82b provided in the center in the width direction and extending in the vertical direction. The space on the robot 81 side with respect to the rotating wall 82a is not enclosed by the housing but is open to the outside to form an access portion 82c where the robot 81 can insert and remove the casting 19E. The space on the opposite side of the robot 81 is surrounded by a housing and serves as a processing unit 82d for performing shot blast processing.

  The robot 81 suspends the casting 19E grasped from the suspension device 61 via the access portion 82c of the shot blast device 82 on a suspension portion provided on the wall surface of the rotary wall 82a on the side of the input / output portion 82c. . Then, the rotating wall 82a rotates, the casting 19E suspended by the robot 81 moves to the processing unit 82d, and the shot blast processing is performed. When the shot blasting process is completed, the rotating wall 82a rotates again, and the casting 19E moves to the loading / unloading portion 82c. The robot 81 grabs the casting 19 </ b> E subjected to the shot blast processing, which has moved to the loading / unloading section 82 c, and places the casting 19 </ b> E on the conveyor 83.

  The shot blasting device 82 actually performs post-processing so that the shot blasting process of another casting 19E is performed in the processing unit 82d while the casting 81E is being loaded and unloaded by the robot 81 in the loading and unloading unit 82c. It is controlled in parallel by the control device of the facility 8.

The conveyor 83 is provided so as to continue from the vicinity of the shot blast device 82 to the shipping area 14. On the conveyor 83, mounting jigs (not shown) on which the castings 19E can be mounted are provided at equal intervals. Is done.
The casting 19E placed on the placing jig of the conveyor 83 is transported in the first direction X1 toward the shipping area 14.

The marking device 84 is provided adjacent to the conveyor 83. The marking device 84 marks one or a plurality of casting products included in the casting 19E conveyed on the conveyor 83 with a laser or the like.
Thereafter, each casting 19E is weir-folded to form one or more castings.

At the processing timing instructed by the control device 11, the control device of the post-processing equipment 8 basically moves the mounting jig on the conveyor 83 for one frame of the mold, that is, at the predetermined casting cycle. The conveyer 83 is controlled so as to move by the distance between the mounting jigs.
That is, before the mounting jig is moved to the next position, the work for one frame of the mold in the robot 81, the shot blast device 82, the marking device 84, and the like is executed.

The post-processing equipment 8 includes a timer (not shown) that measures the time when the stamp is made. The timer is for one frame, that is, for a pair of upper and lower molds that have been matched, the time stamped on the casting formed by the mold is measured as the stamping time, along with the type of stamping, The data is transmitted to the control device of the post-processing equipment 8.
Further, the timer of the post-processing equipment 8 measures the weir folding time, which is the time at which weir folding is performed on each casting. The timer measures the time at which the casting formed by the mold is weir-folded for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold that have been matched, as the weir folding time, and the post-processing equipment 8 to the control device. The control device of the post-processing equipment 8 transmits the weir folding time, the engraving time, and the engraving type for each casting to the control device 11 as unique data for each mold, that is, post-processing data.

  Each casting product formed by the weir folding is inspected by an operator or the like. In the inspection, the dimensions of the cast product, the presence or absence of flaws, and the like are checked. The operator inputs the inspection result of one or a plurality of casting products formed by the mold to the control device 11 for one frame of the mold, that is, for the paired upper mold and lower mold that have been matched. I do.

  Next, the sand treatment facility 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. The sand treatment equipment 10 includes an overband magnetic separator 102, a magnet pulley 104, a rotary screen 106, a hopper 107, a sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device 109, a sand cooler 110, a dust collector 111, a sand bin 114, a water measurement water injection device 116, and an additive input. The apparatus includes a device 120, a water pressure stabilizing device 121, a kneader 122, a compactability control device 123, a cushion hopper 124, an aerator 128, a sand property measuring device 129, and a hopper 130. The sand treatment facility 10 also includes a plurality of conveyors 101, 103, 108, 112, 115, 125, 126, 127, 131 and bucket elevators 105, 113, 117 for moving the mold sand between the facilities and between the apparatuses. Have.

As shown in FIG. 1, a conveyor 101 is provided below the first rail portion 60 a of the casting rail 60 along the traveling direction of the suspension device 61 from near the mold release device 65. The conveyor 101 is provided so that the mold sand separated by the mold separation device 65 and removed from the casting 19E by the mold sand removal device 68 falls onto the conveyor 101. Even after the mold is separated by the mold separation device 65, for a certain period of time, immediately after the separation of the mold, there is a possibility that the mold sand remaining on the casting 19E will naturally separate from the casting 19E and fall. is there. The conveyer 101 is provided so as to run in parallel with the first rail portion 60a so that the conveyer 101 can receive the mold sand that falls after the mold is separated.
The conveyor 101 conveys the collected mold sand to the overband magnetic separator 102.

The over-band magnetic separator 102 uses a suspension type magnetic separator that suspends magnets on the conveyor 101 to magnetically remove iron scraps and iron pieces mixed in the collected mold sand. The removed iron scraps and iron pieces are collected in the foreign matter container 102a. The mold sand falls onto the conveyor 103 and is transported on the conveyor 103. Thereafter, the mold sand is magnetically selected by a magnet built in the magnet pulley 104, that is, the head pulley of the conveyor 103. As a result, iron chips and iron pieces that have not been magnetically separated by the overband magnetic separator 102 are magnetically separated and removed. The removed iron scraps and iron pieces are collected in the foreign matter container 104a.
The iron shavings and the mold sand from which the iron pieces have been magnetically selected are conveyed to the rotary screen 106 by the bucket elevator 105.

The rotary screen 106 continuously pulverizes the recovered sand, and sieves out the core metal, core core, and the like mixed in the molding sand, and sorts the molding sand. The removed core metal, core waste, and the like are collected in the foreign matter container 106a. The sorted sand is collected by a hopper 107 and quantitatively cut out on a conveyor 108 provided below the hopper 107.
Above the conveyor 108, a sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device (MIA) 109 is provided. The sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device 109 measures the temperature and the water content of the mold sand conveyed on the conveyor 108, and injects water in an amount proportional to the measured value into the mold sand.
The mold sand injected by the sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device 109 is transported to the sand cooler 110.

The sand cooler 110 cools the mold sand. The sand cooler 110 includes a cylindrical drum 110a, rotates the drum 110a to agitate the mold sand introduced into the drum 110a, and cools the mold sand by latent heat of evaporation.
The sand cooler 110 also includes a sieve portion 110b, and removes lumps in the mold sand that has been cooled and has a stable water content. The removed lumps are collected in the foreign matter container 110c.
Dust generated by the sand cooler 110 is collected by the dust collector 111.
The mold sand cooled by the sand cooler 110 is conveyed to the sand bin 114 by the conveyor 112 and the bucket elevator 113.

The sand bin 114 stores the mold sand transported from the sand cooler 110.
The sand bin 114 quantitatively cuts out and discharges the mold sand to a conveyor 115 provided below.
Above the conveyor 115, a moisture measuring and injecting device (MIC) 116 is provided. The moisture measuring and injecting device 116 measures the temperature and the amount of moisture of the mold sand conveyed on the conveyor 115, and according to these measured values, should be injected before kneading is performed by a kneading machine 122 described later. An appropriate amount of water to be injected is determined and transmitted to a water pressure stabilizing device 121 described later.
The mold sand conveyed on the conveyor 115 is further conveyed to the kneading machine 122 via the bucket elevator 117.

The additive introduction device 120 supplies the additive to the kneader 122.
Further, the water pressure stabilizing device 121 supplies the kneading machine 122 to the water pressure from the water source W while keeping the water pressure constant, based on the water injection amount received from the moisture measuring water injection device 116.
The kneading machine 122 adds water and additives to the mold sand and kneads.
The kneader 122 is provided with a compactibility control device (MIE) 123. The compactability control device 123 measures the temperature, the moisture content, and the CB value (compactability value) of the mold sand in the kneading machine 122 and, if necessary, keeps the water pressure constant so that additional water is injected into the kneading machine 122. An instruction is given to the device 121.
The mold sand kneaded by the kneader 122 is stored in the cushion hopper 124. The cushion hopper 124 quantitatively cuts out and discharges the mold sand to a conveyor 125 provided below.

The mold sand discharged to the conveyor 125 is conveyed to the aerator 128 via the conveyor 126 and the conveyor 127.
The aerator 128 loosens the conveyed mold sand and stores it in the hopper 130.
The hopper 130 is provided with a sand property measuring instrument (IDST) 129. The sand property measuring device 129 measures the temperature, moisture content, CB value, air permeability, air pressure, and compressive strength of the mold sand stored in the hopper 130 as sand properties.
The hopper 130 quantitatively cuts out and discharges the mold sand to a conveyor 131 provided below.
The conveyor 131 transports the mold sand to the molding equipment 2.

  The sand treatment facility 10 includes a control device (not shown). At the measurement timing instructed by the control device 11, the control device basically transmits the various measurement results by the sand property measuring device 129, that is, the sand property and the measurement time, at every predetermined casting cycle described above, for one frame of the mold. That is, it is transmitted to the control device 11 as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper mold and lower mold sand that have been matched, ie, sand processing data.

  The sand treatment facility 10 includes a measuring device that measures the flow rate of the release material. The control device of the sand treatment facility 10 receives the flow rate of the release material measured by the measuring instrument, and transmits the release flow rate to the control device 11 in the sand treatment data.

Next, the control device 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 6 and FIGS. 7 to 15. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of the product information table. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of the template data table. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of the molding data table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the core data table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of the pouring data table. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of the molten metal transport data table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the cooling transfer data table. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram of the post-processing data table. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram of the sand processing data table.
The control device 11 is configured to perform a specific process for each mold of one frame from each of a plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, for example, a molding process, a core setting process, a pouring process, a cooling and conveying process, a post-processing process, and a sand processing process. Is obtained, and the unique data of each process is associated with each template of one frame.

The control device 11 measures a predetermined casting cycle, for example, 40 seconds, and for each predetermined casting cycle, the molding equipment 2, the core installation equipment 3, the cooling and conveying equipment 4, the pouring equipment 7, the post-processing equipment 8, For example, the processing equipment 10 transmits and instructs the processing timing at which work is started in each equipment and the measurement timing at which unique data is sent from the control device of each equipment to the control device 11.
The control device 11 holds the time at which such processing timing and measurement timing were transmitted.
For example, when a failure occurs in a certain facility and it is necessary to temporarily stop the casting facility 1 in order to cope with it, an elapsed time between the processing timings occurs between the processing timings at which such suspension occurs. Includes the downtime.

The control device 11 receives the molding time, the mold data, and the molding data from the control device of the molding equipment 2 as unique data of the molding equipment 2 for each mold.
The control device 11 receives core data from the control device of the core installation facility 3 as unique data of the core installation facility 3 for each mold.
The control device 11 receives pouring data and molten metal transport data from the control device of the pouring equipment 7 as unique data of the pouring equipment 7 for each mold.
The control device 11 receives the cooling transport data from the control device of the cooling transport facility 4 as the unique data of the cooling transport facility 4 for each mold.
The control device 11 receives post-processing data from the control device of the post-processing equipment 8 as unique data of the post-processing equipment 8 for each mold.
The control device 11 sends the sand processing data from the control device of the sand processing equipment 10 to the sand processing data corresponding to one frame of the mold, that is, the sand corresponding to the pair of upper mold and lower mold that have been matched. It is received as unique data of the facility 10.

The control device 11 receives the above-mentioned various data from each facility and associates the unique data of each process with each frame of the mold as follows.
The control device 11 holds a product information table 200 shown in FIG. The product information table 200 is a table for managing each molded mold, and has a configuration in which a molding time, a pattern number, a casting result, a product number, a product name, and a material are associated with each mold.
The control device 11 issues a unique mold identification number for the molded mold every time the molding time, mold data, and molding data for each molded mold are received from the molding equipment 2, and the new information is added to the product information table 200. An item corresponding to a new mold is added, and the issued mold identification number, molding time, pattern number, product number, product name, and material are registered in each column of the added item. In the casting result item of the product information table 200, it is input whether the mold was not poured due to molding failure in the pouring process or whether the mold was normally molded and poured.

The control device 11 holds a template data table 201 shown in FIG. The mold data table 201 is a table for managing manufacturing history data of each molded mold, and has a configuration in which each mold data is associated with each mold.
Further, the control device 11 holds a molding data table 202 shown in FIG. The molding data table 202 is also a table for managing manufacturing history data of each molded mold, and has a configuration in which each molding data is associated with each mold.
When the controller 11 issues a mold identification number and adds an item corresponding to the new mold to the product information table 200, the controller 11 also corresponds to the new mold in each of the mold data table 201 and the molding data table 202. An item is added, and the issued mold identification number, the mold data and the molding data received from the molding equipment 2 are registered in each column of the added item.

  As described above, the control device 11 issues a mold identification number to each of the molded molds, and associates the mold identification numbers with the unique data of the molding process.

The control device 11 holds a core data table 203 shown in FIG. The core data table 203 is a table for managing core data relating to the core, and has a configuration in which each core data is associated with each template.
In this embodiment, since the core installation equipment 3 is provided in the molding equipment 2, the time at which the core was installed in the mold in the core installation equipment 3, The elapsed time from the time when the molding is performed and the time stamped as the molding time is substantially constant. Therefore, the control device 11 sets the received core installation time based on the difference between the core installation time received from the control device of the core installation facility 3 and the molding time registered in the product information table 200. The mold identification number corresponding to the mold in which the core is installed can be obtained.
The control device 11 adds an item corresponding to the new mold to the core data table 203 each time core data is received from the core installation facility 3, and adds the above-described items to the respective columns of the added item. The core identification data and the core data received from the core installation equipment 3 are registered.

As described above, the control device 11 associates the core data with the unique data of another process by associating the core identification data with the core data, which is the unique data of the core setting process.
Further, the control device 11 associates the core data with the unique data of another process based on the core installation time (installation time).

Control device 11 holds a pouring data table 204 shown in FIG. The pouring data table 204 is a table for managing pouring data relating to pouring, and has a configuration in which each pouring data is associated with each mold.
As shown in FIG. 3, in the present embodiment, the position 52A of the platen cart 52 from which the mold is discharged from the molding equipment 2 and the position of the platen cart 52 poured into the mold by the pouring equipment 7. 52B is fixed, and the number of platen carts 52 between these positions 52A and 52B is also fixed. For this reason, the time at which a specific surface plate truck 52 was located at the position 52A is determined by the number of the surface plate trucks 52 between the position 52A and the position 52B from the processing timing corresponding to the time at the position 52B. It is possible to estimate the processing timing that is just backward based on the transmitted time. That is, the control device 11 estimates the time at which the platen cart 52 on which the mold was placed was located at the position 52A from the pouring time received from the control device of the pouring equipment 7, and referred to the product information table. Compared with the molding time registered in 200, a mold identification number corresponding to the mold having the received casting time as unique data is obtained.
The control device 11 adds an item corresponding to the new mold to the pouring data table 204 every time the pouring data is received from the pouring equipment 7, and adds each item of the added item as described above. And the pouring data received from the pouring equipment 7 are registered.
Further, control device 11 registers a casting result corresponding to the obtained mold identification number in product information table 200 according to whether or not the molten metal has been poured into the mold.

The control device 11 holds a molten metal transport data table 205 shown in FIG. The molten metal transport data table 205 is a table for managing molten metal transport data related to molten metal, and has a configuration in which each molten metal transport data is associated with each mold.
Each time the molten metal transport data is received from the pouring equipment 7, the control device 11 adds an item corresponding to the new mold to the molten metal transport data table 205, and adds the molten metal transport data to each column of the added item. The mold identification number acquired in the same manner as described in the table 204 and the molten metal transport data received from the pouring equipment 7 are registered.

As described above, the control device 11 associates the pouring data and the molten metal transport data, which are the unique data of the pouring process, with the mold identification numbers, thereby converting the pouring data and the molten metal transport data into the unique data of other processes. Correspond.
In addition, the control device 11 sets the processing time in the second process for one of the plurality of processes (for example, the molding process) and for the two processes (for example, the pouring process) after the one process. Based on the estimation result, the processing time in one process is estimated, and the unique data of one process is associated with the unique data of the second process based on the estimation result.
In particular, control device 11 associates the pouring data and the molten metal transport data with the unique data of another process, based on the casting time at which the molten metal was cast into the mold.

The control device 11 holds a cooling transfer data table 206 shown in FIG. The cooling transfer data table 206 is a table for managing cooling transfer data related to cooling and transfer, and has a configuration in which each cooling transfer data is associated with each mold.
As shown in FIG. 3, in the present embodiment, the position 52A of the stool 52 where the mold is discharged from the molding equipment 2 and the position 52C of the stool 52 where the mold is separated by the mold separating device 65 are fixed. The number of platen carts 52 between these positions 52A and 52C is also constant. For this reason, the time at which the specific surface plate truck 52 was located at the position 52A is determined by the number of the surface plate trucks 52 between the position 52A and the position 52C from the processing timing corresponding to the time at the position 52C. It is possible to estimate the processing timing that is just backward based on the transmitted time. That is, the control device 11 estimates the time at which the platen cart 52 on which the mold was placed was located at the position 52A from the mold unloading time received from the control device of the cooling and transporting equipment 4, and estimated the product information. By comparing with the molding time registered in the table 200, a mold identification number corresponding to the mold having the received mold release time as unique data is obtained.
The control device 11 adds an item corresponding to the new mold to the cooling transfer data table 206 each time the cooling transfer data is received from the cooling transfer equipment 4, and adds each item of the added item as described above. , And each of the cooling transfer data received from the cooling transfer equipment 4 is registered.

As described above, the control device 11 associates the cooling transport data with the unique data of another process by associating the mold identification number with the cooling transport data that is the unique data of the cooling transport process.
In addition, the control device 11 performs one step (for example, a molding step) of the plurality of steps and two steps (for example, mold release in the cooling and conveying step) subsequent to the one step in two steps. The processing time in one process is estimated based on the processing time, and the unique data of one process is associated with the unique data of the second process based on the estimation result.

The control device 11 holds a post-processing data table 207 shown in FIG. The post-processing data table 207 is a table for managing post-processing data related to post-processing, and has a configuration in which each post-processing data is associated with each template.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, the position 52A of the platen cart 52 from which the mold is discharged from the molding equipment 2 and the mounting jig in which the casting removed from the mold is stamped by the stamping device 84. The position 83D of the fixture is fixed, and the number of mounting jigs of the platen cart 52, the suspension device 61, and the conveyor 83 between these positions 52A and 83D is also constant. I have. For this reason, the time at which the specific platform table truck 52 was located at the position 52A can be determined from the processing timing corresponding to the time at the position 83D if the time at the position 83D is known. It is possible to estimate the processing timing that has been traced back by the number of the suspension devices 61 and the mounting jigs based on the transmitted time. That is, the control device 11 estimates the time at which the platen cart 52 on which the corresponding mold is placed was located at the position 52A from the engraving time received from the control device of the cooling and transporting equipment 4, and estimates this time. By comparing with the molding time registered in the product information table 200, a mold identification number corresponding to the mold having the received mold release time as unique data is obtained.
The control device 11 adds an item corresponding to the new template to the post-processing data table 207 each time the post-processing data is received from the post-processing equipment 8, and adds the above-described item to each column of the added item as described above. And the post-processing data received from the post-processing equipment 8 are registered.

As described above, the control device 11 associates the post-processing data with the unique data of another process by associating the template identification number with the post-processing data that is the unique data of the post-processing process.
In addition, the control device 11 performs processing in one of the plurality of processes (for example, a molding process) and two processes (for example, marking in a post-processing process) after the one process in two processes. The processing time in one process is estimated based on the time, and the unique data of one process is associated with the unique data of the second process based on the estimation result.

The control device 11 holds a sand processing data table 208 shown in FIG. The sand processing data table 208 is a table for managing sand processing data relating to sand processing, and has a configuration in which each of the sand processing data is associated with each mold.
As shown in FIG. 6, the sand property measuring device 129 is attached to a fixed position of the hopper 130. For this reason, the mold sand at the position where the sand property measuring instrument 129 is provided is cut out and discharged from the hopper 130, supplied to the molding equipment 2 via the conveyor 131, molded, and the mold 19A is discharged from the molding equipment 2. The movement time of the treated sand until the transfer is basically basically constant.
For this reason, first, every time the sand processing data is received from the sand processing equipment 10, the control device 11 adds an item corresponding to the new mold to the sand processing data table 208, and fills in each column of the added item. Each of the post-processing data received from the sand processing equipment 10 excluding the mold identification number is registered.
The control device 11 further receives the unique data from the molding equipment 2, adds an item corresponding to the new mold to the product information table 200, issues a new mold identification number, and registers the mold identification number and the molding time. At this time, the above-mentioned processing sand movement time is subtracted from the molding time to estimate the time at which the sand property of the molding sand used for molding the mold is measured by the sand characteristic measuring device 129. The control device 11 compares the estimated time with each measurement time (IDST measurement time in FIG. 15) of the sand processing data table 208, and compares the estimated time with the measurement result having the closest measurement time in the sand processing data table 208. The newly issued template identification number is registered in the template identification number column.

As described above, the control device 11 associates the sand processing data with the unique data of another process by associating the mold identification number with the sand processing data that is the unique data of the sand processing step.
Further, the control device 11 associates the unique data of the sand treatment process with the unique data of another process based on the measurement time by the sand property measuring device 129.

The control device 11 includes a display device (not shown). The display device displays information held by the control device 11, such as the contents of each table described above.
In the present embodiment, the control device 11 includes a plurality of display devices. Some display devices are provided near the casting facility 1. In addition, some other display devices are provided at a remote location remote from the casting facility 1 so that the state of the casting facility 1 can be monitored from a remote location.
In the present embodiment, the control device 11 is configured to be able to communicate with a material management / ordering system (not shown). For example, the total used amount of the metal used by melting can be grasped from the pouring weight column of the pouring data table 204 or the like. The control device 11 grasps the remaining amount of the raw materials stored in the warehouse via the material management and ordering system from the usage state of the materials, and automatically instructs the order of the materials as necessary.

Next, a casting method using the above-described casting equipment 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 15 and FIG. 16.
In the casting method according to the present embodiment, unique data for one frame of the mold is acquired for a plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and the unique data of each process is associated with each mold of one frame.
Further, for one of the plurality of processes and two processes after the one process, the processing time in one process is estimated based on the processing time in the two processes, and the estimation result is obtained. Is associated with the unique data of one process and the unique data of the second process.
In addition, the plurality of processes include a molding process for molding a mold, a sand treatment process for treating mold sand used for molding the mold, a core installation process for installing a core in the mold, and a mold for manufacturing a molten metal. It is a combination of two or more steps of a pouring step of pouring into the mold, a mold, a mold in which the molten metal is cast, and a cooling and conveying step of conveying and cooling the casting, and a post-processing step of performing post-processing. .
Here, a method of forming a casting by molding a mold from an amount of molding sand corresponding to a mold of one frame will be described. However, in the actual casting equipment 1, it has already been described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the processing for a plurality of molds and castings is executed in parallel.

First, in the sand processing facility 10, sand processing as described with reference to FIG. 6 is executed (step S1). In the sand treatment, the sand property measuring device 129 measures the temperature, moisture content, CB value, air permeability, air pressure, and compressive strength of the mold sand as sand properties.
The control device of the sand processing equipment 10 transmits the sand processing data to the control device 11 basically at every predetermined casting cycle at the measurement timing instructed by the control device 11.
When receiving the sand treatment data from the sand treatment equipment 10, the control device 11 adds an item corresponding to the new mold to the sand treatment data table 208, and removes the mold identification number from each column of the added item. In addition, each of the sand processing data received from the sand processing equipment 10 is registered.
The mold sand whose sand properties have been measured is conveyed to the molding equipment 2 by the conveyor 131.

Next, the molding facility 2 molds a mold from the mold sand processed by the sand processing facility 10 (Step S2). Further, the formed upper mold and lower mold are once separated vertically in the molding equipment 2, and after the core is installed, they are matched (Step S <b> 3) and discharged to the cooling and transporting equipment 4.
In the present embodiment, the mold is formed and discharged at a processing timing instructed by the control device 11 and basically at one speed in a predetermined casting cycle.

The timer of the molding equipment 2 is a time corresponding to one frame of the mold, that is, the time when the squeeze of the upper mold and the lower mold is completed by the squeeze board of the molding equipment 2 with respect to the paired upper mold and the lower mold that have been matched. It is measured as a molding time and transmitted to the control device of the molding equipment 2. The control device of the molding equipment 2 transmits the molding time for each mold to the control device 11 as unique data for each mold.
The molding equipment 2 measures each of the mold data with a measuring device. The control device of the molding equipment 2 receives the mold data measured by various measuring instruments and transmits the data to the control device 11 together with the molding data.
The timer of the core installation equipment 3 measures the time at which the core was installed in the mold for one frame, that is, the paired upper and lower molds as the core installation time. Then, it transmits to the control device of the core installation facility 3.
The timer of the core installation equipment 3 further measures the core insertion time. The control device of the core installation facility 3 receives the core installation time and the core insertion time, and transmits them to the control device 11 as core data.

When receiving the molding time, mold data, and molding data for each molded mold from the molding equipment 2, the control device 11 issues a unique mold identification number for the molded mold, and stores the new mold in the product information table 200. And the issued mold identification number, molding time, pattern number, product number, product name, and material are registered in each column of the added item.
In addition, when the control device 11 issues the mold identification number and adds an item corresponding to the new mold to the product information table 200, the control device 11 applies the new mold to each of the mold data table 201 and the molding data table 202. A corresponding item is added, and the issued mold identification number, the mold data and the molding data received from the molding equipment 2 are registered in each column of the added item.
When receiving the core data from the core installation equipment 3, the control device 11 adds an item corresponding to the new mold to the core data table 203, and adds the items described in the above-described sections to the respective columns of the added item. The mold identification number acquired in and the core data received from the core installation facility 3 are registered.
The controller 11 further estimates the time at which the sand property of the molding sand used for molding the mold is measured by the sand property measuring device 129 by subtracting the processing sand moving time from the molding time. The control device 11 compares the estimated time with each measurement time in the sand processing data table 208, and newly writes the estimated time in the mold identification number column of the measurement result having the closest measurement time in the sand processing data table 208. Register the issued template identification number.

The molded mold is transported by the cooling transport equipment 4 (Step S4). After the weight and the jacket are placed on the mold 19A by the weight transfer device 58, the molten metal is cast by the pouring equipment 7 (Step S5).
Each of the base trolleys 52 of the cooling and transporting equipment 4 is basically controlled by the first pusher 56A, the second pusher 56B, the first traverser 57A, and the second traverser 57B at the processing timing instructed by the control device 11, basically at the predetermined time. In each casting cycle, the first line 50 and the second line 51 are moved so as to circulate in the first line 50 and the second line 51 by one frame, that is, one platen cart 52.
The automatic pouring device 72 of the pouring equipment 7 basically injects the mold 19A conveyed on the first line 50 at the processing timing instructed by the control device 11 at every predetermined casting cycle. Hot water.

The timer of the pouring equipment 7 measures the time at which the molten metal was poured into the mold of one frame, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold, as the pouring time. Send to control device.
The control device of the pouring equipment 7 receives the measured value measured by each measuring device of the pouring equipment 7, and performs the ladle lot number (ladle number), material number, and casting corresponding to the poured ladle. Together with the time, these are transmitted to control device 11 as pouring data.
The pouring equipment 7 measures the amount of hot water from the furnace 70 to the ladle 71 using a weighing scale. The control device of the pouring equipment 7 receives the amount of hot water measured by the weighing scale, and transmits it to the control device 11 as molten metal transport data along with the hot water furnace number, material number, and hot water time corresponding to the ladle. .

When receiving the pouring data and the molten metal transport data from the pouring equipment 7, the control device 11 adds an item corresponding to the new mold to the molten metal transport data table 204 and the molten metal transport data table 205, and adds the added item. In each of the fields, the mold identification number acquired in the manner already described, and the pouring data and the molten metal transport data received from the pouring equipment 7 are registered.
Further, control device 11 registers a casting result corresponding to the obtained mold identification number in product information table 200 according to whether or not the molten metal has been poured into the mold.

The weight-placed pouring mold 19C poured by the pouring equipment 7 is conveyed while being cooled by the primary cooling / conveying device 5, and the weight and the jacket are removed by the weight transfer device 58, and reaches the mold separating device 65. I do.
In the mold separating device 65, the mold is separated and the casting 19E is taken out.
The casting 19E is conveyed to the casting sand removal device 68, and the casting sand 19E is removed from the casting 19E by the casting sand removal device 68 without being removed even by the casting mold release device 65 and adhering to the casting 19E.
The casting 19E from which the mold sand has been removed is further conveyed while being cooled by the secondary cooling and conveying device 6.
The mold sand that has formed the mold is collected by the conveyor 101 and supplied to the sand treatment step of step S1.
At the processing timing instructed by the control device 11, the control device of the cooling and transporting equipment 4 basically sets each of the suspension devices 61 for one frame of mold, that is, the adjacent suspension at every predetermined casting cycle. The drive unit is controlled so as to move on the casting rail 60 by the distance between the devices 61.

The timer of the cooling / transporting equipment 4 measures the mold release time and the cooling time for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper and lower molds, and transmits the time to the control device of the cooling / transporting equipment 4. I do. The control device of the cooling and transporting equipment 4 transmits the mold release time and the cooling time for each mold to the control device 11 as cooling and transporting data.
When receiving the cooling transfer data from the cooling transfer equipment 4, the control device 11 adds an item corresponding to the new mold to the cooling transfer data table 206, and fills in each column of the added item in the manner already described. The acquired mold identification number and each of the cooling transfer data received from the cooling transfer equipment 4 are registered.

A post-processing step is performed on the cooled and conveyed casting 19E (step S6). In the post-processing equipment 8, the casting 19 </ b> E is shot blasted by the shot blast device 82 and stamped by the stamping device 84.
Thereafter, each casting 19E is weir-folded to form one or more castings.

At the processing timing instructed by the control device 11, the control device of the post-processing equipment 8 basically moves the mounting jig on the conveyor 83 for one frame of the mold, that is, at the predetermined casting cycle. The conveyer 83 is controlled so as to move by the distance between the mounting jigs.
The timer of the post-processing equipment 8 measures the stamping time and the weir folding time for one frame of the mold, that is, for the paired upper and lower molds that have been matched, and transmits the time to the control device of the post-processing equipment 8. I do. The control device of the post-processing equipment 8 transmits the stamp time, the stamp type, and the weir folding time for each casting to the control device 11 as post-processing data.
When receiving the post-processing data from the post-processing equipment 8, the control device 11 adds an item corresponding to the new template to the post-processing data table 207, and fills in each column of the added item in the manner already described. The acquired mold identification number and each of the post-processing data received from the post-processing equipment 8 are registered.

  Each casting product formed by the weir folding is inspected by an operator or the like (step S7). In the inspection, the dimensions of the cast product, the presence or absence of flaws, and the like are checked. The operator inputs the inspection result of one or a plurality of casting products formed by the mold to the control device 11 for one frame of the mold, that is, for the paired upper mold and lower mold that have been matched. I do.

  Next, the effects of the casting equipment and the casting method will be described.

The above-mentioned casting equipment 1 is provided with a control device 11 that acquires unique data for one frame of molds for a plurality of processes, and associates the unique data of each process with each mold for one frame.
According to the above configuration, when a failure occurs in a casting product during casting in a casting facility, the associated process is performed based on the unique data of each process associated with each mold of one frame. The failures can be analyzed in an analysis environment in which the processes are related and the entire process is overlooked. Similarly, even when the operating environment of the casting equipment is changed to improve the quality of the casting, the changes in the casting equipment that are effective for quality improvement can be compared by tracing the unique data linked between processes. It can be easily extracted. In this way, by associating unique data across processes, the traceability of measurement data is improved, and measurement data can be tracked and extracted easily.

  In addition, since the unique data is associated across the processes, for example, by displaying the information stored in each table on the display device of the control device 11, the operation status of each process can be easily managed. In the present embodiment, since some display devices are provided at remote locations, the operation status can be grasped even at a location remote from the casting facility 1.

[First Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a first modified example of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The first modified example is a modified example related to the sand processing equipment 10 in the casting equipment 1. More specifically, in the first modification, the configuration of the sand processing facility 10 in the above-described embodiment, particularly the configuration around the sand cooler 110, is realized in more detail as a recovered sand cooling system. Is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the first modified example, the control device of the sand processing equipment, the various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, that is, the sand property and the measurement time, for one frame of the mold, that is, a pair of upper molds matched. It is the same as the above embodiment in that the specific data corresponding to the mold sand to be molded as the lower mold, that is, sand processing data, is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 17 is a schematic configuration diagram of the collected sand cooling system A1 shown as the first modified example. The recovered sand is obtained by solidifying the molten metal cast in the mold in the green casting, and then separating the sand used as the mold from the casting. The recovered sand is kneaded and adjusted after the removal of foreign substances and the cooling of the sand, and is used again for green molding. The recovered sand cooling system A1 is a system for cooling the green recovered sand, particularly in the green mold, and adjusting the water content of the cooled recovered sand.

  The recovered sand cooling system A1 is a sand water temperature measuring device (corresponding to the sand temperature water proportional water injection device 109 in the above embodiment) A2 for measuring the water content and temperature of the recovered sand, and the amount of water added to the recovered sand. A control device A3 for determining an appropriate amount of water and a water spray cooling device (corresponding to the sand cooler 110 in the above embodiment) A4 in which water of an appropriate amount of water is added to the recovered sand and cooled by the latent heat of vaporization of the water to obtain cooled recovered sand. , A5, an air introduction device A6 for introducing air into the sand cooling device, and an introduction air temperature / humidity measuring device A7 for measuring the temperature and humidity of the introduction air introduced into the sand cooling device.

  Hereinafter, the recovered sand cooling system A1 will be described in detail. The collected sand cooling system A1 includes a hopper A8 and a belt feeder A9. The recovered sand separated from the casting is stored in the hopper A8. The belt feeder A9 is provided below the hopper A8. The recovered sand stored in the hopper A8 is supplied to a belt feeder A9 from a recovered sand supply port (not shown) provided in the hopper A8.

  The belt feeder A9 includes an inverter motor A10, and is driven by the inverter motor A10. A control device A3 described later is electrically connected to the inverter motor A10, and is configured so that the rotation speed of the inverter motor A10 changes according to a signal from the control device A3. Thereby, the collected sand supplied to the belt feeder A9 is conveyed to the sprinkling cooling devices A4 and A5.

  The sand moisture temperature measuring device A2 is provided on the belt feeder A9. The amount and temperature of the recovered sand conveyed on the belt feeder A9 are measured by the sand / water temperature measuring device A2. A control device A3 described later is electrically connected to the sand moisture temperature measuring device A2, and the water content and temperature of the recovered sand measured by the sand moisture temperature measuring device A2 are transmitted to the control device A3.

  The water spray cooling devices A4 and A5 include a water spray device A4 and a sand cooling device A5. The recovered sand cooling system A1 includes a water source A11 and a water amount adjustment valve A12. The water source A11 is connected to the water spray device A4, and supplies water to the water spray device A4. The water sprinkling device A4 sprinkles the water supplied from the water source A11 onto the collected sand supplied from the belt feeder A9, and then agitates the collected sand to disperse the water in the collected sand. The collected sand in which the water is sprinkled and the water is dispersed is referred to as water-collected sand.

  The water amount adjustment valve A12 is interposed between the water source A11 and the sprinkler A4. A control device A3 described later is electrically connected to the water amount adjustment valve A12. The water amount adjusting valve A12 controls the amount of water supplied from the water source A11 to the sprinkler A4 so that the amount of water supplied to the sprinkler A4 becomes a value of an appropriate amount of water calculated by the controller A3, which is an appropriate amount of water to be added to the collected sand. It is controlled by the device A3. Thereby, the water sprinkling device A4 adds water of an appropriate amount of water to the recovered sand to obtain water as the recovered water.

  The water-collected sand in which the water is dispersed by being stirred by the watering device A4 is discharged from the watering device A4 and is introduced into the sand cooling device A5. The sand cooling device A5 cools the water by bringing the water recovered into contact with the air in the sand cooling device A5. The cooled recovered sand is referred to as cooled recovered sand.

  The recovered sand cooling system A1 includes an air heater A13 and a dust collector A14. One air flow path is formed by the air heating device A13, the sand cooling device A5, the dust collecting device A14, and the air introducing device A6 so that air flows in this order. The air introduction device A6 provided at the end of this air flow path creates air flow in the air flow path by sucking air from the direction of the upstream air heating device A13, and introduces air into the sand cooling device A5. This is a suction-type device.

  The air heating device A13 is provided at the uppermost stream of the air flow path. The air heating device A13 heats the air taken in from the outside air or the indoor atmosphere by the suction of the air introduction device A6 as necessary, and introduces air to the sand cooling device A5 as introduction air. A control device A3 described later is electrically connected to the air heating device A13. The air heating device A13 is controlled by the control device A3 to heat the introduced air such that the temperature of the introduced air introduced into the sand cooling device A5 becomes the appropriate air temperature calculated by the control device A3.

  In the sand cooling device A5, the discharged air whose temperature and humidity have been increased due to evaporation of water from the water recovered from the water and heat transfer from the sand are introduced into the dust collection device A14. The dust collecting device A14 removes dust in the air flow path including the inside of the sand cooling device A5 introduced into the dust collecting device A14. The air from which the dust has been removed is discharged to the outside air via the air introduction device A6.

  The air introduction device A6 includes an inverter motor A15, and is driven by the inverter motor A15. A control device A3 described later is electrically connected to the inverter motor A15. The inverter motor A15 is controlled by the control device A3 such that the air suction amount of the air introduction device A6 becomes an appropriate air volume calculated by the control device A3.

  The collected sand cooling system A1 includes an introduced air temperature / humidity measuring device A7, an exhaust air temperature / humidity measuring device A16, and an air volume measuring device A17 in order to measure the state of air in the air flow path described above. The introduced air temperature / humidity measuring device A7 is provided between the air heating device A13 and the sand cooling device A5, and measures the temperature and humidity of the introduced air introduced into the sand cooling device A5. A control device A3 described later is electrically connected to the introduced air temperature / humidity measuring device A7. The temperature and humidity of the introduced air measured by the introduced air temperature / humidity measuring device A7 are transmitted to the control device A3.

  The discharged air temperature / humidity measuring device A16 is provided between the sand cooling device A5 and the dust collecting device A14, and measures the temperature and humidity of the discharged air discharged from the sand cooling device A5. A control device A3 described later is electrically connected to the exhaust air temperature / humidity measuring device A16. The temperature and humidity of the discharged air measured by the discharged air temperature / humidity measuring device A16 are transmitted to the control device A3.

  The air flow measuring device A17 is provided between the dust collecting device A14 and the air introducing device A6, and the amount of air taken in by the air introducing device A6, that is, the amount of air introduced into the sand cooling device A5. Is measured. A control device A3 to be described later is electrically connected to the air volume measuring device A17. The air volume of the introduced air measured by the air volume measuring device A17 is transmitted to the control device A3.

  The collected sand cooling system A1 includes a belt conveyor A18 below a cooled collected sand discharge port (not shown) of the sand cooling device A5. The belt conveyor A18 has a motor A19, and is driven by the motor A19. The belt conveyor A18 conveys the cooled and recovered sand discharged from the sand cooling device A5 to the next step such as a kneading device (not shown).

  The collected sand cooling system A1 includes a cooled collected sand moisture temperature measuring device A20. The cooling and collecting sand moisture temperature measuring device A20 measures the moisture content and temperature of the cooling and collecting sand transported on the belt conveyor A18. A control device A3 to be described later is electrically connected to the cooling / recovered sand moisture temperature measuring device A20. The water content and the temperature of the cooling / recovered sand measured by the cooling / recovered sand / water temperature measuring device A20 are transmitted to the control device A3.

  As described above, the water content and temperature of the recovered sand measured by the sand water temperature measuring device A2, the water content and temperature of the cooled recovered sand measured by the cooling recovered sand water temperature meter A20, and the introduced air temperature and humidity meter The temperature and humidity of the introduced air measured by A7, the temperature and humidity of the discharged air measured by the discharged air temperature / humidity measuring device A16, and the air volume of the introduced air measured by the air volume measuring device A17 are sent to the control device A3. Sent. The control device A3 receives these measured values, performs an operation described below with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, and based on the result, the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, the water amount adjustment valve A12, the air introduction device A6. Of the inverter motor A15 and the air heating device A13.

  The control device A3 performs three types of processing of determining an appropriate amount of water and instructing water spraying, operation correction based on the water content and temperature of the cooled and recovered sand, and operation correction based on the temperature and humidity of the discharged air. The operation of the cooling system A1 is controlled. First, the configuration of the control device A3 necessary for determining the appropriate amount of water and executing the watering instruction will be described.

(Configuration of control device A3 regarding determination of appropriate amount of water added and watering instruction)
The control device A3 determines an appropriate amount of water. For this purpose, as shown in FIG. 18, the control device A3 includes a necessary evaporation water amount calculation unit A31, an allowable evaporation water vapor amount calculation unit A32, an appropriate water addition amount determination unit A33, a comparison operation unit A34, and a control unit A35. ing.

The required amount of evaporated water calculating unit A31 calculates the required amount of evaporated water based on the temperature of the collected sand and the amount of the collected sand. As described above, the water recovered from the water is mainly cooled in the sand cooling device A5 by the latent heat of evaporation caused by the evaporation of water. The required amount of evaporating water is the amount of evaporating water per unit time required to cool the water recovered from the water to the target temperature by the latent heat of evaporation. The temperature of the recovered sand measured by the sand moisture temperature measuring device A2 is T _s1 (K), the cooling target temperature of the water-recovered sand is T _s2 (K), and the input amount of the recovered sand, that is, is input to the sand cooling device A5. When the amount of recovered sand per unit time is G _s (kg / min), the specific heat of the recovered sand is C _s (kJ / kg · K), and the latent heat of vaporization of water is L _w (kJ / kg), the unit is The required amount of evaporated water per hour _Qv (kg / min) is expressed by the following equation.

Required evaporating water calculator A31 may by above formula (1), calculates the necessary evaporation water Q _v per unit time.

Note that recovered sand amount G _s per unit time is introduced into the sand cooler A5 is present in the first modification, recovered sand supply to the belt feeder A9 from the hopper A8 is constant per unit time and the control device A3 is connected to the inverter motor A10 belt feeder A9, recognizing the driving speed of the inverter motor A10, Convert it is controllable, the driving speed of the inverter motor A10 as recovered sand amount G _s Used.

  Further, in the first modified example, the water recovered from the water is cooled by the latent heat of vaporization due to the evaporation of the water of the water recovered from the water and the heat transfer from the sand to the air. The cooling effect by the latent heat of vaporization is largely dominant. Therefore, each process of the arithmetic unit A3 is defined on the premise of this.

  The allowable vapor amount calculating section A32 calculates the allowable vapor amount based on the temperature and humidity of the introduced air and the air flow. As described above, the water recovered from the water is mainly cooled by the latent heat of vaporization of the water in the sand cooling device A5. Therefore, the air introduced into the sand cooling device A5 receives the evaporated water vapor and then discharges the water. The air is discharged from the sand cooling device A5 as air.

To cool the hydrolysis recovered sand to the target temperature T _s2, it is necessary to evaporate the amount of water corresponding to the required evaporation water Q _v per unit time shown as Equation (1). Therefore, whether to perform cooling in the sand cooler A5 effectively, the control device A3 includes the comparing unit A34 to be described later, acceptable water vapor introduced air is equivalent to require the evaporation water Q _v per unit time Determine whether or not. For this determination, the evaporable water vapor amount calculation unit A32 determines that the amount of water vapor per unit time that can be evaporated by the sand cooling device A5 with the current introduced air, that is, the introduced air introduced per unit time, has already been calculated. An allowable vapor amount W _a (kg / min) per unit time, which is an amount of water vapor that can be held in addition to the humidity, is calculated.

As a pre-stage for calculating the evaporation allowable water vapor content W _a per time unit, to consider the total amount W _max amount of steam per unit time current introduction air can have _(kg / min). The humidity that the introduced air can have, that is, the amount of water vapor, is 100% in relative humidity, but the absolute humidity for this differs depending on the air temperature. Therefore, the total amount of water vapor per unit time W _max that can be possessed by the current introduced air is calculated by calculating the temperature of the introduced air measured by the introduced air temperature / humidity measuring device A7 as _Ta1 (K), and the relative humidity at the temperature _{Ta1 as} 100%. % the absolute humidity corresponding to _{X max (kg / kg-air} ), the air volume, i.e., when the amount of the introduced air measured by the airflow meter A17 and _{G a (kg-air / min} ), the table by: Is done.

Incidentally, X _max as described _above, in the unit system of G _a, wherein a kg-air is intended to represent the amount of air, in order to distinguish the unit kg are used to represent the amount of water It is description.

Introduction correspondence between the temperature T _a1 and absolute temperature X _max of the air, for example, the controller may be held in a format such as a table or a function, such as the interior of the A3, when calculating the total amount W _max of the amount water vapor may have introduced air What is necessary is just to refer to it suitably.

Since the total amount of water vapor per unit time W _max that the introduced air can have is represented by the above equation (2), the absolute humidity of the introduced air measured by the introduced air temperature / humidity measuring device A7 is represented by X ₁ ( When kg / kg-air), evaporation allowable amount of water vapor per unit time _W a (kg / min) can be calculated by the following equation.

Comparing unit A34 is required evaporation water quantity per unit time is expressed by the formula _{(1) Q v (kg /} min), evaporated allowable amount of water vapor per unit time is represented by the formula (3) _W a (kg / Min). Whether Thus, whether it is possible to reliably perform cooling in the sand cooler A5, i.e., introducing air introduced per unit time, accept steam quantity only requires evaporative water Q _v per unit time Judge.

The comparison operation unit A34 determines a control operation for controlling any one or a combination of the air volume, the amount of the collected sand, and the temperature of the introduced air based on the comparison result. More specifically, when comparing the evaporation allowable water vapor content _{W a} per need evaporated water _{Q v} and unit time per unit _time, if the Q v> _{W a} (state _1), the Q v = _{W a} Either case (state 2) or when Q _v <W _a (state 3) should occur. Comparing unit A34, due either _{Q v} and _{W a} have the relationship of the state 1 to 3 throat, inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, inverter motor A10 belt feeders A9, or any one of the air heating device A13 The control operation for controlling any one or any combination of the air volume, the amount of the collected sand, and the temperature of the introduced air is determined by controlling the combination. Hereinafter, the control operation determined in each of the states 1 to 3 will be described in detail.

First, the case of state 2 will be described. In state 2, Q _v = W _a , which means that the amount of water vapor to be evaporated per unit time is equal to the amount of water vapor that can be held in addition to the humidity already possessed by the introduced air introduced per unit time. It is an equal state, which is the most ideal state. Therefore, the comparison operation unit A34 does not determine a special control operation, and transmits the control operation to the control unit A35 so as to maintain the current state.

Next, the case of the state 1 will be described. In state 1, Q _v > W _a , because the amount of water vapor to be evaporated per unit time is greater than the amount of water vapor that can be held in addition to the humidity already possessed by the introduced air introduced per unit time. This is the case. This is a state in which the amount of water vapor to be evaporated cannot be accepted by the introduced air, and the sand cooling device A5 does not sufficiently cool the water-collected sand. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the amount of water vapor to be evaporated per unit time, or to increase the amount of water vapor that can be held in addition to the humidity of the introduced air introduced per unit time, to achieve the state 2 described above. . In other words, if the required amount of evaporative water is larger than the allowable amount of water vapor, a control operation that is an operation of performing one or a combination of an increase in the air flow, a reduction in the amount of collected sand, and an increase in the temperature of the introduced air is determined. I do.

More specifically, the comparison calculation unit A34 first increases the rotation speed of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 to increase the air volume, and thereby increases the amount of air introduced per unit time. Consider increasing the amount of water vapor that can be introduced by the introduced air per unit time. Since the relation of Q _v = W _a can be realized to achieve the state of state 2, the comparison operation unit A34 sets an equation that makes the above equation (1) and equation (3) equal, after substituting each measured value, air volume, i.e., by solving the equations for deriving the value of the quantity G _a deployment air introduced per unit time, to calculate the appropriate value of the air flow. After that, the comparison operation unit A34 transmits to the control unit A35 a control operation for adjusting the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 so that the air volume becomes the calculated value.

If the value of the air volume calculated by the comparison operation unit A34 exceeds the capacity limit of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, or even if the value is increased to a value equivalent to the capacity limit of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, when to achieve the relationship Q v ₌ W _a is insufficient, comparing unit A34 further by reducing the rotational speed of the inverter motor A10 belt feeder A9, reducing the input amount of recovered sand By doing so, we will consider reducing the amount of water vapor to be evaporated per unit time. Therefore, as in the case of the air volume, by solving the equation in the formula (1) according to equation (3), input amount of recovered sand, i.e., the appropriate value of the recovered sand amount G _s per unit time calculate. After that, in addition to the control operation relating to the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, the comparison operation unit A34 performs a control operation of adjusting the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9 so that the amount of the collected sand becomes the calculated value. , To the control unit A35.

However, if the amount of collected sand is reduced too much, it will be less than the amount of sand required in the subsequent molding process, and it will not be possible to secure the minimum amount of sand to be supplied to the molding machine to keep the specified molding speed Therefore, if the calculated value falls below the preset lower limit value G _sL to recovered sand amount G _s per unit time is calculated and set value the lower limit G _sL. The setting of the lower limit _GsL is set by an operator inputting in advance to the control device A3 or the like.

When Q _{v =} W comparison operation unit A34 to be insufficient to achieve the relation of _a is determined by the above, the comparison operation unit A34 may further raise the set temperature in an air heating device A13 Consider increasing the amount of water vapor that can be introduced by the introduced air per unit time by increasing the temperature of the introduced air. This is calculated as in the case described above, the equation (1) solves the equation according to formula (3) is a value that depends on the temperature T _a1 for introducing air, the absolute appropriate values of humidity X ₁ of the introduced air It is done by doing. Thereafter, in addition to the control operation related to the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 and the control operation related to the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, the comparison operation unit A34 calculated the temperature of the introduced air using the air heating device A13. A control operation to increase the value is transmitted to the control unit A35.

  However, when the set temperature of the air heating device A13 is increased, if the introduced air is excessively heated, the temperature of the sand cooling device A5 increases, and the sand cooling device A5 cannot efficiently cool the water recovered from water. Therefore, the upper limit of the temperature of the introduced air is desirably set to, for example, about 45 ° C.

Finally, the case of state 3 will be described. In state 3, Q _v <W _a , because the amount of water vapor to be evaporated per unit time is greater than the amount of water vapor that can be held in addition to the humidity already possessed by the introduced air introduced per unit time. It is a small case. That is, in state 3, the introduced air introduced per unit time is in a state capable of sufficiently absorbing water vapor, and basically, even if this state is maintained, the recovered sand is sufficiently cooled. However, state 3 is, in other words, a state in which an excessive amount of introduced air is introduced into the recovered sand, so that state 2 is set by reducing the air volume, increasing the amount of collected sand, and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the utility cost and increase the amount of cooling processing per unit time. That is, when the required amount of evaporative water is smaller than the allowable amount of vapor, the control operation which is one of or both of reducing the air flow and increasing the amount of the collected sand is determined.

  More specifically, the comparison calculation unit A34 first reduces the rotation speed of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 to reduce the air volume, and thereby reduces the amount of air introduced per unit time. Consider reducing the amount of water vapor that can be introduced by the introduced air per unit time. The appropriate value of the air volume is calculated in the same manner as described in the state 1. After that, the comparison calculation unit A34 transmits to the control unit A35 a control operation for adjusting the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 so that the air volume becomes the calculated value.

  However, in order to prevent that the air volume is reduced too much to prevent dust generated in the sand cooling device A5 from being collected, the air volume should not be lower than a value at which the dust in the sand cooling device A5 can be collected. There is a need.

The calculated air volume value comparing unit A34, if it is insufficient to realize the relation of Q v ₌ W _a, the comparison computation unit A34 may further rotational speed of the inverter motor A10 belt feeder A9 Consider increasing the amount of water vapor to be evaporated per unit time by increasing the amount of recovered sand by increasing the amount of recovered sand. Therefore, as in the case of state 1, input amount of recovered sand, i.e., to calculate the appropriate value of the recovered sand amount G _s per unit time. After that, in addition to the control operation relating to the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, the comparison operation unit A34 performs a control operation of adjusting the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9 so that the amount of the collected sand becomes the calculated value. , To the control unit A35.

  The control unit A35 executes the control operation transmitted from the comparison operation unit A34. More specifically, it controls the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, and the air heating device A13. The control unit A35 also receives the control operation transmitted by the appropriate water amount determination unit A33 described later, and controls the water amount adjustment valve A12.

The appropriate amount of water determining unit A33 determines an appropriate amount of water per unit time based on the required amount of evaporated water per unit time calculated by the necessary amount of evaporated water calculating unit A31. The cooled recovered sand, which is the recovered sand after cooling, is preferably used as a sand mold again, and thus preferably has a constant water content in a stage before kneading adjustment. That is, the water recovered from the water is cooled by the latent heat of evaporation in the sand cooling device A5, so that the evaporated water is lost. However, it is preferable that the cooled water recovered thereafter still has a constant water content. The appropriate amount of water is the amount of water sprayed per unit time in the water spray device A4, which is necessary for the cooling and collecting sand to have this constant water content. Assuming that the water content of the recovered sand measured by the sand water temperature measuring device A2 is W _s1 (%) and the target water content of the cooling recovered sand is W _s2 (%), the appropriate amount of water Q _w (kg / min) is represented by the following equation.

Proper amount of water determining unit A33, the above equation by (4), to determine the proper amount of water Q _w per unit time.

As will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 19 after the determination of the proper amount of water Q _w per unit by appropriate hydrolytic amount determining unit A33 time is performed need evaporated water Q _v per unit time after calculating twice. Strictly speaking, after the first calculation of the required evaporating water Q _v per unit time, the inverter motor A10 belt feeder A9, inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, and, as described above with respect to the air heating device A13 And the control unit A35 controls these devices. Proper amount of water Q _w per unit time is determined based on each measurement value is re-measured after the control operation. That is, in a state in which the environment is changed suitably by the control operation, to measure the measured values again by each of the instrument, and re-calculate the required evaporation water Q _v per unit time from the re-measurement, the calculated again Unit required evaporation water Q _v and based on each remeasurement per time, appropriate amount of water Q _w per unit time is determined. Thus, the proper amount of water Q _w per unit time is determined as an appropriate value.

  As described above, the control device A3 determines an appropriate amount of water based on the moisture and temperature of the collected sand, the temperature and humidity of the introduced air, and the air volume.

(Determining the appropriate amount of water and watering instructions)
Next, a method of determining an appropriate amount of water and a method of instructing water spraying in the method for cooling the recovered sand using the recovered sand cooling system A1 will be described with reference to FIGS. The method cools the recovered sand and adjusts the water content of the cooled recovered sand. The details of the first correction amount calculation unit A36 and the second correction amount calculation unit A37 of the control device A3 shown in FIG. 18 and the processing method using them will be described later.

  This method measures the water content and temperature of the recovered sand, determines the appropriate amount of water, which is the amount of water to be added to the recovered sand, adds the appropriate amount of water to the recovered sand, and introduces water while introducing air. Cooling with latent heat of vaporization to produce cooling recovered sand, including measuring the temperature and humidity of the introduced air, based on the water content and temperature of the recovered sand, and the temperature and humidity of the introduced air , Determine the appropriate amount of water. The method also includes measuring the flow rate of the introduced air, and determining the appropriate amount of water based on the flow rate.

  More specifically, first, collected sand separated from the casting is put into the hopper A8. The hopper A8 supplies the recovered sand to the belt feeder A9. The belt feeder A9 conveys the collected sand to the sprinkler A4. The sand moisture temperature measuring device A2 measures the moisture content and temperature of the recovered sand conveyed on the belt feeder A9, and transmits the measurement result to the control device A3. The drive speed of the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9 is controlled by the control device A3. (Step AS1).

The required evaporating water amount calculation unit A31 of the control device A3 calculates the temperature (T _s1 ) of the recovered sand received from the sand moisture temperature measuring device A2 and the input amount of the recovered sand, that is, of the inverter motor A10 managed by the control device A3. obtained by converting the driving speed, it recovered sand amount per unit time (G _s) based on, for calculating the required evaporation water Q _v per unit time by the equation (1) (step AS2).

  Next, the air introduction device A6 is driven by the inverter motor A15, and air flows through the air flow path formed by the air heating device A13, the sand cooling device A5, the dust collection device A14, and the air introduction device A6. Thereby, the introduced air is introduced into the sand cooling device A5. The introduced air temperature / humidity measuring device A7 measures the temperature and humidity of the introduced air, and transmits the measurement result to the control device A3. Further, the air volume measuring device A17 measures the air volume of the introduced air introduced into the sand cooling device A5, and transmits the measurement result to the control device A3 (step AS3).

The evaporating allowable water vapor amount calculation unit A32 of the control device A3 receives the temperature (T _a1 ), the absolute humidity (X ₁ ) of the introduced air received from the introduced air temperature / humidity measuring device A7, and the air volume received from the air volume measuring device A17 ( based on the G _a), formula (2), to calculate the evaporation allowable water vapor content _{W a} per time unit by the formula (3) (step AS4).

Comparing unit A34 of the control unit compares the required evaporation water Q _v per unit calculated time in a step AS2, evaporated allowable water vapor content W _a per unit time calculated in the step AS4 (Step AS5). Whether Thus, whether it is possible to reliably cool the sand cooler A5, i.e., introducing air introduced per unit time, accept steam quantity only requires evaporative water Q _v per unit time Judge.

The result of this comparison, in the case (Condition 1) that is the Q _v> W _a, have water vapor to be evaporated per unit time, in addition to the humidity introducing air already has to be introduced per unit time Since the amount of water vapor to be evaporated per unit time is reduced, or the amount of water vapor that can be held in addition to the humidity of the introduced air introduced per unit time is increased because the amount of water vapor to be evaporated per unit time is increased, so that Q _v W determines the control operation for the state 2 is the state equal to _a (step AS6).

  More specifically, the comparison calculation unit A34 first increases the rotation speed of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 to increase the air volume, thereby increasing the amount of air introduced per unit time. Consider increasing the amount of water vapor that can be introduced by the introduced air per unit time. The comparison calculation unit A34 calculates an appropriate value of the air volume by using the equations (1) to (4) in the manner described above. After that, the comparison calculation unit A34 transmits to the control unit A35 a control operation for adjusting the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 so that the air volume becomes the calculated value.

If the value of the air volume calculated by the comparison operation unit A34 exceeds the capacity limit of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, or even if the value is increased to a value equivalent to the capacity limit of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, when to achieve the relationship Q v ₌ W _a is insufficient, comparing unit A34 further by reducing the rotational speed of the inverter motor A10 belt feeder A9, reducing the input amount of recovered sand By doing so, we will consider reducing the amount of water vapor to be evaporated per unit time. For this purpose, an appropriate value of the amount of collected sand per unit time is calculated as in the case of the above-mentioned air volume. After that, in addition to the control operation relating to the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, the comparison operation unit A34 performs a control operation of adjusting the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9 so that the amount of the collected sand becomes the calculated value. , To the control unit A35.

However, if the amount of collected sand is reduced too much, it will be less than the amount of sand required in the subsequent molding process, and it will not be possible to secure the minimum amount of sand to be supplied to the molding machine to keep the specified molding speed Therefore, if the calculated value falls below the preset lower limit value G _sL to recovered sand amount G _s per unit time is calculated and set value the lower limit G _sL. The setting of the lower limit _GsL is set by an operator inputting in advance to the control device A3 or the like.

When Q _{v =} W comparison operation unit A34 to be insufficient to achieve the relation of _a is determined by the above, the comparison operation unit A34 may further raise the set temperature in an air heating device A13 Consider increasing the amount of water vapor that can be introduced by the introduced air per unit time by increasing the temperature of the introduced air. Therefore, as in the above case, an appropriate value of the absolute humidity of the introduced air is calculated. Thereafter, in addition to the control operation related to the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 and the control operation related to the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, the comparison operation unit A34 calculated the temperature of the introduced air using the air heating device A13. A control operation to increase the value is transmitted to the control unit A35.

  The control unit A35 receives the control operation, and controls the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, and the air heating device A13 based on the control operation.

Comparison of the result in step AS5, in the case (Condition 2) which has a Q v ₌ W _a, the amount of water vapor to be evaporated per unit time, in addition to the humidity introducing air already has to be introduced per unit time It is equal to the amount of water vapor that can be held. Since this is the most ideal state, the comparison operation unit A34 transmits to the control unit A35 so as to maintain the current state without determining a special control operation (step AS7).

  The control unit A35 receives the instruction for maintaining the current status as a control operation. The control of the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, and the air heating device A13 is continued so as to maintain the current state.

Comparison of the result in step AS5, in the case (state 3) which is the Q v _{<W a,} the amount of water vapor to be evaporated per unit time, in addition to the humidity introducing air already has to be introduced per unit time Because it is smaller than the amount of water vapor that can be held, the reduction of heating expenses and the increase of cooling processing amount per unit time, the reduction of air volume, the increase of the input amount of recovered sand, or both, A control operation for setting the state 2 is determined (step AS8).

  More specifically, the comparison calculation unit A34 first reduces the rotation speed of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 to reduce the air volume, and thereby reduces the amount of air introduced per unit time. Consider reducing the amount of water vapor that can be introduced by the introduced air per unit time. The appropriate value of the air volume is calculated in the same manner as described in the state 1. After that, the comparison calculation unit A34 transmits to the control unit A35 a control operation for adjusting the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 so that the air volume becomes the calculated value.

  However, in order to prevent that the air volume is reduced too much to prevent dust generated in the sand cooling device A5 from being collected, the air volume should not be lower than a value at which the dust in the sand cooling device A5 can be collected. There is a need.

The calculated air volume value comparing unit A34, if it is insufficient to realize the relation of Q v ₌ W _a, the comparison computation unit A34 may further rotational speed of the inverter motor A10 belt feeder A9 Consider increasing the amount of water vapor to be evaporated per unit time by increasing the amount of recovered sand by increasing the amount of recovered sand. Therefore, as in the case of state 1, input amount of recovered sand, i.e., to calculate the appropriate value of the recovered sand amount G _s per unit time. After that, in addition to the control operation relating to the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, the comparison operation unit A34 performs a control operation of adjusting the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9 so that the amount of the collected sand becomes the calculated value. , To the control unit A35.

  The control unit A35 receives the control operation and controls the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9 and the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 based on the control operation.

After the control of the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, and the air heating device A13 in steps AS6 to AS8 described above, the input amount and introduction of the collected sand in the collected sand cooling system A1. The flow rate of air and the temperature of the introduced air satisfy the relationship of Q _v = W _a , that is, the amount of water vapor to be evaporated per unit time is added to the humidity already contained in the introduced air introduced per unit time. It changes so that it becomes an ideal state equal to the amount of water vapor that can be held. After step AS9 described below, each measurement value in a state in which the environment has changed to an ideal by the control operation is measured again by each measuring instrument, and the required amount of evaporative water Q _v per unit time is again measured from the re-measurement value. It was calculated again, based on the required evaporation water Q _v and the re-measured value calculated again to determine the proper amount of water Q _w per unit time in the ideal state.

  Specifically, first, the sand moisture temperature measuring device A2 measures the moisture content and the temperature of the recovered sand conveyed on the belt feeder A9, and transmits the measurement result to the control device A3. The drive speed of the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9 is controlled by the control device A3 so as to feed the collected sand at the speed calculated in steps AS6 to AS8. (Step AS9).

The required evaporation water amount calculation unit A31 of the control device A3 calculates the temperature (T _s1 ) of the recovered sand received from the sand moisture temperature measuring device A2 and the input amount of the recovered sand, that is, of the inverter motor A10 managed by the control device A3. obtained by converting the driving speed, it recovered sand amount per unit time (G _s) based on, for calculating the required evaporation water Q _v per unit time by the equation (1) (step AS10).

  Next, the introduced air temperature / humidity measuring device A7 measures the temperature and humidity of the introduced air, and transmits the measurement result to the control device A3. Further, the air volume measuring device A17 measures the air volume of the introduced air introduced into the sand cooling device A5, and transmits the measurement result to the control device A3. The temperature and the flow rate of the introduced air are controlled by the control device A3 so as to be the values calculated in steps AS6 to AS8 (step AS11).

The evaporating allowable water vapor amount calculation unit A32 of the control device A3 receives the temperature (T _a1 ), the absolute humidity (X ₁ ) of the introduced air received from the introduced air temperature / humidity measuring device A7, and the air volume received from the air volume measuring device A17 ( based on the G _a), formula (2), to calculate the evaporation allowable water vapor content _{W a} per time unit by the formula (3) (step AS12).

Proper amount of water determining unit A33 of the control device A3, based on the required evaporation water Q _v per unit calculated time by the to determine the proper amount of water Q _w per unit time. Units proper amount of water Q _w hourly, formula (4) as described above with a necessary evaporation water Q _v per unit time, the amount of water to be added in addition to the water content of the time of turn-on of the recovered sand Is calculated by the sum of Through the process of step AS6~AS8 the environment adjustment of recovered sand cooling system A1, because the necessary evaporation water Q _v per unit time becomes an appropriate value, is determined based on equation (4) based on this proper amount of water Q _w per unit time also has a similarly appropriate value. Proper amount of water determining unit A33, the control operation for adjusting the water amount adjustment valve A12 so that the value appropriate amount of water Q _w is determined per unit time, and transmits to the control unit A35 (step AS13).

The control unit A35 controls the water amount adjustment valve A12 based on the control operation received from the appropriate water amount determination unit A33. Thus, the amount of water per unit time supplied from the water source A11 to the sprinkler A4 is adjusted to a proper amount of water Q _w, hydro recovered sand having an appropriate moisture content is generated (step AS14).

  The water spraying device A4 disperses the water by stirring the water recovered from the water. The sand cooling device A5 brings the agitated water-collected sand discharged from the sprinkling device A4 into contact with the introduced air introduced into the sand cooling device A5, and cools the sand by the latent heat of evaporation of water.

  The sand cooling device A5 discharges the cooled and collected sand onto a belt conveyor A18 driven by a motor A19. The belt conveyor A18 conveys the cooled and recovered sand discharged from the sand cooling device A5 to the next step such as a kneading device (not shown).

  In the sand cooling device A5, the discharged air whose temperature and humidity have been increased due to the evaporation of water and the heat transfer from the sand are introduced into the dust collection device A14. The dust collecting device A14 removes the dust of the introduced air, and discharges the air from which the dust has been removed to the outside air.

  In FIG. 20, after the process of step AS14, it is determined whether or not to perform an operation correction based on the water content and temperature of the cooling and collecting sand, which will be described later. Whether or not to perform the operation correction is determined based on a set value or the like of the recovered sand cooling system A1, for example, which is previously input by the operator to the control device A3. When performing the motion correction, the process is shifted to a motion correction process shown as step AS21 (step AS20).

  When the operation correction based on the water content and the temperature of the cooling and collecting sand is not performed, it is determined whether or not the operation correction based on the temperature and the humidity of the discharged air, which will be described later, is performed. Whether or not to perform the operation correction is determined based on a set value or the like of the recovered sand cooling system A1, for example, which is previously input by the operator to the control device A3. When performing the motion correction, the process proceeds to a motion correction process shown as step AS41 (step AS40).

When the operation correction based on the temperature and humidity of the discharged air is not performed, it is determined whether or not to continue the series of processing of the present recovered sand cooling system A1. Whether or not to continue the process is determined based on a set value or the like of the recovered sand cooling system A1 that is input by the operator in advance to the control device A3, for example. If the process is to be executed continuously, the process returns to step AS1, and the processes after step AS1 are repeated. By returning to step AS1, when the amount of collected sand, the amount of air, or the like is changed by a correction operation or the like described later, each measured value is measured again, and the required amount of evaporated water per unit time _Qv , and the amount of per unit time per unit time are measured. evaporation allowable amount of water vapor W _a is recalculated, the value is updated. If not executed, a series of processing of the recovered sand cooling system A1 ends (step AS60).

(Additional configuration of control device A3 for operation correction based on water content and temperature of cooling and collecting sand)
Next, the configuration of the control device A3 relating to the operation correction based on the water content and the temperature of the cooling and collecting sand will be described. In order to perform the operation correction based on the water content and the temperature of the cooling and collecting sand, the control device A3 includes a first correction amount calculation unit A36 as shown in FIG.

In watering indication and determination of the proper amount of water as described above, by comparing the evaporation allowable water vapor content W _a per need evaporated water Q _v and unit time per unit time, according to the comparison result, the air volume of the introduced air, collected input of the sand, adjusting any or any combination of the temperature of the introduced air, and determines the proper amount of water Q _w per unit time on it. However, this process does not take into account the actual capacity of the sand cooling device A5, for example, the cooling efficiency.

Water in order to take into account the actual capacity of the sand cooler A5, a proper amount of water determining unit A33 determines the proper amount of water Q _w, by controlling the amount of water adjustment valve A12, supplied from a water source A11 to the sprinkler device A4 is adjusted to a proper amount of water Q _w, after the processing corresponding to step AS14 in FIG. 19, the first correction amount calculating unit A36 is, based on the moisture content and temperature of the cooling recovery sand sand cooler A5 discharges , The amount of wind, the amount of collected sand, and the appropriate amount of water added, or the correction amount of any combination thereof is calculated.

The first correction amount calculating unit A36 receives the water amount W _s3 (%) and the temperature T _s3 (K) of the cooling and collecting sand from the cooling and collecting sand and water temperature measuring device A20. The first correction amount calculating unit A36 compares these values with the above-mentioned target water amount W _s2 (%) of the cooling and collecting sand and the target cooling temperature T _s2 (K), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 21 which will be used later when describing the operation correction method by the first correction amount calculation unit A36, for example, W _s3 > W _s2 and T _s3 > T _s2 are established as the comparison results. Case (state A), W _s3 <W _s2 and T _s3 > T _s2 hold (state B), W _s3 > W _s2 and T _s3 <T _s2 hold (state C), and W _s3 When <W _s2 and T _s3 <T _s2 are satisfied (state D), there is a possibility that any of the states will be performed. The first correction amount calculation unit A36 determines the relationship between W _s3 and W _s2 , and the relationship between T _s3 and T _s2 , the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, and the water amount adjustment valve A12. Control of any one or any combination of the above, calculate the correction amount of any or any combination of the air volume, the amount of collected sand, and the appropriate amount of water, and control each device by the calculated correction amount Of the correction control operation to be performed. Hereinafter, the correction control operation determined in each of the states A to D will be described in detail.

In state A, W _s3 > W _s2 and T _s3 > T _s2, and both the water content and the temperature of the cooling and collecting sand discharged by the sand cooling device A5 are higher than the target values. This is because the amount of water sprayed in the water spraying device A4 is sufficient, but the water is not sufficiently evaporated in the sand cooling device A5 due to insufficient contact between the water for recovery and the introduced air, and the water is recovered by latent heat of evaporation. The sand has not been cooled sufficiently.

In this state A, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 first increases the rotation speed of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 to increase the air volume, and the water vapor that can be introduced by the introduced air per unit time has Consider increasing the amount. The amount of increase in the air volume may be set so that W _s3 becomes equal to W _s2 and T _s3 equals T _s2 after the increase. Therefore, the amount of increase in the air volume is calculated based on the expressions (1) to (4) and the respective relationships of W _s3 = W _s2 and T _s3 = T _s2 . Thereafter, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 transmits to the control unit A35 a correction control operation for adjusting the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 so that the air volume becomes the calculated value.

  When the value of the air volume calculated by the first correction amount calculator A36 exceeds the capacity limit of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, or is increased to a value equivalent to the capacity limit of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6. However, if the target value is not sufficient to achieve the target value, the first correction amount calculating unit A36 further reduces the rotation speed of the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9 to reduce the amount of collected sand. Consider reducing it. The amount of the collected sand is calculated based on the equations (1) to (4). Thereafter, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 adjusts the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9 so that the amount of collected sand becomes the calculated value, in addition to the correction control operation for the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6. The correction control operation to be performed is transmitted to the control unit A35.

However, if the amount of collected sand is reduced too much, it will be less than the amount of sand required in the subsequent molding process, and it will not be possible to secure the minimum amount of sand to be supplied to the molding machine to keep the specified molding speed Therefore, if the calculated value falls below the preset lower limit value G _sL to recovered sand amount G _s per unit time is calculated and set value the lower limit G _sL. The setting of the lower limit _GsL is set by an operator inputting in advance to the control device A3 or the like.

In state B, W _s3 <W _s2 and T _s3 > T _s2, and the water content of the cooling and collecting sand discharged from the sand cooling device A5 is lower than the target value and the temperature is higher than the target value. . This is a state in which the water is not sufficiently evaporated in the sand cooling device A5 because the amount of water sprayed in the water spraying device A4 is insufficient, and the cooling of the water recovered by the latent heat of evaporation is insufficient.

  In this state B, the first correction amount calculating unit A36 considers increasing the opening of the water amount adjusting valve A12 to increase the amount of water supplied to the watering device A4. The water amount is calculated based on the equations (1) to (4), as in the case of the state A. Thereafter, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 transmits to the control unit A35 a correction control operation for increasing the opening of the water amount adjustment valve A12 so that the water amount becomes the calculated value.

In state C, W _s3 > W _s2 and T _s3 <T _s2, and the water content of the cooling and collecting sand discharged from the sand cooling device A5 is higher than the target value and the temperature is lower than the target value. . This is because the amount of water sprayed in the water spraying device A4 is too large, and while the recovered water for sand is sufficiently cooled in the sand cooling device A5, excess water that has not been evaporated and exceeds the target is collected in the cooled recovered sand. A lot remains.

  In this state C, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 considers reducing the opening of the water amount adjustment valve A12 to reduce the amount of water supplied to the watering device A4. The water amount is calculated based on (1) to (4), as in the case of the state A. Thereafter, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 transmits to the control unit A35 a correction control operation for reducing the opening of the water amount adjustment valve A12 so that the water amount becomes the calculated value.

In the state D, W _s3 <W _s2 and T _s3 <T _s2 are satisfied, and the water is sufficiently cooled in the sand cooling device A5. The amount is low.

  In this state D, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 considers increasing the opening of the water amount adjustment valve A12 to increase the amount of water supplied to the watering device A4. The water amount is calculated based on the equations (1) to (4), as in the case of the state A. Thereafter, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 transmits to the control unit A35 a correction control operation for increasing the opening of the water amount adjustment valve A12 so that the water amount becomes the calculated value.

  Alternatively, the first correction amount calculating unit A36 considers reducing the rotation speed of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 to reduce the air volume, and thereby reduce the evaporation amount. As in the case of the state A, the amount of reduction of the air volume is calculated based on the equations (1) to (4). After that, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 transmits to the control unit A35 a correction control operation for adjusting the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 so that the air volume becomes the calculated value.

  However, in order to prevent that the air volume is reduced too much to prevent dust generated in the sand cooling device A5 from being collected, the air volume should not be lower than a value at which the dust in the sand cooling device A5 can be collected. There is a need.

  The control unit A35 receives and executes the correction control operation transmitted from the first correction amount calculation unit A36, and executes any of the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, the water amount adjustment valve A12, and the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6. Or a combination of either.

(Operation compensation method based on water content and temperature of cooling and collecting sand)
Next, an operation correction method using the above-described first correction amount calculation unit A36 in the above-described recovered sand cooling system A1 based on the water content and temperature of the cooled recovered sand will be described with reference to FIGS. This method corresponds to step AS21 shown in FIG. 20 and is executed after steps AS1 to AS20 described in the method for determining an appropriate amount of water and instructing watering.

  First, an appropriate amount of water is determined and a watering instruction method (steps AS1 to AS20) is executed. In step AS20, it is determined whether or not to perform the operation correction based on the water content and the temperature of the cooling and collecting sand, and when the setting to perform the operation correction has been made, the correction process described as step AS21 is performed. FIG. 21 shows details of the correction process AS21.

  In the correction process AS21, first, the cooling / recovered sand / water temperature measuring device A20 measures the water content and temperature of the cooling / recovered sand conveyed on the belt conveyor A18, and transmits the measurement result to the control device A3 (step AS22). ).

The first correction amount calculating unit A36 of the control unit A35 receives the water amount W _s3 (%) and the temperature T _s3 (K) of the cooling and collecting sand from the cooling and collecting sand and water temperature measuring device A20, and calculates these values. and the target moisture content of the cooling recovered sand _W s2 (%), and, the cooling target temperature _T s2 (K), are respectively compared (step AS23). Accordingly, whether or not the sand cooling device A5 is cooling the hydrated and recovered sand so as to satisfy the target of the temperature and the amount of water of the cooled and recovered sand is not excessively cooled even if it is satisfied. Is determined.

As a result of this comparison, when W _s3 > W _s2 and T _s3 > T _s2 are satisfied (state A), although the amount of water sprayed in the water spraying device A4 is sufficient, the water for water collection and the introduced air come into sufficient contact. Therefore, the water is not sufficiently evaporated in the sand cooling device A5, and the water is not sufficiently cooled by the latent heat of evaporation. Therefore, a control operation is determined to make W _s3 equal to W _s2 and T _s3 equal to T _s2 , respectively (step AS24).

  More specifically, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 first increases the rotation speed of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 to increase the air flow, and the water vapor that can be introduced by the introduced air per unit time. Consider increasing the amount. The amount of increase in the air volume is calculated based on equations (1) to (4). After that, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 transmits to the control unit A35 a correction control operation for adjusting the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 so that the air volume becomes the calculated value.

  When the value of the air volume calculated by the first correction amount calculator A36 exceeds the capacity limit of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, or is increased to a value equivalent to the capacity limit of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6. However, if the target value is not sufficient to achieve the target value, the first correction amount calculating unit A36 further reduces the rotation speed of the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9 to reduce the amount of collected sand. Consider reducing it. The amount of the collected sand is calculated based on the equations (1) to (4). Thereafter, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 adjusts the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9 so that the amount of collected sand becomes the calculated value, in addition to the correction control operation for the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6. The correction control operation to be performed is transmitted to the control unit A35.

However, if the amount of collected sand is reduced too much, it will be less than the amount of sand required in the subsequent molding process, and it will not be possible to secure the minimum amount of sand to be supplied to the molding machine to keep the specified molding speed Therefore, if the calculated value falls below the preset lower limit value G _sL to recovered sand amount G _s per unit time is calculated and set value the lower limit G _sL. The setting of the lower limit _GsL is set by an operator inputting in advance to the control device A3 or the like.

As a result of the comparison in step AS23, when W _s3 <W _s2 and T _s3 > T _s2 (state B), the amount of water in the sand cooling device A5 is reduced because the water amount in the water spray device A4 is insufficient. In this state, the water is not sufficiently evaporated, and the cooling of the water recovered by the latent heat of evaporation is insufficient. Also in this case, a control operation is determined to make W _s3 equal to W _s2 and T _s3 equal to T _s2 , respectively (step AS25).

  More specifically, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 considers increasing the amount of water supplied to the watering device A4 by increasing the opening of the water amount adjustment valve A12. The amount of water is calculated based on equations (1) to (4). Thereafter, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 transmits to the control unit A35 a correction control operation for increasing the opening of the water amount adjustment valve A12 so that the water amount becomes the calculated value.

As a result of the comparison in step AS23, when W _s3 > W _s2 and T _s3 <T _s2 (state C), the water collection amount is too large in the water cooling device A5 because the water spray amount in the water spray device A4 is too large. This is a state in which excess moisture exceeding the target, which has not been evaporated while being sufficiently cooled, is left in the cooled recovered sand. Also in this case, a control operation is determined to make W _s3 equal to W _s2 and T _s3 equal to T _s2 , respectively (step AS26).

  More specifically, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 considers reducing the opening of the water amount adjustment valve A12 to reduce the amount of water supplied to the watering device A4. The amount of water is calculated based on equations (1) to (4). Thereafter, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 transmits to the control unit A35 a correction control operation for reducing the opening of the water amount adjustment valve A12 so that the water amount becomes the calculated value.

As a result of the comparison in step AS23, when W _s3 <W _s2 and T _s3 <T _s2 (state D), the water is sufficiently cooled in the sand cooling device A5, but the amount of water spray is small. Therefore, the water content of the cooling and collecting sand is low. Also in this case, a control operation is determined to make W _s3 equal to W _s2 and T _s3 equal to T _s2 , respectively (step AS27).

  More specifically, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 considers increasing the amount of water supplied to the watering device A4 by increasing the opening of the water amount adjustment valve A12. The amount of water is calculated based on equations (1) to (4). Thereafter, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 transmits to the control unit A35 a correction control operation for increasing the opening of the water amount adjustment valve A12 so that the water amount becomes the calculated value.

  Alternatively, the first correction amount calculating unit A36 considers reducing the rotation speed of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 to reduce the air volume, and thereby reduce the evaporation amount. The amount of reduction of the air volume is calculated based on equations (1) to (4). After that, the first correction amount calculation unit A36 transmits to the control unit A35 a correction control operation for adjusting the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 so that the air volume becomes the calculated value.

  However, in order to prevent that the air volume is reduced too much to prevent dust generated in the sand cooling device A5 from being collected, the air volume should not be lower than a value at which the dust in the sand cooling device A5 can be collected. There is a need.

  The control unit A35 receives the correction control operation, and based on the correction control operation, controls any one or a combination of any one of the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, the water amount adjustment valve A12, and the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6. Control is performed (step AS28).

  Thereafter, step AS40 shown in FIG. 20 is executed. As described above, even if it is determined in step AS20 that the correction process AS21 described with reference to FIG. 21 is not to be performed, step AS40 is performed as described above. In step AS40, it is determined whether or not to perform an operation correction based on the temperature and humidity of the exhaust air, which will be described later. Whether or not to perform the operation correction is determined based on a set value or the like of the recovered sand cooling system A1, for example, which is previously input to the control device A3 by an operator. When performing the motion correction, the process proceeds to a motion correction process described later as step AS41.

When the operation correction based on the temperature and humidity of the discharged air is not performed, it is determined whether or not to continue the series of processing of the present recovered sand cooling system A1. Whether or not to continue the process is determined based on a set value or the like of the recovered sand cooling system A1 that is input by the operator in advance to the control device A3, for example. If the processing is to be executed continuously, the processing from step AS1 is repeated. By returning to step AS1, the correction operation in the case of recovered sand weight and air volume, etc. is changed, etc., the measured values are measured again, must evaporate water Q _v per unit _time, and the evaporation per unit time permissible amount of water vapor W _a is recalculated, the value is updated. If not executed, a series of processing of the recovered sand cooling system A1 ends (step AS60).

  If the environment in the collected sand cooling system A1 is suddenly changed, there is a possibility that the quality of the collected sand is deteriorated, the system malfunctions or is damaged. Therefore, in the execution of the operation correction processing, it is desirable to perform correction control of each device at a speed of about 0.5 to 2.0% of each correction amount in about 2 to 10 seconds.

(Additional configuration of control device A3 for operation correction based on temperature and humidity of exhaust air)
Next, the configuration of the control device A3 relating to the operation correction based on the temperature and humidity of the exhaust air will be described. In order to perform the operation correction based on the temperature and humidity of the exhaust air, the control device A3 includes a second correction amount calculation unit A37 as shown in FIG.

  In the first modified example, the operation based on the moisture and the temperature of the cooling / recovered sand corresponding to steps AS1 to AS14 in FIG. 19, after the determination of the appropriate amount of water and the instruction of watering, or in step AS21 in FIG. After the correction, the second correction amount calculating unit A37 calculates any one or a combination of the air volume, the input amount of the recovered sand, and the temperature of the introduced air based on the temperature and the humidity of the exhaust air discharged from the sand cooling device A5. Is calculated.

  More specifically, the second correction amount calculation unit A37 receives the temperature and humidity of the exhaust air from the exhaust air temperature / humidity measuring device A16. The second correction amount calculation unit A37 calculates the value of the relative humidity at the temperature from the values.

  If the value of the relative humidity is, for example, 95% or more, which is a value close to 100%, there is a possibility that dew condensation may occur in the sand cooling device A5 and the air duct forming the air flow path. In order to prevent dew condensation, the second correction amount calculation unit A37 first increases the airflow by increasing the rotation speed of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, and reduces the relative humidity of the discharged air to, for example, about 90 to 95%. Consider reducing it. The amount of increase in the air volume is calculated based on equations (1) to (4). After that, the second correction amount calculation unit A37 transmits to the control unit A35 a correction control operation for adjusting the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 so that the air volume becomes the calculated value.

  If dew condensation cannot be sufficiently prevented due to a change in air flow due to a correction operation of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, the second correction amount calculation unit A37 further reduces the rotation speed of the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9. Consider reducing the amount of collected sand. The amount of the collected sand is calculated based on the equations (1) to (4). After that, the second correction amount calculation unit A37 adjusts the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9 so that the amount of the collected sand becomes the calculated value, in addition to the correction control operation for the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6. The correction control operation to be performed is transmitted to the control unit A35.

However, if the amount of collected sand is reduced too much, it will be less than the amount of sand required in the subsequent molding process, and it will not be possible to secure the minimum amount of sand to be supplied to the molding machine to keep the specified molding speed Therefore, if the calculated value falls below the preset lower limit value G _sL to recovered sand amount G _s per unit time is calculated and set value the lower limit G _sL. The setting of the lower limit _GsL is set by an operator inputting in advance to the control device A3 or the like.

  If the condensation still cannot be sufficiently prevented, the second correction amount calculating unit A37 further considers increasing the set temperature in the air heating device A13. The temperature of the introduced air is calculated based on equations (1) to (4). Then, in addition to the correction control operation for the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 and the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, the second correction amount calculation unit A37 sets the air heating device A13 to the value obtained by calculating the temperature of the introduced air. Is transmitted to the control unit A35.

  The control unit A35 receives and executes the correction control operation transmitted from the second correction amount calculation unit A37, and executes any of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, and the air heating device A13. Or a combination of either.

  Note that the respective correction amounts are calculated based on the equations (1) to (4) as described above. Prior to this calculation, in the equations (1) to (4), the absolute humidity is used as the humidity. Since it is used, the second correction amount calculation unit A37 converts the relative humidity of the discharged air into the absolute humidity.

(Operation compensation method based on temperature and humidity of exhaust air)
Next, an operation correction method based on the temperature and humidity of the exhaust air using the above-described second correction amount calculation unit A37 in the above-described recovered sand cooling system A1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20 and 22. I do. This method corresponds to step AS41 shown in FIG. 20, and is performed after steps AS1 to AS14 in FIG. 19 described in the determination of the appropriate amount of water and the watering instruction method, or according to the water content and temperature of the cooling and collecting sand. This is executed after step AS21 described in the correction method.

  First, a method of determining an appropriate amount of water and a watering instruction method (Steps AS1 to AS20) and an operation correction method based on the moisture and temperature of the cooling and collecting sand (Steps AS21 and AS40) are executed. In step AS40, it is determined whether or not to perform the operation correction based on the temperature and humidity of the discharged air. If the setting for performing the operation correction has been made, the main correction process described as step AS41 is performed. FIG. 22 shows details of the correction process AS41.

  In the correction process AS41, first, the discharged air temperature / humidity measuring device A16 measures the temperature and humidity of the discharged air discharged from the sand cooling device A5, and transmits the measurement result to the control device A3 (step AS42).

  The second correction amount calculating unit A37 of the control unit A35 receives the temperature and humidity of the exhaust air from the exhaust air temperature / humidity measuring device A16, and calculates the value of the relative humidity at the temperature from these values. Further, the second correction amount calculation unit A37 determines whether the calculated value of the relative humidity is, for example, 95% or more (Step AS43).

  If the value of the relative humidity is, for example, 95% or more and a value close to 100%, any one or any of an air volume, a charged amount of collected sand, and a temperature of the introduced air suitable for preventing dew condensation is used. The correction amount of the combination is calculated (step AS44). First, the second correction amount calculation unit A37 considers increasing the rotation speed of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 to set the relative humidity of the discharged air to, for example, about 90 to 95%. The amount of increase in the air volume is calculated based on equations (1) to (4). After that, the second correction amount calculation unit A37 transmits to the control unit A35 a correction control operation for adjusting the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 so that the air volume becomes the calculated value.

  If dew condensation cannot be sufficiently prevented due to a change in air flow due to a correction operation of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, the second correction amount calculation unit A37 further reduces the rotation speed of the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9. Consider reducing the amount of collected sand. The amount of the collected sand is calculated based on the equations (1) to (4). After that, the second correction amount calculation unit A37 adjusts the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9 so that the amount of the collected sand becomes the calculated value, in addition to the correction control operation for the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6. The correction control operation to be performed is transmitted to the control unit A35.

However, if the amount of collected sand is reduced too much, it will be less than the amount of sand required in the subsequent molding process, and it will not be possible to secure the minimum amount of sand to be supplied to the molding machine to keep the specified molding speed Therefore, if the calculated value falls below the preset lower limit value G _sL to recovered sand amount G _s per unit time is calculated and set value the lower limit G _sL. The setting of the lower limit _GsL is set by an operator inputting in advance to the control device A3 or the like.

  If the condensation still cannot be sufficiently prevented, the second correction amount calculating unit A37 further considers increasing the set temperature in the air heating device A13. The temperature of the introduced air is calculated based on equations (1) to (4). Then, in addition to the correction control operation for the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6 and the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, the second correction amount calculation unit A37 sets the air heating device A13 to the value obtained by calculating the temperature of the introduced air. Is transmitted to the control unit A35.

  The control unit A35 receives the correction control operation and, based on the correction control operation, controls any one or a combination of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, and the air heating device A13. It controls (step AS45).

After step AS45 or immediately after step AS43 in which the value of the relative humidity is 95% or less and it is determined in step AS43 that it is not necessary to perform the correction for preventing the dew condensation, as shown in FIG. Step AS60 is executed. If the process is to be continuously executed in step AS60, the process from step AS1 is repeated. By returning to step AS1, the correction operation in the case of recovered sand weight and air volume, etc. is changed, etc., the measured values are measured again, must evaporate water Q _v per unit _time, and the evaporation per unit time permissible amount of water vapor W _a is recalculated, the value is updated.

  In addition, similarly to the operation correction based on the moisture and the temperature of the cooling and collecting sand, in the execution of the operation correction process, at a speed of about 0.5 to 2.0% of each correction amount in about 2 to 10 seconds. It is desirable to correct and control the air volume and the amount of collected sand. In addition, it is preferable that the temperature of the introduced air be corrected and controlled at a speed of about 0.5 to 3 ° C. of the correction amount in about 2 to 10 seconds.

  Next, the operation and effect of the above-described recovered sand cooling system A1 and method will be described.

In the configuration and method as described above, in the determination of the appropriate amount of water to be added and the instruction for watering, the comparison operation unit A34 performs the evaporation per unit time based on the temperature and humidity of the introduced air, which is expressed by Expression (3). the permissible amount of water vapor _W a (kg / min), is compared with the required evaporation water quantity per unit time is represented by the formula _{(1) Q v (kg /} min), effectively to cool the hydrolytic recovered sand Therefore, the it is determined whether air introduced per unit time can accept necessary evaporation water Q _v corresponding steam.

  As a result, for example, when the required amount of evaporative water per unit time is larger than the amount of permissible vapor per unit time (state 1), the required amount of evaporative water per unit time is reduced, or the permissible amount of vapor per unit time is reduced. The control operation is performed so as to increase. The control amount of each device by this control operation is performed based on the equations (1) to (4) so that the required amount of evaporative water per unit time is equal to the amount of vapor permissible vapor per unit time.

  That is, based on the temperature and humidity of the introduced air, it is determined how much water vapor the introduced air can have per unit time, and based on the result, the input of the collected sand into the collected sand cooling system is performed. It controls and changes the environment such as the amount, watering amount, the temperature of the introduced air and the amount of airflow. As a result, it is possible to realize an appropriate environment in the collected sand cooling system in consideration of the temperature and humidity of the introduced air, so that, for example, even when the temperature and humidity change depending on the season, stable cooling is performed. Thus, a water-containing effect can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to reliably cool the recovered sand to the target temperature regardless of the state of the introduced air.

  In addition, the amount of operation of each device to obtain the cooling recovered sand cooled to the target temperature, that is, to realize the necessary and sufficient environment for cooling the recovered sand to the target temperature in the recovered sand cooling system is calculated. Since each device is controlled according to this operation amount, it is possible to reduce the number of times each device is controlled. In other words, when empirically controlling each device, control adjustment of each device and re-measurement by each measuring device in the environment changed as a result are repeated many times, and the environment in the collected sand cooling system converges. However, in the first modification, such repetition does not need to be performed many times. Therefore, the cooling of the recovered sand can be performed more easily.

  Also, when the required amount of evaporative water per unit time is smaller than the permissible amount of water vapor per unit time (state 3), that is, even when the introduced air can sufficiently absorb water vapor, the required amount of evaporative water per unit time And the control operation is performed such that the evaporation allowable steam amount per unit time becomes equal. As this control operation, there is a case where the amount of collected sand can be increased to increase the cooling processing amount per unit time. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently cool the recovered sand.

  Further, in the above state 3, it is also possible to perform a control operation for reducing the air volume, and in this case, it is possible to reduce the utility cost.

Also, the proper amount of water Q _w per unit time, the recovered sand cooling system environment as described above is adjusted once, by equation (4), it is determined by calculation. Equation (4), to the required evaporation water Q _v per unit after adjustment time, and the target moisture cooling recovered sand, by adding the difference of the water recovered sand prior to watering, determine the proper amount of water Things. That is, the water content of the cooling and collecting sand is adjusted to about the target water content, and the water content of the cooling and collecting sand can be adjusted efficiently.

Further, in determining the watering instruction process proper amount of water, to determine the appropriate proper amount of water Q _w, despite the watering, there are cases where the water content and temperature of the cooling recovered sand is different from the target value. It is conceivable that the assumed capacity such as the cooling capacity and the actual capacity of the sand cooling device A5 are different from each other, but in such a case, the appropriate amount of water is determined and the watering instruction processing is performed. After that, the operation is corrected based on the water content and the temperature of the cooling and collecting sand, and the correction is made to bring the water content and the temperature of the cooling and collecting sand closer to the target. Therefore, even in such a case, the collected sand can be reliably cooled and hydrated to the target temperature.

In the operation correction by the temperature and humidity of the exhaust air, appropriate after hydrolysis the amount determining the Q _w, based on the temperature and humidity of the exhaust air, the relative humidity of the introduced air, for example, 95% or more, nearly 100% If the value is a value, for example, a correction amount of any one or a combination of the air volume, the input amount of the recovered sand, and the temperature of the introduced air for obtaining about 90 to 95% is calculated, and each device is corrected and controlled. I have. This makes it possible to prevent dew condensation in the sand cooling device A5 and the air duct forming the air flow path.

  In the present modified example in which the recovered sand cooling system is provided in the sand processing facility as described above, as described above, the control device of the sand processing facility performs various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, that is, the sand property and the measurement time. For the configuration of transmitting to the control device of the casting equipment, as the unique data corresponding to the mold sand to be molded as a pair of upper mold and lower mold for one frame of mold, that is, as a pair of upper mold and lower mold, that is, sand processing data. Are common to the above embodiment. Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Second Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a second modified example of the casting equipment 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The second modified example is a modified example related to the sand treatment equipment 10 in the casting equipment 1. More specifically, the second modified example is a further modified example of the first modified example.
Also in the second modified example, the control device of the sand processing equipment, the various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, ie, the sand properties and the measurement time, for one frame of the mold, that is, a pair of upper molds matched. It is the same as the above embodiment in that the specific data corresponding to the mold sand to be molded as the lower mold, that is, sand processing data, is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility.

FIG. 23 is a schematic configuration diagram of a collected sand cooling system A61 shown as the second modified example, and FIG. 24 is a block diagram of a control device in the collected sand cooling system A61.
In these figures, the same components as those shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 described in the first modification are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.
The difference between the second modification and the first modification is that the humidity of the exhaust air is calculated without calculating the humidity of the exhaust air. Accordingly, the processing of the second correction amount calculating unit A67 is performed. The content is different.

As shown in FIG. 23, the recovered sand cooling system A61 of the present modification uses the temperature of the discharged air discharged from the sprinkling cooling devices A4 and A5 as shown in FIG. An exhaust air temperature measuring device A66 for measurement is provided.
The discharge air temperature measuring device A66 is provided between the sand cooling device A5 and the dust collecting device A14, and measures the temperature of the discharge air discharged from the sand cooling device A5. A control device A63 described later is electrically connected to the exhaust air temperature measuring device A66. The temperature of the exhaust air measured by the exhaust air temperature measuring device A66 is transmitted to the control device A3.

  The water content and temperature of the recovered sand measured by the sand water temperature measuring device A2, the water content and temperature of the cooling recovered sand measured by the cooling recovered sand water temperature measuring device A20, and measured by the introduced air temperature / humidity measuring device A7. The temperature and humidity of the introduced air, the temperature of the discharged air measured by the discharged air temperature measuring device A66, and the airflow of the introduced air measured by the airflow measuring device A17 are transmitted to the control device A63. The control device A63 receives these measured values, performs an operation described below, and based on the result, the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, the water amount adjustment valve A12, the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, and the air heating device. The device A13 is controlled.

The control device A63 performs three types of processing of determining an appropriate amount of water and instructing water sprinkling, operation correction based on the water content and temperature of the cooling / recovered sand, and operation correction based on the temperature of the discharged air. The operation of A61 is controlled.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the recovered sand cooling method shown as the present modified example, which follows the determination of the appropriate amount of water and the watering instruction of the first modified example described with reference to FIG. In this modified example, similarly to the first modified example, the determination of the appropriate amount of water and the watering instruction shown in FIG. 19, and the operation correction based on the water content and the temperature of the cooling / recovered sand shown as step AS21 in FIG. Is executed. Since these processes are the same as those in the first modification, the description is omitted. Here, the operation correction based on the temperature of the exhaust air shown as step AS51, which is different from the first modification, will be described in detail.

  In the first modification, as described with reference to FIG. 20, the operation correction based on the water content and the temperature of the cooling and collecting sand (Step AS21) and the operation correction based on the temperature and the humidity of the discharged air (Step AS41). By the determination process in steps AS20 and AS40, whether or not to execute is determined. In the present modified example, these determination processes are not performed, and the operation correction based on the water content and the temperature of the cooling and collecting sand (Step AS21) and the operation correction based on the temperature of the discharged air (Step AS51) are sequentially and sequentially performed. Configuration.

(Additional configuration of control device A63 for operation correction based on temperature of exhaust air)
In this modification, after the operation correction based on the moisture and temperature of the cooling and collecting sand, which corresponds to step AS21 in FIG. Next, the humidity of the discharged air is calculated, and when the humidity of the discharged air is equal to or more than a predetermined value, a correction amount of any one or a combination of the air volume, the amount of the collected sand, and the temperature of the introduced air is calculated.

  More specifically, the second correction amount calculation unit A67 receives the temperature of the exhaust air from the exhaust air temperature measuring device A66. The second correction amount calculation unit A67 calculates the amount of moisture contained in the exhaust air, and calculates the value of the relative humidity at the temperature from the amount of moisture and the received temperature of the exhaust air.

The second correction amount calculation unit A67 calculates the amount of water contained in the discharged air as follows.
First, the absolute humidity of the introduced air is calculated from the temperature and humidity of the introduced air measured by the introduced air temperature / humidity measuring device A7. Based on the humidity, the amount of moisture held by the introduced air per unit time is calculated.
Next, based on the amount of water in the collected sand measured by the sand water temperature measuring device A2 and the amount of collected sand per unit time fed into the sand cooling device A5, the amount of water held by the collected sand per unit time Is calculated.
The calculated sum of the amount of water held by the introduced air per unit time and the amount of water held by the recovered sand per unit time is calculated, and the sum is added to the watering device A4 via the water amount adjustment valve A12. The sum of the supplied amounts of water per unit time is calculated.
Thus, the total sum of the amounts of water introduced into the water spray cooling devices A4 and A5 is derived.

  On the other hand, from the water spray cooling devices A4 and A5, moisture is retained in each of the cooled and recovered sand and the discharged air, and is discharged from the sand cooling device A5. That is, by subtracting the amount of water retained and discharged in the cooling and collecting sand from the sum of the amounts of water introduced into the water spray cooling devices A4 and A5 calculated as described above, the amount of water retained in the discharged air is obtained. Can be calculated.

For this reason, the second correction amount calculating unit A67 calculates the water content of the cooling and collecting sand measured by the cooling and collecting sand moisture temperature measuring device A20 and the cooling and collecting sand amount per unit time discharged from the sand cooling device A5. Next, the amount of water held by the cooling recovered sand per unit time is calculated.
The second correction amount calculating unit A67 further subtracts the amount of water held by the cooling and collecting sand per unit time from the sum of the amounts of water introduced into the water spray cooling devices A4 and A5, and calculates the amount of water in the discharged air. calculate.
The second correction amount calculating unit A67 calculates the value of the relative humidity at the temperature based on the water content of the exhaust air calculated in this way and the temperature of the exhaust air.

  The relative humidity of the exhaust air calculated as described above is used as a substitute for the value of the humidity of the exhaust air measured by the exhaust air temperature / humidity measuring device A16 in the first modification. That is, when the value of the relative humidity of the discharged air is a predetermined value, for example, 95% or more, a value close to 100%, dew condensation occurs in the sand cooling device A5 and the air duct forming the air flow path. Can occur. Therefore, in order to prevent dew condensation, the second correction amount calculation unit A67, like the second correction amount calculation unit A37 in the first modified example, calculates the air volume due to the increase in the rotation speed of the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6. The control operation is transmitted to the control unit A35 in consideration of the increase, the reduction in the amount of collected sand by reducing the rotation speed of the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, and the correction control such as the increase in the set temperature in the air heating device A13.

  Each of the above correction amounts is calculated based on Expressions (1) to (4) as in the first modification, but prior to this calculation, in Expressions (1) to (4), the absolute Since the humidity is used, the second correction amount calculating unit A67 converts the calculated relative humidity of the discharged air into the absolute humidity.

(Operation compensation method based on temperature of exhaust air)
Next, a description will be given of a method of correcting the operation of the recovered sand cooling system A61 based on the temperature of the discharged air using the above-described second correction amount calculation unit A67. This method corresponds to step AS51 shown in FIG. 25 and is executed after the operation correction method (step AS21) based on the water content and temperature of the cooling and collecting sand.

  First, a method of determining an appropriate amount of water and a watering instruction method (steps AS1 to AS14) and an operation correction method based on the moisture and temperature of the cooling / recovered sand (step AS21) are performed, and then the main correction processing described as step AS51 is performed. I do. FIG. 26 shows details of the correction process AS51.

  In the correction process AS51, first, the discharged air temperature measuring device A66 measures the temperature of the discharged air discharged from the sand cooling device A5, and transmits the measurement result to the control device A63 (step AS52).

  The second correction amount calculating unit A67 of the control unit A35 receives the temperature of the discharged air from the discharged air temperature measuring device A66 and calculates the value of the relative humidity at the temperature (Step AS53). This is performed as follows.

First, the absolute humidity of the introduced air is calculated from the temperature and humidity of the introduced air measured by the introduced air temperature / humidity measuring device A7. Based on the humidity, the amount of moisture held by the introduced air per unit time is calculated.
Next, based on the amount of water in the collected sand measured by the sand water temperature measuring device A2 and the amount of collected sand per unit time fed into the sand cooling device A5, the amount of water held by the collected sand per unit time Is calculated.
The calculated sum of the amount of water held by the introduced air per unit time and the amount of water held by the recovered sand per unit time is calculated, and the sum is added to the watering device A4 via the water amount adjustment valve A12. The sum of the supplied amounts of water per unit time is calculated.
In addition, based on the water content of the cooling and collecting sand measured by the cooling and collecting sand moisture temperature measuring device A20 and the amount of cooling and collecting sand per unit time discharged from the sand cooling device A5, the cooling and collecting sand per unit time is calculated. Calculate the amount of water retained.
Further, the water content of the cooling and collecting sand per unit time is subtracted from the sum of the water content introduced into the water spray cooling devices A4 and A5 to calculate the water content of the discharged air.
The second correction amount calculating unit A67 calculates the value of the relative humidity at the temperature based on the water content of the exhaust air calculated in this way and the temperature of the exhaust air.

  Further, the second correction amount calculation unit A67 determines whether the value of the relative humidity of the exhaust air calculated as described above is a predetermined value, for example, 95% or more (step AS54). This is a process equivalent to step AS43 described with reference to FIG. Thereafter, steps AS55 and AS56 equivalent to steps AS44 and AS45 in FIG. 22 are sequentially executed.

It goes without saying that the present modified example has the same effect as the first modified example.
In the present modification, in particular, in the operation correction based on the temperature of the discharged air, the humidity of the introduced air is obtained by calculation, so that a hygrometer for measuring the humidity of the discharged air is unnecessary. Since dust and the like are mixed in the discharged air discharged from the sand cooling device A5, when a hygrometer for measuring the humidity of the discharged air is provided, it is necessary to maintain the accuracy of the measured value. Maintenance work such as periodic cleaning of the hygrometer is required. By calculating the humidity of the discharged air by calculation, the configuration of the recovered sand cooling system can be simplified and the cost required for maintenance can be reduced.

[Third Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a third modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The third modified example is a modified example related to the sand processing equipment 10 in the casting equipment 1. That is, the third modified example also realizes the configuration of the sand processing facility 10 in the above-described embodiment, particularly the configuration around the sand cooler 110, in more detail as a recovered sand cooling system, similarly to the first and second modified examples. The configuration of other parts is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the third modified example, the control device of the sand processing equipment is configured to transfer various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, that is, the sand properties and the measurement time, to one frame of the mold, that is, a pair of upper molds that have been matched. It is the same as the above embodiment in that the specific data corresponding to the mold sand to be molded as the lower mold, that is, sand processing data, is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility.

FIG. 27 is a schematic configuration diagram of a collected sand cooling system A71 shown as the third modified example, and FIG. 28 is a block diagram of a control device in the collected sand cooling system A71.
In these figures, the same components as those shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 described in the first modification are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.
The difference between the third modification and the first modification is that the controller A73 determines the appropriate amount of water based on the water content and temperature of the collected sand and the temperature of the introduced air. It is. That is, in the third modified example, when determining the appropriate amount of water to be added, the humidity of the introduced air may not be used.

The recovered sand cooling system A71 of this modification is configured to reduce the temperature of the introduced air introduced into the water spray cooling devices A4 and A5, as shown in FIG. An introduction air temperature measuring device A77 for measuring is provided.
Further, in the present modification, the configuration is such that the humidity of the exhaust air is not used. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 27, the recovered sand cooling system A71 of the present modified example replaces the discharged air temperature / humidity measuring device A16 shown in FIG. Is provided with an exhaust air temperature measuring device A76 for measuring the temperature of the air.

As described above, the collected sand cooling system A71 includes the introduced air temperature measuring device A77 and the discharged air temperature measuring device A76 in addition to the air volume measuring device A17 in order to measure the state of the air in the air flow path described above. I have.
The introduced air temperature measuring device A77 is provided between the air heating device A13 and the sand cooling device A5, and measures the temperature of the introduced air introduced into the sand cooling device A5. A control device A73 to be described later is electrically connected to the introduced air temperature measuring device A77. The temperature of the introduced air measured by the introduced air temperature measuring device A77 is transmitted to the control device A73.

  The discharge air temperature measuring device A76 is provided between the sand cooling device A5 and the dust collecting device A14, and measures the temperature of the discharge air discharged from the sand cooling device A5. A control device A73 to be described later is electrically connected to the exhaust air temperature measuring device A76. The temperature of the exhaust air measured by the exhaust air temperature measuring device A76 is transmitted to the control device A73.

  Moisture content and temperature of recovered sand measured by sand moisture temperature measuring device A2, moisture content and temperature of cooling collected sand measured by cooling recovered sand moisture temperature measuring device A20, introduction measured by introduced air temperature measuring device A77. The temperature of the air, the temperature of the exhaust air measured by the exhaust air temperature measuring device A76, and the airflow of the introduced air measured by the airflow measuring device A17 are transmitted to the control device A73. The control device A73 receives these measured values, and controls the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, the water amount adjustment valve A12, the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, and the air heating device A13 based on the measured values. .

In this modification, the control device A73 determines an appropriate amount of water based on the water content and temperature of the recovered sand and the temperature of the introduced air, and issues a watering instruction.
Further, the control device A73 corrects the operation of the system based on the amount of water and the temperature of the cooling and collecting sand.

  The recovered sand cooling system A71 configured as described above includes a sand water temperature measuring device A2 that measures the water content and temperature of the recovered sand, and a control device that determines an appropriate amount of water that is the amount of water to be added to the recovered sand. A73, water spray cooling devices A4 and A5 that add water with an appropriate amount of water to the recovered sand, and cool the recovered sand by latent heat of vaporization of water to produce cooling recovered sand; and an air introduction device that introduces air into the water spray cooling devices A4 and A5. A6 and an introduced air temperature measuring device A77 for measuring the temperature of the air introduced into the water spray cooling devices A4 and A5. The control device A73 controls the water content and the temperature of the collected sand and the temperature of the introduced air. Next, the appropriate amount of water is determined.

  As a result, it is possible to realize an appropriate environment in the collected sand cooling system in consideration of the temperature of the introduced air, so that, for example, even in a situation where the temperature and humidity change depending on the season, stable cooling and hydration can be performed. The effect can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to cool the recovered sand to the target temperature regardless of the state of the introduced air.

  In the present modified example in which the recovered sand cooling system is provided in the sand processing facility as described above, as described above, the control device of the sand processing facility performs various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, that is, the sand property and the measurement time. For the configuration of transmitting to the control device of the casting equipment, as the unique data corresponding to the mold sand to be molded as a pair of upper mold and lower mold for one frame of mold, that is, as a pair of upper mold and lower mold, that is, sand processing data. Are common to the above embodiment. Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Fourth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a fourth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The fourth modified example is a modified example related to the sand processing equipment 10 in the casting equipment 1. That is, similarly to the first to third modified examples, the fourth modified example also realizes the configuration of the sand treatment facility 10 in the above embodiment, particularly the configuration around the sand cooler 110, in more detail as a recovered sand cooling system. The configuration of other parts is the same as in the above embodiment.
In the fourth modification as well, the control device of the sand treatment facility is configured to compare various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, that is, the sand properties and the measurement time, with one pair of molds, that is, with a pair of upper molds that have been matched. The point that the specific data corresponding to the molding sand to be molded as the lower mold, that is, the sand processing data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility is the same as in the above embodiment.

FIG. 29 is a schematic configuration diagram of a collected sand cooling system A81 shown as the fourth modified example, and FIG. 30 is a block diagram of a control device in the collected sand cooling system A81.
In these drawings, the same components as those shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 described in the third modification are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.
The fourth modification is different from the third modification in that the control device A83 determines the appropriate amount of water based on the water content and temperature of the collected sand and the water content and temperature of the cooled recovered sand. That's what we did.

  That is, in this modification, in the recovered sand cooling system A81 shown in FIG. 29 for cooling the recovered sand and adjusting the water content of the cooled recovered sand, a sand water temperature measurement for measuring the water content and the temperature of the recovered sand is performed. Vessel A2, a control device A83 for determining an appropriate amount of water, which is an amount of water to be added to the collected sand, and adding the appropriate amount of water to the collected sand, and cooling with the latent heat of vaporization of the water to recover the cooling water. Water spray cooling devices A4 and A5 to be sand, an air introducing device A6 for introducing air into the water spray cooling devices A4 and A5, and a cooling recovery sand moisture temperature measuring device A20 for measuring the water content and temperature of the cooling recovery sand; The controller A83 determines the appropriate amount of water based on the water content and temperature of the collected sand and the water content and temperature of the cooled recovered sand.

  In this modification, the appropriate amount of water is determined by the output of the sand moisture temperature measuring device A2 and the output of the cooling / recovery sand moisture temperature measuring device A20. Therefore, the measurement of the introduced air temperature shown in FIG. A77 and an exhaust air temperature measuring device A76 are not provided.

  In this modification as well, the same effects as those of the third modification are obtained, and the collected sand can be cooled to the target temperature.

  Note that the first to fourth modifications are not limited to the above-described embodiment described with reference to the drawings, and various other modifications are possible within the technical scope.

For example, in the first modification example, in the determination of the appropriate amount of water added and the watering instruction, in the case of the state 1, the increase in the air flow, the reduction in the amount of the collected sand, and the increase in the temperature of the introduced air are performed in this order. The order is not limited to this, and, for example, an attempt may be made to increase the temperature of the introduced air first, or another order may be used. In this case, the control operation may be determined so as to control three types of devices: the inverter motor A15 of the air introduction device A6, the inverter motor A10 of the belt feeder A9, and the air heating device A13. The control operation may be determined so as to control one or two of the devices.
Apparatuses to be controlled, such as determination of the appropriate amount of water and state 3 of watering instruction, states A and D in operation correction based on the moisture and temperature of the cooling and collecting sand, and each processing in operation correction based on the temperature and humidity of the discharged air. The same applies to other cases where there are a plurality of.

  In the first to fourth modified examples, the sprinkling device A4 and the sand cooling device A5 are separately arranged, and the water recovered in the sprinkling device A4 is supplied to the sand cooling device A5. As long as the water sprinkled on the collected sand is dispersed by mixing, and the air and the collected sand are sufficiently brought into contact with each other, a sprinkler cooling device integrating these may be used.

  Further, in the first to fourth modifications, the air volume in the air introduction device A6 is adjusted by the inverter motor A15. Instead, a damper is provided in the air flow path, and the air volume is adjusted by the damper. The configuration may be as follows.

[Fifth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a fifth modified example of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The fifth modified example is a modified example related to the sand processing equipment 10 in the casting equipment 1. More specifically, the fifth modified example is one in which the configuration of the sand processing facility 10 in the above embodiment, particularly the configuration around the sand cooler 110, is realized in more detail as a casting sand processing facility, and the configuration of other parts Is the same as in the above embodiment.
In the fifth modification as well, the control device of the sand treatment facility is configured to perform various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, that is, the sand property and the measurement time, for one frame of the mold, that is, with the paired upper molds that have been matched. It is the same as the above embodiment in that the specific data corresponding to the mold sand to be molded as the lower mold, that is, sand processing data, is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.
In the following description of this modification, the up, down, left, and right directions refer to the directions in the drawing unless otherwise specified.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the hopper B1 is connected to a straight body having the same cross-sectional shape downward and the lower end of the straight body, and the area of the cross-section is reduced downward. And a reduction part, and the lower end of the reduction part is open. The hopper B1 has a dividing wall B8 provided with an opening B9 provided vertically inside the hopper B1 as shown in FIG. 31, and is divided into a first chamber B1a and a second chamber B1b. .

  The suction port B10 is connected to the divided wall B8 on the upper surface of the second chamber B1b, as shown in FIG. Further, a dust collector (not shown) for generating a suction force is connected to the suction port B10. Further, an air inlet B11 is connected to a side surface of the second chamber B1b opposite to the divided wall B8.

  Below the first chamber B1a and the second chamber B1b, a first conveyor B12 is provided. In this modification, a belt conveyor including a first front pulley B12a, a first rear pulley B12b, and a first belt B12c is provided as the first conveyor B12. The first belt B12c is stretched between the first front pulley B12a and the first rear pulley B12b, and is connected to the first front pulley B12a via a V belt (not shown) and a V pulley (not shown). A first conveyor drive motor (not shown) is rotatably provided. By driving the first conveyor drive motor, the first belt B12c rotates in the transport direction (clockwise in FIG. 31). Further, the width of the first conveyor B12 is substantially equal to or smaller than the opening width Bh of the lower end of the reduced portion shown in FIG. Widely set.

  A gantry B1c is disposed in the first chamber B1a of the hopper B1, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, and a sand radiating device B2 is installed on the gantry B1c. As shown in FIG. 33, the endless belt B22 with comb teeth in the sand radiating device B2 is stretched between a sand radiating front pulley B23 and a sand radiating rear pulley B24, and a V belt B25a is attached to the sand radiating front pulley B23. And a sand radiating motor B25 is rotatably disposed via V pulleys B25b and B25c. By driving the sand emission motor B25, the endless belt with comb teeth B22 rotates in the transport direction (clockwise in FIG. 33). As shown in FIG. 33, a plurality of comb teeth B22a are formed on the endless belt with comb teeth B22 at intervals in the transport direction and the belt width direction. The length of the comb teeth B22a is preferably 10 mm or more and 30 mm or less, and the interval at which the endless belt B22 with comb teeth is attached in the transport direction is preferably 20 mm or more and 50 mm or less. Further, in this modification, the sand radiating front pulley B23 is disposed above the sand radiating rear pulley B24, and the endless belt B22 with comb teeth is disposed so as to be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane. With this configuration, the sand radiating device B2 can radiate casting sand diagonally upward. The fixed space above the comb-tooth endless belt B22 is provided so as to be covered by the surrounding chute B26.

  As shown in FIG. 33, a rotating shaft B27a is provided above the sand radiating front pulley B23 in the surrounding chute B26, and a plurality of gate plates B27 are provided rotatably about the rotating shaft B27a. Further, one ends of a plurality of springs B28 are fixed to upper ends of the plurality of gate plates B27, respectively, and the other ends of the plurality of springs B28 are fixed to the surrounding chute B26 on the right side of the gate plate B27. Due to the spring B28 and the rotating shaft B27a, the endless belt B22 with comb teeth and the gate plate B27 have a right angle relationship. In the present modification, a stopper shaft (not shown) is provided on the surrounding chute B26 so that the endless belt B22 with comb teeth and the gate plate B27 are provided in a right angle relationship. Further, a gap is secured between the lower end of each gate plate B27 and the tip of the comb teeth B22a, and the size of the gap is preferably 3 mm or more and 10 mm or less. In this modification, the size of the gap between the lower end of the gate plate B27 and the tip of the comb tooth B22a is set to 5 mm.

  As shown in FIG. 33, a rotating shaft B29a is provided above the sand radiating rear pulley B24 in the surrounding chute B26, and a plate member B29 is provided rotatably around the rotating shaft B29a. In the present modification, the rotation direction of the plate member B29 is on the sand radiating front pulley B23 side, and the rotation angle is about 90 degrees. In this modification, a stopper shaft (not shown) is provided so that the endless belt with comb teeth B22 and the plate member B29 have a right angle relationship. Further, a gap is secured between the lower end of the plate member B29 and the tip of the comb teeth B22a of the endless belt B22 with comb teeth, and the size of the gap is preferably 3 mm or more and 10 mm or less. In this modification, the size of the gap between the lower end of the plate member B29 and the tip of the comb tooth B22a is set to 5 mm.

  As shown in FIG. 33, a plate-shaped and rotatable sand radiation guide B30 is provided at the leading end of the endless belt B22 with comb teeth in the conveyance direction as shown in FIG. It is arranged. The radiation angle of the molding sand radiated from the sand radiation device B2 can be adjusted by the sand radiation guide B30.

  An opening B18 is provided on the left side of the hopper B1 shown in FIG. Also, the sand feeding conveyor B19 is moved so that the sand feeding belt B19b is directed from outside the hopper B1 into the first chamber B1a of the hopper B1 and the leading end in the conveyance direction is located above the endless belt B22 with comb teeth. It is arranged. In this modified example, as a sand charging conveyor B19, a sand charging front pulley B19a disposed above the sand radiating device B2, a sand charging rear pulley (not shown) disposed outside the hopper B1, and a sand charging conveyor B19. A belt conveyor constituted by a sand pulling belt B19b stretched between the front pulley B19a and the sand pulling rear pulley is provided. Further, a sand feeding conveyor driving motor (not shown) is rotatably disposed on the sand feeding front pulley B19a via a V belt (not shown) and a V pulley (not shown). By driving the sand injection conveyor drive motor, the sand injection conveyor B19 rotates in the transport direction (clockwise in FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 31, the sand charging conveyor B19 has a sand temperature measuring means B20 for measuring the temperature of the molding sand conveyed by the sand charging conveyor B19, and a molding sand whose temperature has been measured by the sand temperature measuring means B20. And a watering means B21 for watering. The sand temperature measuring means B20 and the water spraying means B21 correspond to the sand cooler 110 in the above embodiment. In the present modification, a thermocouple is provided on a sand charging conveyor B19 as a sand temperature measuring means B20. Further, as the water spraying means B21, a nozzle capable of spraying water into the casting sand in a shower shape is provided on the sand charging conveyor B19. Further, between the sand temperature measuring means B20 and the water sprinkling means B21, as shown in FIG. 31, an operation for determining the amount of water sprinkling by the water sprinkling means B21 based on the sand temperature measured by the sand temperature measuring means B20. Means B20a is connected.

  Below the sand radiating device B2 in the first chamber B1a, a mountain-shaped first sieve B3 is arranged as shown in FIG. The first sieve B3 is formed in a mesh shape, the width of the openings in the inclined direction is preferably 15 mm or more and 35 mm or less, and the width of the openings in the inclined and vertical directions is 3 mm or more and 10 mm or less. It is preferred to do so. Regarding the first sieve B3 of this modification, the width of the aperture in the inclined direction is 25 mm, and the width of the aperture in the inclined and vertical directions is 5 mm. The inclination angle Bα of the first sieve B3 with respect to the horizontal plane is preferably 45 degrees or more and 60 degrees or less. If the inclination angle Bα is smaller than 45 degrees, the foreign matter input from the sand radiating device B2 will remain on the first sieve B3, and if the inclination angle Bα is larger than 60 degrees, the foreign matter and the molding sand It passes through the first chute B5 without being sieved by the sieve B3, and is collected in the foreign matter collection container B7. In the present modification, the inclination angle Bα is 45 degrees.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the first vibrating means B4 may be provided on the first sieve B3. In this modification, the first vibrating means B4 is provided on the surface opposite to the sand radiating device B2 and on the plate member (so that the foreign matter and the molding sand injected from the sand radiating device B2 do not collide with the first vibrating means B4. (Not shown) and disposed on the first sieve B3. Further, as the first vibration means B4, various means such as an eccentric motor and an air vibration cylinder which generates vibration by a cylinder by inputting air can be used. In this modification, an eccentric motor is used as the first vibration means B4. When the first vibrating means B4 is disposed on the first sieve B3, the inclination angle Bα of the first sieve B3 is preferably from 15 degrees to 60 degrees.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the first chute B5 is disposed from two lower ends of the mountain-shaped first sieve B3 toward the foreign matter collection container B7. In this modified example, the first chute B5 has a reduced portion B5a whose width decreases downward from the lower end of the first sieve B3, and a conduit portion connected to the lower end of the reduced portion B5a and having the same width downward. B5b. The second chute B6 in the first chamber B1a is arranged below the first sieve B3 and between the pair of first chute B5, and is arranged on the first conveyor B12.

  The first front pulley B12a (the tip of the first conveyor B12) of the first conveyor B12 is surrounded by a third chute B13. An opening B13c is provided in the third chute B13, and the first belt B12c is disposed so as to pass through the opening B13c. In addition, a first discharge chute B13a and a second discharge chute B13b are provided in the lower part of the third chute B13 so as to open. The first discharge chute B13a is open toward the second conveyor B16, and the second discharge chute B13b is open toward the foreign matter collection container B17.

  As shown in FIG. 31, a turning means B14a is provided between the first discharge chute B13a and the second discharge chute B13b, and the first discharge chute is turned by the turning means B14a. A second sieve B14 located on the B13a side or the second discharge chute B13b side is provided. The second sieve B14 is formed in a mesh shape, and the size of the mesh is preferably 3 mm or more and 10 mm or less. Regarding the second sieve B14 of the present modification, the size of the aperture is 5 mm. Further, the second sieve B14 is disposed below the first front pulley B12a.

  The second vibrating means B15 may be provided on the second sieve B14. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 31, the second vibrating means B15 is disposed at the tip of a rod member B14b provided on the rotating means B14a. Further, as the second vibration means B15, various means such as an eccentric motor or an air vibration cylinder which generates vibration by a cylinder by inputting air can be used. In this modification, an eccentric motor is used as the second vibration means B15.

  Next, an example of a sand processing method using the foundry sand processing apparatus of the present modification will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings.

  The first conveyor driving motor, the sand radiating motor B25, and the sand feeding conveyor driving motor are driven. At the same time, the dust collector is operated to allow air to pass from the air introduction port B11 to the suction port B10. In addition, the sand charging conveyor B19 is unframed after casting, and further transports the molding sand from which the casting has been taken out from the previous process. Contains sand lumps formed by agglomeration of core core, iron flakes and foundry sand.

  The casting sand and the like conveyed from the previous process are constant per unit area of the sand charging conveyor B19. The temperature of the foundry sand and the like conveyed by the sand introduction conveyor B19 (unraveling sand temperature T1) is measured when the foundry sand contacts a thermocouple as the sand temperature measuring means B20. The measured unsealing sand temperature T1 is transmitted to the calculating means B20a. The specific heat of the foundry sand, the latent heat of vaporization of the water, and the temperature of the foundry sand (cooling sand temperature T2) in the second chamber B1b, which are arbitrarily set, are input to the calculating means B20a in advance. The calculating means B20a determines the amount of water to be sprayed per unit area in the sand charging conveyor B19, which is necessary for lowering the temperature of the molding sand from the unraveling sand temperature T1 to the cooling sand temperature T2, based on the specific heat of the molding sand and water. It is calculated by comparing with the latent heat of evaporation. Then, based on the calculated watering amount, the watering means B21 waters the casting sand or the like.

  The endless belt with comb teeth B22 in the sand radiating device B2 is rotating, and sprinkled molding sand or the like is charged from the sand charging conveyor B19. The foundry sand injected into the sand radiating device B2 enters between the plurality of comb teeth B22a, passes between the gate plate B27 and the endless belt with comb teeth B22, and is radiated toward the second chamber B1b. Further, the lump of sand contained in the foundry sand, which has been put into the sand radiating device B2, is pulverized by the rotating comb teeth B22a into a sand state while colliding with the gate plate B27. The light is emitted toward the second chamber B1b after passing between the toothed endless belts B22. On the other hand, the core dust, iron pieces, and the sand lumps that were not pulverized by the sand radiating device B2 contained in the foundry sand, which were put into the sand radiating device B2, are foreign matters, and the endless belt B22 with comb teeth is rotated. By colliding with the gate plate B27 while maintaining the speed, it bounces out of the surrounding chute B26 in the sand radiating device B2, and falls on the first sieve B3.

  The rotation speed of the endless belt B22 with comb teeth is preferably 2 m / s to 12 m / s. If the rotation speed of the endless belt B22 with comb teeth is lower than 2 m / s, the molding sand cannot be radiated toward the second chamber B1b. Further, if the rotation speed of the endless belt with comb teeth B22 is faster than 12 m / s, the V-belt B25a, the endless belt with comb teeth B22, the sand radiating front pulley B23, and the sand radiating rear pulley B24 are consumed more quickly, and the comb teeth B22a. Deterioration due to collision with foundry sand or foreign matter is accelerated. In the present modification, the rotation speed of the endless belt B22 with comb teeth is 7 m / s.

  The core waste and iron pieces remaining in the sand radiator B2 without falling to the first sieve B3, and the sand lumps that could not be completely crushed by the sand radiator B2 were combed with the sand radiating motor B25 stopped. It remains on the endless belt B22. The core member, the iron piece, and the sand mass that has not been completely crushed by the sand radiating device B2 can be dropped on the first sieve B3 by rotating the plate member B29 around the rotation axis B29a.

  When a core lump, an iron piece, or a sand lump that has not been completely crushed by the sand radiating device B2 bites between the lower end portion of the gate plate B27 and the comb teeth B22a, the core lump, the iron piece, or the sand radiating device B2 crushes the lump. The unremoved lump rotates the gate plate B27 while extending the spring B28 fixed to the upper end of the gate plate B27, and passes while widening the gap between the comb teeth B22a and the lower end of the gate plate B27. The light is emitted toward the two chambers B1b. The core core, iron pieces, and sand lumps that have not been completely crushed by the sand radiating device B2 are collected by the foreign matter collecting container B17 via a second sieve B14 described later.

  The foundry sand radiated from the sand radiating device B2 is stored in the second chamber B1b through the opening B9. Here, the molding sand contacts the air passing from the air introduction port B11 toward the suction port B10 between the time when the molding sand is radiated by the sand radiating device B2 and the time when the molding sand is stored in the second chamber B1b. The attached moisture evaporates and is cooled to the cooling sand temperature T2. Dust that flies when the molding sand comes into contact with air is collected by a dust collector.

  The foundry sand stored in the second chamber B1b can impart an aging effect by giving moisture. Here, aging means that bentonite, which is contained in the foundry sand as a binder and dehydrated by the heat of the molten metal at the time of casting and has a reduced binding force, is provided with moisture and stored. Means that water permeates again and the caking power is restored. In the present modification, the water given to the foundry sand is the water sprinkled by the sprinkling means B21 and the water not evaporated from the foundry sand radiated by the sand projecting device B2. When the foundry sand stored in the second chamber B1b is aged, water for maturing the foundry sand is added to the water necessary for cooling the foundry sand and sprinkled with the above-described watering means B21. Is also good. Here, it is also possible to stop the first conveyor B12 in order to extend the time for aging the foundry sand.

  The foreign matter removed from the sand radiating device B2 falls toward the first sieve B3. Of the foreign matter that has fallen on the first sieve B3, the foundry sand that has adhered to the foreign matter and passes through the first sieve B3 smaller than the opening of the first sieve B3 is stored in the second chute B6. On the other hand, foreign matter that is larger than the opening of the first sieve B3 and cannot pass through the first sieve B3 continues to fall, passes through the reduced portion B5a and the conduit portion B5b of the first chute B5, and is collected in the foreign matter collection container B7. With these configurations, the foreign matter removed from the sand radiating device B2 can be efficiently separated into the foreign matter and the molding sand adhering to the foreign matter.

  When foreign matter falls from the sand radiating device B2 toward the first sieve B3, the first sieve B3 may be vibrated by the first vibrating means B4. The amplitude and frequency of the first vibration means B4 can be changed according to the situation. Due to the vibration of the first sieve B3, clogging of the first sieve B3 can be prevented.

  The foundry sand stored in the second chute B6 is conveyed by rotating the first belt B12c in the first conveyor B12, passes between the dividing wall B8 and the first belt B12c, and passes through the second chamber B1b. Transported to The foundry sand stored in the second chamber B1b is conveyed by rotating the first belt B12c of the first conveyor B12, and is moved between the right side surface of the hopper B1 and the first belt B12c shown in FIG. After passing through the gap, it is thrown into the second sieve B14 disposed in the third chute B13.

  Of the casting sand charged into the second sieve B14, the casting sand that passes through the second sieve B14 and is smaller than the opening of the second sieve B14 passes through the first discharge chute B13a and falls onto the second conveyor B16. I do. Since the second conveyor B16 is rotating toward the post-processing device (not shown), the molding sand is transported to the post-processing device. On the other hand, foreign matter that is larger than the opening of the second sieve B14 and cannot pass through the second sieve B14 remains on the second sieve B14. The foreign matter remaining on the second sieve B14 is recovered by the foreign matter recovery container B17 through the second discharge chute B13b by rotating the second sieve B14. With such a configuration, the molding sand put on the second sieve B14 can be efficiently separated into the molding sand and the foreign matter. Here, the post-processing apparatus includes, for example, a kneading apparatus for supplying a binder such as bentonite or water to the molding sand and then kneading the molding sand.

  When the foundry sand falls from the first conveyor B12 toward the second sieve B14, the second sieve B14 may be vibrated by the second vibrating means B15. The amplitude and frequency of the second vibration means B15 can be changed according to the situation. Due to the vibration of the second sieve B14, clogging of the second sieve B14 can be prevented.

  In this modification, the first front pulley B12a may be a magnet pulley. According to this configuration, the fine iron pieces in the foundry sand conveyed by the first conveyor B12 are attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet pulley via the first belt B12c. Then, when the first belt B12c further rotates, the iron piece separates from the magnet pulley, whereby the attraction force by the magnetic force decreases, the iron piece separates from the magnet pulley, passes through the second discharge chute B13b, and is collected by the foreign matter collection container. With these configurations, fine iron pieces that cannot be separated by the first sieve B3 and the second sieve B14 can also be efficiently removed.

  In this modification, the first sieve B3 having a chevron shape is provided, but the shape of the first sieve B3 is not limited to the chevron shape. For example, you may arrange | position the 1st sieve B3 which consists of one inclined surface below the sand radiator B2. In this case, the first chute B5 is disposed from one lower end of the first sieve B3 having one inclined surface toward the foreign matter collection container B7.

  Next, the characteristics of the flow direction of the air introduced into the second chamber B1b from the air introduction port B11 by suction from the suction port B10 and the radiation direction of the molding sand radiated from the sand radiating device B2 to the second chamber B1b. Are described below.

  In this modification, as shown in FIG. 31, the suction port B10 is connected to the divided wall B8 on the upper surface of the second chamber B1b, and the air introduction port B11 is on the side opposite to the divided wall B8 in the second chamber B1b. Is connected to the Further, a sand radiating device B2 is installed in the first chamber B1a. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35, the flow direction of air (hereinafter, referred to as flowing air) introduced into the second chamber B1b from the air introduction port B11 by suction from the suction port B10 changes from the sand radiating device B2 to the second direction. The direction is opposite to the direction in which the foundry sand is radiated into the chamber B1b.

  Contact between the flowing air and the molding sand radiated from the sand radiating device B2 causes heat transfer from the molding sand radiated from the sand radiating device B2 to the flowing air. Therefore, the foundry sand radiated from the sand radiating device B2 is cooled. According to this modification, since the flowing air and the molding sand radiated from the sand radiating device B2 are in contact with each other while facing each other, the heat transfer from the molding sand radiated from the sand radiating device B2 to the flowing air is performed. It will be efficient.

  In this modification, the dust collector is connected to the suction port B10 and sucks the air introduced from the air inlet port B11 into the second chamber B1b. Therefore, the flow speed of the flowing air is higher than in the case where the dust collector is not connected to the suction port B10. In other words, the frequency of discharging the air in the second chamber B1b warmed by the contact with the casting sand radiated from the sand radiating device B2 from the suction port B10 increases, and the room temperature air outside the second chamber B1b is removed by the air. The frequency of taking in the second chamber B1b from the inlet B11 increases. Therefore, the temperature of the air and the flowing air in the second chamber B1b can always be kept near the temperature outside the second chamber B1b. Since the temperature of the air and flowing air in the second chamber B1b can always be kept near the temperature outside the second chamber B1b, the molding sand radiated from the sand radiating device B2 can be efficiently cooled.

  If necessary, as shown in FIG. 35, an adjustment plate B50 positioned to adjust the flow direction of the flowing air may be provided in the second chamber B1b. The adjusting direction of the flowing air is adjusted by the adjusting plate B50, so that the molding sand radiated from the sand radiating device B2 can be efficiently cooled.

  In the present modified example in which the sand processing facility is provided with the above-described casting sand processing facility, as described above, the control device of the sand processing facility performs various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, that is, sand properties and measurement time. The, for the configuration of transmitting to the control unit of the casting equipment, as the unique data corresponding to the mold sand to be molded as a pair of upper mold and lower mold, that is, a pair of matched upper molds and lower molds, that is, sand processing data. Are common to the above embodiment. Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Sixth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a sixth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The sixth modification is a modification of the casting facility 1 relating to data management across processes.
Also in the sixth modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the sixth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  The casting equipment according to the present modification includes a sand processing line for preparing molding sand to be molded (corresponding to the sand processing equipment 10 in the above embodiment), and a mold molding line for molding a mold (corresponding to the molding equipment 2 in the above embodiment). A pouring line for pouring the molten metal into the molded mold, a melt transport line for preparing the molten metal for pouring (both correspond to the pouring equipment 7 in the above embodiment), and a predetermined treatment for the produced casting. Even if only one of a post-processing line for performing weir folding (corresponding to the post-processing equipment 8 in the above-described embodiment) and an inspection line for inspecting a produced casting is included in this. It is. In addition, a combination of a plurality of lines selected from a sand processing line, a mold making line, a pouring line, a molten metal transport line, a post-processing line, and an inspection line is also included. The mold molding line also includes a cooling line for cooling a casting (product) in the mold.

  The schematic configuration of the casting facility of this modification will be described with reference to FIG. The casting facility of the present modification is a facility for producing a casting by molding a mold using molding sand (green sand in this modification) and pouring a molten metal into the molded mold. As shown in FIG. 36, the casting facility includes a sand processing line C100, and a mold molding line C200 is disposed downstream of the sand processing line C100.

  A pouring line C300 is disposed at a position adjacent to the mold making line C200, and a molten metal transport line C400 is disposed upstream of the pouring line C300. Further, a post-processing line C500 is disposed downstream of the mold making line C200, and an inspection line C600 is disposed downstream of the post-processing line C500.

  The casting facility configured as described above is configured to measure and collect a plurality of unique data in a plurality of devices constituting the casting facility for each lot, and store it in a database. In this modification, each lot refers to, for example, each mold or each product. Here, "one mold" means each upper and lower mold to be matched, and "one product" means one product. Also, in this modification, the unique data refers to data that can be measured by the device.

  In this modification, a plurality of unique data in a plurality of devices are measured and collected for each mold, and stored in a database. To illustrate this point, for example, the blanking molding machine C201 that forms a part of the mold molding line C200 measures, for example, the squeeze pressure of the upper and lower molds as the unique data. The squeeze pressure is measured by a pressure sensor as measuring means. Further, the pressure of aeration air for filling the casting flask with the casting sand is measured. The pressure of the aeration air is also measured by a pressure sensor as measuring means.

  In addition, in the molding machine upper belt feeder C202 constituting a part of the mold molding line C200, for example, compressive strength, tensile strength, shear strength, moisture content, ventilation, and the like of the molding sand on the molding machine upper belt feeder C202. Measure the degree, compactability value and sand temperature. The sand properties of these foundry sands are measured by a sand property measuring device as a measuring means adjacent to the molding machine upper belt feeder C202.

  The plurality of unique data in the plurality of devices measured and collected in this way are stored in the database C701 in the control means C700 (in this modification, the control panel, corresponding to the control device 11 in the above embodiment) for each mold. Is done. In addition, the sand processing line C100, the mold making line C200, the pouring line C300, the molten metal conveying line C400, the post-processing line C500, the inspection line C600, and the control means C700 which constitute the casting equipment are electrically connected. (The connection status is not shown.)

  In this modification, not only the above-described mold forming line C200, but also the sand processing line C100, the pouring line C300, the molten metal transfer line C400, the post-processing line C500, and the inspection line C600, as necessary, for each mold. A plurality of unique data in a plurality of devices are measured and collected, and stored in the database C701. (Specific examples are omitted)

As described above, in the present modified example, a plurality of apparatuses are provided for each mold in the sand processing line C100, the mold forming line C200, the pouring line C300, the molten metal transport line C400, the post-processing line C500, and the inspection line C600 which constitute the casting equipment. Are collected and measured and stored in the database C701. For this reason, a plurality of unique data in a plurality of devices constituting the casting facility are stored in the database C701 in association with each mold.
As already described in the above embodiment, the control unit C700 issues a unique template identification number for the template and, based on this, associates the unique data of each step as described above for each frame of the template.

  Next, an example of determining occurrence of a defect based on the unique data stored in the database C701 will be described. In this modification, the term “defective” refers to a factor that causes a defective casting. As an example of the defect, there is, for example, a “mold shift” which is a mold defect due to a shift between the upper and lower molds that have been matched. When the molten metal is poured into the misaligned upper and lower molds, a defective casting is produced in which the upper half and the lower half of the casting are misaligned.

  Here, an example will be described in which the occurrence of a type shift is determined based on the unique data stored in the database C701. FIG. 37 is a plan view showing upper and lower molds C1 and C2 intermittently conveyed by one pitch (for one mold) by conveying means (a pusher device and a cushion device) (not shown) in a frameless molding line. The transport direction of the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 is the CY axis direction, and the direction orthogonal to the transport direction of the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 is the CX axis direction. At a position adjacent to the upper and lower molds C1 and C2, a mold deviation detecting device C3 that can move up and down is provided. Reference numeral C7 denotes a support frame of the first distance measuring means C4, the second distance measuring means C5, and the third distance measuring means C6, and these three distance measuring means use laser displacement sensors in this modification.

  First, in the upper mold C1, the distance CS1 to the point C1a by the first distance measuring means C4, the distance CS2 to the point C1b by the second distance measuring means C5, and the distance CS3 to the point C1c by the third distance measuring means C6. Is measured. The measured distances CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the database C701, and the arithmetic unit C702 calculates the horizontal center position and the rotation angle of the upper mold C1.

  Next, the mold displacement detecting device C3 is lowered by a lifting cylinder (not shown). Then, in the lower mold C2, the distance CS4 to the point C2a by the first distance measuring means C4, the distance CS5 to the point C2b by the second distance measuring means C5, and the distance CS6 to the point C2c by the third distance measuring means C6. Is measured. This measurement is performed while the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 are stopped by intermittent conveyance. The measured distances CS4, CS5, and CS6 are stored in the database C701, and the arithmetic unit C702 calculates the horizontal center position and the rotation angle of the lower mold C2.

  The calculating unit C702 calculates the position coordinates of the four corners of the rectangle from the center positions and the rotation angles of the upper mold C1 and the lower mold C2. Then, the distance between the horizontal coordinates of the four opposing corners of the upper mold C1 and the lower mold C2 is calculated. A mold shift is determined based on the distance between the horizontal coordinates of the four opposing corners of the upper mold C1 and the lower mold C2 calculated by the calculating means C702. In this modification, the allowable range of the horizontal coordinate distance is 0.5 mm or less, and in this case, the allowable range is 0 to 0.5 mm. It is determined whether or not the four corners are within the allowable range to determine a mold deviation.

  This determination may be made by the calculating means C702 or by a calculating means (not shown) dedicated to the misalignment detecting device C3. In this modification, if any one of the four corners is out of the allowable range, it is determined to be a mold shift.

  When it is determined that the mold is misaligned as described above, a measure relating to the operation of the casting facility is performed to eliminate the occurrence of misalignment in the future. This example will be described. One of the causes of the misregistration is the initial speed at which the mold of the mold extruder C8 (see FIG. 38) for extruding the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 from the blanking molding machine C201 onto the surface plate carrier C10 outside the machine. Is too fast. Therefore, the setting of the initial speed of the mold extruder C8 is automatically or manually corrected so that the initial speed becomes slow. By taking such measures, the occurrence of a mold shift from the next cycle is eliminated.

  If it is determined that there is a misalignment, if the above-described measures are taken to eliminate the occurrence of misalignment from the next cycle, practically no problem occurs. However, in addition to this, it is more preferable to estimate the source of the misalignment during the operation of the casting facility. Next, a description will be given of an example in which a source of a mold shift during the operation of the casting facility is added, taking a frameless molding line as an example.

  FIG. 38 is a front view showing a part of an undermold molding line. In FIG. 38, reference numeral C8 denotes a mold extruding device provided on a base C9 of a blanking molding machine C201. Here, the configuration of the mold extruder C8 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a plan view showing a part of the undermolding molding line and showing a state where the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 are extruded.

  The mold extruder C8 includes two first cylinders C8a arranged at an interval. The intermediate member C8b is connected to the tip of the piston rod of the first cylinder C8a. A second cylinder C8c is mounted at the center of the intermediate member C8b, and a mold extruding member C8d is connected to a tip of a piston rod of the second cylinder C8c. The mold extruder C8 is configured to extrude the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 from the frame making machine C201 onto a surface plate carrier C10 outside the machine by extending and operating the first cylinder C8a and the second cylinder C8c in this order. I have.

  A first acceleration sensor C11 is mounted on the back surface of the mold extruding member C8d. The first acceleration sensor C11 is a sensor that can measure acceleration in three directions CX, CY, and CZ (see FIGS. 38 and 39). Further, a mold receiving member C12 for receiving the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 to be framed is disposed at the upper center of the base C9. The mold receiving member C12 can be moved up and down by an elevating cylinder (not shown). FIG. 38 shows a state where the blanking is completed and the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 are lowered.

  A second acceleration sensor C13 is mounted on the back surface of the mold receiving member C12. The second acceleration sensor C13 is a sensor that can measure acceleration in three directions CX, CY, and CZ. Reference numeral C14 denotes a transfer plate provided on the base C9 for extruding the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 from the mold receiving member C12 to the platen carrier C10. The upper and lower molds C1 and C2 extruded to the platen carriage C10 are placed on the platen carriage C10, and are transported by one notch (pusher device and cushion device) for one pitch (for one mold). Are transported intermittently. The platen carrier C10 runs on the rail C15.

The operation of the present example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. By the first acceleration sensor C11 in this example, to measure a first acceleration _{G 1} in the direction of extrusion (CX direction) of the upper and lower mold C1, C2 when pushing the upper and lower molds C1, C2 from mold stripping equipment molding machine C201. A threshold value _G01 is set in advance for the first acceleration, and in this modification, the threshold value _G01 is set to 2G or less (G is a gravitational acceleration).

The measured first acceleration _{G 1} was is stored in a database C701, determines whether the _{G 1} ≦ _{G 01.} That is, it is determined whether the first acceleration _{G 1} is is 2G or less. When the first acceleration G ₁ is is 2G or less, to confirm the determination result of the type shift of the type displacement detecting device C3 described above. If the result is "not shift type", the first acceleration G ₁ is and falls within the threshold, since no even mold deviation abnormality determines that there is no normal pouring on the upper and lower molds C1, C2 I do.

  If the result is "out of shape", whether to pour is automatically or manually selected. When the selection is “pour”, the finished product is precisely inspected on the inspection line C600. The inspection result of the completed product may be stored in the database C701. If the selection is “no pouring”, a command to change the molding plan so as to form one more upper and lower molds C1 and C2 is issued to the control means C700.

In addition, the second acceleration sensor C13 in this example, to measure a second acceleration _{G 2} of the upper and lower molds C1, C2 withdrawal direction (Z direction) at the time of being mold stripping equipment in mold stripping equipment molding machine C201. The threshold value _G02 is set in advance for the second acceleration, and in the present modified example, the threshold value _G02 is set to 2G or less.

Second acceleration _{G 2} which is measured are stored in a database C701, determines whether the _{G 2} ≦ _{G 02.} That is, it is determined whether the second acceleration _{G 2} is 2G or less. When the second acceleration _{G 2} is 2G or less, the first threshold value _{G 01} of the acceleration _{G 1,} and to reset the second threshold value _{G 02} of the acceleration _{G 2.} Specifically, a numerical value obtained by subtracting the threshold _{G 01} 0.1 the current and new threshold _{G 01.} Threshold _{G 02} similarly to the numerical value obtained by subtracting 0.1 from the threshold _{G 02} the current and new threshold _{G 02.}

The reason for resetting will be described. In this case, as seen from above, to the first acceleration G ₁ and the second acceleration G ₂ measured is accommodated in the threshold G ₀₁ and the threshold value G _02, in the state "is shifted type". In such a state, the setting of the numerical values of the threshold value _G01 and the threshold value _G02 may not be good. Thus, each threshold _{G 01} and the threshold _{G 02} the current is subjected to slight narrowing treatment, to optimize the threshold _{G 01} and the threshold _{G 02.}

Also, if the second acceleration G ₂ exceeds 2G, there is a possibility that is casting a vertical mold C1, C2 on the mold receiving member C12 in the mold stripping equipment in mold stripping equipment molding machine C201. Therefore, the following measures are taken. FIG. 41 is a partial schematic diagram for explaining the blanking operation. In FIG. 41, below the upper and lower molds C1 and C2, a mold receiving member C12 which is moved up and down by a first elevating cylinder C16 is disposed, and above the mold receiving plate C18 which is moved up and down by a second elevating cylinder C17. It is arranged. Reference numeral C19 is an upper flask, and reference numeral C20 is a lower flask.

  When the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 are dropped on the mold receiving member C12 when the frame is removed, as shown in FIG. The lower surface of the extruding plate C18 contacts the upper surface of the upper mold C1 to extrude the upper and lower molds C1, C2. In this case, the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 fall by the gap between the upper surface of the mold receiving member C12 and the lower surface of the lower mold C2.

  In order to eliminate this state, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), after the upper surface of the mold receiving member C12 is securely in contact with the lower surface of the lower mold C2, the lower surface of the mold extruding plate C18 is brought into contact with the upper surface of the upper mold C1. The operation timing of the second lifting cylinder C17 and the first lifting cylinder C16 is automatically or manually corrected so that the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 are pushed out. That is, the frame removal operation is adjusted. Such a treatment is performed.

  After the treatment is performed, the number is counted automatically or manually. If this procedure is repeated many times, the count is incremented by one every time the procedure is performed.

  In this example, the threshold value of the number of times (number of times) of this treatment is set to three times. Note that the set number of times of three is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. The set number can be set to an arbitrary number.

Until the count is two, the operation of the equipment is continued, that is, the cycle is continued. If the count is more than three times, the threshold value G ₀₁ of the first acceleration G ₁ is review whether it is appropriate. Specifically, a numerical value obtained by subtracting the threshold _{G 01} 0.1 the current and new threshold _{G 01.}

The reason will be described. In this case, it is a state in which the correction of the operation timing of the second lifting cylinder C17 and the first lifting cylinder C16 has been attempted three times while the state of "mold misalignment" continues. In such a state, it can be estimated that the cause of the misalignment is not on the side where the second acceleration sensor C13 is mounted, but on the side where the first acceleration sensor C11 is mounted. In this case, it is also conceivable that the first place is the setting of the first acceleration G ₁ threshold G ₀₁ that do not too wide. Therefore, applying a slight narrowing treat threshold G ₀₁ is.

  When the count number becomes three or more, the count number is reset once here.

Then, when the first acceleration G ₁ is to determine whether it is 2G or less, the case where the first acceleration G ₁ is exceeded 2G. If the first acceleration G ₁ is exceeded 2G, confirms the determination result of the type shift of the type displacement detecting device C3 described above. The result is "no shift type" case, resets the first threshold value G ₀₁ of the acceleration G _1. Even if the first acceleration G ₁ is longer than the 2G, from a state where no displacement type, is reset in a direction to widen the threshold G ₀₁ slightly. That is, I'll just spread the first permissible range of the acceleration G _1. Specifically, a value obtained by adding 0.1 to the current threshold value _G01 is set as a new threshold value _G01 .

Then, the number of times that the threshold value _G01 is reset (corrected) is counted automatically or manually. If this resetting is repeated many times, the count is incremented by one each time the resetting is performed. For example, the threshold value _{G 01} 2.1G, successively spread as 2.2G, when it becomes 2.3G, If it has a state that is shifted type, the appropriate value of the threshold _{G 01} is 2.2G It can be said that: Thus, thereby to optimize threshold G _01.

  In this example, the threshold value of the reset count (number of times) is set to three times. Note that the set number of times of three is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. The set number can be set to an arbitrary number.

Until the count number reaches 2, the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 are poured as usual. If the count is more than three times, the threshold value G ₀₂ of the second acceleration G ₂ is review whether it is appropriate. Specifically, a value obtained by adding 0.1 to the current threshold value _G02 is set as a new threshold value _G02 .

The reason will be described. In this case, the threshold _G01 is increased by 0.1 three times three times while the state of "no misalignment" continues. When like this situation, it is necessary threshold G ₀₂ of the second acceleration G ₂ be broadened slightly to balance the threshold G _01. Therefore, applying a slight widening treatment threshold G ₀₂ is.

  When the count number becomes three or more, the count number is reset once here. Even when the count number becomes three or more, the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 are poured as usual.

  Also, when checking the result of determining the type shift in the type shift detecting device C3 described above, if the result is “type shift”, as described above, the initial speed of the mold extruding device C8 is reduced, The setting of the initial speed is automatically or manually corrected.

  Then, whether or not to pour is automatically or manually selected. When the selection is “pour”, the finished product is precisely inspected on the inspection line C600. The inspection result of the completed product may be stored in the database C701. If the selection is “no pouring”, a command to change the molding plan so as to form one more upper and lower molds C1 and C2 is issued to the control means C700.

Considering based on the description of the present example described above, for example, despite the first acceleration G ₁ is that falls within the threshold G _01, the mold misalignment of the determination is "are shifted type" case, the type displacement of It can be estimated that the source is the side on which the second acceleration sensor C13 is mounted. That is, it can be estimated that there is a high possibility that the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 are dropped on the mold receiving member C12 when the frame is removed.

In this example, as described above, the first acceleration G in the extrusion direction (CX direction) of the upper and lower molds C1, C2 when the upper and lower molds C1, C2 are extruded from the blanking machine C201 by the first acceleration sensor C11. ₁ is measured. In addition, the first acceleration sensor C11 may measure the vertical acceleration (CZ direction) of the upper and lower molds C1, C2.

  The acceleration in the CZ direction is measured in order to detect vibration of the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 due to molding sand (adhered sand), foreign matter, and the like on the platen carrier C10. That is, the vibration of the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 is detected as acceleration. A threshold value is set in advance for the acceleration in the Z direction, and in this modification, the threshold value is set to 0.5 G or less.

  The measured acceleration in the CZ direction is stored in the database C701. When the measured acceleration in the CZ direction exceeds the threshold value, that is, 0.5 G, it is conceivable that, for example, foundry sand, foreign matter, or the like has adhered to the surface plate carrier C10. In this case, for example, an inspection instruction screen for prompting confirmation and cleaning on the surface plate carrier C10 is displayed on a display panel (not shown) to urge the operator to perform the inspection. In addition, in the case where the blanking mold forming line includes a surface plate carrier cleaning device, the degree of contact (contact allowance) between the upper surface of the surface plate carrier C10 and a cleaning member (for example, a scraper, a brush, or the like) is automatically or manually corrected. .

  As described above, when the vertical acceleration of the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 is measured by the first acceleration sensor C11, it is possible to estimate that molding sand, foreign matter, and the like are attached to the surface plate carrier C10, There is an advantage that a more advanced defect countermeasure can be realized.

  In this modification, various thresholds are shown, but the thresholds may be an allowable range having a predetermined range. Further, the numerical values of the various thresholds described above are merely examples, and are not limited to the numerical values described above. Numerical values of various thresholds can be set arbitrarily.

  In this modification, the step of determining the occurrence of a defect includes the step of determining whether the unique data is outside a preset threshold or outside a permissible range. More specifically, the step of determining the misalignment between the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 includes a step of determining whether or not the distance between the horizontal coordinates of the four opposing corners of the upper mold C1 and the lower mold C2 is out of an allowable range. I have. According to this configuration, there is an advantage that the occurrence of a defect can be reliably determined based on numerical data, not an abstract determination.

  In this modification, a plurality of unique data in a plurality of devices constituting the casting facility are measured and collected for each lot, and stored in the database C701. According to this configuration, there is an advantage that the traceability of the produced product can be secured.

  Further, the present modified example has a step of estimating the source of the defect during the operation of the casting facility. According to this configuration, not only is it possible to determine the occurrence of a defect, and to take measures relating to the operation of the casting facility in order to eliminate the occurrence of the failure, but also to perform the failure without stopping the facility during the operation of the casting facility. It is possible to estimate the source of the occurrence, so that there is an advantage that it is less necessary to take unnecessary measures against a defective portion at the wrong place, and the productivity is improved.

Further, in the present modification, the step of estimating the source of the misregistration during the operation of the casting facility includes the step of extruding the upper and lower molds C1, C2 when the upper and lower molds C1, C2 are extruded from the blanking molding machine C201. a step of measuring the acceleration _{G 01} of the first acceleration sensor C11, measures the vertical mold C1, second acceleration _{G 02} in the direction extracting the C2 as it is mold stripping equipment in mold stripping equipment molding machine C201 by the second acceleration sensor C13 And a process. According to this configuration, the state of the device or the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 at the location can be grasped by measuring the acceleration at the location that is likely to be the source of the misalignment. There is an advantage that a closer response can be taken.

Furthermore, in the present modification, the first acceleration G ₀₁ and the second acceleration G ₀₂ are set in advance with a threshold or an allowable range, and the threshold or the allowable range is changed (re-set) during the operation of the casting equipment. ing. According to this configuration, there is an advantage that the threshold or the allowable range can be optimized during the operation of the casting facility.

  Further, in the present modification, the first acceleration sensor C11 mounted on the mold extruding member C8d of the mold extruding device C8 for extruding the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 outside the blanking machine C201, and the blanking in the blanking machine C201. A second acceleration sensor C13 mounted on a mold receiving member C12 that receives the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 when the operation is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to measure the acceleration of a location that is likely to be a source of a mold shift, and to grasp the state of the device or the upper and lower molds C1 and C2 at the location. Has the advantage that a closer response can be taken.

  In this modification, a plurality of unique data in a plurality of devices constituting the casting facility are measured and collected, and stored in the database C701, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least one specific data in at least one device constituting the casting facility may be measured and stored in the database C701. Further, the occurrence of at least one defect may be determined based on the stored unique data.

  Further, in the present modified example, the example in which the mold making line C200 is a frameless mold making line is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. This modification can also be applied to a case where the mold making line C200 is a framed mold making line.

  Further, in the present variation, in the misregistration detection by the misregistration detecting device C3, the deviation of the distance between the horizontal coordinates of the four opposing corners of the upper mold C1 and the lower mold C2 is within an allowable range. Is determined to be misaligned, the invention is not limited to this. For example, when two, three, or all four deviations exceed the allowable range, it may be determined that there is a type deviation. Alternatively, when the average value of the shifts at the four corners, the average sum of squares, and the like exceed the allowable range, it may be determined that there is a type shift. Alternatively, the mold displacement may be determined using the displacement of the center position and the displacement of the rotation angle of the upper mold C1 and the lower mold C2.

  In this modification, the operation of the casting equipment includes not only the automatic operation of the equipment in the casting equipment, but also the manual operation of the equipment by an operator, the maintenance work or adjustment work of the equipment by the operator, and the like. It is. In addition, the operating method and operating device of the casting facility can be said to be, in other words, a managing method and a managing apparatus of the casting facility.

Also in the casting facility of the present modification as described above, the control device of the facility corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting facility, as described above, measures the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, It is the same as the above embodiment in that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the paired upper mold and lower mold that have been matched. Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Seventh Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a seventh modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The seventh modification is a modification of the casting equipment 1 mainly related to the molding equipment 2 and the primary cooling and transporting device 5 of the cooling and transporting equipment 4. More specifically, the seventh modified example realizes in more detail the configuration of the casting facility 1 in the above-described embodiment, particularly the configuration around the molding facility 2 and the primary cooling and conveying device 5, and the configuration of other parts. Is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the seventh modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the seventh modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data of one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  In each of the drawings of this modification, the same or corresponding devices are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description will be omitted. First, the frame forming line D100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42, 43, and 44.

  FIG. 42 is a partial front view of the blanking molding line D100, and FIG. 43 is a partial plan view. FIG. 44 is a plan view showing the entire frameless molding line D100, and arrows indicate the moving directions of the upper and lower molds D1 and D2. The blanking molding line D100 includes a blanking molding machine D200 (corresponding to the molding equipment 2 in the above-described embodiment) that molds and sends the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 molded using the casting sand D290, and the upper and lower molds D1 and D2. A transport means (corresponding to the primary cooling transport device 5 in the above embodiment) D300, a jacket covering the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 to prevent mold displacement during transport, and a jacket and a weight transfer device for placing a weight thereon It includes D400 (corresponding to the weight transfer device 58 in the above embodiment) and a mold balancing device D500 (corresponding to the mold releasing device 65 in the above embodiment) for separating the cooled and solidified casting from the upper and lower molds D1 and D2.

  The conveying means D300 places the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 sent from the blanking molding machine D200 on a surface plate carrier D310 (see FIGS. 50 and 51), and further moves to a place where the molten metal is poured from the pouring machine D800. The poured upper and lower molds D1, D2 are conveyed to the mold balancing device D500 while being cooled, and the grooves and the upper surface of the platen carrier D310 are cleaned by the scraper D330 and the cleaning means D360, and are returned to the position of the frame making machine D200. Have a route. A straight route is laid in parallel on the transport route. FIG. 44 shows a transport route that makes one round trip, but may have a transport route that makes two or more round trips. In the straight route, the platen truck D310 is intermittently transported by one pitch (for one mold) by the pushers D390 and the cushions D391 installed at both ends. At the end of the straight route, the trolley D310 is transferred onto the adjacent straight route by the traverser D392.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the blanking molding line D100 is formed by the blanking molding machine D200, and the upper and lower molds D1 and D2, which have been matched, are moved from the mold receiving plate D210 of the blanking molding machine D200 to the upper and lower molds. And a mold extruding cylinder D120 for extruding the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 from the mold receiving plate D210 to the conveying means D300 via the mold receiving plate D110 to the conveying means D300. .

  The height of the upper surface of the mold transfer plate D110 is substantially the same as the upper surface of the mold receiver plate D210 and the upper surface of the transport means D300 (in this modification, the upper surface of the platen carrier D310 {see FIGS. 50 and 51} as described later). It is a flat plate installed between the mold receiving plate D210 and the conveying means D300 so that The upper surface is smooth so that the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are easily extruded. Note that the upper and lower molds D1, D2 may be directly extruded from the mold receiving plate D210 onto the surface plate carrier D310 without the mold receiving plate D110. Since the blanking molding line D100 is described as including the mold delivery plate D110, when the mold delivery plate D110 is not provided, the mold delivery plate D210 and the mold delivery plate D110 and between the mold delivery plate D110 and the platen carrier D310 are provided. The description of the interval between the above will be appropriately read as the description between the mold receiving plate D210 and the surface plate carrier D310.

  The mold extrusion cylinder D120 is shown in a contracted state in FIG. 42 and in an extended state in FIG. The expansion and contraction of the mold extrusion cylinder D120 may be of a fluid pressure type (pneumatic pressure, liquid pressure), a mechanical type, or an electric type. In this modification, a fluid pressure (hydraulic) type is used. The mold extrusion cylinder D120 is provided with mold extrusion cylinder waveform measuring means D126 for measuring the waveform of the fluid pressure driving the cylinder. The mold extrusion cylinder waveform measuring means D126 may be a known pressure gauge. When the expansion and contraction of the mold extrusion cylinder D120 is an electric type, the mold extrusion cylinder waveform measuring means D126 is an ammeter for measuring a current waveform. In the vicinity of the mold extrusion cylinder D120, an encoder D130 for measuring the length of the extended cylinder is installed. The encoder D130 can calculate how far the upper and lower molds D1, D2 are pushed by the mold extrusion cylinder D120, that is, the positions of the upper and lower molds D1, D2.

  An extrusion plate D122 for pressing the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 is provided at the tip of the mold extrusion cylinder D120. The extrusion plate D122 has substantially the same width (the DY direction in FIG. 43) as the width of the upper and lower molds D1 and D2, and prevents local force from acting on the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 from the mold extrusion cylinder D120. It enhances the contact with the upper and lower molds D1 and D2. The extrusion plate D122 is provided with a plurality of two-dimensional laser displacement meters D124 in the width direction. In FIG. 43, four two-dimensional laser displacement gauges D124 are shown, but the number is not limited to four, and they are arranged so as to enable measurement in the full width direction of the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold receiving plate D110. The two-dimensional laser displacement meter D124 measures the size (area, height) of the deposit on the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold receiving plate D110, and measures the level difference between the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold receiving plate D110. Measure. The size of the deposit on the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold receiving plate D110 is measured when the mold extruding cylinder D120 is extended to extrude the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 onto the platen carrier D310. The measurement is preferably performed twice when the mold extrusion cylinder D120 contracts after being extruded onto the surface plate carrier D310. That is, the two-dimensional laser displacement meter D124 functions as a mold receiving plate attached matter measuring unit, a mold receiving plate attached matter measuring unit, or a mold receiving plate / mold passing plate level difference measuring unit. It should be noted that separate measuring devices, for example, a laser displacement meter, may be used for the mold receiving plate attached matter measuring means, the mold receiving plate attached matter measuring means, and the mold receiving plate / mold receiving plate level difference measuring means. As the two-dimensional laser displacement meter D124, LJ-V7300 manufactured by Keyence Corporation (Japan) is preferably used. Further, a three-dimensional acceleration sensor D128 is provided on or near the back surface of the extrusion plate D122 (the surface opposite to the surface from which the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are extruded). Since the extruded plate D122 has high contact with the upper and lower molds D1 and D2, for example, if there is an adhering substance on the mold receiving plate D210 or the mold transfer plate D110, the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 which are extruded thereon receive an impact when moving. . Since the impact at that time is transmitted to the extruding plate D122, the impact can be measured by the three-dimensional acceleration sensor D128. That is, the three-dimensional acceleration sensor D128 functions as a pushing plate impact measurement unit. Here, measuring the shock means that the three-dimensional acceleration sensor D128 that has received the shock measures the direction of the shock, that is, the acceleration in the moving direction (DX direction) and the vertical direction (DZ direction). In addition, the acceleration in the lateral direction (DY direction) may be measured as an impact. In this modification, the term “shock” includes vibration. Vibration can also be measured by measuring acceleration.

  In order to measure a step between the mold delivery plate D110 and the conveying means D300, a laser displacement gauge D140 is installed above both of them. In FIG. 42, two laser displacement gauges D140 are installed, and the height of the upper surface of the mold transfer plate D110 and the height of the upper surface of the conveying means D300 are measured, and the level difference is measured from each height. I have. However, the level difference may be measured by one laser displacement meter D140.

  A blow device D160 is installed along the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold receiving plate D110. The blow device D160 is provided with a plurality of air nozzles D162 so as to remove attached matter on the upper surfaces of the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold receiving plate D110 by air blowing. 42 and 43, three air nozzles D162 are shown. However, a plurality of air nozzles D162 are provided so that air can be blown onto the entire upper surfaces of the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold delivery plate D110 to remove attached matter. The blow device D160 has a pressurized air source (not shown) such as a compressor for supplying pressurized air, but a known structure may be used, and thus a description thereof will be omitted. Further, one air nozzle D162 may be provided.

  With reference to FIG. 45, a description will be given of the temperature measurement of the molding sand (also referred to as “molding sand”) D290 supplied to the blanking molding machine D200. The foundry sand D290 is transported from a sand storage device (not shown) or the like by a conveyor D280, and is supplied to a blanking molding machine D200. A part of the foundry sand D290 conveyed by the conveyor D280 is collected by the sand cutting device D272. The sand cutting device D272 has a screw inside the cylindrical body, cuts out the molding sand D290 on the conveyor with a rotating screw, and supplies the sand D290 to the automatic sand property measuring device D270. The sand property automatic measuring device D270 measures the temperature and other properties of the supplied foundry sand D290. The temperature of the molding sand D290 may be measured directly by, for example, the temperature of the molding sand D290 in the molding machine D200, or may be measured by another method.

  The blank frame molding machine D200 includes an upper frame D250 (see FIG. 49), a match plate (not shown) and an upper squeeze board (not shown), and a lower frame D240 (see FIG. 49), a match plate (not shown) and a lower plate. The casting sand D290 is introduced into the upper mold space and the lower mold space surrounded by the squeeze board D220 (see FIGS. 46 and 47), and squeezed by the upper and lower squeeze boards to form the upper and lower molds D1 and D2.

  As shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, in order to measure the attached matter on the surface of the lower squeeze board D220, the blanking molding machine D200 uses a two-dimensional laser displacement meter D226 (for example, Keyence) as a lower squeezed board attached matter measuring means. LJ-V7300). The two-dimensional laser displacement meter D226 may be provided on a device other than the blanking machine D200, for example, on a gantry near the blanking machine D200. The lower squeeze board adhering matter measuring means may be an image recognition device. Further, as shown in detail in FIG. 48, a heater D222 is provided on the back surface or inside of the lower squeeze board D220 so that the lower squeeze board D220 can be heated. The heater D222 is preferably arranged in a zigzag shape so that the entire surface of the lower squeeze board D220 can be heated. Then, a thermometer D224 is installed as a lower squeeze board temperature measuring means for measuring the temperature of the lower squeeze board D220. The thermometer D224 may be embedded in the lower squeeze board D220.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the formed upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are matched after removing the match plate, and are extruded downward from above via a mold extruding plate D232 by a mold blanking cylinder D230. D250 is removed from the lower frame D240. Note that, depending on the frame molding machine D200, the mold frame cylinder may also be used as the mold extrusion plate D232.

  The upper and lower molds D1 and D2 removed from the upper frame D250 and the lower frame D240 are received by the mold receiving plate D210. The mold receiving plate D210 can be moved up and down by a mold receiving plate cylinder D218. As shown in FIG. 49 (a), if the upper and lower molds D1, D2 are extruded through the mold extruding plate D232 by the mold blanking cylinder D230 before the mold receiving plate D210 contacts the upper and lower molds D1, D2, The molds D1 and D2 fall to the mold receiving plate D210, and an impact acts on the upper and lower molds D1 and D2, so that a mold misalignment easily occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), it is preferable that the mold receiving plate D210 contacts the upper and lower molds D1 and D2, and then the mold extruding plate D232 contacts and extrudes the upper and lower molds D1 and D2. As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, a three-dimensional acceleration sensor D212 is provided on the mold receiving plate D210, and the mold receiving plate D210 serves as a mold receiving plate impact measuring means, that is, the impact received by the upper and lower molds D1, D2. Measure the impact. The three-dimensional acceleration sensor D212 may be a known acceleration sensor. The level when the mold receiving plate D210 is lowered, that is, the level when the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are pushed out is adjusted by the stopper bolt D214 (see FIG. 42).

  With reference to FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, the upper and lower mold conveying means D300 will be described. The conveying means D300 includes a pouring machine D800 for pouring the molten metal into the upper and lower molds D1, D2 from the frame molding machine D200, and a crushing mold after the molten metal is cooled and solidified into a casting. The upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are transported to a mold balancing device D500 that separates a casting and a molding sand, or to an area (not shown) for temporarily storing. Here, the trolley D310 travels on the rail D320 by the roller D312. The upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are placed on the surface plate carrier D310 and run on the rails D320 to convey the upper and lower molds D1 and D2.

  A scraper D330 that cleans the groove and the upper surface of the trolley D310 is installed in the transport unit D300. The scraper D330 includes a groove scraper D332 configured to hold a steel plate for removing sand and the like adhered to the groove on the upper surface of the platen truck D310, and a steel plate for removing the adhered sand and the like on the upper surface of the platen truck D310. And a finishing scraper D336 for finishing cleaning by contacting the groove and the upper surface of the surface plate carrier D310. Further, a touch switch D338 is provided as a conveyance means adhesion measurement means for detecting an adhesion on the groove and the upper surface of the base plate carrier D310. When there is a protrusion (attachment) attached to the groove and upper surface of the base plate carrier D310, the touch switch D338 tilts the detection plate that has contacted the protrusion, and the tilted detection plate becomes a needle-like contact. This is a switch that detects an adhering substance upon contact. The transporter attached matter measuring means may have another known configuration as long as it can measure the protrusion attached to the groove and the upper surface of the surface plate carrier D310. Further, a laser displacement meter similar to the two-dimensional laser displacement meter D124 such as a mold receiving plate attached matter measuring unit, a mold receiving plate attached matter measuring unit, and a mold receiving plate / mold passing plate level difference measuring unit is provided. Deposits on the grooves and on the top surface may be measured.

  The groove scraper D332, the upper surface scraper D334, the finishing scraper D336, and the touch switch D338 are mounted on a scraper suspension rod D344. The scraper suspension rod D344 is suspended from a carriage D342 that slides on a rail D351 mounted on a frame beam D352 by a traversing cylinder D340. The frame beam D352 is passed between a pair of frame columns D350 installed on both sides. Therefore, by expanding and contracting the traversing cylinder D340, the groove scraper D332, the upper surface scraper D334, the finishing scraper D336, and the touch switch D338 reciprocate in the width direction of the base plate carrier D310.

  With reference to FIGS. 52 and 53, a description will be given of a cleaning unit D360 different from the scraper D330. The cleaning means D360 includes a rotating brush D370 having a plurality of brushes rotating around the rotation axis D372 to clean the grooves and the upper surface of the platen truck D310, and cleaning the grooves and the upper surface of the platen truck D310 with a soft rubber. And a rubber scraper D362. The rotating brush D370 is supported by a receiving table D386 fixed to the vertical frame D380. The rotating brush D370 is rotated via a rotating shaft D372 by a motor D374 as a rotation driving device, and the motor D374 is also supported by the vertical frame D380. A horizontal frame D382 extending in the traveling direction DY1 of the platform trolley D310 is fixed to a lower end of the vertical frame D380. On the horizontal frame D382, a rubber scraper frame D384 is fixed upward to a position downstream of the vertical frame D380 in the traveling direction DY1 of the base plate carrier D310. The rubber scraper D362 is fixed to the rubber scraper frame D384. The rotating brush D370 and the rubber scraper D362 have a length capable of cleaning substantially the entire width of the platen carrier D310. Even if there is provided a conveyer adhering matter measuring means (not shown) for detecting an adhering matter on the groove and upper surface of the platen truck D310 downstream of the rubber scraper D362 of the rubber scraper frame D384 in the traveling direction DY1 of the platen truck D310. Good. The transporter attached matter measuring means has the same structure as the touch switch D338.

  In addition, it is preferable that both the scraper D330 and the cleaning means D360 are installed in the conveying means D300 of the blanking molding line D100. When both are installed, it is preferable that the scraper D330 or the cleaning unit D360 disposed on the downstream side has a transporting unit attached matter measuring unit, but is not limited thereto. Further, as the transport unit D300, only one of the scraper D330 and the cleaning unit D360 may be provided. When only one of them is installed, the scraper D330 or the cleaning means D360 has a transporting means and a deposit measuring means. In the blanking molding line D100, as shown in FIG. 44, the cleaning means D360 is installed on the downstream side, and the scraper D330 is installed on the upstream side. The scraper D330 has a conveyance means attached matter measuring means, that is, a touch switch D338.

  54. A misregistration detecting device D3 shown in FIG. 54 is installed at a predetermined position on a blanking molding line D100. In general, the misalignment detecting device D3 is installed in a position along the upper and lower mold conveying means D300. The mold displacement detecting device D3 includes three distance measuring means D4, D5, and D6 on a lifting frame D7 extending in the transport direction of the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 (the DY direction in FIG. 54). The distance measuring means D4, D5, D6 may be a known displacement sensor such as a laser displacement sensor, an ultrasonic displacement sensor, and a contact displacement sensor. The lifting frame D7 moves up and down so that the distances measured by the three displacement sensors D4, D5, and D6 can be measured to the upper mold D1 and the lower mold D2. Therefore, the distances DS1, DS2, DS3 to the three points D1a, D1b, D1c of the upper mold D1 and the distances DS4 to the three points D2a, D2b, D2c of the lower mold D2 are determined by the three displacement sensors D4, D5, D6. , DS5 and DS6 can be measured. Here, since the coordinates of the three displacement sensors D4, D5, D6 are known, the coordinates of three points of the upper mold D1 and the coordinates of three points of the lower mold D2 are obtained. Since the shapes of the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are known, when the coordinates of three points are obtained, the center position and the rotation angle in the horizontal direction can be calculated. The difference between the calculated center position and the horizontal rotation angle or the difference between the coordinates of the corners of the upper mold D1 and the lower mold D2 calculated from the center position and the horizontal rotation angle is used to determine the types of the upper and lower molds D1 and D2. The deviation can be determined. The mold displacement detection device D3 may include three displacement sensors for the upper mold and three displacement sensors for the lower mold, or may include an arbitrary number of displacement sensors and perform misalignment of the upper and lower molds D1 and D2. May be determined. The invention is not limited to the above, and may have another configuration.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the frame making line D100 includes a control device D700. The control device D700 controls the operation of the blanking molding line D100. The control device D700 may also be used as a control device for controlling the operation of the frame making machine D200 or the conveying means D300, may be a dedicated control device, or may be a personal computer. The control device is an unillustrated wiring or wireless communication, and uses a lifting frame D7, a mold extrusion cylinder D120, a blow device D160, a frame forming machine D200 (an upper squeeze board, a lower squeeze board D220, a heater D222, an automatic sand property measuring device D270, etc. ), And controls the operation of the upper and lower mold conveying means D300, the scraper D330, the cleaning means D360, and the like. Further, distance measuring means D4, D5, D6, two-dimensional laser displacement sensor (mold receiving plate attached matter measuring means, mold passing plate attached matter measuring means, mold receiving plate / mold passing plate level difference measuring means) D124, mold extruding cylinder waveform measuring means D126, extruded plate impact measuring means D128, mold delivery plate / transporting means level difference measuring means D140, mold receiving plate impact measuring means D212, lower squeezed board temperature measuring means D224, lower squeezed board attached matter measuring means D226, sand temperature measuring means D270, measurement data from the conveyance means attached matter measurement means D338 and the like are received, compared with an allowable range as necessary, and an adjustment step or a prevention step described later is performed. The determination of the measured unique data will be described using the “permissible range”, but a threshold value that is a boundary value of the permissible range may be used.

  Next, the operation of the frame making line D100 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 44, in the blanking molding line D100, upper and lower molds D1 and D2 formed and matched by the blanking molding machine D200 are transported by the transport unit D300. The upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are pushed by the mold pushing cylinder D120, and are placed on the platen carrier D310 of the conveying means D300 from the mold receiving plate D210 of the blanking molding machine D200 via the mold receiving plate D110. The platen truck on which the upper and lower casting molds D1 and D2 are placed is intermittently transported by a pitch by a pusher D390, a cushion D391 and a traverser D392, and sequentially transports the upper and lower molds D1 and D2. For the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 conveyed by the conveying means D300, first, the mold deviation of the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 is detected by the mold deviation detecting device D3. Next, the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are covered with the jacket and the weight is placed by the jacket and weight transfer device D400. Next, molten metal is poured from pouring machine D800. The poured upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are transported over a long distance on the transporting means D300 with time, and the molten metal is cooled and solidified. The weights and the jacket are removed from the upper and lower molds D1 and D2, which are formed by cooling and solidifying the molten metal, by the jacket and weight transfer device D400, and thereafter, the mold is disintegrated by the mold disintegration device D500. That is, the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are crushed and the casting is taken out. The molding sand generated by crushing the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 is supplied to a blanking molding machine D200 via a sand recovery device (not shown), a kneading machine (not shown) and the like. The platen truck D310 from which the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 have been removed by the mold disperser D500, the attached sand and the like adhered to the grooves and the upper surface thereof are removed by the scraper D330 and the cleaning means D360. Receiving the molds D1 and D2.

  FIG. 55 to FIG. 63 are flowcharts of an operation of optimizing the allowable range of the unique data while removing the cause of the misalignment as the adjustment process. In addition, one flow diagram is divided into nine sheets in FIGS. 55 to 63, and connection points are indicated by circles DA to DO. The portion shown in FIGS. 55 to 57 is a flow in the case where the result of the determination by the misregistration detecting device D3 is no misregistration. First, in Step D1, the allowable range of the size deviation (corner point deviation) of the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 is set to, for example, 0.5 mm or less, and it is determined whether or not the corner point deviation is within the allowable range.

  The determination of the mold displacement can be performed as follows. In the upper mold D1, the first distance measuring means D4 measures the distance DS1 to the point D1a, the second distance measuring means D5 measures the distance DS2 to the point D1b, and the third distance measuring means D6 measures the distance DS3 to the point D1c. I do. The horizontal center position and rotation angle of the upper mold D1 are calculated from the measured distances DS1, DS2, DS3.

  Next, the mold displacement detecting device D3 is lowered by a lifting cylinder (not shown). Thereafter, in the lower mold D2, the distance DS4 to the point D2a by the first distance measuring means D4, the distance DS5 to the point D2b by the second distance measuring means D5, and the distance DS6 to the point D2c by the third distance measuring means D6. Is measured. This measurement is performed while the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are stopped by intermittent conveyance. From the measured distances DS4, DS5, DS6, the horizontal center position and rotation angle of the lower mold D2 are calculated.

  Next, the position coordinates of the four corners of the rectangle are calculated from the center positions and the rotation angles of the upper mold D1 and the lower mold D2. Then, a distance between horizontal coordinates of four opposing corners of the upper mold D1 and the lower mold D2 is calculated. In this modification, the allowable range of the horizontal coordinate distance is 0.5 mm or less, and in this case, the allowable range is 0 to 0.5 mm. It is determined whether or not the four corners are within the allowable range to determine a mold deviation. In this modification, if any one of the four corners is out of the allowable range, it is determined to be a mold shift. However, for example, when two, three, or all four deviations exceed the allowable range, it may be determined that there is a type deviation. Alternatively, when the average value of the shifts at the four corners, the average sum of squares, and the like exceed the allowable range, it may be determined that there is a type shift. Alternatively, the mold displacement may be determined using the displacement of the center position and the displacement of the rotation angle of the upper mold D1 and the lower mold D2.

For the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 determined to have no mold displacement, in Step D11, the size of the adhered substance of the mold receiving plate D210 through which the molds D1 and D2 passed was measured for the adhered substance of the mold receiving plate attached to the extruded plate D122. The result measured by the two-dimensional laser displacement meter D124 as a means, that is, the size (area, height) of the attached matter as unique data is compared with an allowable range. For example, initially, the allowable range is 25 mm ² or less in area and 5 mm or less in height. If the measured result is within the allowable range, the process directly proceeds to the next Step D12 (below the flowchart). In the present modification, in determining the size of the deposit, when both the area and the height are within the allowable range, it is determined that the size of the deposit is within the allowable range. Not done. When the measured result is out of the allowable range, air is blown from the blow device D160 to remove the deposit on the mold receiving plate D210. Then, when the mold extruding cylinder D120 is returned (burr, shrinkage of the cylinder), the amount of deposits on the mold receiving plate D210 is measured. If the deposit remains even after returning (when the measurement result is out of the allowable range), the worker is notified using a panel, an indicator lamp, or the like. That is, since the attached matter cannot be cleaned only by the air blow, the cleaning of the mold receiving plate D210 by the operator is requested. Then, the process proceeds to Step D12.

In the next Step D12, the size of the deposit on the mold delivery plate D110, through which the molds D1 and D2 passed, was measured by a two-dimensional laser displacement meter D124, which is a mold delivery plate attachment measurement unit attached to the extrusion plate D122. That is, the size (area, height) of the attached matter as the unique data is compared with the allowable range. For example, initially, the allowable range is 25 mm ² or less in area and 5 mm or less in height. If the measured result is within the allowable range, the process directly proceeds to the next Step D13 (below the flowchart). If the measured result is out of the allowable range, air is blown from the blowing device D160 to remove the deposit on the mold delivery plate D110. Then, when the mold extruding cylinder D120 is returned (burr; contraction of the cylinder), the amount of the deposit on the mold delivery plate D110 is measured. If the deposit remains even after returning (when the measurement result is out of the allowable range), the worker is notified using a panel, an indicator lamp, or the like. That is, since the attached matter cannot be cleaned only by the air blow, the cleaning of the mold delivery plate D110 by the operator is requested. Then, the process proceeds to Step D13.

  In the next Step D13, the result of measuring the attached matter on the base trolley D310 by the touch switch D338, which is a means for measuring the attached matter of the transporter of the scraper D330, that is, the presence or absence of the attached matter as unique data is determined. If there is no extraneous matter (when the touch switch D338 is off), the process proceeds to the next Step D14 (below the flowchart). When there is an attached matter (when the touch switch D338 is on), the attached matter remains without being removed even after cleaning with the scraper D330 or the cleaning means D360. To the operator, and requests the operator to clean the trolley D310. The presence or absence of the attached matter may be determined by recognizing the upper surface of the trolley D310 after cleaning.

  If there is any extraneous matter, it is further determined whether or not the elapsed time from the completion of the pouring to the mold dispersion is within the range of the normal cooling time. The deposit, that is, foundry sand, hardens and hardens over time. However, if it is within the range of the normal cooling time, it should be able to be removed by the scraper D330 and the cleaning means D360. Therefore, if the attached matter cannot be removed within the normal cooling time, deterioration of the scraper D330 and the cleaning means D360 is assumed. For example, when the accumulated amount or the number of times that the deposits cannot be removed within the normal cooling time range exceeds five times in total or continuously, work is performed on the panel and the indicator light to check the wear state of the scraper D330 and the cleaning means D360. Notify others. If the elapsed time from the completion of the pouring to the dispersion of the mold is not within the range of the normal cooling time, for example, if it is left from the closing time to the starting time, there is a high possibility that the deposits are also solidified. Change the operation settings of. Although the scraper D330 has been described here, the rotation speed of the rotating brush D370 may be increased by the cleaning unit D360, or the speed at which the platen truck D310 passes through the cleaning unit D360 may be reduced. Then, the process proceeds to Step D14.

In the next Step D14, the size of the deposit on the lower squeeze board D220 was measured by the lower squeeze board deposit measuring means D226, that is, the size (area, height) of the deposit as unique data was compared with the allowable range. I do. For example, initially, the allowable range is 25 mm ² or less in area and 5 mm or less in height. If the measured result is within the allowable range, the process directly proceeds to the next Step D15 (below the flowchart). If the measured result is out of the allowable range, the operator is notified using a panel, an indicator lamp, or the like, and requests the operator to clean the lower squeeze board D220.

  When the measured result is out of the allowable range, it is the temperature difference between the temperature measured by the thermometer D224 of the lower squeeze board D220 and the temperature of the molding sand (molding sand) D290 measured by the automatic sand property measuring device D270. It is determined whether the unique data is within an allowable range. For example, the allowable range is set to 15 ° C. or less. The temperature difference between the casting sand D290 and the lower squeeze board D220 increases, which may cause dew condensation on the surface of the lower squeeze board D220, which may make it easier to adhere. Therefore, it is determined whether the temperature difference between the lower squeeze board D220 and the casting sand D290 is within an allowable range. When the temperature difference is within the allowable range, the molding sand D290 adheres to the lower squeeze board D220 even without condensation, so that the components of the molding sand D290, for example, the content of the activated clay and the fine powder are adjusted. Then, the operator is notified using a panel, an indicator light, or the like.

  If the temperature difference is outside the allowable range, it is determined whether or not the molding is interrupted until the temperature difference falls within the allowable range. When the molding is interrupted, the lower squeeze board D220 is heated by the heater D222 so that the temperature difference falls within the allowable range. When the temperature difference falls within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D15. When the lower squeeze board D220 is not heated by the heater D222 without interrupting the molding, for example, cooling air is blown to the molding sand D290 so that the temperature of the molding sand D290 becomes lower than a predetermined temperature of, for example, 30 ° C. I do. If the temperature of the casting sand D290 is equal to or lower than the predetermined temperature, the process returns to the step of determining whether the temperature difference is within the allowable range. When the lower squeeze board D220 is not heated by the heater D222 and the casting sand D290 is not cooled, work is performed using a panel, an indicator light, and the like so that the operator cleans the lower squeeze board D220 every cycle. Notify others. Then, the process proceeds to Step D15.

  In the next Step D15, the allowable range is expanded for items determined to be out of the allowable range or to be present in Step D11 to Step D14 even though they were within the allowable range in the determination of the mold shift. In other words, the fact that no misregistration occurred even if the attached matter was out of the allowable range is considered that the allowable range may not be appropriate. For example, the allowable range is increased by 10%. As described above, the feedback of the determination result of the mold deviation to the allowable range enables the optimization of the allowable range.

  In Step D15, if all the deposits are within the allowable range, nothing is performed. When Step D15 ends, the process returns to Step D1 to determine the next upper and lower molds D1 and D2.

  If it is determined in Step D1 that there is a misalignment, the process proceeds to Step D2 shown in FIG. In Step D2, although the mold is misaligned, it is determined whether or not the molten metal is poured into the upper and lower molds D1 and D2. Usually, this determination is made by an operator and input to the control device D700. The determination may be made automatically by the control device D700. In the case of pouring, it is instructed to inspect the product precisely on the inspection line. If the pouring is not performed, a molding plan change command is issued because the number of upper and lower molds D1 and D2 to be molded needs to be increased by one. Then, the process proceeds to a step of determining and removing the cause of the mold shift.

  Subsequently, Steps D31 to D36 for determining the cause of the type shift shown in FIGS. 58 to 60 are executed. In Step D31, it is determined whether the acceleration in the extrusion direction of the mold extrusion cylinder D120 measured by the extrusion plate impact measurement means D128 is within an allowable range. The acceleration measured here is the acceleration in the X direction that expands and contracts the mold extrusion cylinder D120. The allowable range is, for example, 2 G or less (G is the gravitational acceleration). Here, if the acceleration of the mold extrusion cylinder D120 is within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D32 (below the flowchart). If the acceleration of the mold extrusion cylinder D120 is out of the allowable range, the initial speed setting for driving the mold extrusion cylinder D120 is corrected. Then, the process proceeds to Step D32.

  In Step D32, it is determined whether or not the impact of the extruded plate D122 measured by the extruded plate impact measuring means D128 is within an allowable range. The impact measured here is an impact in the expansion and contraction direction (DX direction) and the vertical direction (DZ direction) of the mold extrusion cylinder D120. Since the extruded plate impact measuring means D128 used in Step D31 is a three-dimensional acceleration sensor, it can also be used for measuring impact in the DX / DZ directions. If there is an adhered substance on the mold receiving plate D210 or the mold receiving plate D110 from which the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are extruded, or the level difference between the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold receiving plate D110 or the mold receiving plate D110 and the platen carrier D310. When there is, the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 receive an impact when the attached matter or the level difference is exceeded, and the impact is transmitted to the extruded plate D122. The impact appears remarkably in the extrusion direction (DX direction) and the vertical direction (DZ direction). Therefore, the impact of the extruded plate D122 indicates that there is a possibility that there is a deposit on the mold receiving plate D210 or the mold receiving plate D110, or that there is a possibility that there is a level difference described above. Here, the allowable range of the impact is, for example, 2 G or less. If both impacts of the extruded plate D122 in the two directions DX and DZ are within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D33 (below the flowchart). If at least one of the impacts of the extruded plate D122 is out of the allowable range, the process proceeds to Steps D41 to D48 shown in FIGS. Steps D41 to D48 will be described later. The impact in the DY direction may be further measured and compared with the allowable range.

  In Step D33, it is determined whether or not the size of the deposit on the lower squeeze board D220 is within the allowable range. If the size is within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D34 (below the flowchart). The determination in Step D33 is performed in the same manner as the determination described in Step D14. If the attached matter is out of the allowable range, the same processing as that described for Step D14 is performed, and the process proceeds to Step D34.

  In Step D34, it is determined whether the waveform of the fluid pressure driving the mold extrusion cylinder D120 measured by the mold extrusion cylinder waveform measuring means D126 is within an allowable range. For example, if the fluctuation of the waveform of the fluid pressure during transport of the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 is within ± 10% of the normal state, it is within the allowable range. If it is within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D35 (below the flowchart). The upper and lower molds D1, D1 Since the resistance different from the normal state is applied to push D2, the driving fluid pressure fluctuates. Therefore, if the waveform of the fluid pressure is out of the allowable range, it is assumed that there is a deposit or a level difference at the position calculated by the encoder D130, and the operator is notified of cleaning and maintenance. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step D35. In addition, when the expansion and contraction of the mold extrusion cylinder D120 is an electric type, a waveform of a current value is used instead of a waveform of a fluid pressure. Is used.

  In Step D35, it is determined whether or not the impact value of the mold receiving plate D210 measured by the mold receiving plate impact measuring means D212 is within an allowable range. The impact measured here is an impact in the vertical direction (DZ direction). For example, an impact value of 2 G or less is defined as an allowable range. If it is within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D36 (below the flowchart). As described in FIG. 49 (a), if the upper and lower molds D1, D2 are extruded by the mold blanking cylinder D230 via the mold extruding plate D232 before the mold receiving plate D210 contacts the upper and lower molds D1, D2, The upper and lower molds D1 and D2 fall onto the mold receiving plate D210, and an impact acts on the upper and lower molds D1 and D2, so that mold misalignment easily occurs. Therefore, when the impact value of the mold receiving plate D210 is out of the allowable range, the frame removing operation is adjusted. Specifically, the mold receiving plate cylinder D218 and the mold receiving plate cylinder D218 are pressed so that the mold receiving plate D210 reliably contacts the lower mold D2 and then the mold extruding plate D232 contacts the upper mold D1 and pushes out the upper and lower molds D1, D2. Automatically or manually correct the operation timing of the blanking cylinder D230. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step D36.

  In Step D36, the encoder D130 calculates the location where the impact is detected in Step D31, Step D32 or Step D34 or the location where the fluid pressure waveform increases within the allowable range, and narrows the allowable range at that location. That is, if the location is the mold receiving plate D210, the allowable range of the size of the attached matter on the mold receiving plate D210, and if the level difference is between the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold receiving plate D110, the allowable range of the level difference therebetween. In the case of the mold delivery plate D110, the allowable range of the size of the adhered matter on the mold delivery plate D110 is reduced, and in the case of a step between the mold delivery plate D110 and the surface plate carrier D310, the allowable range of the level difference is narrowed. For example, in the case of Step D31, 2G or less is narrowed to 1.9G or less. Here, a large impact or waveform means, for example, a case where the ratio is 80% or more, or 90% or more of an allowable range. Alternatively, it may indicate a location where the ratio of the measured unique data to the allowable range is the largest. When Step D36 ends, the process returns to Step D1 to determine the next upper and lower molds D1 and D2.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, Steps D <b> 41 to D <b> 48 which are processes performed when the impact of the mold extrusion cylinder D <b> 120 in the DX / DZ directions is out of the allowable range in Step D <b> 32 will be described. In Step D41, if the size of the deposit on the lower squeeze board D220 is within the allowable range, the process proceeds to Step D42 (below the flowchart). If the size of the attached matter on the lower squeeze board D220 is out of the allowable range, the same processing as described for Step D14 is performed, and then the process proceeds to Step D42.

  In Step D42, it is determined whether or not the impact value of the mold receiving plate D210 is within the allowable range. If the impact value is within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D43 (below the flowchart). If it is out of the allowable range, the frame removal operation is adjusted, and the process proceeds to the next Step D43. In Step D42, the same processing as that of Step D35 is performed, and thus the duplicated description will be omitted.

  In Step D43, similarly to Step D11, it is determined whether or not the size of the adhered substance on the mold receiving plate D210 is within an allowable range. If it is out of the allowable range, the same processing as described for Step D11 is performed, and then the process proceeds to the next Step D44.

  In Step D44, similarly to Step D12, it is determined whether or not the size of the adhered substance on the mold delivery plate D110 is within an allowable range. If it is out of the allowable range, the same processing as that described for Step D12 is performed, and the process proceeds to the next Step D45.

  In Step D45, similarly to Step D13, it is determined whether or not there is any adhering matter on the surface plate trolley D310. If there is no adhering matter, the process proceeds to the next Step D46 (below the flowchart). If there is any extraneous matter, the same processing as that described for Step D13 is performed, and the process proceeds to the next Step D46. It is to be noted that the presence or absence of the adhering matter may be determined by recognizing the upper surface of the trolley D310 after cleaning by image recognition, similarly to Step D13.

  In Step D46, it is determined whether the level difference between the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold receiving plate D110 measured by the mold receiving plate / mold receiving plate level difference measuring means D124 is within an allowable range. The allowable range is, for example, ± 0.3 mm or less. If the level difference is within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D47 (below the flowchart). If the level difference is out of the allowable range, the worker is notified using a panel, an indicator light, or the like to adjust the level when the mold receiving plate D210 is lowered by adjusting the stopper bolt D214 of the mold receiving plate D210. I do. Alternatively, the operation and the like of the actuator D218 that moves up and down the mold receiving plate D210 may be adjusted. Note that the mold delivery plate D110 is usually fixed, and the level cannot be adjusted. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step D47. Note that, instead of measuring the level difference between the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold receiving plate D110 by the mold receiving plate / mold receiving plate level difference measuring means D124, the upper and lower molds D1, D2 are moved from the mold receiving plate D210 to the mold receiving plate D110. When extruded, the weight of the found found sand may be measured to determine whether the level difference is within an allowable range. That is, when the lower mold D2 is extruded beyond the level difference step, the lower mold D2 is shaved by the step, and a part of the molding sand falls from the gap between the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold receiving plate D110. The level difference can be determined from the weight of the casting sand collected in a container and measured with a load cell or the like.

  In Step D47, it is determined whether or not the level difference between the mold delivery plate D110 and the surface plate carrier D310 measured by the mold delivery plate / transportation unit level difference measurement unit D140 is within an allowable range. The allowable range is, for example, ± 0.3 mm or less. If the level difference is within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D48 (below the flowchart). When the level difference is out of the allowable range, the worker is notified using a panel, an indicator, or the like to adjust the height of the rail D320. The reason why the level difference between the mold delivery plate D110 and the platen carrier D310 is large is mainly due to the wear of the rollers D312 and the rails D320 of the platen truck D310 due to the use of the platen truck D310. Therefore, for example, a spacer (not shown) is inserted below the rail D320 to adjust the level of the rail D320. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step D48. As described in Step D46, instead of measuring the level difference between the mold delivery plate D110 and the platen carrier D310 by the mold delivery plate / transportation means level difference measurement means D140, the upper and lower molds D1, D2 are used to transfer the mold. When the molding sand is extruded from the plate D110 to the stool D310, the weight of the molding sand that has been shaved off may be measured to determine whether the level difference is within an allowable range.

  In Step D48, in Steps D41 to D44 and D46 to D47, it is determined whether or not any of the unique data is out of the allowable range. If all the values are within the allowable range, it means that the mold misalignment has occurred in spite of that (determined in Step D1), so the allowable range regarding the location where the impact is detected during the extrusion of the mold is narrowed. For example, in the case of Step D31, 2G is narrowed to 1.9G. The “location where an impact is detected during the extrusion of the mold” is, for example, on the mold receiving plate D210, on the mold delivery plate D110, on the surface plate carrier D310, or on a step thereof. It is possible to specify a location where an impact is detected during the extrusion of the mold by the encoder D130. In this way, by specifying a location that may cause a mold deviation and narrowing the tolerance of the location, the tolerance can be converged to an optimal range. In Steps D41 to D44 and D46 to D47, when even one unique data is out of the allowable range, the process returns to Step D1 to determine the next upper and lower molds D1 and D2.

  Subsequently, referring to the flow charts of FIGS. 64 to 68, the use of the measured unique data and the allowable range of the unique data optimized in the adjustment process is used to prevent the occurrence of a mold shift in the blanking molding line D100. The operation of the preventive process will be described. One flow chart is divided into five sheets shown in FIGS. 64 to 68, and connection points are indicated by circles DP to DT.

First, in Step D51, it is determined whether the size of the deposit on the lower squeeze board D220 measured by the lower squeeze board deposit measuring means D226 is within an allowable range. After the squeeze of the previous cycle is completed, the lower squeeze board D220 is turned forward by 90 ° to rotate the frames D250 and D240 (see FIG. 49) to remove the frame. (Not shown) to measure the size of the deposit. It is determined whether or not the cleaning should be performed in the current cycle by using the size of the deposit, which is the measured unique data. The allowable range is, for example, 25 mm ² or less in area and 5 mm or less in height, but the allowable range may be adjusted to another value in the adjusting step. If both the area and the height are within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D52 (below the flowchart). If it is out of the permissible range, the worker is informed using a panel, an indicator light, or the like to clean the attached matter, and the process proceeds to the next Step D52.

  Subsequently, in Step D52, the temperature of the lower squeeze board D220 measured by the lower squeeze board temperature measuring means D224 and the temperature of the molding sand D290 being conveyed by the conveyor D280 measured by the sand temperature measuring means D270, that is, the molding sand D290 to be molded. It is determined whether the difference is within an allowable range. The allowable range is, for example, 15 ° C. or less, but the allowable range may be adjusted to another value in the adjustment step. If it is within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D53 (below the flowchart). If the temperature is outside the allowable range, it is determined whether or not the molding is interrupted until the temperature difference falls within the allowable range. When the molding is interrupted, the lower squeeze board D220 is heated by the heater D222. When the temperature difference between the lower squeeze board D220 and the casting sand D290 falls within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D53. When the lower squeeze board D220 is not heated by the heater D222 without interrupting the molding, for example, cooling air is blown to the molding sand D290 so that the temperature of the molding sand D290 becomes lower than a predetermined temperature of, for example, 30 ° C. I do. If the temperature of the casting sand D290 is equal to or lower than the predetermined temperature, the process returns to the step of determining whether the temperature difference is within the allowable range. When the lower squeeze board D220 is not heated by the heater D222 and the casting sand D290 is not cooled, the process proceeds to Step D53. In addition, even if the temperature difference between the lower squeeze board D220 and the casting sand D290 is out of the allowable range, the process may proceed to the next step without doing anything. If molding cannot be stopped due to time constraints, there is a possibility that there is a deposit on the lower squeeze board D220 in the molding of the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 in the next cycle, but the process may proceed to the next step. In that case, in the next cycle, the size of the deposit on the lower squeeze board D220 is out of the allowable range in Step D51, and the worker is notified using a panel, an indicator light, or the like to clean the deposit. Could be done.

  Subsequently, in Step D53, the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are formed by the frame forming machine D200, the match plate is removed, and the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are matched.

Further, in Step D54, it is determined whether the size of the deposit on the mold receiving plate D210 measured by the mold receiving plate deposit measuring means D124 is within an allowable range. In addition, Step D54 was measured when the mold extrusion cylinder D120 was contracted (returned) in the previous cycle (the processing on the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 formed in the cycle immediately before the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 formed in Step D53). Based on data. The allowable range is, for example, 25 mm ² or less in area and 5 mm or less in height, but the allowable range may be adjusted to another value in the adjusting step. If it is within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D55 (below the flowchart). If it is out of the permissible range, the adhering matter is removed by air blowing using a blow device D160, or a worker is informed using a panel, an indicator light, or the like to clean the adhering matter, and the next step D55 is performed. move on.

  In Step D55, the mold receiving plate D210 is raised so as to contact the bottom surfaces of the upper and lower molds D1 and D2. Subsequently, in Step D56, the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 in the upper frame D250 and the lower frame D240 are pushed downward through the mold extruding plate D232 by the mold blanking cylinder D230 to blank the frame. The impact acting on the mold receiving plate D210 when the frame is removed in Step D57 is measured by the mold receiving plate impact measuring means D212. When the mold receiving plate D210 on which the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are placed is lowered to the lower end, the blanking is completed (Step D58). When the blanking is completed, the process proceeds to the next Step D59 (below the flowchart).

In Step D59, in the previous cycle (processing on the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 formed in a cycle one time before the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 formed in Step D53), when the mold extruding cylinder D120 is contracted, the mold transfer plate adhered substance measuring means D124 It is determined whether the size of the deposit on the mold delivery plate D110 measured in the step is within an allowable range. Here, the allowable range is, for example, 25 mm ² or less in area and 5 mm or less in height, but the allowable range may be adjusted to another value in the adjustment step. If it is within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D60 (below the flowchart). If it is out of the permissible range, the adhering matter is removed by air blowing using a blow device D160, or a worker is informed using a panel, an indicator light, or the like to clean the adhering matter, and the next Step D60 is performed. move on.

  In Step D60, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the groove and the upper surface of the surface plate carrier D310 are cleaned, and at that time, the attached matter is detected. When the trolley D310 is conveyed below the scraper D330, the presence or absence of an adhering substance is detected with the cleaning of the groove and the upper surface of the trolley D310 (Step D60). If no extraneous matter is detected, the process proceeds to the next Step D61 (below the flowchart). When the attached matter is detected, the worker is notified using a panel, an indicator light, or the like to clean the attached matter, and the process proceeds to the next Step D61. In addition, the detection of the adhering matter is performed along with the cleaning of the platen cart D310, and the result is stored in, for example, a storage device of the control device D700, and the timing when the platen cart D310 enters the mold extrusion process. Then, data of the result of detection of the adhering matter may be fetched to determine whether it is necessary to notify the worker. In addition, although the description has been made assuming that the scraper D330 detects the attached matter on the groove and the upper surface of the platen cart D310, the cleaning means D360 may detect the attached matter.

  In Step D61, in the previous cycle (processing on the upper and lower molds D1, D2 formed in a cycle one time before the upper and lower molds D1, D2 formed in Step D53), when the mold extrusion cylinder D120 is contracted (returned), the mold receiving plate. It is determined whether the level difference between the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold receiving plate D110 measured by the mold receiving plate level difference measuring means D124 is within an allowable range. Here, the allowable range is, for example, ± 0.3 mm or less, but the allowable range may be adjusted to another value in the adjustment step. If it is within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D62 (below the flowchart). If it is out of the permissible range, a panel, an indicator light, etc. are adjusted so as to adjust the stopper bolt D214 of the mold receiving plate D210 and adjust the operation of the actuator of the mold receiving plate D210, that is, the mold receiving plate cylinder D218 (see FIG. 49). Is notified to the worker by using, and the process proceeds to the next Step D62.

  In Step D62, it is determined whether or not the level difference between the mold delivery plate D110 and the upper surface of the surface plate carrier D310 measured by the mold delivery plate / transportation unit level difference measurement means D140 is within an allowable range. Here, the allowable range is, for example, ± 0.3 mm or less, but the allowable range may be adjusted to another value in the adjustment step. If it is within the allowable range, the process proceeds to the next Step D63 (below the flowchart). If it is out of the allowable range, the operator is notified by using an indicator light or the like so as to adjust the height of the rail D320 of the surface plate trolley D310 in the same manner as described for Step D47, and the next Step D63 is performed. move on.

  In Step D63, the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are extruded from the mold receiving plate D210 to the platen carrier D310 via the mold receiving plate D110 by the mold extrusion cylinder D120. At this time, if the level difference between the deposits in Steps D54 and D59 or the level difference between Steps D61 and D62 is within the allowable range but close to the threshold value, it is preferable to extrude at a lower speed than the normal speed. This is because the risk of causing a mold shift between the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 is reduced. For example, the allowable range is set to 10, the case where the measured value is 8 to 9 is set as the caution range, and if any of the determinations is within the caution range, the speed of the mold extrusion cylinder D120 is reduced.

  Subsequently, in Step D64, the impact (DX and DZ directions) during extrusion of the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 is measured by the extruded plate impact measuring means D128 attached to the extruded plate D122 at the tip of the mold extruding cylinder D120. Here, the measurement value is linked (associated) with the molds D1 and D2 together with the position information calculated based on the encoder D130, and recorded by the control device D700.

  Subsequently, in Step D65, the type shift is detected by using the type shift detecting device D3, and the presence or absence of the type shift is determined. For example, if any one of the four corners is out of the allowable range, it is determined that the mold is out of shape. The allowable range is, for example, 0.5 mm or less. If it is within the allowable range, the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 are transported for pouring as no abnormality (Step D66), and the process proceeds to the next cycle (Step D67).

  If it is out of the allowable range, it is determined that there is a type shift, and processing for narrowing the allowable range of the unique data is performed. In the preventive process, if there is any attached matter in Step D51, Step D52, Step D54, Step D59, Step D60, Step D61 and Step D62, if there is a step, a worker is notified if there is a step, and the cause of the type shift is removed. Nevertheless, the occurrence of a type shift is considered to be due to the fact that the allowable range was not appropriate. Then, the place where the impact was recorded in Step D64 (the mold receiving plate D210, the step between the mold receiving plate D210 and the mold receiving plate D110, the step between the mold receiving plate D110, and the step between the mold receiving plate D110 and the base plate carrier D310) is specified. The location where the impact is detected during the extrusion of the mold by the encoder D130 can be specified. Alternatively, if the impact value of the mold receiving plate D210 is measured in Step D57, the allowable range for the impact is narrowed. In addition, even though the temperature difference between the casting sand D290 and the lower squeeze board D220 is within the allowable range, if there is any deposit on the lower squeeze board D220, the active clay component and the fine powder component of the casting sand D290 are adjusted. To the operator using an indicator light or the like. Then, when pouring into the upper and lower molds D1 and D2 which are out of shape, an instruction is given to inspect the product precisely on the inspection line. If the pouring is not performed, a molding plan change command is issued because the number of upper and lower molds D1 and D2 to be molded needs to be increased by one. Then, the process proceeds to the next cycle.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, switching between the adjustment step described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63 and the preventive step described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68 will be described. First, an adjustment step is performed. Initially, the count number m in the adjustment step is set to zero (0), and the count number n without mold displacement is set to zero (0). When the adjustment step is performed, 1 is added to the count number m of the adjustment step. If no misregistration occurs in the adjustment step, 1 is added to the count number n without misregistration. Next, it is determined whether the count number m in the adjustment step has exceeded the predetermined number m ₀ , or whether the count number n without mold displacement has exceeded the predetermined number n ₀ . The predetermined number m ₀ of the count number of the adjustment process is set to, for example, 7,000 times, which is statistically considered to have been adjusted by accumulating data. The predetermined number n ₀ of the number of counts without mold shift is, for example, 100 times. The number of counts without a type shift may be a continuous count. At that time, if the determination of no type shift is No, the count number n of no type shift is set to zero (0). When the count number m in the adjustment step exceeds the predetermined number m ₀ , or when the count number n without mold displacement exceeds the predetermined number n ₀ , or when both of them exceed, the mode is switched to the preventive step. . Alternatively, when the failure rate calculated by {(count number of adjustment step m−count number n without misalignment) / count number m of adjustment step} is less than a predetermined value, switching to the prevention step may be performed. . The failure rate is a ratio of the number of cycles in which a mold shift has occurred to the total number of cycles. Not only failure rate, in combination with the count number m of the adjustment process exceeds a predetermined number m _0, it is to switch to the prevention process.

When switching to the preventive process, the count number q of the preventive process is set to zero (0), and the measured data (specific data) is within an allowable range, but the count number p of the cycle in which the type shift has occurred is set to zero (0). I do. When the preventive process is executed, 1 is added to the count number q. In the preventive process, when the measured data is within the allowable range but a mold deviation occurs, 1 is added to the count number p. Although measured data is acceptable, if the count number p of cycles which caused the mold deviation exceeds a predetermined number p _0, or is a permissible range data {measured, resulting in a mold deviation If an inappropriate rate is calculated by counting the number q} of cycle count p / prevention process exceeds a predetermined value q _0, it switched to the adjustment process. Predetermined number _{p 0} is, for example, 5 times. The predetermined value for the incorrect rate (threshold) _{q 0} is, for example, 1%.

  The present modified example includes a step of estimating a cause of a mold shift during the operation of the frame making line D100. According to this configuration, by taking appropriate measures, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of mold displacement. Further, the method includes a step of measuring unique data at a location that may cause a mold shift, and optimizing an allowable range for determining from the unique data whether it is a cause of the mold shift. For this reason, it is possible to reliably determine the cause of the type shift based on the numerical data. Further, after optimizing the allowable range, when a factor of the type deviation is found as a result of the determination using the allowable range, a process of removing the factor is performed. For this reason, it is possible to reliably prevent the mold from shifting. Further, even after it is determined that the allowable range has been optimized, the work is performed while checking the appropriateness of the allowable range. If it is determined that the allowable range is inappropriate, the allowable range is adjusted again. Therefore, the allowable range can be kept in an optimal state.

  The processing order of each Step in the above description can be changed as appropriate. The permissible range referred to in the above description is also an example, and can be changed by a blanking molding line.

As described above, even in the casting equipment having the frame forming line of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment converts the measured data and the like into one. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment in that it is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the mold of the frame, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold that have been matched. Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Eighth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, an eighth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The eighth modification is a modification mainly related to the molding equipment 2, the core installation equipment 3, and the primary cooling and conveying device 5 of the cooling and conveying equipment 4 of the casting equipment 1.
In the above-described embodiment, the molding equipment 2 is of a frameless type, but the molding equipment in the eighth modification is of a framed type.
Also in the eighth modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the eighth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data of one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 70 is a schematic configuration diagram of a casting system shown as a modification. The casting system E1 for a mold with a frame shown in FIG. 70 is such that the upper and lower molds are alternately molded by a main mold making machine, the core is put in, the frame is set, the casting is performed, and the mold is separated through a cooling process. After the frame is separated, the molding process is again performed. An impact sensor is attached to the casting system 1 at the position shown in FIGS. 71 and 72 to detect a line malfunction position. The details will be described below.

  The casting system E1 includes a first line E2, a second line E3, a third line E4, and a fourth line E5. In the first line E2, the upper mold E14 and the lower mold E15 move rightward in FIG. 70 on the roller conveyor by the first pushers E6 and the first cushions E7 arranged at both ends thereof. In the second line E3, the platen carrier E16 moves rightward on the rail by the second pusher E8 and the second cushion E9. In the third line E4, the platform trolley E16 moves leftward on the rail by the third pusher E10 and the third cushion E11. In the fourth line E5, the base trolley E16 moves leftward on the rail by the fourth pusher E12 and the fourth cushion E13.

  In the first line, the upper and lower flasks E14 and E15 are alternately loaded into the main molding apparatus (corresponding to the molding equipment 2 in the above embodiment) E17 by the operation of the first pusher E6 and the first cushion E7, and are shown in the drawing. The molding sand fed by the conveyor device not used is filled in the casting flask to form a mold. In the main mold making apparatus E17, the upper mold E18 and the lower mold E19 are alternately formed with respect to the loaded upper and lower casting frames E14 and E15 by rotation of the turntable on which the upper and lower patterns are attached. The molded mold is extruded from the main molding apparatus E17 by the operation of the first pusher E6 and the first cushion E7.

  Since the upper and lower molds extruded from the main mold making apparatus E17 have the lower and lower mold molding surfaces E18 and E19, the first reversing machine E20 inverts the molding mold surface to make the molding surface upper. In the inverted upper and lower molds E18 and E19, an operator or the like checks the molding surface and places the core in the lower mold E19 when the core is applied in the core placement area E22.

  Next, the upper and lower molds E18 and E19 are sent to the second reversing machine E21. In the second reversing machine E21, the lower mold E19 is not reversed, only the upper mold E18 is reversed, and the molding surface of the upper mold E18 is the lower surface. Next, the upper and lower molds E18 and E19 are sent to the frame aligning device E23. In the frame aligning device E23, the lower mold E19 and the upper mold E18 are stacked on the surface plate carrier E16 in this order. The overlapped mold is referred to as a framed mold E24. The platen cart E16 and the frame aligning mold E24 are transferred by the frame aligning device E23 to the second line E3 that moves the platen cart E16 by the operation of the second pusher E8 and the second cushion E9. In this modification, the upper mold is prevented from being lifted by the molten metal pressure at the time of casting by hackers of the upper and lower casting frames, and no weight is used.

  Next, the frame alignment mold E24 framed on the surface plate carrier E16 passes through the transfer rail impact sensor installation position E25 on the second line E3. FIG. 72 is a front view of FIG. 71, and FIG. 72 is a left side view of the state of the trolley E16, the frame aligning mold E24, and the transfer rail E26 at the transfer rail impact sensor installation position E25. 71 and 72 show a partial cross section and an enlarged view of the portion. FIG. 71 also shows a form of a cast flask impact sensor unit to be described later. The platen cart E16 on which the frame matching mold E24 is mounted runs on the transport rail E26 as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72. The transfer rail E26 is attached to the transfer frame E27. A plurality of transport frames E27 are provided over the entire transport rail E26 so that the surface plate carrier E16 on which the frame matching mold E24 is mounted can run stably.

  At the transport rail impact sensor installation position E25, the transport frame E27 is provided with a transport frame impact sensor E41 as an impact sensor. The transfer frame impact sensor E41 measures the impacts of X (travel direction), Y (transverse direction orthogonal to the travel direction), and Z (vertical direction) when the platen carriage E16 on which the frame matching mold E24 is placed passes. The shock value is transmitted to a line monitoring panel E62 described later.

  FIGS. 71 and 72 also show a cast frame impact sensor E42, which is an impact sensor, attached to one upper mold E24. There are four types of configuration of the cast flask impact sensor unit, from EA to ED. Here, the configuration shown in the enlarged view EA of FIG. 71 will be described. Other forms of EB to ED will be described later. The cast flask impact sensor E42 is connected to the storage device E43 and the battery E44, and measures the impact of X (travel direction), Y (lateral direction orthogonal to the travel direction), and Z (vertical direction) applied to the cast flask, The shock value is stored in the storage device E43. The impact measurement value stored in the storage device E43 is taken into the line monitoring panel E62 when the upper mold E14 to which the cast flask impact sensor E42 is stopped at a predetermined position. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 72, the cast flask impact sensor unit is installed in a shaded portion of the cast flask so as to be able to cope with spillage during pouring.

  The platen cart E16 on which the frame matching mold E24 that has passed the transfer rail impact sensor installation position E25 is then sent to the pouring area E28. In the pouring range E28, the molten metal is poured into the framing mold E24 by the pouring device E30 traveling on the pouring device traveling rail E29. The poured casting mold E24 is referred to as a casting mold E31. The molten metal of the pouring device E28 is supplied from a melting furnace (not shown) using a ladle (not shown).

  Next, the frame matching mold E24 is sent to the first traverser E32. The first traverser E32 transfers the pouring mold E31 sent from the second line E3 to the third line E4 or the fourth line E5 by a traveling cart. The platen cart E16 and the pouring mold E31 transferred to the third line E4 by the first traverser E32 are conveyed by the operation of the third pusher E10 and the third cushion E11. Similarly to the platen cart E16 and the pouring mold E31 transferred from the first traverser E32 to the fourth line E5, they are conveyed by the operation of the fourth pusher E12 and the fourth cushion E13. The platen cart E16 and the casting mold E31 which are transferred and transported to the third line E4 or the fourth line E5 are subjected to solidification and cooling of the molten metal poured during the transportation.

  The platen cart E16 and the pouring mold E31 conveyed to the end of the third line E4 or the fourth line E5 are sent to the second traverser E33. The second traverser E33 transfers the pouring mold E31 sent from the third line E4 or the fourth line E5 to the second line E3 by a traveling cart. The platen cart E16 and the pouring mold E31 transferred to the second line E3 are conveyed by the operation of the second pusher E8 and the second cushion E9.

  The pouring mold E31 conveyed to the punch-out device E34 in the second line E3 lifts the pouring mold E31 from the stool E16 by the punch-out device E34, and removes the pouring mold E31 from the pouring mold E31 (to the mold releasing device 65 in the above embodiment). (Equivalent) Move to above E35, and extract the casting in which the mold and the pouring metal have solidified from the upper and lower flasks E14 and E15. The extracted mold and casting are separated into casting sand and casting by a mold release device E35 and transferred to a post-process (not shown). The upper and lower casting frames E14 and E15 from which the mold and the casting have been extracted are returned to the platen carriage E16 on the second line E3 by the punch-out device E34.

  Next, when the upper and lower flasks E14 and E15 returned to the platen carriage E16 of the second line E3 are transported and reach the flask separator E36, the upper and lower flasks E14 and E15 are separated. Done. In the flask separating device E36, the lower flask E15 and the upper flask E14 superimposed on the surface plate carrier E16 are moved to the first line E2, the upper mold E14 at the uppermost stage is gripped, and the rollers of the first line E2 are rolled. The upper mold E14 is pushed out by the operation of the first pusher E6 and the first cushion E7 on the conveyor. When the next molding is performed by the main molding device E17, the flask separator E36 picks up the lower flask E15 and moves the roller to the roller conveyor of the first line E2 by the operation of the first pusher E6 and the first cushion E7. The flask E15 is extruded. When these operations are completed, the casting flask separator E36 returns the platen cart E16 from which the upper and lower flasks E14 and E15 have been removed to the second line E3. The platen cart E16 returned to the second line E3 is transported on the second line E3, and the upper and lower molds E18 and E19 are placed again by the frame aligning device E23.

  The upper and lower flasks E14 and E15 conveyed on the roller conveyor of the first line E2 by the operation of the first pusher E6 and the first cushion E7 pass through the roller conveyor impact sensor installation position E37. At the roller conveyor impact sensor installation position E37, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the roller frame E38 is provided with a roller conveyor impact sensor E49. The roller conveyor impact sensor E49 measures the impact of X (running direction), Y (horizontal direction perpendicular to running direction), and Z (vertical direction) when the upper and lower flasks E14 and E15 pass, respectively, and measures the impact. The value is transmitted to a later-described line monitoring panel (corresponding to the control device 11 in the above embodiment) E52. Thereafter, the upper and lower flasks E14 and E15 are transported for each molding by the main mold making machine E17, and when reaching the main mold making machine E17, a mold is formed in the casting mold. The above operation is repeated on the molding line.

  Hereinafter, the operation in the case of using these configurations will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 76, the operation of the above-described casting system E1 is performed by the control panel attached to the main mold making machine E17 and the pouring device E30, respectively, and attached to the base plate carrier E16 and the pouring device E30. The first line, the second line, the third line, the fourth line, and the first and second reversing machines E20 and E21, which convey the control panel, the base plate carrier E16 and the upper and lower casting frames E14 and E15, and a frame aligning device. E23, the first and second traversers E32 and E33, the punch-out device E34, the mold release device E34, and the line control panel E51 for controlling the operations of the flask separation device E36. Further, a control panel attached to the main molding machine E17 and the pouring device E30, respectively, and a line control panel E51 are electrically connected to a line monitoring panel E52.

(Transport frame impact sensor)
The line monitoring panel E52 is electrically connected to the transport frame impact sensor E41, and receives the impact measurement values in the X, Y, and Z directions detected by the transport frame impact sensor E41. The fetched impact measurement value is stored in the line monitoring panel E52 in association with the number of the platen carriage E16 that has passed the transfer frame impact sensor installation position E25 and the flask number of the frame matching mold E24. These operations are repeated every time the surface platform truck E16 of the second line E3 is transported, and when the surface platform truck E16 makes a round, the traveling state of all the surface platform vehicles E16 can be grasped. In the line monitoring panel E52, when a unique shock value different from that during normal operation is detected from the stored shock measurement values in association with the number of the base plate carrier E16 and the casting frame number of the frame matching mold E24, an alarm is issued. To notify the line manager, and take measures such as stopping the line.

(Roller conveyor impact sensor)
Further, the line monitoring panel E52 is electrically connected to a roller conveyor impact sensor E49, which is an impact sensor, and receives the X, Y, and Z direction impact measurement values detected by the roller conveyor impact sensor E49. The captured impact measurement value is stored in the line monitoring panel E52 in association with the flask numbers of the upper mold E14 and the lower mold E15 that have passed the roller conveyor impact sensor installation position E37. Each time the casting flask is transported on the roller conveyor of the first line E2, these operations are repeated, and when the upper and lower flasks E14 and E15 make a round, the transport state of all the upper mold E14 and the lower mold E15 is changed. I can understand. In the line monitoring panel E52, when a unique shock value different from that during normal operation is detected from the stored shock measurement values in association with the flask number, a warning is issued to notify the line manager and measures such as line stoppage are performed. I take the.

(Configuration and operation of the cast-frame impact sensor)
Next, a description will be given of a state where the impact sensor E42 is attached to the cast flask. As described above, there are four types of the configuration of the flask impact sensor unit, from EA to ED. First, the configuration (form EA) of the enlarged view EA of FIG. 71 will be described. The cast flask impact sensor E42 is connected to the storage device E43 and the battery E44, and measures the impact of X (travel direction), Y (lateral direction orthogonal to the travel direction), and Z (vertical direction) applied to the cast flask, The shock value is stored in the storage device E43 together with the measurement time. The impact measurement value stored in the storage device E43 is taken into the line monitoring panel E52 at a predetermined position when the upper mold E14 to which the flask impact sensor E42 is attached stops. The data is taken into the line monitoring panel E52 by connecting a cable to read the data, or taking out a storage medium set in the storage device E43, or the like.

  The taken impact measurement value of the flask is stored in association with the line position from the time and the operation record of the line control panel E51 connected to the line monitoring panel E52. In addition, when a mold having an impact sensor is formed by the main mold making apparatus E17, the molding process and the position are stored in association with each other from the operation record of the main mold making apparatus control panel. In the line monitoring panel E52, these processes are performed as soon as the impact measurement value of the flask is captured, and the newly captured impact value is compared with the impact value captured in the past, and a unique impact value different from that in the normal operation is obtained. Is recorded, the position is specified, and an alarm is issued to notify the line manager. In addition, when the line is stopped and the data of the shock value is taken in, the charging operation of the battery E44 is also performed, or the battery E44 is replaced with a charged battery.

  Next, the configuration mode EB of the flask impact sensor unit will be described. As shown in an enlarged view EB of FIG. 71, the configuration form EB of the cast flask impact sensor unit includes a cast flask impact sensor E42, a battery E44, and a wireless transmitter E45. The impact value measured by the flask impact sensor E42 during the operation of the transport system E1 is immediately transmitted to the line monitoring panel E52 by the wireless transmitter E45.

  In the line monitoring panel E52, the impact value measured by the cast flask impact sensor E42 is compared with the main molding apparatus control panel, the pouring device control panel, and the line control panel E51, and is associated with the process and position at which the impact was measured. To remember. The measured (received) impact value is compared with the stored impact values at the process and position. If a unique impact value different from that during normal operation is recorded, an alarm is issued to the line manager. Notify the process and position, and take measures such as stopping the line. When the operation of the day is stopped, or when the line is stopped before the start of the operation, the charging operation of the battery E44 is performed, or the battery E44 is replaced with a charged battery.

  Next, the configuration EC of the flask impact sensor unit will be described. As shown in an enlarged view EC of FIG. 73 and FIG. 76, the configuration form EC of the flask input impact sensor unit includes a flask input impact sensor E42, a storage device E43 or a wireless communication device E45, a battery E44, and an electromagnetic induction receiver E46. Have been. The electromagnetic induction receiver E46 is attached to the side surface of the upper casting frame E47, and comes closer to the electromagnetic induction transmitter E47 as the surface plate carrier E16 travels. When the electromagnetic induction receiver E46 and the electromagnetic induction transmitter E47 are close to each other, the battery E44 is charged. One or more electromagnetic induction transmitters E47 are provided in the line.

  In the case where the storage device E43 is configured in the configuration mode EC of the flask impact sensor unit, the measured shock value is stored in the storage device E43 together with the measurement time. The processing of the shock data stored in the storage device E43 in this case is the same as that of the configuration mode EA. Further, when the wireless transmitter E45 is configured, the shock value measured by the flask impact sensor E42 during the operation of the casting system E1 is immediately transmitted to the line monitoring panel E52 by the wireless transmitter E45. The processing of the shock data in this case is the same as that of the configuration mode EB.

  Next, the configuration mode ED of the flask impact sensor unit will be described. As shown in the enlarged view ED of FIG. 71 and FIG. 76, the configuration form ED of the cast flask impact sensor unit includes a cast flask impact sensor E42, a storage device E53 or a wireless communication device E45, a battery E44, and a temperature difference generator E48. Have been. The temperature difference generator E48 is attached to the side surface of the upper flask E14, and generates power by the heat transmitted from the molten metal to the flask during pouring and the temperature difference between the temperature difference generator E48. The power is charged in the battery E44.

  When the storage device E43 is configured with the configuration form ED of the flask impact sensor unit, the measured impact value is stored in the storage device E43 together with the measurement time. The processing of the shock data stored in the storage device E43 in this case is the same as that of the configuration mode EA. When the wireless transmitter E45 is configured, the shock value measured by the cast flask impact sensor E42 during the operation of the casting system E1 is immediately transmitted to the line monitoring panel E52 by the wireless transmitter E45. The processing of the shock data in this case is the same as that of the configuration mode EB.

  As is apparent from the above description, according to the present modification, the operation of the casting line allows the conveyance state to be checked from the impact value of the cast frame or the platen cart that has passed over the conveyance frame to which the impact sensor is attached. At the same time, if the cast frame or stool to which the impact sensor is attached makes a round of the line, the state of a series of lines can be checked. In the present modification, if the impact sensor can simultaneously measure three axes of X, Y, and Z, it is possible to identify the direction of the defect.

  In this modification, the occurrence of a casting defect due to a line operation defect is prevented by detecting a line operation defect. For example, when an impact occurs in the main mold making apparatus E17 during casting of the mold, the impact may cause a part of the mold to collapse, resulting in a "mold drop" failure. When such an unusual impact value different from the normal time is detected, a warning is issued to notify the line manager, and measures such as stopping the line are taken. When a unique impact value is detected, a command is sent from the line monitoring panel E52 to the main molding apparatus E17 to reduce the impact during molding, and the operation speed of the main molding apparatus E17 is reduced to an optimal state. By doing so, the impact at the time of molding that occurs in the main molding apparatus E17 is reduced.

  In addition to the above-mentioned "mold drop", casting defects caused by line malfunctions include "sand drop", "mold shift", "tension" and the like. If detected, the operation speed of the main mold making device E17, the pouring device E30, or the casting line is controlled in accordance with a command from the line monitoring panel E52 so as to be in an optimum state. To mitigate the occurrence of casting defects.

In this modified example, the impact sensor attached to the casting flask or the surface plate cart has a battery and a storage device, so that the impact value can be measured at any position and the state of the line is checked. be able to.
Further, in this modification, the shock sensor attached to the cast flask or the trolley can be capable of wirelessly transmitting the measured shock value. This eliminates the need to store data in the sensor, and allows the control device to collect data in real time.
In this modification, the charging of the battery of the impact sensor attached to the casting frame or the trolley can be of a wireless charging type by electromagnetic induction. As a result, in-line charging can be performed, and there is no need to perform a separate charging operation.
Furthermore, in this modification, the charging of the battery of the impact sensor attached to the casting frame or the platen cart can be performed by a temperature difference generator such as a thermoelectric element utilizing the heat of the molten metal. As a result, in-line charging can be performed, and there is no need to perform a separate charging operation.

  The method and device for detecting a malfunction in the casting line of the present modified example are not limited to the above-described embodiment described with reference to the drawings, and various other modified examples can be considered within the technical scope. . For example, although the platen carriage in the present modified example has been shown to run on rails with wheels provided on the platen, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies even if the platen runs on rollers. The effect is obtained.

  Further, the casting line of the above-described modified example is described as an example of a framed casting line using upper and lower casting frames. However, the present invention is not limited to the framed casting line, and a similar effect can be obtained in a blanked frame casting line. Play. In the case of a blanking frame casting line, since the flask does not circulate in the line, it is sufficient to provide an impact sensor on the platen carrier that transports the upper and lower molds, and the impact sensor of the transport frame is similar to the above-described modification. Is fine. When applied to the blanking frame casting line, the condition inside the molding machine cannot be grasped, but the state of the entire line where the platen carrier is transported, including the process of covering the jacket which is not in the framed casting line, is checked. be able to.

  Further, in the above modification, the upper mold is prevented from being lifted by the molten metal pressure at the time of casting by a hacker of the upper and lower casting frames. It may be a heavy corps type that prevents lifting by weight.

  Further, in the description of the above modified example, the impact value is measured, but the impact value is synonymous with the acceleration, and the same effect can be obtained by measuring the acceleration with the acceleration sensor.

  In addition to the above, it is possible to appropriately select the configuration described in the above modified example or to appropriately change the configuration to another configuration.

As described above, in the casting equipment including the casting system of the present modified example as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment converts the measured data and the like into one frame. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment in that it is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold that have been matched. Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Ninth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a ninth modified example of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The ninth modification is a modification mainly related to the molding equipment 2, the core installation equipment 3, and the primary cooling transfer device 5 of the cooling transfer equipment 4 of the casting equipment 1, and particularly describes the inspection equipment of the casting equipment. Is what you do.
In the above-described embodiment, the molding equipment 2 is of a frame-less type, but the molding equipment in the ninth modified example is of a framed type.
Also in the ninth modified example, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the ninth modified example, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1 and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 77 is a configuration diagram schematically showing a casting system including the inspection device according to the present modification. The casting system F1 shown in FIG. 77 is a system for manufacturing a casting. The casting system F1 includes a molding machine (corresponding to the molding equipment 2 in the above embodiment) F2, an inspection device F3, a pouring machine (corresponding to the pouring equipment 7 in the above embodiment) F4, and a transfer device (the above embodiment). And a line controller (corresponding to the control device 11 in the above embodiment) F6.

  The molding machine F2 is an apparatus that manufactures the mold FM. In the present modification, a mold FM is formed using a flask FF. Upon receiving the molding start signal and the mold information from the line controller F6, the molding machine F2 starts manufacturing the mold FM located in the molding area. The molding machine F2 manufactures the mold FM indicated by the pattern code included in the mold information received from the line controller F6. The pattern code is information that uniquely indicates a molding pattern. The molding machine F2 puts sand into a flask FF provided with a model (not shown), and presses and hardens the sand in the flask FF. The molding machine F2 forms the mold FM by removing the model from the hardened sand. When removing the model, a release agent may be used. The color of the template FM is, for example, black. The molding machine F2 receives a signal for designating molding conditions and sand properties from the line controller F6, sets the kneading machine to have the designated sand properties, and manufactures the mold FM under the designated molding conditions. You may.

  The molding machine F2 transmits a molding state signal and a molding result signal to the line controller F6. The molding state signal is a signal indicating whether molding is in progress. The molding result signal is a signal indicating a molding result indicating whether or not the molding machine F2 operates normally. During molding, the molding machine F2 transmits a molding state signal indicating that molding is being performed to the line controller F6. When the molding is completed, the molding machine F2 transmits a molding state signal indicating that molding is not being performed and a molding result signal to the line controller F6. The molding machine F2 transmits a molding state signal indicating that molding is not being performed to the line controller F6 while molding is not being performed.

  The inspection device F3 is a device that inspects the appearance of the mold FM manufactured by the molding machine F2. Specifically, upon receiving the inspection start signal and the mold information from the line controller F6, the inspection device F3 inspects the mold FM located in the inspection area. The inspection device F3 identifies the type of the mold FM to be inspected based on the pattern code included in the mold information received from the line controller F6, and inspects the mold FM according to the type of the mold FM.

  The inspection device F3 transmits an inspection state signal and an inspection result signal to the line controller F6. The inspection state signal is a signal indicating whether or not the inspection is being performed. The inspection result signal is a signal indicating an inspection result of whether or not the template FM to be inspected is normal. During the inspection, the inspection device F3 transmits an inspection state signal indicating that the inspection is being performed to the line controller F6. When the inspection is completed, the inspection device F3 transmits an inspection state signal indicating that the inspection is not being performed and an inspection result signal to the line controller F6. In addition, while the inspection is not being performed, the inspection apparatus F3 transmits an inspection state signal indicating that the inspection is not being performed to the line controller F6. Details of the inspection device F3 will be described later.

  The pouring machine F4 is a device for pouring a molten metal into the mold FM. Upon receiving the frame feeding completion signal and the mold information from the line controller F6, the pouring machine F4 pours the molten metal (performs pouring) into the mold FM with the mold FM located in the pouring area as a pouring target. The pouring machine F4 identifies the type of the mold FM to be poured, based on the pattern code included in the mold information received from the line controller F6, and performs pouring according to the type of the mold FM. Pouring machine F4 may perform pouring to mold FM based on the inspection result included in the mold information. For example, the pouring machine F4 performs pouring to the mold FM if the inspection result is normal, and does not perform pouring to the mold FM if the inspection result is abnormal. The pouring machine F4 transmits a frame feed enable / disable signal indicating that frame feeding is not possible to the line controller F6 until the pouring into the mold FM to be poured is completed. The frame feed enable / disable signal is a signal indicating whether or not frame feed is possible.

  The transport device F5 is a device that transports the flask FF (mold FM) from the molding machine F2 to the pouring machine F4 via the inspection device F3. The transport device F5 has, for example, a rail (not shown). The rail extends linearly from the molding machine F2 to the pouring machine F4. The transport device F5 sequentially transports the plurality of flasks FF arranged at equal intervals (pitch) on the rail from the molding machine F2 to the pouring machine F4. The transport device F5 is intermittently driven and transports each flask FF one pitch at a time. The transport device F5 includes, for example, a pusher device arranged on the molding machine F2 side and a cushion device arranged on the pouring machine F4 side. When receiving the frame feed signal from the line controller F6, the transport device F5 transports each cast flask FF by one pitch. When the transport for one pitch is completed, the transport device F5 fixes the flask FF with a clamp (not shown), and transmits a frame feed completion signal to the line controller F6.

  Note that a core setting place FW is provided between the inspection device F3 and the hot water dispenser F4. An operator is stationed in the core setting place FW, and sets a core in the mold FM.

  The line controller F6 is a controller that performs overall control of the casting system F1. The line controller F6 includes, for example, a processor such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a memory such as a RAM (Random Access Memory) and a ROM (Read Only Memory), an input device such as a touch panel, a mouse and a keyboard, and a display and the like. It is configured as a computer system including an output device and a communication device such as a network card. The line controller F6 is, for example, a PLC (Programmable Logic Controller). The functions of the line controller F6 are realized by operating each hardware under the control of the processor based on the computer program stored in the memory.

  The line controller F6 has a mold management table for managing the mold information of each mold FM. As shown in FIG. 78, the mold management table stores, for each mold FM, mold information in which “mold ID”, “pattern code”, “inspection result”, and “position” are associated with each other. ing. The “template ID” is information that can uniquely identify the template FM. “Pattern code” is information that uniquely indicates a molding pattern used for manufacturing the mold FM identified by the corresponding mold ID. “Inspection result” is information indicating the inspection result of the template FM identified by the corresponding template ID. In the example of FIG. 78, “OK”, “NG”, and “Fail” are used as the inspection results. When the test result is “OK”, it indicates that the template FM is normal. When the inspection result is “NG”, it indicates that the template FM is abnormal (has a defect). When the inspection result is “Fail”, it indicates that the inspection itself has failed.

  “Position” indicates a position on the transport path where the mold FM identified by the corresponding mold ID is located. In the casting system F1, positions FP1 to FP19 are set in the transport path. The position FP1 is located at the uppermost stream in the transport direction of the transport device F5, and moves downstream by one pitch in the order of the positions FP2, FP3,. The position FP1 is a molding area where molding is performed by the molding machine F2. The positions FP2 to FP4 are positions between the molding machine F2 and the inspection device F3. The position FP5 is an inspection area where the inspection by the inspection device F3 is performed. Positions FP6 to FP17 are positions between inspection device F3 and pouring machine F4. The position FP9 is a position of the mold FM corresponding to an inspection result displayed on a monitor of the operation panel F33 described later. Position FP18 is a pouring area where pouring is performed by pouring machine F4. The position FP19 is a position where the flask FF is carried out of the casting system F1.

  The line controller F6 advances the “position” of each mold information by one, and adds new mold information to the mold management table, for example, each time a frame feed completion signal is received from the transport device F5. In the added template information, the position FP1 is set in the “position”. When the flask FF at the position FP19 is fed by the frame, it is carried out of the casting system F1, so that the “position” of the mold information of the mold FM is blank. When transmitting the molding start signal to the molding machine F2, the line controller F6 assigns a new mold ID to the “mold ID” of the mold information having the position information of the position FP1, and the mold FM to be manufactured by the molding machine F2. Is registered in the “pattern code” of the template information having the position information of the position FP1. Further, when receiving the inspection result signal from the inspection device F3, the line controller F6 registers the inspection result indicated by the inspection result signal in the “inspection result” of the mold information having the position information of the position FP5.

  When the line controller F6 determines that the frame feed is enabled, the line controller F6 transmits a frame feed signal to the transport device F5. The line controller F6 receives a molding state signal indicating that molding is not being performed from the molding machine F2, has received an inspection state signal indicating that inspection is not being performed from the inspection device F3, and has received a frame feed from the pouring machine F4. If a frame feed enable / disable signal indicating that frame feed is possible is received, it is determined that frame feed is possible. That is, the line controller F6 receives a molding state signal indicating that molding is in progress from the molding machine F2, receives an inspection state signal indicating that inspection is in progress from the inspection device F3, or cannot perform frame feeding from the pouring machine F4. If at least one of the frame sending signals indicating whether or not the frame sending signal is received is satisfied, the frame sending signal is not transmitted to the transport device F5. When receiving the frame feed completion signal from the transport device F5, the line controller F6 transmits a molding start signal and mold information of the position FP1 to the molding machine F2, and transmits an inspection start signal and mold information of the position FP5 to the inspection device F3. Then, the frame feeding completion signal and the mold information of the position FP18 are transmitted to the pouring machine F4. The line controller F6 may transmit a signal designating molding conditions and sand properties to the molding machine F2. The line controller F6 may control the pouring machine F4 so as not to perform pouring into the mold FM in which the inspection result by the inspection device F3 indicates an abnormality.

  Next, the details of the inspection device F3 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 79 is a configuration diagram schematically showing the inspection apparatus shown in FIG. FIG. 80 (a) is a perspective view schematically showing the appearance of the housing of the inspection device shown in FIG. 79, and FIG. 80 (b) explains the arrangement of the imaging device and the illumination device shown in FIG. FIG. FIG. 81 is a perspective view schematically showing the periphery of the inspection area. As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, the inspection device F3 includes a housing F30, an imaging device F31, an illumination unit F32, an operation panel F33, and a controller F34. In FIG. 77, the operation panel F33 is arranged outside the inspection device F3 for convenience of explanation.

  The housing F30 has a hollow box shape, and forms an imaging space FV. The housing F30 accommodates the imaging device F31 and the illumination unit F32 in the imaging space FV. The housing F30 includes a frame F41 and a cover F42. The frame body F41 includes a plurality of pillar members (here, pillar members F43a to F43d), a plurality of connecting members (here, connecting members F44a to F44f), and a plurality of mounting members for ceiling illumination (here, mounting members). Members F45a, F45b), a plurality of mounting members for upper illumination (here, mounting members F46a to F46d), a plurality of mounting members for middle illumination (here, mounting members F47a to F47d), and the imaging device F31. And a mounting member F48 for use in forming a rectangular parallelepiped. In the description of the inspection device F3, the up, down, front, rear, left and right directions are as follows: the side on which the imaging device F31 is provided; the side on which the flask FF is conveyed; It means the azimuth when the downstream side in the transport direction is rearward.

  The column members F43a to F43d are erected from the floor along the FZ axis direction (first direction). The column members F43a and F43b are arranged so as to sandwich the conveyance path of the conveyance device F5 in the FY axis direction, and upper ends of the column members F43a and F43b are connected by a connection member F44a. Similarly, the column members F43c and F43d are arranged so as to sandwich the transport path of the transport device F5 in the FY axis direction, and upper ends of the column members F43c and F43d are connected by a connecting member F44b. The column members F43a and F43c are arranged on one side (left side) in the FY-axis direction with respect to the transport path of the transport device F5, and are arranged in the FX-axis direction. The upper and lower ends of the column members F43a and F43c are connected by connecting members F44c and F44e, respectively. Similarly, the column members F43b and F43d are arranged on the other side (right side) in the FY-axis direction with respect to the transport path of the transport device F5, and are arranged in the FX-axis direction. The upper and lower ends of the column members F43b and F43d are connected by connecting members F44d and F44f, respectively.

  The pair of mounting members F45a and F45b are arranged in the FY-axis direction and extend along the FX-axis direction. One ends of the mounting members F45a and F45b are fixed to the connecting member F44a, and the other ends of the mounting members F45a and F45b are fixed to the connecting member F44b. The attachment members F46a to F46d are arranged on a virtual plane FVP1 (first plane) that intersects (here, orthogonally intersects) the FZ axis direction, and forms a substantially square frame. The plane FVP1 is located near the ceiling of the housing F30 in the FZ axis direction. The mounting member F46a extends along the FY axis direction, and one end of the mounting member F46a is fixed to the column member F43a, and the other end of the mounting member F46a is fixed to the column member F43b. The mounting member F46b extends along the FY axis direction, and one end of the mounting member F46b is fixed to the column member F43c, and the other end of the mounting member F46b is fixed to the column member F43d. The mounting member F46c extends along the FX axis direction, and one end of the mounting member F46c is fixed to the column member F43a, and the other end of the mounting member F46c is fixed to the column member F43c. The mounting member F46d extends along the FX axis direction, and one end of the mounting member F46d is fixed to the column member F43b, and the other end of the mounting member F46d is fixed to the column member F43d.

  The attachment members F47a to F47d are arranged on a virtual plane FVP2 (second plane) that intersects (here, orthogonally intersects) the FZ axis direction and forms a substantially square frame. The plane FVP2 is located closer to the floor than the plane FVP1 in the FZ axis direction, and is located near the middle of the housing F30. The mounting member F47a extends along the FY axis direction, and one end of the mounting member F47a is fixed to the column member F43a, and the other end of the mounting member F47a is fixed to the column member F43b. The mounting member F47b extends along the FY axis direction, and one end of the mounting member F47b is fixed to the column member F43c, and the other end of the mounting member F47b is fixed to the column member F43d. The mounting member F47c extends along the FX axis direction, and one end of the mounting member F47c is fixed to the column member F43a, and the other end of the mounting member F47c is fixed to the column member F43c. The mounting member F47d extends along the FX axis direction. One end of the mounting member F47d is fixed to the column member F43b, and the other end of the mounting member F47d is fixed to the column member F43d. The attachment member F48 extends along the FY-axis direction, one end of the attachment member F48 is fixed to the center of the attachment member F45a in the FX-axis direction, and the other end of the attachment member F48 is attached to the FX-axis direction of the attachment member F45b. It is fixed in the center of the.

  The cover portion F42 is a portion that covers the outside of the frame body F41. The cover part F42 includes cover members F42a to F42e. The cover member F42a covers a surface defined by the column member F43a, the column member F43b, and the connecting member F44a. The cover member F42a does not extend to the floor surface, and an opening F42f through which the flask FF can pass is provided between the lower end of the cover member F42a and the floor surface. The cover member F42b covers a surface defined by the column member F43c, the column member F43d, and the connecting member F44b. The cover member F42b does not extend to the floor surface, and an opening F42g through which the flask FF can pass is provided between the lower end of the cover member F42b and the floor surface. The cover member F42c covers a surface defined by the column member F43a, the column member F43c, the connecting member F44c, and the connecting member F44e. The cover member F42d covers a surface defined by the column member F43b, the column member F43d, the connecting member F44d, and the connecting member F44f. The cover member F42e covers a surface defined by the connecting members F44a to F44d.

  The cover portion F42 further includes shutter members F42h and F42i for preventing external light from entering the imaging space FV. The shutter member F42h is provided on the cover member F42a so as to be slidable in the FZ axis direction. The shutter member F42h can take a closed state in which the opening F42f is closed and an open state in which the opening F42f is opened. The state of the shutter member F42h is controlled to a closed state or an open state by the controller F34. The shutter member F42h closes the opening F42f during the inspection, and opens the opening F42f during the frame feeding. The shutter member F42i is provided on the cover member F42b so as to be slidable in the FZ axis direction. The shutter member F42i can take a closed state in which the opening F42g is closed and an open state in which the opening F42g is opened. The state of the shutter member F42i is controlled by the controller F34 to a closed state or an open state. The shutter member F42i closes the opening F42g during the inspection, and opens the opening F42g during the frame feeding.

  In this modification, when the shutter members F42h and F42i close the openings F42f and F42g, the lower ends of the shutter members F42h and F42i come into contact with a connecting portion that connects two adjacent molding frames FF. A gap may occur between the lower ends of F42h and F42i and the floor. For this reason, a recess may be provided at the lower end of the shutter members F42h and F42i so as to fit into the connecting portion. In addition, the connecting portion may be configured such that the upper surface of the connecting portion is located below the surface of the mold FM in the FZ axis direction. Further, the shapes of the shutter members F42h and F42i can be appropriately changed according to the shape of the flask FF, the shape of the transport path, and the like.

  The imaging device F31 is a device that images (images) the mold FM formed in the flask FF located in the inspection area (position FP5). The imaging device F31 is, for example, a camera. In the present modification, the imaging device F31 is attached to the center of the attachment member F48 in the FY-axis direction, and is located at the center of the ceiling of the housing F30. The lens of the imaging device F31 faces downward from the ceiling, and the imaging device F31 captures an image of the flask FF from above the flask FF along the FZ-axis direction. The imaging range of the imaging device F31 is set in advance so that at least the surface (the entire upper surface) of the mold FM located in the inspection area is imaged. When receiving the imaging instruction from the controller F34, the imaging device F31 performs imaging to obtain an image. The imaging device F31 outputs the obtained image to the controller F34.

  The lighting unit F32 irradiates the mold FM arranged in the housing F30 with light in a plurality of irradiation patterns. The lighting unit F32 includes a plurality of lighting devices (here, lighting devices F35a to F35j) and a switch F36.

  The lighting devices F35a to F35j are rod-shaped lighting devices. The lighting devices F35a to F35j are configured by, for example, LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes). The lighting devices F35a and F35b are attached to lower surfaces of the attachment members F45a and F45b. That is, the lighting devices F35a and F35b are arranged in the FY-axis direction with the imaging device F31 interposed therebetween, and extend from the connecting member F44a to the connecting member F44b along the FX-axis direction.

  The lighting devices F35c to F35f are mounted on inner surfaces of the mounting members F46a to F46d. That is, the lighting devices F35c to F35f are upper lighting devices, and are arranged on the plane FVP1. The lighting devices F35c to F35f are arranged so as to surround the flask FF arranged at the position FP5. Specifically, the illumination device F35c is provided at the front end of the imaging space FV in the plane FVP1, and extends from the column member F43a to the column member F43b along the FY axis direction. The illumination device F35d is provided at the rear end of the imaging space FV in the plane FVP1, and extends from the column member F43c to the column member F43d along the FY axis direction. The illumination device F35e is provided at the left end of the imaging space FV in the plane FVP1, and extends from the column member F43a to the column member F43c along the FX axis direction. The illumination device F35f is provided at the right end of the imaging space FV in the plane FVP1, and extends from the column member F43b to the column member F43d along the FX axis direction.

  The lighting devices F35g to F35j are mounted on the inner surfaces of the mounting members F47a to F47d. That is, the lighting devices F35g to F35j are middle-stage lighting devices, and are arranged on the plane FVP2. The lighting devices F35g to F35j are arranged so as to surround the flask FF arranged at the position FP5. Specifically, the illumination device F35g is provided at the front end of the imaging space FV in the plane FVP2, and extends from the column member F43a to the column member F43b along the FY axis direction. The lighting device F35h is provided at the rear end of the imaging space FV in the plane FVP2, and extends from the column member F43c to the column member F43d along the FY axis direction. The illumination device F35i is provided at the left end of the imaging space FV in the plane FVP2, and extends from the column member F43a to the column member F43c along the FX axis direction. The illumination device F35j is provided at the right end of the imaging space FV in the plane FVP2, and extends from the column member F43b to the column member F43d along the FX axis direction.

  The switch F36 is a device that switches the lighting device to be turned on among the lighting devices F35a to F35j. The switch F36 turns on or off each of the lighting devices F35a to F35j based on a switching instruction from the controller F34.

  The plurality of irradiation patterns include an observation irradiation pattern and an inspection irradiation pattern. The irradiation pattern for observation is obtained, for example, by turning on the lighting devices F35a to F35f and turning off the lighting devices F35g to F35j. The irradiation pattern for inspection includes a plurality (here, four) of upper irradiation patterns and a plurality (here, four) of middle irradiation patterns.

  The four upper irradiation patterns turn on the lighting device F35c and turn off the other lighting devices, thereby turning on the lighting device F35d and turning off the other lighting devices by irradiating light from the front position on the plane FVP1. Accordingly, an irradiation pattern for irradiating light from a rear position on the plane FVP1, an irradiation pattern for irradiating light from a lateral position on the plane FVP1 by turning on the illuminating device F35e and turning off other illuminating devices, and illumination This is an irradiation pattern in which light is emitted from a side position on the plane FVP1 by turning on the device F35f and turning off other lighting devices.

  The four middle irradiation patterns turn on the lighting device F35g and turn off the other lighting devices, thereby turning on the lighting device F35h and turning off the other lighting devices by irradiating light from the front position on the plane FVP2. Thus, an irradiation pattern for irradiating light from a rear position on the plane FVP2, an irradiation pattern for irradiating light from a lateral position on the plane FVP2 by turning on the illuminating device F35i and turning off other illuminating devices, and illumination This is an illumination pattern in which light is emitted from a side position on the plane FVP2 by turning on the device F35j and turning off other lighting devices.

  The operation panel F33 is a device for an operator to operate the inspection device F3. The operation panel F33 is provided, for example, in the core set place FW. The operation panel F33 includes a monitor (display device) for displaying an inspection result of the mold FM by the inspection device F3. The operator sets the core in the mold FM according to the inspection result of the inspection device F3 displayed on the monitor of the operation panel F33. For example, the operator does not have to set the core in the mold FM having the normal inspection result, and does not need to set the core in the mold FM having the abnormal inspection result.

  The controller F34 is a device that controls the inspection device F3. The controller F34 is configured as a computer system including, for example, a processor such as a CPU, memories such as a RAM and a ROM, and a communication device such as a network card. The controller F34 is, for example, a PC (Personal Computer). The functions of the controller F34 are realized by operating the respective hardware under the control of the processor based on the computer program stored in the memory. Details of the processing executed by the controller F34 will be described later.

  Next, the manufacturing process of the casting will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a process chart showing a manufacturing process of a casting in the casting system shown in FIG. 77. A series of steps shown in FIG. 82 is started when the line controller F6 receives the frame feed completion signal from the transport device F5. Here, a series of processes for one flask FF will be described, focusing on one flask FF.

  First, a molding process FS01 is performed. In the molding process FS01, the line controller F6 transmits a molding start signal and mold information of the position FP1 to the molding machine F2. Then, upon receiving the molding start signal and the mold information from the line controller F6, the molding machine F2 starts manufacturing a mold FM of the type indicated by the pattern code included in the mold information. At this time, the molding machine F2 continues to transmit a molding state signal indicating that molding is being performed to the line controller F6 until the production of the mold FM is completed. Then, when the manufacture of the mold FM is completed, the molding machine F2 transmits a molding state signal indicating that molding is not being performed and a molding result signal indicating the molding result to the line controller F6. Thereafter, the molding machine F2 continues to transmit a molding state signal indicating that molding is not being performed to the line controller F6 while the mold FM is not being manufactured.

  Subsequently, the transport step FS02 is performed. In the transport step FS02, the line controller F6 determines whether or not frame feeding is possible. Specifically, the line controller F6 receives a molding state signal indicating that molding is not being performed from the molding machine F2, an inspection state signal indicating that inspection is not being performed from the inspection device F3, and the pouring machine. If a frame feed enable / disable signal indicating that frame feed is possible is received from F4, it is determined that frame feed is possible. When the line controller F6 determines that the frame feeding is enabled, the line controller F6 transmits a frame feeding signal to the transport device F5. Then, when receiving the frame feed signal from the line controller F6, the transport device F5 transports each casting flask FF by one pitch. Then, when the transfer of one pitch is completed, the transfer device F5 fixes the casting frame FF with a clamp (not shown) and transmits a frame feed completion signal to the line controller F6. The above processing is repeated until the flask FF reaches the inspection area (position FP5).

  Subsequently, when the flask FF reaches the inspection area of the inspection device F3, an inspection step FS03 is performed. In the inspection step FS03, upon receiving the inspection start signal and the mold information from the line controller F6, the inspection apparatus F3 identifies the type of the mold FM to be inspected based on the pattern code included in the mold information, and identifies the identified mold FM. Inspection of the mold FM located in the inspection area is performed according to the type of the mold. At this time, the molding machine F2 continues to transmit an inspection state signal indicating that the inspection is being performed to the line controller F6 until the inspection of the mold FM is completed. Then, when the inspection is completed, the inspection apparatus F3 transmits to the line controller F6 an inspection state signal indicating that the inspection is not being performed and an inspection result signal indicating the inspection result. After that, while the inspection of the mold FM is not performed, the inspection device F3 continues to transmit the inspection state signal indicating that the inspection is not being performed to the line controller F6. Details of the inspection step FS03 will be described later.

  Subsequently, the transport step FS04 is performed. Similarly to the transporting process FS02, in the transporting process FS04, the line controller F6 determines whether or not the frame feeding is possible. I do. Then, when receiving the frame feed signal from the line controller F6, the transport device F5 transports each casting flask FF by one pitch. Then, when the transfer of one pitch is completed, the transfer device F5 fixes the flask FF with a clamp, and transmits a frame feed completion signal to the line controller F6. The above processing is repeated until the flask FF reaches the core set area (position FP9).

  Subsequently, when the flask FF reaches the core setting area, a core setting step FS05 is performed. In the core setting step FS05, the line controller F6 outputs the inspection result of the mold FM formed in the casting frame FF located at the position FP9 to the operation panel F33 via the controller F34, and displays the result on the monitor of the operation panel F33. . Then, the monitor of the operation panel F33 keeps displaying the inspection result while the flask FF is stopped in the core set area. The worker stationed at the core setting place FW checks the inspection result displayed on the monitor, and if the inspection result is normal, sets the core in the mold FM, and if the inspection result is abnormal, The core is not set in the template FM.

  Subsequently, the transport step FS06 is performed. Similarly to the transporting process FS02, in the transporting process FS06, the line controller F6 determines whether or not the frame feeding is possible. I do. Then, when receiving the frame feed signal from the line controller F6, the transport device F5 transports each casting flask FF by one pitch. Then, when the transfer of one pitch is completed, the transfer device F5 fixes the flask FF with a clamp, and transmits a frame feed completion signal to the line controller F6. The above process is repeated until the flask FF reaches the pouring area (position FP18) of the pouring machine F4.

  Subsequently, when the flask FF reaches the pouring area of the pouring machine F4, a pouring step FS07 is performed. In the pouring step FS07, when the pouring machine F4 receives the frame feed completion signal and the mold information from the line controller F6, it identifies the type of the mold FM to be poured, based on the pattern code included in the mold information, Pouring is performed according to the type of the mold FM. At this time, pouring machine F4 performs pouring to mold FM if the inspection result included in the mold information is normal, and does not perform pouring to mold FM if the inspection result is abnormal. The pouring machine F4 continues to transmit a frame feed enable / disable signal indicating that frame feeding is impossible to the line controller F6 until the pouring into the mold FM to be poured is completed. A frame feed enable / disable signal indicating that frame feed is possible is transmitted to the line controller F6.

  Subsequently, a transport step FS08 is performed. Similarly to the transporting process FS02, in the transporting process FS08, the line controller F6 determines whether or not the frame feeding is possible. I do. Then, upon receiving the frame feed signal from the line controller F6, the transport device F5 transports each casting frame FF by one pitch, and when the transport is completed, transmits a frame transport complete signal to the line controller F6. Thus, the manufacturing process of the casting using the flask FF is completed.

  As described above, in the casting system F1, the mold FM is manufactured by the molding machine F2, and the mold FM is inspected by the inspection device F3. Then, the core is set on the mold FM for which the inspection result is normal, and thereafter, pouring is performed by the pouring machine F4 on the mold FM on which the core has been set. A plurality of (19 in FIG. 77) flasks FF are being transported by the transport device F5, and one flask FF is stopped at each position. Then, when the processing in the molding area (position FP1), the inspection area (position FP5), and the pouring area (position FP18) ends, the line controller F6 moves each casting frame FF (mold FM) to the next position. The transport device F5 is controlled to perform the above. Therefore, a molding process FS01 for one flask FF, an inspection process FS03 for another flask FF, a core setting process FS05 for still another flask FF, and a pouring process for still another flask FF FS07 is performed in parallel.

  Next, the inspection step FS03 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a series of processes performed by the controller of the inspection device in the inspection process shown in FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the image acquisition processing shown in FIG. 83 in detail. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing details of the inspection process shown in FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing details of the reflection removal processing by the release agent shown in FIG. FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating an example of the pattern matching model. FIG. 88 is a diagram illustrating an example of an inspection region and a mask region. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display image.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in the inspection step FS03, first, the controller F34 performs an image acquisition process using the imaging device F31 (step FS11). In the image acquisition processing in step FS11, the controller F34 acquires an observation image by causing the imaging device F31 to image the mold FM to which light is irradiated in the observation irradiation pattern, and obtains a plurality of inspection irradiation patterns. In each case, an inspection image is acquired by causing the imaging device F31 to image the mold FM to which light has been irradiated.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 84, first, the controller F34 selects an irradiation pattern for observation (Step FS21). Then, the controller F34 instructs the switch F36 to switch on the lighting devices (illuminating devices F35a to F35f) corresponding to the selected irradiation pattern and to turn off the other lighting devices (illuminating devices F35g to F35j). Is output (step FS22). Thereby, the mold FM is irradiated with light in an irradiation pattern for observation. Then, the controller F34 outputs an imaging instruction to the imaging device F31 (Step FS23). When receiving the imaging instruction from the controller F34, the imaging device F31 performs imaging of the mold FM to obtain an observation image. Then, the imaging device F31 outputs the obtained observation image to the controller F34. In the observation irradiation pattern, the entire surface of the mold FM is uniformly irradiated with light, so that the observation image is an image of the mold FM having a natural appearance.

  Subsequently, the controller F34 selects one irradiation pattern from a plurality of irradiation patterns for inspection set in advance (Step FS24). The order of selecting the irradiation pattern for inspection is arbitrary and may be determined in advance. Then, the controller F34 outputs a switching instruction to the switch F36 to turn on the lighting device corresponding to the selected irradiation pattern and turn off the other lighting devices (step FS25). Thereby, the mold FM is irradiated with light in the selected irradiation pattern. Since the lighting devices F35c to F35j are provided at the ends of the imaging space FV, they irradiate the surface of the mold FM with light obliquely. Therefore, a shadow corresponding to the uneven shape of the surface of the mold FM is generated. Then, the controller F34 outputs an imaging instruction to the imaging device F31 (Step FS26). Upon receiving the imaging instruction from the controller F34, the imaging device F31 performs imaging of the mold FM to obtain an inspection image. Then, the imaging device F31 outputs the acquired inspection image to the controller F34.

  Then, the controller F34 determines whether or not all the irradiation patterns have been selected (Step FS27). If the controller F34 determines that all the irradiation patterns have not been selected (step FS27; NO), the process returns to step FS24, and selects the next irradiation pattern from the unselected irradiation patterns (step FS24). Steps FS25 to FS27 are repeated. On the other hand, in Step FS27, when the controller F34 determines that all the irradiation patterns have been selected (Step FS27; YES), the image acquisition processing ends.

  Subsequently, the controller F34 performs an inspection process (Step FS12). In the inspection processing of Step FS12, the controller F34 inspects the appearance of the mold FM based on the inspection image and the reference image provided in advance. The reference image is an image obtained by imaging the normal mold FM by the imaging device F31. As preliminary processing of the inspection processing, registration of a reference image and setting of inspection parameters are performed. The inspection parameters may be set and changed by an operator of the casting system F1. The inspection parameters include, for example, a pattern matching model, an inspection area, a mask area, a color adjustment area, a minimum defect size, and a binarization threshold.

  The pattern matching model is an image area used for alignment between the reference image and the inspection image. As shown in FIG. 87, the pattern matching model FRpm is registered based on the reference image FGref. The pattern matching model FRpm is set, for example, as a rectangular area.

  The inspection area is an image area to be inspected among the image areas included in the reference image and the inspection image. Except for the inspection area, the inspection device F3 is not the inspection target. As shown in FIG. 88, the inspection region FRd is set for the reference image FGref. The inspection area FRd is set, for example, as a rectangular area. The mask region is a region outside the inspection target in the inspection region. As shown in FIG. 88, the mask region FRm is set within the range of the inspection region FRd. The mask region FRm is set, for example, as a rectangular region.

  The hue adjustment region is an image region used for comparing the hue between the reference image and the inspection image. The hue adjustment area is set for the reference image as in the case of the pattern matching model. The minimum defect size is the minimum size to be regarded as a defect. The minimum defect size may be set, for example, by an actual size (10 mm × 10 mm or the like) or may be set by the number of pixels. The binarization threshold is used when binarizing the difference between the reference image and the inspection image.

  In the inspection processing of Step FS12, as shown in FIG. 85, first, the controller F34 selects one inspection image (first inspection image) from the plurality of inspection images acquired by the image acquisition processing of Step FS11. At the same time, a reference image (first reference image) for the inspection image is selected (step FS31). Specifically, the controller F34 selects a reference image of a normal mold FM that has been irradiated with light in the same irradiation pattern as that used when capturing the selected inspection image.

  The reference image of the template FM is registered in the controller F34 in advance for each type of the template FM. The reference image of the mold FM is registered in advance in the controller F34 for each irradiation pattern. A plurality of reference images may be registered for one irradiation pattern. In this case, the controller F34 selects a reference image having the closest hue to the inspection image from the plurality of reference images. For example, the controller F34 obtains the square root of the sum of squares of the difference between the pixel values of each pixel in the pre-registered hue adjustment region for the inspection image and each reference image, and uses the calculation result as an error. The controller F34 selects a reference image having the smallest error from the plurality of reference images.

  Then, the controller F34 positions the reference image and the inspection image (Step FS32). The position of the mold FM in the reference image and the position of the mold FM in the inspection image may be deviated due to the size of the flask FF due to manufacturing tolerances, and the accuracy of transport of the flask FF by the transport device F5. is there. For this reason, the controller F34 calculates a shift amount between the reference image and the inspection image by pattern matching using, for example, a preset pattern matching model (image area). Then, the controller F34 performs alignment between the reference image and the inspection image based on the amount of displacement. For example, the controller F34 performs the alignment by shifting the inspection image so that the shift amount becomes zero.

  Then, the controller F34 extracts an image of a preset inspection area (hereinafter, simply referred to as “reference image”) from the aligned reference image, and extracts an image of the inspection area (hereinafter simply referred to as “reference image”) from the aligned inspection image. Hereinafter, it is simply referred to as “inspection image”) (step FS33). Since the image of the mask area is not used in the following processing, the controller F34 need not extract the image of the mask area from the inspection area.

  Then, the controller F34 adjusts the colors of the reference image and the inspection image (Step FS34). Specifically, the controller F34 corrects the inspection image so that the difference between the sum of the pixel values of all the pixels included in the reference image and the sum of the pixel values of all the pixels included in the inspection image is reduced. Calculate the coefficient. For example, the controller F34 calculates a correction coefficient that minimizes the root-sum-square (error) of the difference between the pixel value of each pixel included in the reference image and the pixel value of the pixel included in the inspection image corresponding to the pixel. calculate. Then, the controller F34 adjusts the color of the inspection image to the color of the reference image by multiplying each of the pixel values of all the pixels included in the inspection image by the correction coefficient.

  Then, the controller F34 removes reflection by the release agent from the inspection image (Step FS35). In Step FS35, as shown in FIG. 86, first, the controller F34 divides the reference image into a plurality of blocks (Step FS51). The size of each block is set in advance. Then, for each of the plurality of blocks, the controller F34 calculates the maximum pixel value among the pixel values of the pixels included in the block (step FS52).

  Then, the controller F34 selects one pixel from the pixels included in the inspection image (Step FS53). Then, the controller F34 extracts the maximum pixel value of the block including the pixel of the reference image corresponding to the selected pixel (Step FS54). Then, the controller F34 compares the pixel value of the selected pixel with the extracted maximum pixel value, and determines whether or not the pixel value of the selected pixel is larger than the extracted maximum pixel value (Step FS55). ). When the controller F34 determines that the pixel value of the selected pixel is larger than the extracted maximum pixel value (step FS55; YES), the controller F34 determines that reflection by the release agent has occurred, and determines the pixel value of the selected pixel. Is replaced with the maximum pixel value (step FS56). Thereby, reflection is removed from the pixel. On the other hand, when the controller F34 determines that the pixel value of the selected pixel is equal to or smaller than the extracted maximum pixel value (step FS55; NO), the controller F34 determines that reflection by the release agent has not occurred, and The pixel value is maintained as it is.

  Then, the controller F34 determines whether or not all the pixels have been selected (Step FS57). When determining that all the pixels have not been selected (step FS57; NO), the controller F34 returns to step FS53, selects the next pixel from the unselected pixels (step FS53), and returns to steps FS54 to FS54. The process of step FS57 is repeated. On the other hand, in step FS57, if the controller F34 determines that all the pixels have been selected (step FS57; YES), the controller F34 ends the reflection removal processing by the release agent.

  Then, the controller F34 creates a difference image (first difference image) based on the reference image and the inspection image (Step FS36). Specifically, the controller F34 calculates the difference between the pixel value of each pixel included in the reference image and the pixel value of the pixel of the inspection image corresponding to the pixel. The difference image is created by setting (black) to 1 (white) when the difference is equal to or less than the binary threshold. That is, the difference image is a binary image. The controller F34 may create a difference image by subtracting each pixel value of the inspection image from each pixel value of the reference image, and by subtracting each pixel value of the reference image from each pixel value of the inspection image. , A difference image may be created, or both difference images may be created.

  Then, the controller F34 removes noise from the difference image (Step FS37). The controller F34 removes noise from the difference image using, for example, a filter. Then, the controller F34 performs a particle analysis on the difference image (step FS38). The controller F34 calculates a feature amount such as a position, an area, and a length of a lump (blob) in the difference image by the particle analysis. At this time, the controller F34 determines whether each chunk is a defect based on the minimum defect size, and removes the chunk determined not to be a defect from the difference image, thereby detecting the remaining chunk as a defect. For example, the controller F34 determines that a lump smaller than the minimum defect size × 0.5 is not a defect.

  Then, the controller F34 specifies a pseudo defect (Step FS39). The controller F34 specifies a pseudo defect from the blocks included in the difference image based on, for example, the color of the block (defect). If the mold FM is chipped, it may be a shadow in the inspection image. In such a case, the image area of the inspection image corresponding to the block is darker than the surroundings. For this reason, the controller F34 determines whether the block is a pseudo defect by comparing the color of the image area in the inspection image corresponding to the block with the surrounding colors. If the color of the image area is equal to or lighter than the surrounding color, the controller F34 specifies the block as a pseudo defect.

  Further, the controller F34 may specify a pseudo defect from the blocks included in the difference image based on the contour shape of the block (defect). When light is reflected from a certain portion of the mold FM, that portion may be erroneously detected as a defect. In such a case, since the contour shape of the portion has not been changed, the controller F34 determines whether or not the defect is a pseudo defect by comparing the contour shape in the reference image with the contour shape in the inspection image. I do. Specifically, when the contour shape of the image area of the reference image corresponding to the chunk is the same as the contour shape of the image area of the inspection image corresponding to the chunk, the controller F34 specifies the chunk as a pseudo defect. I do.

  Then, the controller F34 creates a partial defect image (Step FS40). The partial defect image is an image showing a defect of the template FM detected in one irradiation pattern. Specifically, the controller F34 creates a partial defect image by removing the pseudo defect identified in step FS39 from the difference image. Then, the controller F34 determines whether or not all the inspection images have been selected (Step FS41). When the controller F34 determines that all the inspection images have not been selected (step FS41; NO), the process returns to step FS31 and selects the next inspection image (second inspection image) from the unselected inspection images. At the same time, a reference image (second reference image) for the inspection image is selected (step FS31), and the processing of steps FS32 to FS41 is repeated.

  On the other hand, in Step FS41, when the controller F34 determines that all the inspection images have been selected (Step FS41; YES), the controller F34 creates a defect image (Step FS42). The defect image is an image indicating a defect of the mold FM detected by the inspection device F3. Specifically, the controller F34 creates a defect image by synthesizing partial defect images (first partial defect image, second partial defect image) obtained from each inspection image. That is, the controller F34 creates an image having all the defects included in each partial defect image as a defect image.

  Subsequently, the controller F34 performs an output process (Step FS13). In the output process of step FS13, the controller F34 outputs the inspection result of the inspection device F3 to the line controller F6. Then, the line controller F6 stores the inspection result in the mold management table. Further, the controller F34 may create a display image to be displayed to an operator based on the observation image acquired in Step FS11 and the defect image created in Step FS12. As shown in FIG. 89, the controller F34 may create the display image FGd by surrounding an image area corresponding to a defect included in the defect image with a rectangular frame Ffd in the observation image FGc. This display image FGd may be displayed on the monitor of the operation panel F33 in the core setting step FS05 described above.

  As described above, in the inspection step FS03, an inspection image is obtained by imaging the mold FM irradiated with light in each of the plurality of inspection irradiation patterns from above along the FZ axis direction, and the inspection image and the inspection image are acquired. The appearance of the mold FM is inspected based on the reference image. Since the illumination devices F35c to F35j are provided at the ends of the imaging space FV, when the mold FM is irradiated with light in the irradiation pattern for inspection, the surface of the mold FM is irradiated with light obliquely. Therefore, a shadow corresponding to the uneven shape of the surface of the mold FM is generated. In other words, by comparing the reference image and the inspection image, the shadow obtained by irradiating the normal mold FM with light is compared with the shadow obtained by irradiating the inspection target mold FM with light. You. Thereby, the inspection device F3 detects defects on the surface of the mold FM such as cracks, chips, and unnecessary protrusions (burrs). Thus, according to the inspection device F3, the three-dimensional shape of the mold FM can be confirmed with a two-dimensional image. In particular, even when the color of the mold FM is black, it is possible to distinguish the cavity of the mold FM from the parting surface.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91 (a) to 91 (c), the operation and effect of the casting system F1 and the inspection device F3 will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining a difference in light irradiation range between the upper irradiation pattern and the middle irradiation pattern. FIG. 91A is a diagram for explaining a difference in defect detection between the upper irradiation pattern and the middle irradiation pattern. FIG. 91 (b) is a plan view of the mold that is irradiated with light in the upper irradiation pattern. FIG. 91 (c) is a plan view of the mold that is irradiated with light in the middle irradiation pattern.

  In the casting system F1 and the inspection device F3, each inspection image is obtained by imaging the mold FM to which light is irradiated in each of the irradiation patterns for inspection from above along the FZ axis direction by the imaging device F31. You. The irradiation pattern for inspection includes an upper irradiation pattern and a middle irradiation pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, the light FLu of the upper irradiation pattern (referred to as “first irradiation pattern”) obtained by lighting the lighting device F35d (first lighting device) is an imaging space in the plane FVP1. The mold FM is irradiated from the rear end of the FV. Light FLm of the middle irradiation pattern (hereinafter, referred to as “second irradiation pattern”) obtained by turning on lighting device F35h (second lighting device) is applied to mold FM from the rear end of imaging space FV in plane FVP2. You. The position (first position) of the lighting device F35d and the position (second position) of the lighting device F35h are different from each other, but overlap each other when viewed from the FZ axis direction. That is, the first irradiation pattern and the second irradiation pattern irradiate the mold FM with light from the same direction (FX axis direction) when viewed from the FZ axis direction, but have different incident angles of light with respect to the mold FM. .

  When the concave portion F51a is provided on the front surface (upper surface) F51 of the mold FM, the incident angle of the light FLm with respect to the front surface F51 of the mold FM is larger than the incident angle of the light FLu. Not irradiated. For this reason, in the inspection image obtained by imaging the mold FM irradiated with the light FLm, the bottom surface F51b cannot be inspected because a shadow is formed on the bottom surface F51b. On the other hand, since the incident angle of the light FLu with respect to the surface F51 of the mold FM is smaller than the incident angle of the light FLm, the light FLu is applied to the bottom surface F51b of the concave portion F51a. Therefore, in the inspection image obtained by imaging the mold FM irradiated with the light FLu, the area of the shadow formed on the bottom surface F51b is small, so that the inspection of the bottom surface F51b can be performed. As described above, by using two illumination devices provided at different positions (heights) in the FZ axis direction, a portion of the surface F51 of the mold FM that is not irradiated with light can be reduced. Thereby, the inspection range can be expanded.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b), when the chip F52 is formed on the surface of the mold FM, the incident angle of the light FLu on the surface of the mold FM is larger than the incident angle of the light FLm. Is small, the shadow F52a obtained by irradiating the chip F52 with the light FLu is small. For this reason, in the inspection image obtained by imaging the mold FM irradiated with the light FLu, the chip F52 may not be detected as a defect. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (c), the angle of incidence of the light FLm on the surface of the mold FM is larger than the angle of incidence of the light FLu. The obtained shadow F52b is larger than the shadow F52a. For this reason, in the inspection image obtained by imaging the mold FM irradiated with the light FLm, the chip F52 may be detected as a defect. As described above, when the mold FM has a defect such as a crack, a chip, or an unnecessary protrusion (burr), the size of the shadow of the defect can be determined to be a defect by irradiating light having different incident angles. It can be increased to any extent. As a result, the accuracy of defect detection can be improved. From the above, it is possible to improve the inspection accuracy of the mold FM.

  Further, the illumination unit F32 uses four upper irradiation patterns (first irradiation pattern and third irradiation pattern) to mold light from four directions of the front end, the rear end, the left end, and the right end of the imaging space FV in the plane FVP1. Irradiate FM. Then, the controller F34 obtains each inspection image (first inspection image, third inspection image) by causing the imaging device F31 to image the mold FM to which the light is irradiated in each upper irradiation pattern. The illumination unit F32 uses four middle irradiation patterns (second irradiation pattern and fourth irradiation pattern) to mold light from four directions of the front end, the rear end, the left end, and the right end of the imaging space FV in the plane FVP2. Irradiate FM. Then, the controller F34 obtains each inspection image (second inspection image, fourth inspection image) by causing the imaging device F31 to image the mold FM to which light is irradiated in each of the middle irradiation patterns. As described above, the position of the lighting device F35d and the position of the lighting device F35h are different from each other, but overlap each other when viewed from the FZ axis direction. Similarly, the position (third position) of the lighting device F35c (third lighting device) and the position (fourth position) of the lighting device F35g (fourth lighting device), the position of the lighting device F35e and the position of the lighting device F35i, and The position of the lighting device F35f and the position of the lighting device F35j are different from each other, but overlap each other when viewed from the FZ axis direction. In this manner, in the four directions viewed from the FZ axis direction, the mold FM is irradiated with light from different positions (heights) in the FZ axis direction, so that the inspection range can be expanded and the defect detection accuracy can be improved. Can be. As a result, it is possible to further improve the inspection accuracy of the mold FM.

  The shadow generated on the mold FM, the brightness distribution on the surface of the mold FM, and the like may differ depending on the direction of light irradiation on the mold FM, the incident angle of light on the mold FM, and the like. When an inspection is performed using a reference image of a normal mold FM irradiated with light in an irradiation pattern different from the irradiation pattern used when the inspection image is captured, the possibility that a part that is not originally a defect is erroneously detected as a defect increases. In the casting system F1 and the inspection apparatus F3, since the inspection image is compared with the reference image of the normal mold FM irradiated with light in the same irradiation pattern when capturing the inspection image, defects are detected. The possibility of erroneous detection can be reduced. As a result, the inspection accuracy of the object can be further improved.

  Further, a partial defect image is created by comparing the inspection image with a reference image corresponding to the inspection image, and a defect image is created by combining the partial defect images obtained from each inspection image. Since the defect image has all the defects included in each partial defect image, a defect image including a defect that cannot be detected by each irradiation pattern is obtained.

  Each of the illumination patterns for inspection is obtained only by turning on one of the lighting devices F35c to F35j and turning off the other lighting devices. Thus, the control and structure for generating the irradiation pattern can be simplified.

  The imaging device F31 is provided at the center of the ceiling of the housing F30, and images the mold FM from above. For this reason, it is possible to image the entire surface of the mold FM with one imaging device F31. Further, a plurality of imaging devices F31 may be provided. In this case, it is possible to detect a smaller defect by increasing the pixel resolution of each imaging device F31.

  When a plurality of reference images are registered for one irradiation pattern, the controller F34 selects a reference image having the closest hue to the inspection image from the plurality of reference images. Due to the state of the mold FM, the state of the lighting unit F32 (the lighting devices F35c to F35j), the state of the imaging device F31, and the like, even if the same mold FM is imaged, the color of the imaged image may be different. . When an inspection is performed using a reference image having a different color from the inspection image, the possibility that a part that is not originally a defect is erroneously detected as a defect increases. In the casting system F1 and the inspection apparatus F3, since the reference image having the color closest to the inspection image is used, the possibility that a defect is erroneously detected can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to further improve the inspection accuracy of the mold FM.

  The inspection device F3 includes a housing F30 that houses the imaging device F31 and the illumination unit F32. The illumination unit F32 irradiates light to the mold FM disposed in the housing F30. For this reason, the possibility that the light from a light source different from the lighting unit F32 (the lighting devices F35a to F35j) is applied to the mold FM can be reduced. Thereby, the influence of the external environment on the inspection can be reduced, so that the inspection accuracy of the mold FM can be further improved.

  When manufacturing the mold FM, a release agent may be used. If the release agent remains on the surface of the mold FM, light may be reflected by the release agent. Due to the influence of this reflection, the luminance (pixel value) of the part of the mold FM where the release agent remains may increase in the inspection image. As a result, the part may be detected as a defect. On the other hand, the controller F34 removes the reflection due to the release agent from the inspection image and inspects the appearance of the mold FM based on the inspection image from which the reflection has been removed and the reference image, thereby reducing erroneous detection of defects. It is possible to do.

  As described above, when light is reflected on the surface of the template FM, the portion may be detected as a defect. The controller F34 determines whether or not reflection has occurred based on the color of the portion in the inspection image and the feature amount such as the contour shape, and removes the portion where the reflection has occurred as a pseudo defect from the difference image. As a result, it is possible to reduce erroneous detection of defects.

  Further, the line controller F6 controls the pouring machine F4 so as not to perform pouring into the mold FM in which the inspection result indicates an abnormality. Even if a casting is performed on the defective mold FM, a defective casting is produced. For this reason, by not pouring the mold FM in which the inspection result shows an abnormality, the defective rate of the casting can be reduced, and the production efficiency of the casting can be improved.

  The monitor of the operation panel F33 displays the inspection result. For this reason, the operator stationed at the core set place FW can be made to recognize the inspection result of the mold FM. Thereby, the worker can perform a work according to the inspection result. For example, the operator can set the core in the mold FM in which the inspection result indicates normal, and do not set the core in the mold FM in which the inspection result indicates abnormal. Further, the operator only needs to check the inspection result displayed on the monitor, and does not need to visually check the defect of the mold FM, so that the operator can concentrate on the core setting operation.

  In addition, the forms of the inspection device and the casting system are not limited to the above forms.

  For example, the object of the appearance inspection by the inspection device F3 is not limited to the mold FM. The object may be a casting or a pattern (mold) for molding.

  The casting system F1 may not include the molding machine F2. In this case, the transport device F5 transports the mold FM manufactured by the external molding machine to the pouring machine F4 via the inspection device F3. Further, the casting system F1 may not include the pouring machine F4. In this case, the transport device F5 transports the mold FM inspected by the inspection device F3 to an external pouring machine.

  The lighting unit F32 may not include a plurality of lighting devices. For example, the illumination unit F32 may include a mechanism that can move one illumination device, and may irradiate the mold FM with light in each illumination pattern by moving the illumination device. In this case, the number of lighting devices can be reduced, and the switch F36 becomes unnecessary. The illuminating unit F32 does not need to irradiate light in the irradiation pattern for observation, and does not have to include a lighting device for observation.

  Further, the illumination unit F32 may irradiate light with one or more different irradiation patterns in addition to the upper irradiation pattern and the middle irradiation pattern. For example, the lighting unit F32 may further include a lighting device arranged on a virtual plane that intersects (orthogonally) with the FZ axis direction different from the plane FVP1 and the plane FVP2. In this case, the portion of the surface of the mold FM that is not irradiated with light can be further reduced. This makes it possible to further expand the inspection range.

  Further, the number of lighting devices provided on each plane is not limited to four. Increasing the number of illumination devices on each plane can further improve the accuracy of defect detection. The number of planes intersecting the FZ axis direction in which the lighting devices are provided is two or more, and the number of lighting devices provided on each plane may be one or more. For example, the lighting unit F32 includes only one set of the lighting device F35c and the lighting device F35g, the lighting device F35d and the lighting device F35h, the lighting device F35e and the lighting device F35i, and the lighting device F35f and the lighting device F35j. May be provided, two sets may be provided, or three sets may be provided.

  When the operator checks the mold FM in which the inspection result of the inspection device F3 is abnormal, it is actually normal, and the defect detected by the inspection device F3 may be a pseudo defect. In such a case, the operator operates the operation panel F33, and the inspection image of the mold FM determined to be abnormal may be additionally registered in the reference image. Thereby, the same erroneous detection can be suppressed, so that the inspection accuracy can be further improved.

  Further, the line controller F6 may further store the mold information of each mold FM in the mold management table in association with at least one of the molding condition of the mold FM and the sand property at the time of molding the mold FM. The molding conditions include an aeration pressure, a squeeze pressure, and a spray time of a release agent. Examples of the sand properties include a compactability (CB) value and a moisture% value. The line controller F6 may analyze the mold information of the plurality of molds FM stored in the mold management table and find out the correlation between the inspection result and the molding condition. For the analysis of the template information, for example, machine learning such as decision tree analysis is used.

  The line controller F6 may obtain, by analysis, molding conditions having a correlation with the mold FM for which the inspection result is normal, and control the molding machine F2 to perform molding under the acquired molding conditions. Specifically, the line controller F6 transmits a signal specifying a molding condition having a correlation with a normal inspection result to the molding machine F2. In this case, the manufacturing accuracy of the mold FM can be improved. As a result, it is possible to improve the production efficiency of the casting.

  The inspection device F3 may transmit the position of the defect to the line controller F6 for the mold FM in which the inspection result is abnormal. The line controller F6 may perform statistical processing on the defect position and analyze the mold information. The line controller F6 uses the processing result of the defect position for, for example, the abnormality of the mold FM and the change of the application position of the release agent.

  The line controller F6 may obtain the sand property having a correlation with the mold FM for which the inspection result indicates normal by the analysis, and may control the molding machine F2 to perform the molding with the obtained sand property. Specifically, the line controller F6 transmits to the molding machine F2 a signal designating a sand property having a correlation with a normal inspection result. In this case, the manufacturing accuracy of the mold FM can be improved. As a result, it is possible to improve the production efficiency of the casting.

  As a result of the analysis, it may be found that a plurality of molding conditions have a correlation with a normal inspection result. Similarly, multiple sand properties may be found to correlate with normal test results. In such a case, the line controller F6 may transmit to the molding machine F2 a signal specifying the molding condition and the sand property having the highest correlation with the normal inspection result.

  When a product manufactured using the mold FM in which the inspection result of the inspection device F3 is normal is defective, it is not necessary to consider a factor generated in the molding process FS01 when taking measures against the defect. Therefore, it is possible to take a countermeasure against a defect on the assumption that a defect has occurred in the molding process FS01 and thereafter, so that the time required for the defect countermeasure can be shortened as compared with the related art.

As described above, in the casting equipment including the inspection device of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment converts the measured data and the like into one frame. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment in that it is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold that have been matched. Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Tenth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a tenth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The tenth modified example is a modified example relating to the mold release device 65 in the casting equipment 1. More specifically, the tenth modification example realizes the configuration of the mold release device 65 in the above embodiment in more detail.
Also in the tenth modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the tenth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating an example of the height of a mold and a casting formed in the mold, which are put into the mold separating device according to the present modification. The mold G102a shown in FIG. 92 includes an upper mold G103a and a lower mold G104a, and a casting G101a is formed between the upper mold G103a and the lower mold G104a. The casting G101a has a casting G105a as a product and a hanger portion G106a. FIG. 92 illustrates a case where the maximum height of the upper mold G103a and the lower mold G104a is 130 mm, and the height of the mold G102a is 260 mm. Further, the upper mold G103a and the lower mold G104a are in contact with each other at a portion having the maximum height, thereby closing the casting G101a. The protrusion G107a and the pouring section G108a will be described later.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram showing another example of the height of the casting mold and the casting formed in the casting mold that are put into the casting mold separation apparatus according to the present modification. The mold G102b shown in FIG. 93 includes an upper mold G103b and a lower mold G104b, and a casting G101b is formed between the upper mold G103b and the lower mold G104b. The casting G101b has a casting G105b as a product and a hanger portion G106b. Note that FIG. 93 illustrates a case where the maximum height of the upper mold G103b and the lower mold G104b are both 225 mm, and the height of the mold G102b is 450 mm. In addition, the upper mold G103b and the lower mold G104b are in contact with each other at a portion having the maximum height, thereby closing the casting G101b. For the protrusion G107b and the pouring section G108b, the description of the projecting section G107a and the pouring section G108a described later is cited.

  FIG. 94 is a plan view showing the positional relationship of the casting G101a shown in FIG. 92 in the mold G102a. As shown in FIGS. 92 and 94, the casting G101a includes a casting G105a and a hanger portion G106a, and the casting G105a and the hanger portion G106a are integrally formed including a portion connecting these components. The hanger hook G31 is disposed below the hanger portion G106a. The protrusion G107a formed at a portion connecting the casting G105a and the hanger portion G106a has a configuration in which a robot arm is provided to grip the casting G101a as described later. The pouring part G108a is a part to be a gate at the time of pouring.

  In FIG. 94, the hanger portion G106a has a T-shape, but is not limited to this. The hanger portion G106a may be H-shaped or cross-shaped. Further, in FIG. 94, two hanger portions G106a are provided, which are used when the casting G101a is put on a pallet truck in a later step.

  Further, since the positional relationship between the casting G101b and the mold G102b shown in FIG. 93 is the same as the positional relationship between the casting G101a and the mold G102a, the description thereof will be omitted with reference to FIG.

  The hanger part G106a of the mold G102a shown in FIG. 92 is located at a height of 130 mm from the mounting surface of the mold G102a, whereas the hanger part G106b of the mold G102b shown in FIG. It is located at a height of 225 mm. Therefore, the position where the casting G101b shown in FIG. 93 is hung is 95 mm, that is, about 10 cm higher than the position where the casting G101a shown in FIG. Therefore, if the hanger hook G31 is arranged at the same position as when the casting G101a shown in FIG. 92 is hung when the casting G101b shown in FIG. 93 is hung, the casting G101b may not hook on the hanger hook G31. As described above, if the height of the hanger portion of the casting in the mold is different, the hanging by the hanger hook may fail. Therefore, in the present modification, the relative position between the hanger portion of the casting and the hanger hook is adjusted by adjusting the angle of the mounting surface on which the mold is mounted.

  In addition, as a molding method of a mold, there are a molding method with a frame and a molding method with a frame. The height of a mold produced by molding with a frame is determined according to the height of a metal frame which is a frame used for molding the mold. Therefore, the heights of the molds manufactured by the same metal frame in the molding with a frame are substantially equal. On the other hand, the height of the mold to be produced is variously different since the metal mold is not used in the molding of the mold in the frame molding. In such a frame blanking die, the height of the mold is different, and the height of the hanger is also variously different. That is, the present embodiment exerts a sufficient effect when applied to a blanking die having different mold heights.

  In FIGS. 92 and 93, the maximum height of the upper mold and the maximum height of the lower mold are equal, but the maximum height of the upper mold and the maximum height of the lower mold may be different.

  In the following description, the casting G101a and the casting G101b are collectively referred to as a casting G101, the casting mold G102a and the casting mold G102b are collectively referred to as a casting mold G102, and the upper casting mold G103a and the upper casting mold G103b are generally referred to as an upper casting G103. The lower mold G104a and the lower mold G104b are collectively referred to as a lower mold G104, the casting G105a and the casting G105b are generally referred to as a casting G105, and the hanger portion G106a and the hanger portion G106b are generally referred to as a hanger portion G106.

  FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram showing a casting line including the mold separating device according to the present modification. A casting line G20 shown in FIG. 95 includes a mold making apparatus (corresponding to the molding equipment 2 in the above embodiment) G21, a pouring apparatus (corresponding to the pouring equipment 7 in the above embodiment) G22, and a first transport section (the above). The second transfer section (corresponding to the secondary cooling transfer device 6 of the cooling transfer device 4 in the above-described embodiment) G24, and the mold release device (corresponding to the primary cooling transfer device 5 of the cooling transfer device 4 in the embodiment). G30 (corresponding to the mold release device 65 in the embodiment).

  The mold molding apparatus G21 molds the mold G102 by molding the mold sand. Here, the casting G101 formed by the mold has a shape having a casting to be a product and a hanger portion used in separating the mold. The pouring device G22 performs pouring of molten metal into the mold G102 molded by the mold molding device G21.

  The first transport unit G23 transports the mold G102 in which the molten metal is cast by the pouring device G22 to form a casting to the mold unpacking device G30. The second transport unit G24 transports the casting G101 unloaded from the mold release device G30 to a location for the next step (not shown). Here, an example of the next step is an inspection step.

  The mold releasing device G30 separates the casting G102 and the casting G101 transported by the first transporting unit G23, separates the casting G102, collects the generated molding sand, and discharges the casting G101.

  Next, the mold releasing device G30 will be described with reference to FIGS. The mold release device G30 includes a table G32 adjacent to the traveling direction of the first transport unit G23 indicated by a white arrow in FIG. The mold G102 on which the casting G101 is formed is placed on the table G32 by the pusher G33. The table G32 is rotatably supported on the first transport unit G23 side around the rotation axis G34, and the opposite of the rotation axis G34 is a free end. Therefore, the angle of the upper surface of the table G32 can be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane. A rail G35 is disposed above the free end of the table G32 in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing, and a suspension device G36 is suspended from the rail G35. A hanger hook G31 is provided at a lower end portion G37 of the suspension device G36, and the hanger hook G31 is configured to be insertable into the mold G102.

  The plurality of suspending devices G36 are arranged on the rail G35, and after finishing the work of hanging the casting G101 by the hanger hook G31 and sieving the mold sand, sequentially proceed in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface, for example, in the back of the paper surface. It is configured as follows.

Next, the procedure of mold release using the mold release apparatus G30 will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a first procedure of mold release in the mold release device G30. The process shown in FIG.
By extruding the mold G102 on the first transport unit G23 with the pusher G33, the mold G102 is placed and set on the table G32 adjacent to the hanger hook G31 provided in the mold unpacking device G30. In the step shown in FIG. 96, the relative position between the hanger hook G31 and the casting G101 is adjusted such that the casting G101 is hooked on the hanger hook G31 when the mold G102 falls in a later step.

  FIG. 98 is a side view showing details of the modified example of the step shown in FIG. 96. The mold G102 shown in FIG. 98 is placed on the table G32, and the angle of the table G32 rotatably supported by the rotation shaft G34 can be adjusted by expansion and contraction of a cylinder G38 provided on the back surface side of the table G32. The cylinder G38 expands and contracts as indicated by the outline arrow based on the position of the hanger portion G106 of the casting G101, thereby inclining the mounting surface of the mold G102, thereby fixing the hanger portion G106 of the casting G101. It is a configuration that can be applied to The mold release device G30 captures the manufacturing data including the height of the mold G102 from the mold making device G21, and estimates the height of the casting G101 from the mounting surface of the hanger portion G106, thereby obtaining the hanger portion of the casting G101. The position of G106 is obtained.

  As described above, the casting G101 without damage can be obtained by adjusting the angle of the table G32 and dropping the mold G102 from the table G32 so that the casting G101 is hooked on the hanger hook G31. When the mold G102 is dropped from the table G32, the table G32 can be freely rotated by rotating the table G32 about the rotation axis G34 so that the angle between the mounting surface of the mold G102 and the direction of gravity becomes small. The mold G102 may be dropped from its end by its own weight, and the hanger hook G31 may be hooked on the hanger portion G106 of the casting G101 when the mold G102 falls.

  FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a second procedure of mold release in the mold release device G30. In the step shown in FIG. 97, in a state where the casting G101 is hung on the hanger hook G31, a vibration by the vibrating device G39 is applied to the casting G101 to the projecting portion or the pouring portion to drop the remaining mold sand.

  As described above, the mold release device described in the present modification is a table angle adjustment unit that adjusts the angle of the table so that the hanger hook is hooked on the hanger portion based on the position of the hanger portion with reference to the mounting surface of the mold. It is a structure provided with.

  As described above, according to this modification, a casting can be obtained without causing damage such as dents and cracks. In addition, the hook can be reliably hooked, and the mold can be reliably separated.

As described above, in the casting equipment provided with the mold release device of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment stores measured data and the like in one frame. Is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as in the above embodiment. Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Eleventh Modification of Embodiment]
Next, an eleventh modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The eleventh modification is a modification related to the casting apparatus 1, in particular, the mold release device 65, similarly to the tenth modification. That is, in the eleventh modification, the configuration of the mold release device 65 in the above embodiment is realized in more detail.
Also in the eleventh modification, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the eleventh modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. In addition, it is the same as the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame of one frame.

  In the tenth modification, the mode in which the relative position of the hanger hook and the hanger portion of the casting is adjusted by adjusting the angle of the table including the mounting surface of the mold, but as described in this modification, The table may be moved up and down.

  This modified example is different from the tenth modified example only in the adjustment of the relative position between the hanger hook and the hanger part of the casting, and the other configurations are the same as those of the tenth modified example. 96, the description with reference to FIG. 97 is cited.

  FIG. 99 is a side view showing details of the modification of the step shown in FIG. 96. The mold G102 shown in FIG. 99 is placed on the table G32, and the height of the vertically movable table G32 can be adjusted by expansion and contraction of a cylinder G38a provided on the back side of the table G32. The cylinder G38a moves up and down the table G32 by expanding and contracting in the direction of the outline arrow based on the position of the hanger portion G106 of the casting G101, whereby the hanger portion G106 of the casting G101 hangs on the hanger hook G31 fixed thereto. is there. When the expandable portion G38a1 indicated by the oblique lines moves up and down, the table G32 moves from the position indicated by the solid line to the position indicated by the dotted line, or the table G32 moves from the position indicated by the dotted line to the position indicated by the solid line. The position of the hanger portion G106 of the casting G101 is obtained in the same manner as in the tenth modification.

  Thus, the casting G101 without damage can be obtained by adjusting the height of the table G32 and dropping the mold G102 from the table G32 so that the casting G101 is hooked on the hanger hook G31. When the mold G102 is dropped from the table G32, the table G32 can be freely rotated by rotating the table G32 about the rotation axis G34 so that the angle between the mounting surface of the mold G102 and the direction of gravity becomes small. The mold G102 may be dropped from its end by its own weight.

  As described above, the mold release device described in the present modification is based on the position of the hanger portion with respect to the mounting surface of the mold, and the height of the table is raised and lowered by hanging the hanger hook on the hanger portion. Is provided with a table elevating unit for adjusting the height.

  In this modification, it is sufficient that the table G32, which is the mounting surface of the mold G102, can be moved up and down, and the means for moving up and down the table G32 is not limited to the above.

  In the tenth modification and the eleventh modification, the hanger hook is fixed, but the hanger hook may be raised and the casting may be lifted after the hanger hook is hung on the hanger portion.

  As described above, as described in the present modification, the mounting surface of the mold is raised and lowered without tilting the mounting surface of the mold to adjust the relative position between the hanger hook and the table. A casting can be obtained without causing damage, and the mold can be separated without fail.

As described above, in the casting equipment provided with the mold release device of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment stores measured data and the like in one frame. Is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as in the above embodiment. Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Twelfth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a twelfth modified example of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The twelfth modified example is a modified example relating to the mold release device 65 in the casting equipment 1 similarly to the tenth modified example and the eleventh modified example. That is, the twelfth modification example realizes the configuration of the mold release device 65 in the above embodiment in more detail.
Also in the twelfth modified example, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the twelfth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

  In a tenth modified example, a mode in which the relative position between the hanger hook and the hanger portion of the casting is adjusted by adjusting the angle of the table, and in the eleventh modified example, the table is moved up and down to move the hanger hook and the hanger portion of the casting. Although the mode for adjusting the relative position of the hanger hook has been described, the hanger hook may be movable as described in this modification.

  This modified example is different from the tenth modified example and the eleventh modified example only in the adjustment of the relative position between the hanger hook and the hanger part of the casting, and the other configuration is the same as the tenth modified example. The description with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and 97 will be cited.

  FIG. 100 is a side view showing details of the modification of the step shown in FIG. 96. The mold G102 shown in FIG. 100 is placed on the table G32. The position of the hanger hook G31a can be adjusted by expansion and contraction of a cylinder G38b provided on the hanger hook G31a. The cylinder G38b adjusts the position of the hanger hook G31a by expanding and contracting based on the position of the hanger portion G106 of the casting G101, whereby the hanger hook G31a is hooked on the hanger portion G106 of the casting G101. The position of the hanger portion G106 of the casting G101 is obtained in the same manner as in the tenth modification.

  Thus, the casting G101 without damage can be obtained by hanging the casting G101 on the hanger hook G31a and dropping the mold G102 from the table G32. When the mold G102 is dropped from the table G32, the table G32 can be freely rotated by rotating the table G32 about the rotation axis G34 so that the angle between the mounting surface of the mold G102 and the direction of gravity becomes small. The mold G102 may be dropped from its end by its own weight.

  In this way, by adjusting the position of the hanger hook G31a so that the hanger hook G31a is hooked on the casting G101 and dropping the mold G102 from the table G32, the casting G101 without damage can be obtained.

  As described above, the mold release device described in the present modified example moves the hanger hook so that the hanger hook is hooked on the hanger portion, based on the position of the hanger portion with respect to the mounting surface of the mold, thereby increasing the height of the table. It is configured to include a hanger hook position adjustment unit for adjusting the height.

  In this modification, it is sufficient that the position of the hanger hook G31 can be adjusted, and the means for adjusting the position of the hanger hook G31 is not limited to the above.

  In this modification, the hanger hook is movable to be hung on the hanger. However, the hanger hook may be raised and the casting may be lifted after the hanger hook is hung on the hanger.

  As described above in this modification, damage such as dents and cracks can also be obtained by adjusting the relative position between the hanger hook and the table by moving the hanger hook without adjusting the mounting surface of the mold. A casting can be obtained without producing.

As described above, in the casting equipment provided with the mold release device of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment stores measured data and the like in one frame. Is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as in the above embodiment. Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Thirteenth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a thirteenth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The thirteenth modification is a modification relating to the casting apparatus 1, particularly to the mold release device 65. More specifically, in the thirteenth modification, the configuration of the mold release device 65 in the above embodiment is realized in more detail.
Also in the thirteenth modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the thirteenth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1 and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  First, a prerequisite technique will be described before describing the thirteenth modification. FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mold to be put into the mold release device according to the present modification and a casting formed inside the mold. A mold H102 shown in FIG. 101 includes an upper mold H103 and a lower mold H104, and a casting H101 is formed between the upper mold H103 and the lower mold H104. The casting H101 has a casting H105 as a product and a hanger portion H106. FIG. 101 illustrates a case where the maximum height of the upper mold H103 and the lower mold H104 is 130 mm, and the height of the mold H102 is 260 mm. In addition, the upper mold H103 and the lower mold H104 are in contact with each other at a portion having the maximum height, thereby closing the casting H101. The protrusion H107 and the pouring section H108 will be described later.

  FIG. 102 is a plan view showing the positional relationship of the casting H101 shown in FIG. 101 in the mold H102. As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the casting H101 includes a casting H105 and a hanger portion H106, and the casting H105 and the hanger portion H106 are integrally formed including a portion connecting these components. A hanger hook H31 is arranged below the hanger portion H106. The protrusion H107 formed at a portion connecting the casting H105 and the hanger portion H106 is provided so that the robot arm can grip the casting H101 in a later step. The pouring part H108 is a part formed at the gate at the time of pouring.

  In FIG. 102, the hanger portion H106 is T-shaped, but is not limited thereto. The hanger portion H106 may be H-shaped or cross-shaped. Although two hanger portions H106 are provided in FIG. 102, the hanger portions H106 are provided so that the casting H101 can be put on a pallet truck in a later step.

  In addition, as a molding method of the mold, there are a frame molding method and a molding method with a frame. The height of a mold produced by molding with a frame is determined according to the height of a metal frame which is a frame used for molding the mold. Therefore, the heights of the molds manufactured by the same metal frame in the molding with a frame are substantially equal. On the other hand, the height of the mold to be produced is variously different since the metal mold is not used in the molding of the mold in the frame molding. This modification can be applied to both the frame blanking mold and the frame-mounted mold.

  In FIG. 101, the maximum height of the upper mold and the maximum height of the lower mold are equal, but the maximum height of the upper mold and the maximum height of the lower mold may be different.

  FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram showing a casting line including a mold separating device according to the present modification. The casting line H20 shown in FIG. 103 includes a mold making apparatus (corresponding to the molding equipment 2 in the above embodiment) H21, a pouring apparatus (corresponding to the pouring equipment 7 in the above embodiment) H22, and a first transport unit (the above H23, a second transport unit (corresponding to the secondary cooling transport device 6 of the cooling transport device 4 in the above-described embodiment) H24, and a mold release device (corresponding to the primary cooling transport device 5 in the above-described embodiment). H30) (corresponding to the mold release device 65 in the embodiment).

  The mold molding apparatus H21 molds the mold H102 by molding the mold sand. Here, the casting H101 formed by the mold has a shape having at least a casting to be a product and a hanger portion used in separating the mold. The pouring device H22 performs pouring for pouring the molten metal into the mold H102 molded by the mold molding device H21.

  The first transport unit H23 transports the mold H102 in which the molten metal is cast by the pouring device H22 to form a casting to the mold unpacking device H30. The second transport unit H24 transports the casting H101 unloaded from the mold release device H30 to a location for the next step (not shown). Here, an example of the next step is an inspection step.

  The mold separating device H30 separates the mold H102 and the casting H101 transported by the first transport unit H23, separates the mold H102, collects the generated mold sand, and discharges the casting H101.

  Next, the mold releasing device H30 will be described with reference to FIG. The mold releasing device H30 includes a table H32 adjacent to the traveling direction of the first transport unit H23 indicated by a white arrow in FIG. The mold H102 on which the casting H101 is formed is placed on a table H32 by a pusher H33. The table H32 is rotatably supported on the opposite side of the first transport unit H23 about the rotation axis H34, and the opposite side of the rotation axis H34 is a free end. Therefore, the angle of the upper surface of the table H32 can be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane. is there. A rail H35 is disposed above the rotation axis H34 of the table H32 in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing, and a suspension device H36 is suspended from the rail H35. A hanger hook H31 is provided at a lower end portion H37 of the suspension device H36, and the hanger hook H31 is configured to be insertable into the mold H102.

  The plurality of suspension devices H36 are arranged on the rail H35, and after finishing the operation of hanging the casting H101 by the hanger hook H31 and dropping the mold sand, sequentially proceed in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface, for example, to the back of the paper surface. Is configured.

  Next, the procedure of mold release using the mold release device H30 will be described. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a first procedure of mold release in the mold release device H30. In the step shown in FIG. 104, the mold H102 on the first transport unit H23 is pushed out by the pusher H33, so that the mold H102 is placed and set on the table H32 adjacent to the hanger hook H31 provided in the mold unpacking device H30. . In the step shown in FIG. 104, the relative position between the hanger hook H31 and the casting H101 is adjusted such that the casting H101 is hooked on the hanger hook H31 when the mold H102 falls in a later step.

  FIG. 105: is a figure which shows an example (comparative example) of mold release performed by suspending a casting on the hanger hook which hangs on the hanger provided in the casting. The table H32 shown in FIG. 105 is rotatably supported about a rotation axis H34a on the opposite side to the hanger hook H31, and the opposite side of the rotation axis H34a, that is, the hanger hook H31 side is a free end. Therefore, the angle of the upper surface of the table H32 can be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane. In FIG. 105, a mold H102 having a casting H101 formed thereon is placed on a table H32. When the table H32 is inclined in this state, the hanger hook H31 hangs on the hanger portion H106 while the mold H102 falls from the table H32, the casting H101 hangs on the hanger hook H31, and the mold H102 falls downward as mold sand. This apparatus separates the casting H101 and the mold H102 as described above, but depending on the conditions at the time of dropping, the separation of the casting H101 and the mold H102 is appropriate without the hanger portion H106 being hooked on the hanger hook H31. May not be performed. That is, when the table H32 is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, the hanger hook H31 side of the mold H102 jumps up in a direction substantially opposite to the direction of gravity, and the hanger portion H106 of the casting H101 does not hook on the hanger hook H31. It may fall.

  One of the following three or a combination thereof may be considered as a cause of such a jump of the mold H102 on the hanger hook H31 side. The first is that the mold sand present between the hanger hook H31 and the hanger portion H106 serves as a resistance axis. Secondly, since the rotation axis H34a side of the table H32 is in contact with the mold H102 until the inclination of the table H32 becomes large, the mold H102 on the side of the hanger hook H31 which is a free end with this contact portion as an axis. Move up. Third, a collision between the inclined table H32 and the mold H102 that has started to fall, which may be caused by the inclination speed of the table H32, may be mentioned. However, the bouncing of the mold H102 includes bouncing that occurs on the hanger hook H31 side for reasons other than these three reasons. In order to reliably suspend the casting H101 with the hanger hook H31 and to obtain the casting H101 without damage, the mold should be separated so that the mold H102 does not jump up on the hanger hook H31 side.

  FIG. 106 is a side view showing details of the modified example of the step shown in FIG. 104. The mold H102 shown in FIG. 106 is placed on the table H32. FIG. 106 is different from FIG. 105 in that a rotation shaft H34 that rotatably supports the table H32 is provided not on the pusher H33 side but on the hanger hook H31 side. The angle of the table H32 rotatably supported by the rotation shaft H34 provided on the hanger hook H31 side can be adjusted by expansion and contraction of a cylinder H38 provided on the back side of the table H32. The cylinder H38 expands and contracts in the direction of the white arrow to adjust the angle of the table H32 and incline the mounting surface of the mold H102 with respect to the horizontal plane. At this time, the table H32 is rotated around the rotation axis H34 as a rotation center so that the angle between the mounting surface of the mold H102 and the direction of gravity becomes small. Thus, the mold H102 is dropped from the table H32 by its own weight, and the hanger hook H31 is hooked on the hanger portion H106 of the casting H101 when the mold H102 is dropped.

  Thus, by providing the rotation axis H34 of the table H32 on the side of the hanger hook H31 on which the hanger portion H106 is hung, it is possible to prevent the mold H102 from jumping up due to one or more of the above-described reasons when it falls. The casting H101 can be prevented from dropping, the hanger hook H31 can be securely hooked on the hanger portion H106 of the casting H101, and the casting H101 without damage can be obtained.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a second procedure of mold release in the mold release device H30. In the step shown in FIG. 107, in a state where the casting H101 is hung on the hanger hook H31, the table H32 inclined about the rotation axis H34 and the protrusion of the casting H101 are brought into contact with each other to drop the remaining mold sand. Is preferred. With such a configuration, the mold sand remaining on the casting H101 can be further dropped.

  However, the table H32 and the casting H101 may not be brought into contact with each other, and vibration may be applied to the casting H101 by a vibration device to remove the remaining mold sand.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the mold release device described in this modification example has the hanger hook H31 arranged on the rotation axis H34 side of the table H32, and the angle of the table H32 so that the hanger hook H31 is hooked on the hanger portion H106. This is a configuration including a table angle adjustment unit for adjusting. The table angle adjusting unit includes at least a cylinder H38 connected to the table H32, and adjusts the angle of the table H32 according to the expansion and contraction of the cylinder H38.

  As described above, according to the present modification, the casting can be obtained without damaging dents, cracks, and the like by preventing splashing when the mold is dropped. In addition, the hook can be reliably hooked on the casting, and the mold can be reliably separated.

As described above, in the casting equipment provided with the mold release device of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment stores measured data and the like in one frame. Is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as in the above embodiment. Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[A fourteenth modification of the embodiment]
Next, a fourteenth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The fourteenth modification is a modification of the casting facility 1, in particular, the mold release device 65, similarly to the thirteenth modification. That is, in the fourteenth modification, the configuration of the mold release device 65 in the above embodiment is realized in more detail.
Also in the fourteenth modified example, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the fourteenth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

  In the thirteenth modified example, the mode in which the table including the mounting surface of the mold is dropped by tilting the table is described. However, as described in the present modified example, the table may be moved in the horizontal direction.

  This modified example is different from the thirteenth modified example only in the operation of the table when the mold is dropped, and the other configuration is the same as the thirteenth modified example. Invite explanation.

  FIG. 108 is a side view showing details of the modified example of the step shown in FIG. 104. As shown in FIG. 108, the cylinder H38a connected to the table H32 expands and contracts with the mold H102 placed on the table H32 by the pusher H33. When the cylinder H38a expands and contracts, the table H32 is pulled in the horizontal direction, and the mold H102 falls by its own weight. When the mold H102 falls, the hanger hook H31 hooks on the hanger portion H106 of the casting H101.

  In this way, by pulling the table H32 in the horizontal direction, the mold H102 can be prevented from jumping when it falls, and the hanger hook H31 can be securely hooked on the hanger portion H106 of the casting H101, and the casting can be undamaged. H101 can be obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the mold release device described in this modification has a configuration including a table horizontal moving unit that horizontally retreats a table H32 that is a mounting surface of the mold H102 in order to drop the mold H102. is there. The table horizontal moving unit includes at least a cylinder H38a connected to the table H32, and the table H32 moves in the horizontal direction according to the expansion and contraction of the cylinder H38a.

  In this modification, it is only necessary that the table H32, which is the mounting surface of the mold H102, can be retracted in the horizontal direction so that the mold H102 falls. The means for moving the table H32 in the horizontal direction is as described above. Not limited. In the configuration shown in FIG. 108, the table H32 is retracted to the pusher H33 side, but the table H32 may be retracted to the hanger hook H31 side, or the table H32 is divided into two parts at the center, and May be retracted to the pusher H33 side, and the table on the hanger hook H31 side may be retracted to the hanger hook H31 side.

  As described above, as described in the present modification, even when the mounting surface of the mold is retracted without tilting the mounting surface of the mold, it is possible to prevent the bounce when the mold is dropped and to cause damage such as dents and cracks. A casting can be obtained without any. In addition, the hook can be reliably hooked on the casting, and the mold can be reliably separated.

As described above, in the casting equipment provided with the mold release device of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment stores measured data and the like in one frame. Is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as in the above embodiment. Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Fifteenth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a fifteenth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment. The fifteenth modification is a modification of the casting facility 1, in particular, the mold release device 65, similarly to the thirteenth modification and the fourteenth modification. That is, the fifteenth modified example realizes the configuration of the mold release device 65 in the above embodiment in more detail.
Also in the fifteenth modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the pair of the upper mold and the lower mold that have been matched. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the fifteenth modified example, the control device 11 acquires the unique data of one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

  In the thirteenth modification, the mode in which the mold is dropped by adjusting the angle of the table is described. In the fourteenth modification, the mode in which the table is retracted in the horizontal direction and the mold is dropped has been described. As described, the table may be a double door.

  This modified example is different from the thirteenth modified example and the fourteenth modified example only in the operation of the table when the mold is dropped, and the other configuration is the same as the thirteenth modified example. The description with reference to FIG. 104 is cited.

  FIG. 109 is a side view showing details of the modified example of the step shown in FIG. 104. As shown in FIG. 109, in a state where the mold H102 is placed on the tables H32A and H32B by the pusher H33, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. When the table H32B is tilted about the rotation axis H34B as an axis to open the mounting surface of the mold H102 formed by the tables H32A and H32B, the mold H102 falls by its own weight. When the mold H102 falls, the hanger hook H31 hooks on the hanger portion H106 of the casting H101.

  In this way, by making the tables H32A and H32B double-opened, it is possible to prevent the mold H102 from jumping up at the time of dropping, and to securely hook the hanger hook H31 on the hanger portion H106 of the casting H101. Obtainable.

  The mold release device described in the present modification has a configuration in which the mounting surface of the mold formed by the tables H32A and H32B is double-opened.

  In this modification, the table H32, which is the mounting surface of the mold H102, may be double-opened so that the mold H102 falls, and the tables H32A, H32B having the rotation axes H34A, H34B as the rotation axes may be rotated. The means for causing the movement is not limited. Although not shown in FIG. 109, a cylinder connected to a table may be provided similarly to FIG.

  As described above in the present modification, even when the mounting surface of the mold is double-opened, it is possible to prevent the mold from jumping when the mold falls, and to obtain a casting without causing damage such as dents and cracks. . In addition, the hook can be reliably hooked on the casting, and the mold can be reliably separated.

As described above, in the casting equipment provided with the mold release device of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment stores measured data and the like in one frame. Is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as in the above embodiment. Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Sixteenth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a sixteenth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment. The sixteenth modification is a modification of the casting facility 1, in particular, the mold release device 65, as in the thirteenth to fifteenth modifications. That is, in the sixteenth modification, the configuration of the mold release device 65 in the above embodiment is realized in more detail.
Also in the sixteenth modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the sixteenth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

  In a thirteenth modified example, a mode in which the mold is dropped by adjusting the angle of the table is described. In a fourteenth modified example, a mode in which the table is retracted in the horizontal direction to drop the mold is described. In a fifteenth modified example, the table is dropped. Although the form in which the mold is dropped by using a double door is described above, a configuration in which the mold is temporarily fixed when the table is retracted may be used as described in this modification.

  This modified example is different from the thirteenth to fifteenth modified examples only in the configuration of the hanger hook, and other configurations are the same as the thirteenth modified example. Therefore, the description with reference to FIGS. 101 to 104 will be omitted. Invite.

  FIG. 110 is a side view showing details of the modification of the step shown in FIG. 104. FIG. 111 is a plan view of a configuration in which a wedge is formed on the mold in the HX-HX of FIG. 110. As shown in FIG. 110, when the mold H102 is placed on the table H32 by the pusher H33, the cylinder H38b expands and contracts, so that the hanger hook holding portion H39 connected to the cylinder H38b holds the hanger hook H31. A wedge H40 is driven into the mold H102 to temporarily fix it. When the table H32 is inclined around the rotation axis H34a while the wedge H40 is driven into the mold H102, the mold H102 falls by its own weight. When the mold H102 falls, the hanger hook H31 hooks on the hanger portion H106 of the casting H101.

  In FIG. 110, the rotation axis H34a of the table H32 is disposed on the pusher H33 side. However, in this modification, similarly to FIG. 106 of the thirteenth modification, the rotation axis H34a is replaced by the hanger hook H31. May be arranged on the table H32. That is, the configuration of the present modification may be combined with the configuration of the thirteenth modification. Further, the configuration of the present modification may be combined with the configurations of the thirteenth and fourteenth modifications.

  In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the wedge H40 is driven into the mold H102, it is possible to prevent the mold H102 from jumping up when the mold H102 falls, and to securely hang the hanger hook H31 on the hanger portion H106 of the casting H101. H101 can be obtained.

As described above, in the casting equipment provided with the mold release device of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment stores measured data and the like in one frame. Is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as in the above embodiment. Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

  The mold release device described in the present modification has a configuration including a mold temporary fixing mechanism for temporarily fixing a mold by driving a wedge into the mold. In the temporary fixing by the mold temporary fixing mechanism, it is sufficient that the mold can be temporarily prevented from dropping when the table whose upper surface is the mounting surface of the mold is retracted. The wedge is an example of the template temporary fixing mechanism, and is not limited to this.

  As described above in the present modification, even when the mold is temporarily fixed by driving a wedge into the mold, it is possible to prevent the bounce when the mold is dropped and obtain a casting without causing damage such as dents and cracks. Can be. In addition, the hook can be reliably hooked on the casting, and the mold can be reliably separated.

  According to the thirteenth to sixteenth modified examples, the table retracting means for retracting the table whose upper surface is the mounting surface of the mold from the mold so that the hanger hook is hooked on the hanger portion by the weight of the mold, and the retracting of the table. At the time of lifting of the mold, it is possible to prevent the mold from jumping on the hanger hook side when the table is retracted, thereby reliably separating the mold. be able to.

[Seventeenth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a seventeenth modified example of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The seventeenth modified example is a modified example related to the casting apparatus 1, particularly, the mold release device 65. More specifically, in the seventeenth modification, the configuration of the mold release device 65 in the above embodiment is realized in more detail.
Also in the seventeenth modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the seventeenth modified example, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  The mold release device according to the present modification is to separate the casting and the casting in which the casting having the hanger portion is formed from the casting, a table detachable from the casting mold, and a transport mechanism for transporting the casting mold on the table. A hanger hook that hangs on a hanger portion in the mold separated from the table, and a removing device that removes a portion of the mold near the hanger portion.

First, a description will be given of a mold put into the mold release device and a casting formed inside the mold according to the present modification. 112 and 113 are a longitudinal sectional view and a transverse sectional view of a mold and a casting, respectively. In FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, the casting formed inside the mold is hatched.
The mold I102 includes an upper mold I103 and a lower mold I104, and a casting I101 is formed between the upper mold I103 and the lower mold I104. The upper mold I103 and the lower mold I104 confine the casting I101 inside by making the product surface of the upper mold I103 and the product surface of the lower mold I104 contact each other.

The casting I101 has a casting I105 as a product, a hanger part I106, and a connecting part I109 (see FIG. 113) for connecting these. The connecting portion I109 is formed to extend in the horizontal direction. The hanger part I106 is connected to the connecting part I109 so as to be orthogonal to the connecting part I109 and extend horizontally along the side surface of the mold I102. Thus, the hanger portion I106 is formed in a T-shape together with the connecting portion I109.
The casting I105, the hanger part I106, and the connecting part I109 are formed integrally. As will be described later, a hanger hook I31 (see FIG. 113) is arranged below the hanger portion I106 when separating the mold sand from the mold I102.

  A projection I107 used when the robot arm grips the casting I101 is formed at a portion connecting the casting I105 and the hanger part I106a. In the upper mold I103, a pouring part I108, which is a part to be a gate at the time of pouring, is formed.

  FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram showing a casting line including the mold separating device according to the present modification. A casting line I20 shown in FIG. 114 includes a mold making apparatus (corresponding to the molding equipment 2 in the above embodiment) I21, a pouring apparatus (corresponding to the pouring equipment 7 in the above embodiment) I22, and a first transport unit (the above I23, a second transport unit (corresponding to the secondary cooling and transporting device 6 of the cooling and transporting device 4 in the above-described embodiment) I24, and a mold release device (as described above). (Corresponding to the mold release device 65 in the embodiment) I30.

  The mold making device I21 forms the mold I102 by molding the mold sand. Here, as described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, the casting I101 formed by the mold has a shape including the casting I105 as a product and the hanger portion I106 used in separating the mold. The pouring device I22 performs pouring of molten metal into the mold I102 molded by the mold making device I21.

  The first transport unit I23 transports the mold I102 in which the molten metal is cast by the pouring device I22 to form a casting to the mold unloading device I30. The mold separating device I30 separates the casting I102 and the casting I101 transported by the first transporting unit I23, separates the casting I102, collects the generated molding sand, and discharges the casting I101. The second transport unit I24 transports the casting I101 discharged from the mold release device I30 to a location of a next process (not shown) such as an inspection process.

FIG. 115 (a) is a side view of the mold release device, and FIG. 115 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line IA-IA of FIG. 115 (a) for explaining the relationship between the hanger hook, the mold and the casting. is there.
The mold release device I30 includes a table I32 and a pusher (transport mechanism) I33.
The table I32 is provided adjacent to the traveling direction of the first transport unit I23 indicated by a white arrow in FIG.
The mold I102 on which the casting I101 is formed is pushed out by a pusher I33 that pushes the mold I102 from the first transport unit I23 toward the table I32, and is transported and placed on the table I32.
The table I32 has an end on the first transport unit I23 side rotatably supported about a rotation axis I34. For this reason, the end I32a of the table I32 on the opposite side to the rotation axis I34 is rotationally moved in the lower direction ID1, and the table I32 is moved to the position indicated by I32A, whereby the table I32 is moved. , Is detachable from the mold I102 placed on the table I32.

The mold release device I30 includes a rail I35, a suspension device I36, an engagement member I37, and a hanger hook I31.
The rail I35 is disposed above the edge I32a of the table I32 in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing. The suspension device I36 is suspended on a rail I35.

At a lower end I36a of the suspension device I36, a hanger hook I31 is provided.
In the present modification, the hanger hook I31 has a curved shape at one end I31a side of a bar having a rectangular cross section, for example, formed of stainless steel or the like. The end portion I31a located on one side of the curved portion I31b is formed so that the thickness gradually decreases from the curved portion I31b toward the one end portion I31a. The hanger hook I31 is disposed such that one end I31a faces the table I32. This tip I31a is located below the hanger I106 of the casting I101 when the mold I102 is pushed out by the pusher I33 and transported to the position indicated by I102A drawn by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 115 (a). It is provided as follows. The hanger hook I31 is freely rotated about a rotation axis I39 provided near the other end I31c so as to extend in the horizontal direction, so that the tip I31a side is located at the position I102A with respect to the hanger portion I106 of the mold I102. It is possible to approach or leave.

Since the hanger hook I31 is provided rotatably in this manner, when the mold I102 is pushed out to the position I102A by the pusher I33, the tip I31a of the hanger hook I31 abuts on the mold sand forming the mold I102, It may be moved by being pushed by I102. In order to suppress this, an engaging member I37 is provided on the side of the hanger hook I31 opposite to the table I32 so as to contact the hanger hook I31.
The engagement member I37 is connected to the pushing device I38. The pushing device I38 is configured to be able to push the engaging member I37 in the direction of the hanger hook I31 and move the tip I31a of the hanger hook I31 in a direction approaching the hanger portion I106 of the mold I102 located at the position I102A.

In this modification, a pair of hanger hooks I31 are provided at both ends of the rotation shaft I39.
As shown in FIG. 113 and FIG. 115 (b), each of the pair of hanger hooks I31 corresponds to each of two ends I106a of the hanger I106 located on the opposite sides with respect to the connecting portion I109. , With the connecting portion I109 interposed therebetween.
As described above, when the mold I102 is conveyed to the position I102A and the table I32 is rotated to be separated from the mold I102, the mold I102 separated from the table I32 falls by its own weight, and falls on the hanger portion I106 in the mold I102. The pair of hanger hooks I31 is hooked.
The pair of hanger hooks I31 are connected and fixed to each other at a plurality of positions by a rotating shaft I39 and a rod-shaped connecting member (not shown).

  A plurality of suspension devices I36 having the hanger hooks I31 are arranged on the rails I35. The suspension device I36 is configured to, after finishing the operation of hanging the casting I101 by the hanger hook I31 and dropping the mold sand, sequentially proceed in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper, for example, in the depth of the paper.

The mold releasing device I30 includes a removing device for removing a portion of the mold I102 near the hanger portion I106. FIG. 116 (a) is a side view of the mold release device from which mold sand has been removed, and FIG. 116 (b) is a side view of the mold and the casting when viewed from the removal device I40 side in FIG. 116 (a). FIG. 116 (c) is a side view of a state where the mold is transported.
The removing device I40 includes a bar-shaped support member I41 extending in the vertical direction, and an air nozzle I42 provided at a lower end I41a of the support member I41.

The support member I41 is provided between the pusher I33 and the hanger hook I31, more specifically, at a position above the table I32 on the first transport unit I23 side.
The air nozzle I42 is provided so as to blow air in the direction ID2 of the first transport unit I23. In the present modification, the air nozzles I42 are provided so as to form a pair in the horizontal direction with the support member I41 interposed therebetween. More specifically, in this modified example, two air nozzles I42 are vertically arranged on the near side of the paper of FIG. 116A, and two air nozzles I42 are vertically arranged on the back of the paper of FIG. 116A. Two, four in total, are provided.
Each air nozzle I42 is connected to a compressor (not shown) via a hose (not shown).

The support member I41 is provided such that the lower end I41a is movable in the vertical direction.
As shown in FIG. 116 (a), the support member I41 is configured such that the air nozzle I42 provided at the lower end I41a is higher than the hanger part I106 above the lower end I102a of the mold I102 provided on the first transport unit I23. Movable to be positioned below.
In this state, the air nozzle I42 blows air to a portion I102c near the hanger portion I106 of the mold I102 provided on the first transport section I23, and separates and removes the mold sand from the blown portion.
In this modification, each of the air nozzles I42 provided so as to form a pair with the support member I41 interposed therebetween corresponds to each of the pair of hanger hooks I31 of the mold I102 provided on the first transport unit I23. Air is blown to a portion I102c below the hanger portion I106 (the portion near the hanger portion) I102c indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 116 (b).

  Further, the support member I41 is movable such that the lower end I41a is positioned above the upper end I102b of the mold I102. In this state, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), the pusher I33 can transport the mold I102 onto the table I32 without the support member I41 becoming an obstacle.

  As described above, the air nozzle I42 is provided at a position between the pusher I33 and the hanger hook I31 so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

Next, a method of separating the mold by the above-described mold separating apparatus I30 will be described with reference to FIGS.
The present mold separating method is to separate a casting and a casting formed with a hanger part from a casting, by removing a part near the hanger part of the casting mold and placing the casting mold on a table which can be separated from the casting mold. And the hanger is positioned above the hanger hook, the mold is separated from the table, and the hanger is hung on the hanger hook.

First, in a state where the mold I102 is provided on the first transport unit I23, the removing device I40 is lowered, and each of the air nozzles I42 is positioned below the hanger unit I106 shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 116 (b). And the portion I102c.
In this state, air is blown from the air nozzle I42 to the portion I102c near the hanger portion I106 of the mold I102 to separate and remove the mold sand from the blown portion.
Thereafter, the removing device I40 is raised and moved so that the lower end I41a of the support member I41 is positioned above the upper end I102b of the mold I102.

Subsequently, in a state in which the engaging member I37 is in contact with the hanger hook I31, the mold I102 is pushed out from the first carrying unit I23 toward the table I32 by the pusher I33, so that the mold I102 is carried onto the table I32, Place. In this state, the tip I31a of the hanger hook I31 is located below the hanger portion I106 of the casting I101.
Then, the end I32a of the table I32 on the side opposite to the rotation axis I34 is rotated in the lower direction ID1, and the table I32 is separated from the mold I102 placed on the table I32. Then, the mold I102 separated from the table I32 falls by its own weight, and a pair of hanger hooks I31 is hung on the hanger part I106 in the mold I102 and is hung. Most of the mold sand forming the mold I102 is separated from the casting I101 by the impact of the drop at this time.

  The mold sand still fixed and remaining on the casting I101 is separated and removed from the casting I101 by a method such as applying vibration by a vibration device (not shown).

  Next, the effects of the above-described apparatus for separating molds and the method for separating molds will be described.

The above-mentioned mold separating device I30 separates the mold I102 on which the casting I101 having the casting I105 and the hanger portion I106 is formed from the casting I101, and a table I32 detachable from the casting mold I102 and a table I32 on the table I32. A pusher I33 for transporting the mold I102, a hanger hook I31 hanging on a hanger I106 in the mold I102 separated from the table I32, and a removing device I40 for removing a portion I102c near the hanger I106 of the mold I102. .
According to the above configuration, before the mold I102 is conveyed by the pusher I33 and the hanger hook I31 is positioned below the hanger portion I106, the removing device I40 removes the portion I102c of the mold I102 near the hanger portion I106. It can be removed. Thereby, when the hanger part I106 of the mold I102 is conveyed above the hanger hook I31, the amount of mold sand forming the mold I102, which comes into contact with the hanger hook I31, can be reduced. Therefore, abrasion of the hanger hook I31, particularly the tip I31a, can be suppressed, and the casting I101 can be reliably hung by the hanger hook I31 when the mold I102 is lowered.
Further, as described above, since the amount of the mold sand forming the mold I102 with which the hanger hook I31 comes into contact is reduced, the resistance of the mold sand when the hanger hook I31 penetrates the mold I102 can be reduced. . This improves the positioning accuracy of the hanger hook I31, so that the casting I101 can be suspended more reliably.

Further, the removing device I40 includes an air nozzle I42 for blowing air to a portion I102c near the hanger portion I106 of the mold I102 to remove the mold sand.
According to the above configuration, separation and removal of the mold sand from the mold I102 can be easily performed.

The air nozzle I42 is provided at a position between the pusher I33 and the hanger hook I31 so as to be movable in the vertical direction.
According to the above configuration, even if the removing device I40 is provided at a position between the pusher I33 and the hanger hook I31, the lower end I41a of the support member I41 is positioned above the upper end I102b of the mold I102. , The pusher I33 can transport the mold I102 onto the table I32 without the support member I41 becoming an obstacle.

As described above, in the casting equipment provided with the mold release device of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment stores measured data and the like in one frame. Is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as in the above embodiment. Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Eighteenth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, an eighteenth modified example of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The eighteenth modification is a modification of the casting facility 1, in particular, the mold release device 65, similarly to the seventeenth modification. More specifically, the eighteenth modification is a further modification of the seventeenth modification.
Also in the eighteenth modification, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the eighteenth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

FIG. 117 is a side view of the mold releasing device I50 in the first modification. The mold removing device I50 of the present modification is different from the mold removing device I30 of the seventeenth modification in the location where the air nozzle I52 of the removing device I51 is provided.
That is, in the present modification, the air nozzle I52 is fixed to the engaging member I37 to which the hanger hook I31 is fixed. Accordingly, the mold releasing device I50 does not include the support member I41.

  The method of removing the mold using the mold removing device I50 is as follows. First, in a state where the engaging member I37 is in contact with the hanger hook I31, the mold I102 is once conveyed to a position short of the hanger hook I31 by the pusher I33, and is directed by the air nozzle I52 toward the portion I102c near the hanger portion I106 of the mold I102. Blow air as indicated as ID3 to remove mold sand. Thereafter, the pusher I33 conveys the mold I102 onto the table I32, and positions the hanger portion I106 of the casting I101 above the tip I31a of the hanger hook I31. Then, the mold I102 is separated from the table I32, and the hanger portion I106 is hung on the hanger hook I31.

According to the above configuration, since the air blown out from the air nozzle I52 hits the hanger hook I31, the mold sand attached to the hanger hook I31 can be removed. Accordingly, the hanger portion I106 is not hung in a state where the sand adheres to the hanger hook I31, so that the wear of the hanger hook I31 can be more effectively suppressed.
Furthermore, since the air nozzle I52 is attached to the engaging member I37 instead of the hanger hook I31, replacement when the hanger hook I31 is worn is easy.

  It is needless to say that this modification has another effect similar to that of the seventeenth modification already described.

[Nineteenth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a nineteenth modified example of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The nineteenth modified example is a modified example relating to the mold separating device 65 in the casting equipment 1 similarly to the seventeenth and eighteenth modified examples. More specifically, the nineteenth modification is a further modification of the seventeenth modification.
Also in the nineteenth modified example, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the nineteenth modified example, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

  FIG. 118 (a) is a side view of a mold releasing device I60 according to the present modification, and FIG. 118 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the IB-IB portion of FIG. 118 (a). The mold removing device I60 of the present modification is different from the mold removing device I30 of the seventeenth modification in that the removing device I61 removes the mold sand of the mold I102 by scraping off the sand using the removing plate I63.

The removal device I61 of the mold release device I60 includes a rod-shaped support member I62 extending in the vertical direction, and a removal plate I63 provided at a lower end I62a of the support member I62.
The support member I62 is provided between the pusher I33 and the hanger hook I31, more specifically, at a position above the table I32 on the first transport unit I23 side.
The removal plate I63 is provided so as to extend in the vertical plane and positioned on the first transport portion I23 side of the support member I62 so as to be rotatable in a horizontal direction about a rotation axis I63a.
The removal plate I63 may have any shape, but a simple shape such as a rectangular shape is desirable in order to reduce the cost of replacement when it is deteriorated.

The support member I62 is provided so that the lower end I62a is movable in the vertical direction.
As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the support member I62 is configured such that the removal plate I63 provided on the lower end I62a is higher than the lower end I102a of the mold I102 provided on the first transporting unit I23 from the hanger portion I106. Is also movable to be positioned below.
In this state, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the removal plate I63 is rotated about the rotation axis I63a in the direction of the direction ID4, for example, to a position indicated by I63A, whereby the first conveyance unit I23 is rotated. The mold sand of the portion I102c near the hanger portion I106 of the mold I102 provided above is scraped off. In FIG. 118 (b), the mold sand located in the region IR1 on the right side of the arc indicated by the two-dot chain line is scraped off.

  Further, the support member I62 is movable so that the lower end I62a is positioned above the upper end I102b of the mold I102. In this state, the pusher I33 can transport the mold I102 onto the table I32 without the support member I62 becoming an obstacle.

  As described above, the removing device I61 is provided with the removing plate I63 that extends in the vertical plane at the height position of the portion I102c near the hanger portion I106 of the mold I102 and is rotatable in the horizontal direction.

  When the removal plate I63 is rotated as described above, the mold I102 may be displaced from the fixed position of the first transport unit I23 due to the force for scraping the mold I102. In order to suppress this, the removing device I61 includes two movement suppressing plates I64. The movement suppressing plate I64 is provided along two side surfaces of the mold I102 placed on the first transport unit I23, which are parallel to a line connecting the hanger hook I31 and the pusher I33.

The method of separating the mold using the mold separating device I60 is as follows. First, in a state where the mold I102 is provided on the first transport unit I23, the removing device I61 is lowered, and the removing plate I63 faces the portion I102c below the hanger unit I106.
In this state, the removing plate I63 is rotated to remove the mold sand in the portion I102c near the hanger portion I106 of the mold I102.
Thereafter, the removing device I61 is raised, and moved so that the lower end I62a of the support member I62 is positioned above the upper end I102b of the mold I102.
Then, with the engaging member I37 in contact with the hanger hook I31, the pusher I33 conveys the mold I102, and conveys the mold I102 onto the table I32. Hanger part I106 is positioned. Then, the mold I102 is separated from the table I32, and the hanger portion I106 is hung on the hanger hook I31.

  It goes without saying that this modification has the same effect as the seventeenth modification already described.

[Twentieth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a twentieth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment. The twentieth modification is a modification of the casting equipment 1, particularly the mold release device 65, as in the seventeenth to nineteenth modifications. More specifically, the twentieth modification is a further modification of the seventeenth modification.
Also in the twentieth modification, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like to one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the twentieth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

  FIG. 119 (a) is a side view of a mold releasing device I70 according to the present modification, and FIG. 119 (b) is a plan view of the vicinity of a portion of FIG. In the mold removing device I70 of the present modification, the mold removing device I30 of the seventeenth modification is different from the mold removing device I71 in that the removing head I72 is extruded toward the mold I102 by the extruding device I73 and the mold sand of the mold I102. The difference is that they are removed by shaving off.

The removing device I71 of the mold releasing device I70 includes a removing head I72 provided at the height position of a portion I102c near the hanger portion I106 of the mold I102, and extrusion for pushing the removing head I72 horizontally toward the mold I102. Device I73.
The removal head I72 is, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped steel member. The removal head I72 is positioned below the hanger I106 so as to be adjacent to the mold I102 placed on the first transport unit I23 in a direction orthogonal to the line connecting the hanger hook I31 and the pusher I33 in the horizontal plane. It is positioned and provided.
The extruder I73 is, for example, a cylinder, and pushes out the removing head I72 toward the mold I102, for example, in a direction indicated by a direction ID5, and the extruder I73 near the hanger portion I106 of the mold I102 provided on the first transport unit I23. The mold sand of the portion I102c is extruded and shaved off. In FIG. 119 (b), the mold sand located in the region IR2 on the right side of the straight line indicated by the two-dot chain line is scraped off.

  The removing device I71 includes two movement suppressing plates I64, as in the nineteenth modification.

The method of separating the mold using the mold separating device I70 is as follows. First, in a state where the mold I102 is provided on the first transport unit I23, the extruder I73 pushes out the removing head I72 in the direction of the mold I102, and removes the mold sand of the portion I102c near the hanger I106 of the mold I102. I do.
Then, in a state where the engaging member I37 is in contact with the hanger hook I31, the pusher I33 conveys the mold I102, and conveys the mold I102 onto the table I32, so that the casting I101 is placed above the tip I31a of the hanger hook I31. Hanger part I106 is positioned. Then, the mold I102 is separated from the table I32, and the hanger portion I106 is hung on the hanger hook I31.

  It goes without saying that this modification has the same effect as the seventeenth modification already described.

[Twenty-first Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a twenty-first modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The twenty-first modification is a modification of the casting equipment 1, particularly the mold release device 65, as in the seventeenth to twentieth modifications. More specifically, in the twenty-first modification, the configuration of the mold release device 65 in the above embodiment is realized in more detail.
Also in the twenty-first modification, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the twenty-first modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram of a mold releasing device I80 in the present modification. In this modification, portions corresponding to those of the seventeenth modification are given the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.
In this modification, the mold release device I80 hangs on a table detachable from the mold, a pusher for conveying the mold on the table, and a hanger part in the mold separated from the table, similarly to the seventeenth modification. And a hanger hook I31. The mold release device I80 includes a wear detection device I81 that detects wear of the hanger hook I31.

  When the casting I101 is repeatedly hung on the hanger hook 31, the hanger portion I106 of the casting I101 abuts and the weight of the casting I101 acts, and the upper side I31d of the curved portion I31b of the hanger hook I31 is worn and worn. When the upper part I31d of the hanger hook I31 wears, the thickness of the worn part becomes thinner. It is lower than the case where

In the present modification, the wear detecting device I81 includes a casting height measuring device I82 that measures the height position of the casting I101 suspended from the hanger hook I31. The wear detection device I81 also includes a comparison unit I83 and a notification device I84.
The casting height measuring device I82 may be a sensor that measures the height of the object using, for example, a laser or the like. The casting height measuring device I82 measures the height position of the hanger portion I106 of the casting I101 hung on the hanger hook I31 and transmits the height position to the comparison portion I83.
The comparing unit I83 compares the height position with a predetermined value, and when the height position is lower than the predetermined value, notifies the worker that the hanger hook I31 has worn out by a notification device I84 such as an alarm. I do.

As described above, the mold separating device I80 separates the casting and the casting in which the casting I101 having the hanger portion I106 is formed from the casting I101, and includes a table detachable from the casting mold, , A hanger hook I31 that hangs on a hanger portion I106 in the mold separated from the table, and a wear detection device I81 that detects wear of the hanger hook I31.
According to the above configuration, since the wear of the hanger hook I31 can be detected, the hanger hook I31 may be appropriately removed before the abrasion proceeds so that the hanger hook I31 cannot reliably suspend the mold I102. , Can be replaced. Therefore, the casting I101 can be reliably suspended by the hanger hook I31.

In addition, the wear detecting device I81 includes a casting height measuring device I82 that measures the height position of the casting I101 suspended from the hanger hook I31.
According to the above configuration, the wear state of the upper side I31d of the curved portion I31b of the hanger hook I31 can be grasped by measuring the height position of the casting I101 hung on the hanger hook I31. Therefore, before the mold I102 is suspended by the hanger hook I31, the hanger hook I31 can be appropriately replaced before the mold I102 falls and the abrasion progresses so that the mold I102 falls. Therefore, the casting I101 can be reliably suspended by the hanger hook I31.

As described above, in the casting equipment provided with the mold release device of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment stores measured data and the like in one frame. Is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as in the above embodiment.
Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Twenty-second modification of the embodiment]
Next, a twenty-second modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The twenty-second modification is a modification of the casting equipment 1, particularly the mold release device 65, as in the twenty-first modification. More specifically, the twenty-second modification is a further modification of the twenty-first modification.
Also in the twenty-second modification, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the twenty-second modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data of one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

  FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram of a mold releasing device I90 in this modification. In the mold removing device I90 of the present modification, the mold removing device I80 of the twenty-first modification is different from the mold detecting device I92 in that the wear detecting device I91 captures an image of the hanger hook I31 and detects the wear state of the hanger hook I31. Is different.

More specifically, the wear detecting device I91 of the mold separating device I90 includes an imaging device I92 and an image comparing unit I93.
The imaging device I92 is, for example, a camera or the like, and captures an image of the hanger hook I31 on which the casting I101 is not hung to generate a captured image I94.
The image comparison unit I93 compares the basic image I95 obtained by imaging the new unworn hanger hook I31 with the photographed image I94, and detects the degree of wear of the photographed image I94 by image processing or the like.

It is needless to say that this modification has the same effect as the twenty-first modification described above.
In particular, in this modified example, it is possible to detect the wear state of not only the upper side I31d of the curved portion I31b of the hanger hook I31 but also the entire hanger hook I31. That is, since the wear state of the tip I31a of the hanger hook I31 can be detected, the hanger hook I31 may be appropriately replaced before the wear progresses so that the hanger hook I31 cannot effectively penetrate the mold I102. it can. Therefore, the casting I101 can be reliably suspended by the hanger hook I31.

  In addition, the mold separating apparatus and the mold separating method of the 17th to 22nd modifications are not limited to the above-described modifications described with reference to the drawings, and various other modifications may be made within the technical scope thereof. Can be considered.

  For example, in the seventeenth modification, the removing device I40 including the air nozzle I42 is provided between the pusher I33 and the hanger hook I31, but is not limited thereto. For example, it may be provided at an arbitrary position on the route where the mold I102 is transported in the first transport unit I23 shown in FIG. 114. In this case, the mold sand is removed while the mold I102 is being conveyed to the mold separating device I30.

  In the seventeenth modified example and the eighteenth modified example, the air nozzles I42 and I52 are provided so as to blow out air. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the air nozzle provided in the removing device may be configured to remove the mold sand from the mold by sucking the mold sand constituting the mold. In this case, it is possible to prevent the mold sand from scattering when the mold sand is removed.

  Further, the hanger portion I106 of the casting I101 shown in FIGS. 112 and 113 used in the above description is formed in a T shape, but is not limited to this. For example, the hanger portion may be formed in another shape such as an H shape.

In addition to the above, it is possible to selectively select the configuration described in the seventeenth to twenty-second modifications or to appropriately change the configuration to another configuration.
For example, the removing devices I40 and I51 having the air nozzles I42 and I52 described as the seventeenth and eighteenth modifications, respectively, remove the mold sand as described in the nineteenth and twentieth modifications. It is good also as composition provided with I63, removal head I72, and extrusion device I73.
In addition, the mold releasing devices I30, I50, I60, and I70 of the seventeenth to twentieth modifications also have the wear detecting devices I81 and I91 as shown in the twenty-first and twenty-second modifications, and partially remove the molding sand of the mold I102. It is good also as a structure which detects the abrasion state of the hanger hook I31, removing it.
Alternatively, the mold release devices I80 and I90 of the twenty-first and twenty-second modifications may include the removal devices I40, I51, I61, and I71 shown as the seventeenth to twentieth modifications.

[Twenty-third Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a twenty-third modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment. The twenty-third modification is a modification of the casting facility 1, particularly the sand processing facility 10, and is a monitoring system for the sand processing facility 10.
Also in the twenty-third modification, the control device of the sand processing equipment is configured to perform various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, that is, the sand property and the measurement time, for one frame of a mold, that is, a pair of upper molds that have been matched. It is the same as the above embodiment in that the specific data corresponding to the mold sand to be molded as the lower mold, that is, sand processing data, is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 122 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the green sand processing equipment monitoring system according to the present modification. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the configuration of the green sand processing facility.

  The green sand processing equipment monitoring system J1 includes an overband magnetic separator J2, a magnet pulley J3, a rotary screen J4, a hopper J5, a bucket elevator J6, a dust collector J7, a sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8, a sand stirrer J9, a sand cooler J10, Dust collector J11, Sand bin J12, Moisture measurement and injection device J13, Water pressure stabilization device J14, Bucket elevator J15, Meter J16, Additive charging device J17, Kneader J18, Kneader water injection tank J19, Compactability control device J20, Dust collector J21 , A hopper J22, and a green sand processing facility (corresponding to the sand processing facility 10 in the above-described embodiment) including a green sand property automatic measuring device J23, and further, an information collecting device J24 and a diagnostic device J25. ing.

  The over-band magnetic separator J2 and the magnet pulley J3 magnetically select the collected sand (green sand) collected from the green casting equipment, and separate and remove iron pieces from the collected sand. The rotary screen J4 continuously grinds the recovered sand. The hopper J5 stores the recovered sand after the pulverization. The bucket elevator J6 transports the collected sand stored in the hopper J5. The dust collector J7 collects dust generated in the rotary screen J4 and dust generated during transportation by the bucket elevator J6.

  A sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8, which is one of the green sand treatment facilities, measures the temperature and water content of the recovered sand conveyed via the bucket elevator J6, and the amount of water (cooling) is proportional to the measured value. Water) into the recovered sand. The sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8 is called MIAII. The sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8 includes a measurement unit J31, a water injection unit J32, and a control unit J33. The measuring unit J31 measures the temperature and the water content of the collected sand. The water injection unit J32 injects water into the recovered sand.

  The control unit J33 controls the operation of the sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8. For example, the controller J33 determines the required amount of cooling water to be injected from the temperature and moisture content of the collected sand measured by the measuring unit J31, and instructs the water injection unit J32 to inject the determined amount of injected water. All the measurement data of the temperature and the water content are collected in the control unit J33. The control unit J33 is a computer or a PLC.

  The sand stirring device J9 stirs the water (cooling water) injected from the water injection section J32 of the sand temperature / water proportional water injection device J8 into the recovered sand.

  Sand cooler J10, which is one of the green sand processing facilities, cools the recovered sand. Sand cooler J10 is called RCT. The sand cooler J10 includes a measuring unit J34 and a control unit J35. The measuring unit J34 measures the temperature of the collected sand at the outlet of the sand cooler J10.

  The control unit J35 operates the sand cooler J10 to cool the recovered sand by natural cooling. The control unit J35 is a computer or a PLC.

  The dust collector J11 collects dust generated during the stirring by the sand stirrer J9 and dust generated in the sand cooler J10.

  Sand bin J12, which is one of the green sand treatment facilities, stores the recovered sand from sand cooler J10. Sand bin J12 is called BIN. The sand bin J12 includes a measurement unit J36 and a control unit J37. The measuring unit J36 measures the amount of collected sand (the height of the sand) stored in the sand bin J12. The control unit J37 controls the operation of the sand bin J12. All the measurement data of the amount of the collected sand is collected in the control unit J37. The control unit J37 is a computer or a PLC.

  A moisture measuring and injecting device J13, which is one of the green sand treatment facilities, measures the temperature and the moisture content of the recovered sand discharged from the sand bin J12. Then, after the recovered sand is carried into the kneading machine J18, a predetermined amount of water is poured into the kneading machine J18 at the start of the kneading process with the additive. The moisture measurement and injection device J13 is called a BMIC. The moisture measuring and injecting device J13 includes a measuring unit J38, an injecting unit J39, and a control unit J40. The measuring unit J38 measures the temperature and the amount of water of the recovered sand. The water injection section J39 injects water into the kneading machine J18 after the recovered sand is carried into the kneading machine J18.

  The control unit J40 controls the operation of the moisture measurement and injection device J13. For example, the control unit J40 determines the required water injection amount from the temperature and the water content of the collected sand measured by the measurement unit J40, and instructs the water injection unit J39 to inject the determined water injection amount. All the measurement data of the temperature and the amount of moisture are collected in the control unit J40. The control unit J40 is a computer or a PLC.

  The water pressure stabilizing device J14 stabilizes the pressure of the water from the water source J41, and sends the water to the sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8 and the moisture measurement water injection device J13. Bucket elevator J15 conveys the collected sand stored in sand bin J12 to scale J16. The measuring device J16 stores the recovered sand, and inputs a predetermined amount of the recovered sand measured by a sand measuring means (not shown) provided therein to the kneading machine J18. The additive introduction device J17 discharges the additive into the kneading machine J18 according to an instruction from the kneading machine J18 or an instruction from an operator.

  The kneading machine J18, which is one of the green sand processing equipment, was supplied with water injected from the water measuring and pouring device J13, recovered sand (raw sand) charged from the measuring instrument J16, and was charged from the additive charging device J17. Additives are added and kneaded to produce kneaded sand. The kneading machine J18 is called MS. The kneading machine J18 includes a measuring unit J42 and a control unit J43. The measuring unit J42 measures the operation time of the kneading machine J18. The control unit J43 controls the operation of the kneading machine J18. All the measurement data regarding the kneading process in the kneading machine J18 is collected in the control unit J43. The control unit J43 is a computer or a PLC.

  The kneader injection tank J19 additionally injects water from the water source J41 during the kneading process.

  The compactability control device J20, which is one of the green sand processing equipment, measures the temperature, the water content, and the CB value (compactability value) of the kneading sand in the kneading machine J18, and provides the kneading machine J18 in the kneading process. Add additional water. The CB value indicates the properties of the kneaded sand. Compactability control device J20 is called MIEII. The compactibility control device J20 includes a measurement unit J44 and a control unit J45. The measuring unit J44 measures the temperature, the water content, and the CB value of the kneading sand. The control unit J45 controls the operation of the compactability control device J20 and the water injection tank J19 of the kneader.

  For example, the temperature of the kneaded sand measured by the measuring unit J44, the water content, and the CB value, the control unit J45 determines an additional water injection amount required, and determines the additional water injection amount determined in the kneading machine injection tank J19. Instruct to inject water. The measurement data of the temperature, the water content, and the CB value are all collected in the control unit J45. The control unit J45 is a computer or a PLC. The CB value can be stabilized in a short kneading time by combining the water measuring water injection device J13 and the compactibility control device J20.

  The dust collector J21 collects dust generated during transportation by the bucket elevator J15, dust generated in the additive input device J17, and dust generated during the kneading process in the kneader J18.

  A hopper J22, which is one of the green sand processing facilities, stores the kneaded sand produced by the kneader J18. Hopper J22 is called HOPPER. The hopper J22 includes a measuring unit J46 and a control unit J47. The measuring unit J46 measures the amount of kneaded sand (the height of the sand) stored in the hopper J22. The control unit J47 controls the operation of the hopper J22. All the measurement data of the amount of the kneading sand are collected in the control unit J47. The control unit J47 is a computer or a PLC.

  The green sand property automatic measuring device J23, which is one of the green sand treatment facilities, measures the temperature, the water content, the CB value, the air permeability, and the compressive strength of the kneaded sand stored in the hopper J22. The green sand characteristic automatic measuring device J23 is called IDST. The automatic sand characteristics automatic measuring device J23 includes a measuring unit J48 and a control unit J49. The measuring part J48 measures the temperature, the water content, the CB value, the air permeability, and the compressive strength of the kneading sand. The control unit J49 controls the automatic sand property automatic measurement device J23.

  For example, from the temperature, moisture content, CB value, air permeability, and compressive strength of the kneaded sand measured by the measuring unit J48, the control unit J49 determines whether the kneaded sand is in a usable range in the casting process. The measurement data of the temperature, the water content, and the CB value are all collected in the control unit J49. The control unit J49 is a computer or a PLC.

(Information collection device)
The information collecting device J24 includes the respective devices of the green sand processing equipment (sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8, sand cooler J10, sand bin J12, water measurement water injection device J13, kneading machine J18, compactability control device J20, hopper J22, and The data measured by the automatic sand property measuring device J23) is collected in real time. Specifically, the measurement data collected in the control unit J33 of the sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8, the measurement data collected in the control unit J35 of the sand cooler J10, the measurement data collected in the control unit J37 of the sand bin J12, Measurement data collected by the control unit J40 of the water content injection device J13, measurement data collected by the control unit J43 of the kneading machine J18, measurement data collected by the control unit J45 of the compactibility control device J20, and control of the hopper J22. The measurement data collected in the section J47 and the measurement data collected in the control section J49 of the automatic sand property automatic measuring device J23 are collected in real time. The information collection device J24 is a data logger.

  In this modification, the data from the control unit of each device of the green sand processing equipment is collected by one information collecting device J24. However, as many information collecting devices as the number of devices in the green sand processing equipment are collected. J24 may be provided and data from the control unit of each device may be collected by a separate information collecting device J24.

(Diagnosis device)
The diagnostic device J25 diagnoses the state of each device of the green sand processing facility, the quality of the green sand processed by the green sand processing facility, and the quality of the kneaded sand produced from the green sand from the collected measurement data. FIG. 124 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the diagnostic device J25. The diagnostic device J25 includes a receiving unit J51, a storage unit J52, a control unit J53, a display unit J54, and a transmitting unit J55.

  The receiving unit J51 receives the measurement data collected by the information collecting device J24 in real time. The storage unit J52 stores the received measurement data, and the storage unit J52 stores in advance management values corresponding to the measurement data in each device of the green sand processing facility and a method for coping with a deviation from the management value. It is remembered. Further, the storage unit J52 stores the report created by the control unit J53.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen for setting a management value displayed on the display unit J54. In the figure, the CB value is set for the compactability control device J20 (MIEII) and the green sand property automatic measurement device J23 (IDST). These management values are stored in the storage unit J52.

  The control unit J53 compares the collected measurement data with the control value in real time, and when it determines that the collected data is out of the control value, displays a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur. J54 is displayed. Further, the control unit J53 causes the transmission unit J55 to transmit the instruction data for changing the setting conditions of the apparatus for the green sand processing equipment that is out of the management value so as not to exceed the management value. Further, the control unit J53 periodically creates a report from the collected data.

  The display unit J54 displays the measurement data received by the receiving unit J51, the report created by the control unit J53, and the diagnosis result (alarm). The transmitting unit J55 transmits the instruction data to the apparatus of the green sand processing facility that is out of the management value. The diagnostic device J25 is a computer. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an outline of the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J1.

(Monitoring method for green sand processing equipment)
Next, a method for monitoring a green sand processing facility using the green sand processing facility monitoring system J1 according to the present modification will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart illustrating a method for monitoring a green sand processing facility using the green sand processing facility monitoring system J1 according to the present modification.

  First, the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J1 (each device of the green sand processing equipment) is operated (step JS101). Until the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J1 (each device of the green sand processing equipment) stops (step JS102: Yes), the monitoring of the green sand processing equipment is continuously performed.

  Simultaneously with the operation of the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J1, the information collecting device J24 includes a sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8, a sand cooler J10, a sand bin J12, a water measurement water injection device J13, a kneading machine J18, a compactability control device J20, and a hopper. J22 and each data measured by the automatic sand property automatic measuring device J23 are collected in real time (step JS103).

  Next, the receiving unit J51 of the diagnostic device J25 receives the measurement data collected by the information collecting device J24 in real time (step JS104). FIGS. 128 and 129 are diagrams illustrating an example of the measurement data received by the diagnostic device J25. FIG. 128 shows measurement data collected from the sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8 (MIAII) in the form of raw data. On the other hand, FIG. 129 shows the measurement data collected from each facility of the green sand processing facility, not in the form of raw data, but in the form of edited data displayed on the display unit J25.

  Next, the control unit J53 of the diagnostic device J25 compares the received measurement data with management values stored in advance in the storage unit J52 of the diagnostic device J25 in real time (step JS105). When the control unit J53 determines that the measured data does not deviate from the management value (step JS105: No), the data collection is continuously performed.

  Then, the control unit J53 periodically creates a report from the collected data (step JS106). The time for collecting information for creating a report is arbitrary. For example, a report is automatically created every 8 hours, and is stored in the storage unit J52 of the diagnostic device J25 so that an operator can confirm it later.

  On the other hand, when the control unit J53 determines that the measured data is out of the management value (step JS105: Yes), the display unit J54 of the diagnostic device J25 has a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur. Is displayed (step JS107). For example, in the measurement data collected from the compactability control device J20, if the CB value falls below the lower limit of the management value, a diagnosis result indicating that a problem may occur in the compactability control device J20 (kneading machine J18). (Alarm) is displayed.

  Further, when a specific method for coping with the problem is known (step JS108: Yes), the control unit J53 determines that the equipment (the sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device) in the green sand processing equipment whose measured data is out of the control value. J8, sand cooler J10, sand bin J12, moisture measuring and injecting device J13, kneading machine J18, compactability control device J20, hopper J22, and automatic sand property automatic measuring device J23). The instruction data for changing the setting conditions of each facility is transmitted from the transmission unit J55 of the diagnostic device J25 in the above manner (step JS109).

  For example, in the measurement data collected from the compactability control device J20, when the CB value falls outside the lower limit of the control value, the water in the kneader J18 increases so that the water content of the kneader J18 increases and returns to the range of the control value. Instruction data for increasing the water supply to J19 by a predetermined value is transmitted to the control unit J45 of the compactibility control device J20. Note that, depending on the type of the management value, instruction data for stopping each facility may be transmitted.

  Any of the control units J33, J35, J37, J40, J43, J45, J47, and J49 of the equipment that has received the instruction data from the diagnostic device J25 changes the equipment setting conditions based on the instruction data (step JS110). For example, the control unit J45 of the compactibility control device J20 increases the supply of water by a predetermined value based on the instruction data. As a result, the CB value falls within the range of the management value again, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the trouble due to the decrease in the CB value.

  If the control unit J53 does not know a specific method for dealing with the problem (step JS108: No), the problem is dealt with by the operator who has confirmed the diagnosis result (alarm) displayed on the display unit J54. Even after the setting conditions are changed, data collection is continuously performed (step JS103), and monitoring of the green sand treatment facility by the diagnostic device J25 is continued.

  As described above, this series of operations is performed until the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J1 (each equipment of the green sand processing equipment) stops (step JS102: Yes). When the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J1 (each device of the green sand processing equipment) stops, the monitoring of the green sand processing equipment ends.

  In this modified example, when there is a possibility that a failure may occur, a diagnosis result (alarm) is displayed on the display unit J54. However, the diagnosis device has a speaker and outputs the diagnosis result (alarm) as voice. The diagnosis may be issued, and the diagnosis result (alarm) may be issued by both the screen display and the voice.

  As described above, according to the green sand processing equipment monitoring system according to the present modification, the information collection device collects data measured by each device of the green sand processing equipment in real time, and collects the measurement data collected by the diagnostic device in real time. When the collected data is determined to be out of the control value, a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur is displayed. Thereby, before the green sand processing equipment breaks down, it is detected that the state of the green sand processing equipment is deteriorating, or, the green sand processed by the green sand processing equipment, and made from the green sand Before the kneaded sand is found to be defective, it is possible to detect that the quality of the green sand and the kneaded sand is deteriorating.

  Further, according to the green sand processing equipment monitoring system according to the present modification, when it is determined that the data collected by the diagnostic device is out of the management value, the instruction data for changing the equipment setting condition is changed from the management value. Send to missing equipment. Thereby, it is possible to automatically stabilize the state of the green sand processing equipment and the quality of the green sand and the kneaded sand.

  In the present modified example in which the sand processing facility is provided with the above-described green sand processing facility monitoring system, as described above, the control device of the sand processing facility performs various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, that is, the sand properties. The measurement time is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the specific data corresponding to the mold sand of one frame, that is, the mold sand molded as the paired upper mold and the lower mold that have been matched, that is, sand processing data. The configuration is common to the above embodiment. Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Twenty-fourth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a twenty-fourth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment. Similar to the twenty-third modification, the twenty-fourth modification is a modification of the casting facility 1, particularly the sand treatment facility 10, and is a monitoring system for the sand treatment facility 10.
Also in the twenty-fourth modification, the control device of the sand processing facility is configured to perform various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, that is, the sand property and the measurement time, with respect to one frame of a mold, that is, a pair of upper molds that have been matched. It is the same as the above embodiment in that the specific data corresponding to the mold sand to be molded as the lower mold, that is, sand processing data, is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the twenty-fourth modification described below, the same components as those in the twenty-third modification are denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and description thereof will be omitted. In the twenty-fourth modification, the diagnostic result and the report created by the diagnostic device are transmitted to a diagnostic result receiving device located at a location away from the green sand processing equipment monitoring system, and the diagnostic result receiving device diagnoses based on the diagnostic result. A change instruction is issued to the device.

  This modification will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 130 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the green sand processing equipment monitoring system according to the present modification. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the configuration of the green sand processing facility. The green sand processing equipment monitoring system J61 includes an overband magnetic separator J2, a magnet pulley J3, a rotary screen J4, a hopper J5, a bucket elevator J6, a dust collector J7, a sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8, a sand stirring device J9, a sand cooler J10, Dust collector J11, Sand bin J12, Moisture measurement and injection device J13, Water pressure stabilization device J14, Bucket elevator J15, Meter J16, Additive charging device J17, Kneader J18, Kneader water injection tank J19, Compactability control device J20, Dust collector J21 Sand processing equipment (corresponding to the sand processing equipment 10 in the above embodiment), an information collecting apparatus J24, a diagnostic apparatus J62, and a diagnostic result receiving apparatus including a hopper J22, and a raw sand characteristic automatic measuring apparatus J23. J63 is provided.

  The over-band magnetic separator J2 and the magnet pulley J3 magnetically select the collected sand (green sand) collected from the green casting equipment, and separate and remove iron pieces from the collected sand. The rotary screen J4 continuously grinds the recovered sand. The hopper J5 stores the recovered sand after the pulverization. The bucket elevator J6 transports the collected sand stored in the hopper J5. The dust collector J7 collects dust generated in the rotary screen J4 and dust generated during transportation by the bucket elevator J6.

  The sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8 measures the temperature and water content of the recovered sand conveyed via the bucket elevator J6, and injects water (cooling water) in an amount proportional to the measured value into the recovered sand. The sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8 includes a measurement unit J31, a water injection unit J32, and a control unit J33. The measuring unit J31 measures the temperature and the water content of the collected sand. The water injection unit J32 injects water into the recovered sand. The control unit J33 controls the operation of the sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8. All the measurement data of the temperature and the water content are collected in the control unit J33. The control unit J33 is a computer or a PLC.

  The sand stirring device J9 stirs the water (cooling water) injected from the water injection section J32 of the sand temperature / water proportional water injection device J8 into the recovered sand.

  Sand cooler J10 cools the recovered sand. Sand cooler J10 is called RCT. The sand cooler J10 includes a measuring unit J34 and a control unit J35. The measuring unit J34 measures the temperature of the collected sand at the outlet of the sand cooler J10. The control unit J35 controls the operation of the sand cooler J10. All the measurement data of the amount of the collected sand is collected in the control unit J35. The control unit J35 is a computer or a PLC.

  The dust collector J11 collects dust generated during the stirring by the sand stirrer J9 and dust generated in the sand cooler J10.

  The sand bin J12 stores the recovered sand from the sand cooler J10. The sand bin J12 includes a measurement unit J36 and a control unit J37. The measuring unit J36 measures the amount of collected sand (the height of the sand) stored in the sand bin J12. The control unit J37 controls the operation of the sand bin J12. All the measurement data of the amount of the collected sand is collected in the control unit J37. The control unit J37 is a computer or a PLC.

  Moisture measurement and injection device J13 measures the temperature and the amount of water of the recovered sand discharged from sand bin J12, and after the recovered sand is carried into kneading machine J18, a predetermined amount of water is added at the start of the kneading step with the additive. Water is poured into the kneader J18. The moisture measuring and injecting device J13 includes a measuring unit J38, an injecting unit J39, and a control unit J40. The measuring unit J38 measures the temperature and the amount of water of the recovered sand. The water injection section J39 injects water into the kneading machine J18 after the recovered sand is carried into the kneading machine J18. The control unit J40 controls the operation of the moisture measurement and injection device J13. All the measurement data of the temperature and the amount of moisture are collected in the control unit J40. The control unit J40 is a computer or a PLC.

  The water pressure stabilizing device J14 stabilizes the pressure of the water from the water source J41, and sends the water to the sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8 and the moisture measurement water injection device J13. Bucket elevator J15 conveys the collected sand stored in sand bin J12 to scale J16. The measuring device J16 stores the recovered sand, and inputs a predetermined amount of the recovered sand measured by a sand measuring means (not shown) provided therein to the kneading machine J18. The additive introduction device J17 discharges the additive into the kneading machine J18 according to an instruction from the kneading machine J18 or an instruction from an operator.

  The kneading machine J18 adds and kneads the water injected from the water measuring and injecting device J13, the recovered sand (raw sand) introduced from the measuring device J16, and the additive introduced from the additive introducing device J17. Make kneading sand. The kneading machine J18 includes a measuring unit J42 and a control unit J43. The measuring unit J42 measures the operation time of the kneading machine J18. The control unit J43 controls the operation of the kneading machine J18. All the measurement data regarding the kneading process in the kneading machine J18 is collected in the control unit J43. The control unit J43 is a computer or a PLC.

  The kneader injection tank J19 additionally injects water from the water source J41 during the kneading process.

  The compactability control device J20 measures the temperature, water content, and CB value (compactability value) of the kneading sand in the kneading machine J18, and additionally injects water into the kneading machine J18 during the kneading process. The compactibility control device J20 includes a measurement unit J44 and a control unit J45. The measuring unit J44 measures the temperature, the water content, and the CB value of the kneading sand. The control unit J45 controls the operation of the compactability control device J20 and the water injection tank J19 of the kneader. The measurement data of the temperature, the water content, and the CB value are all collected in the control unit J45. The control unit J45 is a computer or a PLC.

  The dust collector J21 collects dust generated during transportation by the bucket elevator J15, dust generated in the additive input device J17, and dust generated during the kneading process in the kneader J18.

  The hopper J22 stores the kneaded sand produced by the kneading machine J18. The hopper J22 includes a measuring unit J46 and a control unit J47. The measuring unit J46 measures the amount of kneaded sand (the height of the sand) stored in the hopper J22. The control unit J47 controls the operation of the hopper J22. All the measurement data of the amount of the kneading sand are collected in the control unit J47. The control unit J47 is a computer or a PLC.

  The raw sand property automatic measuring device J23 measures the temperature, the water content, the CB value, the air permeability, and the compressive strength of the kneaded sand stored in the hopper J22. The automatic sand characteristics automatic measuring device J23 includes a measuring unit J48 and a control unit J49. The measuring part J48 measures the temperature, the water content, the CB value, the air permeability, and the compressive strength of the kneading sand. The control unit J49 controls the automatic sand property automatic measurement device J23. The measurement data of the temperature, the water content, the CB value, the air permeability, and the compressive strength are all collected in the control unit J49. The control unit J49 is a computer or a PLC.

  The information collecting device J24 is provided with each device of the green sand processing equipment (sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8, sand cooler J10, sand bin J12, water measurement water injection device J13, kneading machine J18, compactability control device J20, hopper J22, The data measured by the automatic sand property automatic measuring device J23) is collected in real time. The information collecting device J24 is a data logger.

(Diagnosis device)
The diagnostic device J62 diagnoses the state of each device of the green sand processing equipment, the quality of the green sand processed by the green sand processing equipment, and the quality of the kneaded sand produced from the green sand from the collected measurement data. FIG. 132 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the diagnostic device J62. The diagnostic device J62 includes a receiving unit J64, a storage unit J65, a control unit J66, a display unit J67, and a transmitting unit J68.

  The receiving unit J64 receives the measurement data collected by the information collecting device J24 in real time, or receives instruction data from the diagnostic result receiving device J63. The storage unit J65 stores the received measurement data, and the storage unit J65 stores in advance management values corresponding to the measurement data in each device of the green sand processing facility. Further, the storage unit J65 stores the report created by the control unit J66.

  The control unit J66 compares the collected measurement data with the management value in real time, and if it determines that the collected data is out of the management value, creates the diagnosis result data and displays it on the display unit J67. Then, the control unit J66 causes the transmission unit J68 to transmit the diagnosis result data. When receiving the instruction data from the diagnosis result receiving device J63, the control unit J66 causes the transmitting unit J68 to transmit the instruction data to the device of the green sand processing facility that is out of the management value. Further, the control unit J66 periodically creates a report from the collected data and causes the transmission unit J68 to transmit the report.

  The display unit J67 displays the measurement data received by the receiving unit J64, the report created by the control unit J66, and a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur. In this modification, the display unit J67 may not be provided in the diagnostic device J62. In that case, the control unit J66 causes the transmission unit J68 to transmit the created diagnosis result data as it is.

  The transmitting unit J68 transmits the diagnostic result data or the report to the diagnostic result receiving device J63, and transmits the instruction data to the device of the green sand processing facility that is out of the management value. The diagnostic device J62 is a computer.

  In this modification, when the diagnostic device J62 transmits diagnostic result data or a report to the diagnostic result receiving device J63, and when the diagnostic device J62 receives instruction data from the diagnostic result receiving device J63, an e-mail is sent. Is used, but other methods may be used.

(Diagnosis result receiving device)
The diagnostic result receiving device J63 receives diagnostic result data or a report from the diagnostic device J62. Then, a change instruction is issued to the diagnostic device J62 based on the diagnostic result data. The diagnosis result receiving device J63 is located away from the green sand processing equipment, the information collecting device J24, and the diagnostic device J62. FIG. 133 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the diagnosis result receiving device J63. The diagnosis result receiving device J63 includes a receiving unit J69, a storage unit J70, a control unit J71, a display unit J72, and a transmitting unit J73.

  The receiving unit J69 receives diagnostic result data or a report from the diagnostic device J62. The storage unit J70 stores the received diagnosis result data or report, and the storage unit J70 stores in advance a measure to cope with a case where the measurement data from the apparatus of the green sand processing facility deviates from the control value. I have.

  The control unit J71 causes the display unit J72 to display a diagnosis result (warning) or a report indicating that a failure may occur based on the diagnosis result data. Further, based on the diagnosis result data, the transmitting unit J73 transmits the instruction data for changing the setting conditions of the apparatus for the green sand processing equipment that is out of the control value so as not to exceed the control value.

  The display unit J72 displays a diagnosis result (alarm) and a report. The transmitting unit J73 transmits the instruction data to the diagnostic device J62. The diagnosis result receiving device J63 is a computer.

  Note that, in this modified example, when the diagnostic result receiving device J63 receives diagnostic result data or a report from the diagnostic device J62, and when the diagnostic result receiving device J63 transmits instruction data to the diagnostic device J62, Although mail is used, other methods may be used.

(Monitoring method for green sand processing equipment)
Next, a method of monitoring a green sand processing facility using the green sand processing facility monitoring system J61 according to the present modification will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing a method for monitoring a green sand processing facility using the green sand processing facility monitoring system J61 according to this modification.

  First, the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J61 (each device of the green sand processing equipment) is operated (step JS201). Until the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J61 (each device of the green sand processing equipment) stops (step JS202: Yes), the monitoring of the green sand processing equipment is continuously performed.

  At the same time as the operation of the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J61, the information collecting device J24 includes a sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8, a sand cooler J10, a sand bin J12, a water measurement water injection device J13, a kneading machine J18, a compactability control device J20, and a hopper. J22 and each data measured by the automatic sand property automatic measuring device J23 are collected in real time (step JS203).

  Next, the receiving unit J64 of the diagnostic device J62 receives the measurement data collected by the information collecting device J24 in real time (step JS204).

  Next, the control unit J66 of the diagnostic device J62 compares the received measurement data with management values stored in advance in the storage unit J65 of the diagnostic device J62 in real time (step JS205). When the control unit J66 determines that the measurement data does not deviate from the management value (step JS205: No), the data collection is continuously performed.

  Then, the control unit J66 periodically creates a report from the collected data (step JS206). The created report is transmitted from the transmitting unit J68 of the diagnostic device J62 (step JS207). The receiving unit J69 of the diagnostic result receiving device J63 receives the report (step JS208), and the report is displayed on the display unit J72 of the diagnostic result receiving device J63 so that the operator can confirm it.

  On the other hand, when the control unit J66 determines that the measured data is out of the management value (step JS205: Yes), it creates diagnostic result data and transmits it from the transmitting unit J68 (step JS209). For example, when the CB value falls outside the lower limit of the management value in the measurement data collected from the compactibility control device J20, diagnostic result data to that effect is transmitted.

  When the receiving unit J69 of the diagnostic result receiving device J63 receives the diagnostic result data (step JS210), the display unit J72 of the diagnostic result receiving device J63 displays a diagnostic result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur ( Step JS211). For example, when the CB value falls below the lower limit of the management value, a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that a problem may occur in the compactability control device J20 (kneading machine J18) is displayed.

  Further, when a specific method for coping with the problem is known (step JS212: Yes), the control unit J71 of the diagnosis result receiving device J63 determines the equipment in the green sand processing equipment whose measured data is out of the management value ( Sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8, sand cooler J10, sand bin J12, water measurement water injection device J13, kneading machine J18, compactability control device J20, hopper J22, and fresh sand characteristic automatic measurement device J23) Then, the instruction data for changing the setting condition of each facility so as not to exceed the management value is transmitted from the transmitting unit J73 of the diagnostic result receiving device J63 to the diagnostic device J62 (step JS213).

  For example, in the measurement data collected from the compactability control device J20, when the CB value falls outside the lower limit of the control value, the water in the kneader J18 increases so that the water content of the kneader J18 increases and returns to the range of the control value. Instruction data for increasing the water supply to J19 by a predetermined value is transmitted to the control unit J45 of the compactibility control device J20. Note that, depending on the type of the management value, instruction data for stopping each facility may be transmitted.

  When the receiving unit J64 of the diagnostic device J62 receives the instruction data from the diagnostic result receiving device J63 (step JS214), the control unit J66 of the diagnostic device J62 determines whether the measured data is out of the management value in the raw sand processing equipment. The instruction data from the diagnosis result receiving device J63 is transferred to the equipment (step JS215). For example, the instruction data is transferred to the control unit J45 of the compactibility control device J20.

  Any of the control units J33, J35, J37, J40, J43, J45, J47, and J49 of the equipment that has received the instruction data from the diagnostic device J62 changes the equipment setting conditions based on the contents of the instruction data. (Step JS216). For example, the control unit J45 of the compactibility control device J20 increases the supply of water by a predetermined value based on the instruction data. As a result, the CB value falls within the range of the management value again, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the trouble due to the decrease in the CB value.

  If the control unit J71 of the diagnosis result receiving device J63 does not know a specific method for dealing with the failure (step JS212: No), the handling for the failure is performed by checking the diagnosis result (alarm) displayed on the display unit J72. Although the setting is changed by the user, the data collection is continuously performed even after the setting condition is changed (step JS203), and the monitoring of the green sand processing equipment by the diagnostic device J62 is continued.

  As described above, this series of operations are performed until the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J61 (each equipment of the green sand processing equipment) stops (step JS202: Yes). When the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J61 (each device of the green sand processing equipment) stops, the monitoring of the green sand processing equipment ends.

  In this modification, when there is a possibility that a failure may occur, the diagnosis result (alarm) is displayed on the display J72 of the diagnosis result receiving device J63, but the diagnosis result is also displayed on the display J67 of the diagnosis device J62. (Alarm) may be displayed, and the diagnostic device J62 and / or the diagnostic result receiving device J63 may have a speaker so as to emit an alarm as a sound. A result (alarm) may be issued.

  As described above, according to the green sand processing equipment monitoring system according to the present modification, the information collection device collects data measured by each device of the green sand processing equipment in real time, and collects the measurement data collected by the diagnostic device in real time. If it is determined that the collected data is out of the control value, the diagnosis result is transmitted to the diagnosis result receiving device, and the diagnosis result receiving device is diagnosed that a failure may occur. Displays the result (alarm). Thereby, even if the distance from the green sand processing equipment is large, before the green sand processing equipment breaks down, it is detected that the state of the green sand processing equipment is deteriorating, or it is processed by the green sand processing equipment. It is possible to detect that the quality of the green sand and the kneaded sand is deteriorating before it is determined that the green sand and the kneaded sand produced from the green sand are defective.

  Further, according to the green sand processing equipment monitoring system according to the present modification, the diagnostic result receiving device transmits instruction data for changing the setting conditions of the equipment to the diagnostic device, and the diagnostic device deviates the instruction data from the management value. Transfer to the existing equipment. This makes it possible to automatically stabilize the state of the green sand processing equipment and the quality of the green sand and the kneaded sand even if the distance from the green sand processing equipment is large.

  In the present modified example in which the sand processing facility is provided with the above-described green sand processing facility monitoring system, as described above, the control device of the sand processing facility performs various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, that is, the sand properties. The measurement time is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the specific data corresponding to the mold sand of one frame, that is, the mold sand molded as the paired upper mold and the lower mold that have been matched, that is, sand processing data. The configuration is common to the above embodiment. Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Twenty-fifth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a twenty-fifth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment. Similar to the twenty-third modification, the twenty-fifth modification is a modification of the casting facility 1, particularly the sand treatment facility 10, and is a monitoring system for the sand treatment facility 10.
In the twenty-fifth modified example, the control device of the sand treatment facility also performs various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, that is, the sand property and the measurement time, for one frame of the mold, that is, with the paired upper molds that have been matched. It is the same as the above embodiment in that the specific data corresponding to the mold sand to be molded as the lower mold, that is, sand processing data, is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the twenty-fifth modified example described below, the same components as those in the twenty-fourth modified example are denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and description thereof will be omitted. In the twenty-fifth modification, the diagnostic result created by the diagnostic device in the twenty-fourth modification and the report are added with the positional information data, and then sent to the diagnosis result receiving device at a location remote from the green sand processing equipment monitoring system. Sending.

  This modification will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 135 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the green sand processing equipment monitoring system according to the present modification. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the configuration of the green sand processing facility. The green sand processing equipment monitoring system J81 includes an overband magnetic separator J2, a magnet pulley J3, a rotary screen J4, a hopper J5, a bucket elevator J6, a dust collector J7, a sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8, a sand stirrer J9, a sand cooler J10, Dust collector J11, Sand bin J12, Moisture measurement and injection device J13, Water pressure stabilization device J14, Bucket elevator J15, Meter J16, Additive charging device J17, Kneader J18, Kneader water injection tank J19, Compactability control device J20, Dust collector J21 Sand processing equipment (corresponding to the sand processing equipment 10 in the above-described embodiment) including the hopper J22 and the automatic sand property automatic measuring device J23, an information collecting device J24, a diagnostic device J82, and a diagnostic result receiving device J83. It has.

  The over-band magnetic separator J2 and the magnet pulley J3 magnetically select the collected sand (green sand) collected from the green casting equipment, and separate and remove iron pieces from the collected sand. The rotary screen J4 continuously grinds the recovered sand. The hopper J5 stores the recovered sand after the pulverization. The bucket elevator J6 transports the collected sand stored in the hopper J5. The dust collector J7 collects dust generated in the rotary screen J4 and dust generated during transportation by the bucket elevator J6.

  The sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8 measures the temperature and water content of the recovered sand conveyed via the bucket elevator J6, and injects water (cooling water) in an amount proportional to the measured value into the recovered sand. The sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8 includes a measurement unit J31, a water injection unit J32, and a control unit J33. The measuring unit J31 measures the temperature and the water content of the collected sand. The water injection unit J32 injects water into the recovered sand. The control unit J33 controls the operation of the sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8. All the measurement data of the temperature and the water content are collected in the control unit J33. The control unit J33 is a computer or a PLC.

  The sand stirring device J9 stirs the water (cooling water) injected from the water injection section J32 of the sand temperature / water proportional water injection device J8 into the recovered sand.

  Sand cooler J10 cools the recovered sand. Sand cooler J10 is called RCT. The sand cooler J10 includes a measuring unit J34 and a control unit J35. The measuring unit J34 measures the temperature of the collected sand at the outlet of the sand cooler J10. The control unit J35 controls the operation of the sand cooler J10. All the measurement data of the amount of the collected sand is collected in the control unit J35. The control unit J35 is a computer or a PLC.

  The dust collector J11 collects dust generated during the stirring by the sand stirrer J9 and dust generated in the sand cooler J10.

  The sand bin J12 stores the recovered sand from the sand cooler J10. The sand bin J12 includes a measurement unit J36 and a control unit J37. The measuring unit J36 measures the amount of collected sand (the height of the sand) stored in the sand bin J12. The control unit J37 controls the operation of the sand bin J12. All the measurement data of the amount of the collected sand is collected in the control unit J37. The control unit J37 is a computer or a PLC.

  Moisture measurement and injection device J13 measures the temperature and the amount of water of the recovered sand discharged from sand bin J12, and after the recovered sand is carried into kneading machine J18, a predetermined amount of water is added at the start of the kneading step with the additive. Water is poured into the kneader J18. The moisture measuring and injecting device J13 includes a measuring unit J38, an injecting unit J39, and a control unit J40. The measuring unit J38 measures the temperature and the amount of water of the recovered sand. The water injection section J39 injects water into the kneading machine J18 after the recovered sand is carried into the kneading machine J18. The control unit J40 controls the operation of the moisture measurement and injection device J13. All the measurement data of the temperature and the amount of moisture are collected in the control unit J40. The control unit J40 is a computer or a PLC.

  The water pressure stabilizing device J14 stabilizes the pressure of the water from the water source J41, and sends the water to the sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8 and the moisture measurement water injection device J13. Bucket elevator J15 conveys the collected sand stored in sand bin J12 to scale J16. The measuring device J16 stores the recovered sand, and inputs a predetermined amount of the recovered sand measured by a sand measuring means (not shown) provided therein to the kneading machine J18. The additive introduction device J17 discharges the additive into the kneading machine J18 according to an instruction from the kneading machine J18 or an instruction from an operator.

  The kneading machine J18 adds and kneads the water injected from the water measuring and injecting device J13, the recovered sand (raw sand) introduced from the measuring device J16, and the additive introduced from the additive introducing device J17. Make kneading sand. The kneading machine J18 includes a measuring unit J42 and a control unit J43. The measuring unit J42 measures the operation time of the kneading machine J18. The control unit J43 controls the operation of the kneading machine J18. All the measurement data regarding the kneading process in the kneading machine J18 is collected in the control unit J43. The control unit J43 is a computer or a PLC.

  The kneader injection tank J19 additionally injects water from the water source J41 during the kneading process.

  The compactability control device J20 measures the temperature, water content, and CB value (compactability value) of the kneading sand in the kneading machine J18, and additionally injects water into the kneading machine J18 during the kneading process. The compactibility control device J20 includes a measurement unit J44 and a control unit J45. The measuring unit J44 measures the temperature, the water content, and the CB value of the kneading sand. The control unit J45 controls the operation of the compactability control device J20 and the water injection tank J19 of the kneader. The measurement data of the temperature, the water content, and the CB value are all collected in the control unit J45. The control unit J45 is a computer or a PLC.

  The dust collector J21 collects dust generated during transportation by the bucket elevator J15, dust generated in the additive input device J17, and dust generated during the kneading process in the kneader J18.

  The hopper J22 stores the kneaded sand produced by the kneading machine J18. The hopper J22 includes a measuring unit J46 and a control unit J47. The measuring unit J46 measures the amount of kneaded sand (the height of the sand) stored in the hopper J22. The control unit J47 controls the operation of the hopper J22. All the measurement data of the amount of the kneading sand are collected in the control unit J47. The control unit J47 is a computer or a PLC.

  The raw sand property automatic measuring device J23 measures the temperature, the water content, the CB value, the air permeability, and the compressive strength of the kneaded sand stored in the hopper J22. The automatic sand characteristics automatic measuring device J23 includes a measuring unit J48 and a control unit J49. The measuring part J48 measures the temperature, the water content, the CB value, the air permeability, and the compressive strength of the kneading sand. The control unit J49 controls the automatic sand property automatic measurement device J23. The measurement data of the temperature, the water content, the CB value, the air permeability, and the compressive strength are all collected in the control unit J49. The control unit J49 is a computer or a PLC.

  The information collecting device J24 is provided with each device of the green sand processing equipment (sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8, sand cooler J10, sand bin J12, water measurement water injection device J13, kneading machine J18, compactability control device J20, hopper J22, The data measured by the automatic sand property automatic measuring device J23) is collected in real time. The information collecting device J24 is a data logger.

(Diagnosis device)
The diagnosing device J82 diagnoses the state of each device of the green sand processing equipment, the quality of the green sand processed by the green sand processing equipment, and the quality of the kneaded sand produced from the green sand from the collected measurement data. FIG. 137 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the diagnostic device J82. The diagnostic device J82 includes a receiving unit J64, a position information storage unit J84, a storage unit J65, a control unit J85, a display unit J67, and a transmission unit J68.

  The receiving unit J64 receives the measurement data collected by the information collecting device J24 in real time, or receives instruction data from the diagnosis result receiving device J83.

  The position information storage unit J84 stores position information data of the green sand processing equipment monitored by the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J81. The position information data may be not only the position information of the entire green sand processing facility but also the position information of each device of the green sand processing facility. As the format of the position information data, a case where information on the latitude and longitude where each device is located is stored in advance, and a GPS (Global Positioning System) is incorporated in each device, and the GPS position of each device is Information may be stored.

  When the GPS is incorporated, the information collection device J24 may periodically collect the GPS position information of each device. This enables continuous monitoring even when the device of the green sand processing facility moves for some reason.

  Furthermore, GPS may be incorporated in the diagnostic device J82. Even if the diagnostic device J82 is stolen, the data in the diagnostic device J82 is set to be automatically erased if the diagnostic device J82 moves more than a predetermined distance (for example, 1 km). Can be prevented.

  The storage unit J65 stores the received measurement data, and the storage unit J65 stores in advance management values corresponding to the measurement data in each device of the green sand processing facility. Further, the storage unit J65 stores the report created by the control unit J85.

  The control unit J85 compares the collected measurement data with the management value in real time, and when it determines that the collected data is out of the management value, displays the diagnosis result on the display unit J67. Then, the control unit J85 adds the position information data of the green sand processing equipment to the created diagnosis result data, and causes the transmission unit J68 to transmit the result as the diagnosis result data with position information. Upon receiving the instruction data from the diagnosis result receiving device J83, the control unit J85 causes the transmitting unit J68 to transmit the instruction data to the device of the green sand processing facility that is out of the management value. Further, the control unit J85 periodically creates a report from the collected data, adds location information data to the created report, and causes the transmission unit J68 to transmit the report.

  The display unit J67 displays the measurement data received by the reception unit J64, the report created by the control unit J85, and a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur. In this modification, the display unit J67 may not be provided in the diagnostic device J82. The transmitting unit J68 transmits the diagnostic result data or the report to the diagnostic result receiving device J83, and transmits the instruction data to the device of the green sand processing facility that is out of the management value. The diagnostic device J82 is a computer.

  In this modification, the diagnostic device J82 transmits diagnostic result data with position information or a report to the diagnostic result receiving device J83, and the diagnostic device J82 receives instruction data from the diagnostic result receiving device J83. Uses e-mail, but other methods may be used.

(Diagnosis result receiving device)
The diagnosis result receiving device J83 receives the diagnosis result data with position information data or the report with position information data from the diagnostic device J82. Then, a change instruction is issued to the diagnostic device J82 based on the diagnostic result data. The diagnosis result receiving device J83 is located away from the green sand processing equipment, the information collecting device J24, and the diagnostic device J82. FIG. 138 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the diagnosis result receiving device J83. The diagnosis result receiving device J83 includes a receiving unit J69, a position information storage unit J86, a storage unit J70, a control unit J87, a display unit J72, and a transmission unit J73.

  The receiving unit J69 receives the diagnosis result data with position information data or the report with position information data from the diagnostic device J82.

  The position information storage unit J86 stores position information data of the green sand processing equipment monitored by the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J81.

  The storage unit J70 stores the received diagnostic result data with the position information data or the report with the position information data, and the storage unit J70 stores the measurement data from the device of the green sand processing facility out of the management value. Is previously stored.

  The control unit J87 causes the display unit J72 to display a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that there is a possibility of occurrence of a failure or a report with position information data based on the diagnosis result data with position information data. Further, based on the diagnosis result data with the position information data, instruction data for changing the setting conditions of the apparatus for the green sand processing equipment which is out of the control value so as not to exceed the control value is transmitted to the transmitting unit J73. Send.

  The display unit J72 displays a diagnosis result (alarm) and a report. When displaying a diagnosis result (alarm) or a report, the diagnosis result data with position information data or the position information data included in the report with position information data and the position stored in the position information storage unit J86 are used. The information data is collated and displayed together as map information. FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating an example of the map information displayed on the display unit J72. FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating another example of the map information displayed on the display unit J72. Here, FIG. 139 shows a case where the green sand treatment facility monitoring system J81 is constructed in Japan, and FIG. 140 shows a case where the green sand treatment facility monitoring system J81 is constructed worldwide.

  The transmitting unit J73 transmits the instruction data to the diagnostic device J82. The diagnosis result receiving device J83 is a computer.

  In this modification, the diagnosis result receiving device J83 receives the diagnostic result data with position information or a report from the diagnostic device J82, and the diagnostic result receiving device J83 transmits instruction data to the diagnostic device J82. Uses e-mail, but other methods may be used. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an outline of the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J81.

(Monitoring method for green sand processing equipment)
Next, a method of monitoring a green sand processing facility using the green sand processing facility monitoring system J81 according to the present modification will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a method for monitoring a green sand processing facility using the green sand processing facility monitoring system J81 according to the present modification.

  First, the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J81 (each device of the green sand processing equipment) is operated (step JS301). Until the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J81 (each device of the green sand processing equipment) stops (step JS302: Yes), the monitoring of the green sand processing equipment is continuously performed.

  Simultaneously with the operation of the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J81, the information collecting device J24 includes a sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8, a sand cooler J10, a sand bin J12, a water measurement water injection device J13, a kneading machine J18, a compactability control device J20, and a hopper. Each data measured by J22 and the automatic sand property automatic measuring device J23 is collected in real time (step JS303).

  Next, the receiving unit J64 of the diagnostic device J82 receives the measurement data collected by the information collecting device J24 in real time (step JS304).

  Next, the control unit J85 of the diagnostic device J82 compares the received measurement data with management values stored in advance in the storage unit J65 of the diagnostic device J82 in real time (step JS305). When the control unit J85 determines that the measurement data does not deviate from the management value (step JS305: No), the data collection is continuously performed.

  Then, the control unit J85 periodically creates a report with position information from the collected data (step JS306). The created report with position information is transmitted from the transmission unit J68 of the diagnostic device J82 (step JS307). The receiving unit J69 of the diagnostic result receiving device J83 receives the report with position information (step JS308), and the display unit J72 of the diagnostic result receiving device J83 displays a report and a map indicating the location of the green sand processing facility where the report was created. Both are displayed. This allows the operator to easily confirm the location of the green sand processing facility for which the report has been created. FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an example of a report created by the control unit J85 of the diagnostic device J82.

  On the other hand, when determining that the measurement data is out of the management value (step JS305: Yes), the control unit J85 creates the diagnostic result data with position information and transmits it from the transmission unit J68 (step JS309).

  When the receiving unit J69 of the diagnostic result receiving device J83 receives the diagnostic result data with position information (step JS310), the display unit J72 of the diagnostic device receiving device J83 displays a diagnostic result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur. Then, both of the maps indicating the locations of the green sand processing facilities where a failure may occur are displayed (step JS311). Thereby, the operator can easily confirm the location of the green sand treatment facility where a failure may occur.

  FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed on the display unit J72. In this figure, it can be seen at a glance that a problem has occurred in the compactability control device J20 of the green sand processing facility JA. Although the position of the green sand processing facility JA is displayed on the map of Japan in this figure, it is also possible to specifically display a location where the green sand processing facility has a problem. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating another example of the screen displayed on the display unit J72. In this figure, the place where the problem of the compactability control device J20 of the green sand processing facility JA has occurred can be recognized at a glance.

  Further, in FIGS. 144 and 145, the status of the green sand processing equipment is displayed in different colors, so that the state of the green sand processing equipment can be recognized at a glance. For example, when a problem occurs in the green sand treatment facility in FIG. 144, the mark indicating the position of the green sand treatment facility changes from green to red, thereby enabling the operator to quickly know the occurrence of the problem. . Further, in FIG. 145, when a problem occurs in the green sand processing facility, the mark indicating the location of the problem in the green sand processing facility changes from green to red, thereby allowing the operator to generate the problem and the location where the problem occurs. Can be quickly known.

  Furthermore, when the control unit J87 of the diagnosis result receiving device J83 knows a specific method for coping with the failure (step JS312: Yes), the equipment in the green sand processing equipment whose measurement data is out of the control value ( Sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device J8, sand cooler J10, sand bin J12, water measurement water injection device J13, kneading machine J18, compactability control device J20, hopper J22, and automatic sand property automatic measurement device J23) Then, the instruction data for changing the setting condition of each facility so as not to exceed the management value is transmitted from the transmitting unit J73 of the diagnostic result receiving device J83 to the diagnostic device J82 (step JS313). Note that, depending on the type of the management value, instruction data for stopping each facility may be transmitted.

  When receiving the instruction data from the diagnosis result receiving device J83 (step JS314), the receiving portion J64 of the diagnostic device J82 controls the control portion J85 of the diagnostic device J82 in the raw sand processing equipment in which the measured data is out of the management value. The instruction data from the diagnosis result receiving device J83 is transferred to the equipment (step JS315).

  Any of the control units J33, J35, J37, J40, J43, J45, J47, and J49 of the facility that has received the instruction data from the diagnostic device J82 changes the setting conditions of the facility based on the contents of the instruction data. (Step JS316). When the control unit J87 of the diagnosis result receiving device J83 does not know a specific method for dealing with the failure (step JS312: No), the handling for the failure is performed by checking the diagnosis result (alarm) displayed on the display unit J72. However, even after the setting conditions are changed, the data collection is continuously performed (step JS303), and the monitoring of the green sand processing equipment by the diagnostic device J82 is continued.

  As described above, this series of operations is performed until the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J81 (each equipment of the green sand processing equipment) stops (step JS302: Yes). When the green sand processing equipment monitoring system J81 (each device of the green sand processing equipment) stops, the monitoring of the green sand processing equipment ends.

  In this modification, when there is a possibility that a malfunction may occur, both the diagnosis result (alarm) and the map indicating the location of the green sand processing facility are displayed on the display unit J72 of the diagnosis result receiving device J83. The diagnostic result (alarm) may be displayed on the display unit J67 of the diagnostic device J82, and the diagnostic device J82 and / or the diagnostic result receiving device J83 may have a speaker and emit the diagnostic result (alarm) as voice. Alternatively, a diagnosis result (alarm) may be issued by both screen display and sound.

  As described above, according to the green sand processing equipment monitoring system according to the present modification, the diagnosis result receiving apparatus notifies the diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that there is a possibility that a failure may occur to the green sand processing apparatus where the failure may occur. Display along with a map showing the location of the equipment. This allows the operator to easily confirm the location of the green sand treatment facility where a failure may occur.

  In the present modified example in which the sand processing facility is provided with the above-described green sand processing facility monitoring system, as described above, the control device of the sand processing facility performs various measurement results by the sand property measuring device, that is, the sand properties. The measurement time is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the specific data corresponding to the mold sand of one frame, that is, the mold sand molded as the paired upper mold and the lower mold that have been matched, that is, sand processing data. The configuration is common to the above embodiment. Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

  In the twenty-third to twenty-fifth modifications, the sand cooler, the sand bin, and the hopper each have a control unit, but instead of the sand cooler, the sand bin, and the hopper each having a control unit. In addition, a common control unit may be provided to control the sand cooler, the sand bin, and the hopper collectively. Similarly, in the twenty-third to twenty-fifth modified examples, the moisture measurement water injection device and the compactibility control device have a configuration including a control unit, respectively, but the moisture measurement water injection device and the compactability control device May be provided with a common control unit instead of each of the control units, and the moisture measurement water injection device and the compactibility control device may be controlled collectively. In these cases, the control unit is a computer or a PLC.

  In the twenty-third to twenty-fifth modifications, the green sand processing equipment diagnosed by the diagnostic device is a sand temperature / moisture proportional water injection device, a sand cooler, a sand bin, a water measurement water injection device, a kneading machine, a compactability control device, a hopper, and , But is not limited thereto. For example, the information collecting device may collect measurement data on the additive input amount of the additive input device in real time, and the diagnostic device may diagnose the data.

  In addition, in the twenty-third to twenty-fifth modifications, the information collecting device collects each data measured by each green sand processing facility in real time, but when an event occurs, for example, when the facility breaks down, Alternatively, when trouble occurs in the equipment, additional collection of data from the equipment is performed. This is the same when a failure occurs due to a human error, or when a trouble occurs due to a human error.

  In the twenty-fourth and twenty-fifth modifications, the diagnosis device creates a diagnosis result and a report based on the measurement data collected by the information collection device, and the diagnosis result receiving device receives the diagnosis result and the report. The diagnostic device may transmit the measurement data collected by the information collecting device to the diagnostic result receiving device as it is, and the diagnostic result receiving device may create a diagnostic result and a report based on the measured data.

  Further, in the twenty-fifth modified example, it is assumed that the GPS is incorporated in the diagnostic device. However, the GPS may be incorporated in the diagnostic devices of the twenty-third and twenty-fourth modified examples. Even in this case, even if the diagnostic device is stolen, the data in the diagnostic device is automatically erased if the diagnostic device has moved a predetermined distance (for example, 1 km), so that the data collected so far can be stolen by another person. Can be prevented.

[Twenty-Sixth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a twenty-sixth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The twenty-sixth modification is a modification mainly related to the molding equipment 2, the core installation equipment 3, and the primary cooling and conveying device 5 of the cooling and conveying equipment 4 of the casting equipment 1. In addition, the twenty-sixth modified example also describes the pouring equipment 7 of the casting equipment 1 in detail.
In the above-described embodiment, the molding equipment 2 is of a frameless type, but the molding equipment in the twenty-sixth modification is of a framed type.
Also in the twenty-sixth modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the twenty-sixth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data of one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  First, the configuration of the casting facility K1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. 146 is a plan view showing the configuration of the casting facility, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged view of the KA portion in FIG. 146. The casting equipment K1 includes a molding unit (corresponding to the molding equipment 2 in the above embodiment) K10, a mold transport unit (corresponding to the primary cooling transport device 5 of the cooling transport equipment 4 in the above embodiment) K30, and a molten metal transport unit (the above embodiment) And a pouring unit K70 (corresponding to the pouring equipment 7 in the above embodiment). The molding unit K10 molds the mold KM from the mold sand. The mold transport unit K30 transports the molded mold KM from the molding unit K10 to the pouring unit K70, and cools and solidifies the molten metal by cooling while transporting the mold KM poured by the pouring unit K70. The casting is taken out of the casting mold by a mold release device K48. The molten metal transport unit K50 loads the alloy material into the processing ladle KL1, receives the molten metal from the furnace KF into the processing ladle KL1, causes the molten metal to react with the alloy material, and empties the molten metal after the reaction into the pouring ladle KL2. Instead, the pouring ladle KL2 is transferred to the pouring machine K72 of the pouring unit K70. Pouring unit K70 pours from pouring ladle KL2 into mold KM.

  The molding unit K10 has a pre-molding sand characteristic measuring device K12 for measuring properties of the molding sand before molding. The molding sand before molding is, for example, kneaded by mixing a binder, an additive, a hardening agent, moisture, and the like, with fresh sand or sand obtained by treating a sand discharged from a mold release device K48 by a sand recovery device. It is sand. Since the properties of the mold sand greatly affect the quality of the mold, it is measured before molding.

  The molding unit K10 has a molding device K14 for molding a mold from mold sand. In the molding device K14, molding sand is put around a model imitating the shape of a product, and two upper and lower molds are formed for one product. There are two types of molds: a framed mold made in a mold and a frameless mold without a mold. The molding apparatus K14 includes a measuring instrument (not shown) that measures molding history data such as sand input weight, compression ratio, static pressure or squeeze pressure, squeeze time, pressure increase speed, squeeze stroke, mold thickness, and molding time during molding. Have.

  The molding unit K10 has an engraving device K16 that applies an identifiable engraving for each space to a space formed in the mold by the model, that is, a space into which the molten metal is poured and solidified to form a casting, that is, an inner surface. You may. The marking device K16 may cut a plurality of hole-shaped marks on the surface of the space of the mold with a jig such as a drill while changing the mutual positional relationship, or may mark holes or grooves with a laser or the like. May be. For example, when a hole is formed on the inner surface of each space of the mold, a projection is formed at a position corresponding to the hole on the surface of the cast casting, and it becomes possible to identify each casting. Here, each space of the mold is because a plurality of castings may be made by one mold. That is, one mold has a plurality of spaces. That is, by imprinting on the surface of each space of the molded casting, the engraving is formed corresponding to each obtained casting. Note that the marking device K16 may be provided in the mold transport unit K30. However, engraving immediately after the mold is formed can be engraved before it is completely hardened, for example, in the case of a self-hardening sand mold, and it is easy to engrave without breaking the mold. In particular, in the case of a frameless mold, the stamping is performed by the marking device K16 while the mold is in the molding device K14.

  The mold transfer unit K30 has a mold rail KRf for transferring the mold KM from the molding unit K10 to the pouring unit K70, and cooling and conveying the mold KM to the mold separating device K48. The mold rails KRf are arranged side by side, for example, as shown in FIG. 146, and the mold KM is laterally moved between the rails KRf and is alternately conveyed by a plurality of rails KRf in the opposite direction. For this purpose, the poured mold KM is cooled over time, and the molten metal is solidified and formed into a casting before reaching the mold release device K48. In other words, the conveying path of the mold conveying unit K30 is conveyed to be poured from the molding line K32 for processing the completed mold molded by the molding apparatus K14 into a completed mold in a state capable of pouring, and the pouring machine K72. The mold transport unit pouring zone K33 is roughly divided into a mold transport unit cooling zone K34 in which the poured mold KM is transported and cooled over time.

  The mold transport unit K30 has a mold feed pusher K38 as a transport mechanism shown in FIG. 148 at a straight end of the rail KRf. The pusher K38 is a device for extending and contracting a rod to push a mold, and is, for example, an air cylinder, a hydraulic cylinder, or an electric cylinder. The pusher K38 is a sensor that detects extension and contraction of the rod, and has a mold position sensor K39 that detects that the mold KM is being conveyed. The mold position sensor K39 may be a limit switch, a proximity switch, a photoelectric switch, or the like. The pusher K38 preferably has a mold position detection encoder K37 for synchronous pouring and for correctly detecting the pouring position even when the thickness of the mold changes. The pusher K38 pushes the rear end molds arranged on the straight rail KRf by one frame, and intermittently conveys the arranged molds by one frame. It is preferable that a pusher K38 is also installed on the opposite side (front end) of the straight rail KRf, and the rod is contracted in accordance with being pushed at the rear end. With this configuration, the molds KM in a row can be suppressed from both ends even during conveyance, and the molds KM are stabilized during conveyance. When the mold KM reaches the front end, it is transferred by the traverser KT onto the adjacent rail KRf, and is made the rear end in the mold line there. The traverser KT may also be provided with a mold position sensor K39.

  The molding line K32 of the mold transport unit K30 further includes a gas drilling device K40, which drills a hole in the mold to release gas generated upon pouring. The molding line K32 further includes an upper and lower mold reversing machine K41, for example, inverting the upper mold and the lower mold to turn the space of the mold upward. The molding line K32 further has a sand cutter K42 for removing excess sand on the upper surface of the upper die and the lower surface of the lower die to make it flat. The molding line K32 further includes a gate cutter K43, and the gate is opened in the upper mold.

  The molding line K32 further includes a stool setting device K44 for placing the mold on the stool. The molding line K32 further has a core setter K45, and sets the core in the upper die and the lower die. The molding line K32 further has an upper mold re-inverter K46, which is oriented so as to form one mold when the upper mold is inverted and two upper and lower molds are stacked. The molding line K32 further includes a mold aligning / transferring device K47, and the upper mold and the lower mold are combined to form an upper and lower completed mold that can be poured. In addition, the arrangement | sequence of the apparatus from the gas drilling apparatus K40 to the core setter K45 is not restricted to the above, and can be replaced suitably.

  When the mold is a mold with a frame, for example, as shown in FIG. 146, the mold transport unit K30 includes a gas drilling device K40, an upper and lower mold reversing device K41, a sand cutter K42, a sprue cutter K43, and a stool set device K44. , A core setter K45, an upper mold re-inverter K46, and a mold aligning / transferring device K47, and the mold KM molded by the molding device K14 is processed into a vertically completed mold that can be poured. When the mold is a frameless mold, processing such as formation of vent holes, core setting, and mold matching may be performed by the molding apparatus K14. In that case, the mold transport unit K30 processes the mold. And some or all of the devices K40 to K47 may not be provided.

  The mold transport unit K30 has a mold release device K48. In the mold releasing device K48, the mold is disassembled, the casting is taken out, and the casting and sand are separated. The casting then goes through a post-process and is shipped as a product. The core is also separated. The sand is used for a mold after removing mixed iron powder, binder and the like by a sand recovery device (not shown).

  The molten metal transport unit K50 includes an alloy material charging unit K60 for charging an alloy material to be reacted with the molten metal into the processing ladle KF. The alloy material unit K60 has a plurality of alloy material hoppers K62, and throws one or a plurality of alloy materials into the processing ladle KL1. Alternatively, the processing material ladle KL1 is covered with a hole, and a thin pipe filled with the alloy material is inserted into the molten metal in the processing metal ladle KL1 through a hole in the cover to inject the alloy material and the molten metal using a wire inoculation device (not shown). You may make it react. The alloy material unit K60 has a measuring device (not shown) and a timer (not shown) for measuring the weight of the alloy material put into the processing ladle KL1 from each alloy material hopper K62.

  The molten metal transport unit K50 replaces the molten metal with the pouring ladle KL2, the charging position KP1 where the alloy material is charged from the alloy material charging unit K60 into the processing ladle KL1, the hot metal receiving position KP2 where the molten metal is received from the furnace KF. There is a hot water receiving cart K52 for transferring the processing ladle KL1 to the empty replacement position KP4, and a rail KR on which the hot water receiving truck K52 runs. When reacting the alloy material and the molten metal by wire inoculation, the position where the wire is inoculated is the input position KP1. In addition, the description “when the alloy material is input” will be replaced with “when the wire is inoculated”. In addition, the alloy material is Mg, Ce, Ca, Ni, Cr, Cu, Mo, V, Ti, etc. added to the molten metal in order to enhance the strength and toughness of the cast iron, or corrosion resistance, heat resistance, wear resistance, and the like. Say. The alloy material contains a graphite spheroidizing agent. In addition, an inoculant such as calcium silicon, ferrosilicon, or graphite may be added in the alloy material input unit K60.

  As shown in FIG. 149, the hot-water receiving cart K52 with an emptying function includes a traveling truck K520 that travels on the rail KR and a traveling motor K522 that causes the traveling truck K520 to travel. The wheels of the traveling vehicle K520 are provided with an encoder K523, and measure the rotation of the wheels, that is, the traveling of the traveling vehicle K520. That is, the encoder K523 can detect the position of the processing ladle KL1, and is a ladle position detection sensor. In addition, the hot-water receiving cart K52 with an emptying function may include a ladle position detection sensor K59 such as a photoelectric sensor described later. The hot-water receiving cart K52 with an emptying function includes a tilting device K526 for tilting the processing ladle KL1 to replace the molten metal, and a tilting motor K527 for tilting the processing ladle KL1 using the tilting device K526. The tilting device K526 and the processing ladle KL1 are placed on the scissor lifter K524 on the traveling carriage K520, and are raised and lowered. By having the function of raising and lowering the processing ladle KL1 by the hot water receiving cart K52 with the emptying function, the emptying ladle KL1 can be easily replaced with the pouring ladle KL2. The hot-water receiving cart K52 with the emptying function has a load cell (first weight scale) K525 for measuring the weight of the molten metal received from the furnace KF. In addition, it has a non-contact thermometer (not shown) for measuring the temperature of the received molten metal.

  In the hot water receiving cart K52 with the emptying function, by installing the cable reel K528 and the control panel K521 for receiving power from the outside at a position away from the processing ladle KL1, the molten metal can be discharged from the processing ladle KL1. In the event of a leak, these devices are not affected. Note that the control panel K521 may be installed at a position along the rail KR on which the traveling vehicle K520 travels, instead of on the traveling vehicle K520.

  When the molten metal is placed in the processing ladle KL1 into which the alloy material has been charged, and the alloy material and the molten metal react with each other, droplets of the molten metal are scattered or dust or gas is generated. Then, when the alloy material in the processing ladle KL1 reacts with the molten metal, the processing ladle KL1 is transported to the reaction position KL3. A reaction chamber (not shown) is preferably provided at the reaction position KP3. The reaction chamber surrounds the upper part of the processing ladle KL1, and discharges air with a duct. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the droplets of the molten metal from scattering around and discharge the dust and dust.

  As shown in FIG. 150, the molten metal transport unit K50 is provided with an empty change position KP4 at which the molten metal is exchanged from the processing ladle KL1 (strictly different from the empty change position KP4 of the processing ladle KL1; ), A pouring ladle transport cart K54 for transporting the pouring ladle KL2 to a transfer position KP5 for transporting the pouring ladle KL2 to the pouring machine K72, and a pouring ladle transport cart K54 traveling. And a rail KR. The pouring ladle transport trolley K54 includes a traveling trolley K540 traveling on a rail, a roller conveyor K544 and a roller conveyor motor K546 installed on the traveling trolley K540 and moving the pouring ladle KL2 in the horizontal direction. The wheels of the traveling vehicle K540 are provided with an encoder K543, and measure the rotation of the wheels, that is, the traveling of the traveling vehicle K540. That is, encoder K543 can detect the position of pouring ladle KL2, and is a ladle position detection sensor. In the pouring ladle transport cart K54, the cable reel K548 and the control panel K541 for receiving power from the outside are installed at a position away from the pouring ladle KL2, so that the molten metal can be removed from the pouring ladle KL2. In case of leakage, these devices are not affected. Note that the control panel K541 may be installed at a position along the rail KR on which the traveling vehicle K540 travels, instead of on the traveling vehicle K540. Also, between the transfer position KP5 and the pouring machine K72, a pouring ladle transport mechanism K58 for transporting the pouring ladle KL2 in a direction orthogonal to the traveling direction of the pouring ladle transport cart K54 may be provided. Good. The pouring ladle transport mechanism K58 may be a roller conveyor or the like. The capacity of the processing ladle KL1 may be doubled, for example, to the capacity of the pouring ladle KL2, and one processing ladle KL1 may be replaced with two pouring ladle KL2.

  An empty inoculation device K56 for adding an inoculant to the molten metal to be replaced from the processing ladle KL1 to the pouring ladle KL2 may be provided near the emptying position VP4. The configuration of the empty inoculation device K56 is basically the same as that of the alloy material input unit K60. By injecting the inoculant when the molten metal is changed from the processing ladle KL1 to the pouring ladle KL2, the inoculant can be uniformly introduced in a short time.

  The molten metal transport unit K50 transports the processing ladle KL1 to the input position KP1, the receiving position CP2, the reaction position KP3, and the emptying position KP4 as the ladle positions of the processing ladle KL1, and It has a ladle position detection sensor K59 for detecting that the pouring ladle KL2 has been conveyed to the empty position KP4 and the transfer position KP5 as ladle positions of the pan KL2. The ladle position detection sensor K59 may be, for example, a proximity switch or a laser sensor installed below the roller conveyor of the pouring ladle transport mechanism K58 as shown in FIG. Alternatively, it may be an encoder K523, K543 installed on the hot-rolling trolley K52 shown in FIG. 149 or the pouring ladle transporting trolley K54 shown in FIG. 150, or a cold-receiving trolley K52 with the emptying function. Or a photoelectric sensor installed on the pouring ladle transfer cart K54. In addition, there is a photoelectric sensor for confirming that the processing ladle KL1 is mounted on the empty hot-water receiving carriage K52 and that the pouring ladle KL2 is mounted on the pouring ladle transporting car K54. Is preferred.

  As shown in FIG. 151, the pouring unit K70 has a pouring machine K72 that pours the pouring from the pouring ladle KL2 into the mold KM. The pouring machine K72 is supported by a pouring machine truck K720 that travels in parallel with the transfer of the mold KM to be poured, an elevating mechanism K722 installed on the pouring machine cart 720, and an elevating mechanism K722. And a tilting mechanism K724 for tilting the mounted pouring ladle KL2, a pouring machine rail KRp on which a pouring machine truck K720 travels, and a load cell (second weight scale) for measuring the weight of the molten metal of the pouring ladle KL2. K725. The elevating mechanism K722 is installed on a forward and backward moving mechanism K728 that moves in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the pouring machine truck K720 travels. In addition, a non-contact thermometer (not shown) for measuring the temperature of the molten metal to be poured is provided. The non-contact thermometer is preferably of a fiber type, for example, so that the temperature measurement unit can be adjusted.

  It is preferable that the pouring machine K72 has a level detecting camera K726 for detecting the level of the level of the gate of the mold KM. In this case, by providing a taper in the pouring cup of the sprue, the spout level is detected from the area of the spout taken by the spout detection camera K726. The water level detection camera K726 may be an image sensor. It is preferable that the water level detection camera is supported (suspended) by an arm and can be moved in the horizontal direction so that the water level can be photographed even if the position of the gate changes.

  As shown in FIG. 151, the pouring unit K70 preferably has a test piece (TP) collection unit K76 that receives molten metal for the test piece (TP) from the pouring ladle KL2. The TP collecting unit K76 collects TP from the molten metal of each pouring ladle KL2 for material inspection.

  As shown in FIG. 152, the casting facility K1 includes a casting facility management computer K91 that manages the entire casting facility K1, and each unit includes a control device. That is, the molding unit K10 includes a molding unit control device K11. The mold transport unit K30 includes a mold transport unit K31, the melt transport unit K50 includes a melt transport unit control device K51, and the pouring unit K70 includes a pouring unit control device K71. Further, the alloy material input unit K60 includes an alloy material input unit control device K61. The TP collection unit K76 may be provided with a TP collection unit control device. These control devices are installed in each unit, but the installation locations are not limited. For example, the molten metal transport unit control device K51 may be configured with a control panel K521 of a hot water receiving vehicle K52 with an emptying function and a control panel K541 of a pouring ladle transport vehicle K54. Further, pouring unit control device K71 may be installed on pouring machine cart K720 as shown in FIG. 151, or may be installed at a position along pouring machine rail KRp. Note that physically, the plurality of control devices K11, K31, K51, K61, and K71 may be in the same control device, or may be in the same computer as the casting facility management computer K91. The casting facility management computer K91 may be any computer that can perform data management, and its configuration is not particularly limited. Alternatively, the operations of each control device and the casting facility management computer K91 may be performed by a computer in a location different from the casting facility K1 by using cloud computing. Also in these cases, each unit is provided with each control device, and the casting equipment K1 is provided with a casting equipment management computer K91.

  Next, a casting method and a data management method in the casting facility K1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 146, 147, and 152. Based on a product plan, user input, etc., molding plan data indicating a plan for molding the mold KM by the molding unit K10, the mold KM molded by the mold transport unit K30 is transported, and processing such as drilling is performed on the mold KM. Transfer plan data indicating the plan, melt transfer plan data indicating the transfer plan and emptying plan of the melt in the melt transfer unit K50, alloy plan data indicating the plan of the alloy material and the inoculant to be charged in the alloy material input unit K60, and In the pouring unit K70, pouring plan data indicating a pouring plan from the pouring ladle KL2 to the mold KM is input to the casting facility management computer K91 or calculated by the casting facility management computer K91. Note that two or more of the molding plan data, the transfer plan data, the molten metal transfer plan data, the alloy material plan data, and the pouring plan data may be combined and treated as a set of data. The molten metal transfer plan data and the alloy material plan data together are referred to as molten metal plan data.

  The molding plan data includes data such as a model number, a release agent application time, a static pressure or a squeeze pressure at the time of molding, a sand injection amount, a mold height, a mold thickness, and a compressibility. The transfer plan data includes data such as gas drilling, the shape and position of the gate, the core set, and the cycle time of intermittent mold transfer. The molten metal transport plan data includes data such as a material number and a planned hot water weight. The alloy material plan data includes data such as the hopper number and the weight input from the hopper. The pouring plan data includes data such as pouring weight, cup position, pouring temperature, allowable fading time, and material of the molten metal corresponding to the mold.

  In the molding unit K10, the mold KM is molded based on the molding plan data. First, the property of the molding sand before molding is measured by the pre-molding sand characteristic measuring machine K12. Properties to be measured include compactability (CB), moisture, sand temperature, air permeability, mold strength (anti-pressure), and the like. The properties of the mold sand greatly affect the quality of the mold. The measured properties of the mold sand are stored in the molding unit controller K11 as molding history data.

  Using the mold sand whose properties have been measured, a mold (upper mold and lower mold at this stage) is molded by the molding apparatus K14. A mold release agent is applied to a predetermined model, a predetermined amount of mold sand is put therein, and pressurized with a predetermined static pressure or a squeeze pressure until a predetermined compression ratio is reached, thereby forming a mold having a predetermined thickness and height. When the mold is molded, the molding unit controller K11 issues a mold serial number to the mold. When the mold serial number is issued, the molding plan data such as the measured properties of the mold sand is associated with the mold serial number. In addition, the molding apparatus K14 measures molding history data such as sand input weight, compression ratio, static pressure or squeeze pressure, squeeze time, pressure increase speed, squeeze stroke, mold thickness, molding time, etc., and mold serial number as molding history data. Associate with The molding unit controller K11 transmits the mold serial number and the molding history data to the casting facility management computer K91. The molding plan data and the molding history data are collectively referred to as molding data. The molding unit controller K11 transmits the mold serial number and the molding data associated with the mold serial number to the mold transport unit controller K31.

  When the mold is formed by the molding apparatus K14, a mark for identifying the space is imprinted on the inner surface of the space for manufacturing the casting in the mold by the engraving apparatus K16. What is necessary is just to engrave on either an upper mold or a lower mold. When one mold has a plurality of spaces, that is, when a plurality of castings are manufactured by one mold, an identifiable mark is imprinted on each space. That is, an identifiable mark is attached to each obtained casting (product). When engraving is performed by the engraving device K16, the molding unit control device K11 issues an individual identification serial number corresponding to each engraving. Further, the molding unit control device K11 associates the issued individual identification serial number with the template serial number. When the marking device K16 is installed in the mold transfer unit K30, the individual identification serial number is issued by the mold transfer unit control device K31, and is associated with the mold serial number by the mold transfer unit control device K31.

  In the mold transport unit K30, based on the mold transport plan data, the mold KM is transported, and the mold KM is put into a pouring state, and the poured mold, that is, the molten metal is cooled to separate the casting and sand. . In the mold transport unit K30, the mold is intermittently fed by the pusher K38 one frame at a time. The traverser KT also transfers the molds one by one to the adjacent mold row. In addition, a hole is formed in the mold by a gas drilling device K40, the upper mold and the lower mold are inverted by a vertical mold reversing machine K41 to turn the space of the mold upward, and extra sand on the upper surface of the upper mold is removed by a sand cutter K42. Remove and open the gate with the gate cutter K43. Further, the mold is placed on the surface plate carrier by the surface plate carrier setting device K44, the cores are set on the upper die and the lower die by the core setter K45, and the upper die is inverted by the upper die re-inverter K46. The upper mold and the lower mold are combined by the mold transfer device K47 to form one mold KM. History data in these processes, for example, gas drilling information, gate opening information, core information, etc., is collected as molding data (mold history data) and associated with the mold serial number. Thus, the mold transport unit K30 collects molding data while transporting the mold. When a trouble occurs in these processes, the mold transport unit control device K31 associates the information of the trouble with the mold serial number of the mold KM. In the case of a mold without a frame, a part or all of the above-described gas drilling information, gate hole drilling information, core information, and the like are obtained by the molding unit K10, and are associated with the mold serial number by the molding unit controller K11. You may be.

  As shown in FIG. 153, each time the mold is transported, the mold transport unit controller K31 detects the transport of the mold by the mold position sensor K39 and shifts the serial number of the mold. A mold serial number “Kn” is issued to the mold molded by the molding apparatus K14. When the mold transport unit K30 detects that the mold has been transported by one frame, the mold serial number “Kn” is shifted to the next position. A mold serial number is assigned to all the stop positions in the intermittent transfer of the mold, and by shifting all the mold serial numbers, the position of the mold and the mold serial number correctly correspond.

  In the molten metal transport unit K50, based on the molten metal transport plan data, the hot water receiving vehicle K52 with the emptying function and the pouring ladle transport vehicle K54 are operated. The empty processing ladle KL1 is first conveyed to the charging position KL1 by the hot water receiving cart K52 with the emptying function. When the processing ladle KL1 is transported to the charging position KL1, the alloy material is charged into the processing ladle KL1 from the alloy material charging unit K60. The alloy material may include an inoculant.

  In the alloy material input unit K60, the alloy material is input into the processing ladle KL1 based on the alloy material input plan data. When the alloy material is charged into the processing ladle KL1, the alloy material input unit controller K61 issues a ladle serial number to the processing ladle KL1. Also, the alloy material input history data such as the type, weight, and input time of the alloy material input from the alloy material input unit K60 to the processing ladle KL1 is associated with the ladle serial number. When the ladle serial number and the alloy material input history data are completed, the data is transmitted to the casting equipment management computer K91. Also, at least the ladle serial number is transmitted to the molten metal transport unit control device K51. The ladle serial number and the alloy material input history data may not be transmitted to the casting facility management computer K91 but may be transmitted to the molten metal transport unit control device K51. In this case, the molten metal transport unit control device K51 sends the data including the data to the casting facility management computer K91 as molten metal state data as molten metal history data. The molten metal state data may include molten metal plan data. When a problem occurs in the charging of the alloy material into the processing ladle KL1 in the alloy material charging unit K60, information on the defect is transmitted to the casting equipment management computer K91 in association with the ladle serial number.

  The processing ladle KL1 into which the alloy material has been loaded is transported to the hot-water receiving position KP2 by the hot-water receiving cart K52 having the emptying function of the molten metal transport unit K50. The processing ladle KL1 receives molten metal from the furnace KL. When the molten metal is received, the weight of the molten metal received by the load cell K525 as the first weighing scale and the temperature measured by the non-contact thermometer are measured. The molten metal transport unit control device K51 associates the measured weight, temperature, tapping furnace number, charge number, material number, received time, and the like with the ladle serial number of the processing ladle KL1 as molten metal state data. Further, data relating to the properties of the molten metal melted in the furnace KF may be received, and the data may be included in the molten metal state data. In this document, the molten metal melted in the furnace, the molten metal received in the processing ladle, and the molten metal reacted with the alloy material are simply referred to as “molten metal” in this document.

  The treated ladle KL1 that has received the hot water is transported to the reaction position KP3 by the hot water receiving cart K52 with the emptying function. When the reaction between the molten metal and the alloy material is intense, after the alloy material is charged into the processing ladle KL1 by the alloy material charging unit K60, the alloy material is covered with a cover agent such as steel scrap, and the contact between the molten metal and the alloy material is performed. suppress. Therefore, immediately after receiving the hot water in the processing ladle KL1, no violent reaction occurs, and during that time, the processing ladle KL1 can be moved to the reaction position BP3. When the alloy material contains a spheroidizing element such as Mg, vigorous bubbling occurs when the reaction starts. As a result, the measured value of the load cell K525 fluctuates greatly. Thus, a point in time at which the measured value of the load cell K525 greatly fluctuates and then becomes smaller than a predetermined value can be recognized as the start of fading. The molten metal transport unit control device K51 may associate the fading start time or the fading elapsed time, which is the elapsed time from the fading start time, with the ladle serial number as molten metal state data. The fading start time or elapsed time associated with the ladle serial number is transmitted to pouring unit control device K71. As described above, the molten metal transport unit control device K71 collects molten metal state data while transporting the processing ladle KL1 and the pouring ladle KL2, and associates the molten metal state data with the ladle serial number.

  When the reaction between the molten metal and the alloy material ends, the processing ladle KL1 is transported to the emptying position KP4 by the hot water receiving cart K52 with the emptying function. At the emptying position KP4, the empty pouring ladle KL2 is transported by the pouring ladle transport cart K54 and stands by. Therefore, the molten metal is changed from the processing ladle KL1 to the pouring ladle KL2. Here, in the hot water receiving cart K52 with the emptying function, the processing ladle KL1 is set to a desired height by the scissor lifter K524, and the processing ladle KL1 is tilted and replaced, so that the emptying can be performed safely and efficiently. During the transportation of the processing ladle KL1, the processing ladle KL1 is lowered and moved to a position close to the center of the traveling vehicle K520, so that the influence of the swing of the traveling vehicle K520 can be reduced.

  When the emptying is completed, the ladle serial number associated with the processing ladle KL1 is associated with the pouring ladle KL2. After that, the hot water receiving cart K52 with the emptying function transports the processing ladle KL1 to the charging position KP1, and is repeated from the charging of the alloy material. In addition, two pouring ladles KL2 and two pouring machines K72 may be provided, and the molten metal may be replaced from one processing ladle KL1 to two pouring ladles KL2. When pouring takes time, pouring the pouring from the pouring ladle KL2 to the mold KM using the plurality of pouring machines K72 can improve the efficiency of the casting facility K1. When one processing ladle KL1 is replaced with two pouring ladles KL2, the second pouring ladle KL2 includes the ladle serial number of the processing ladle KL1 and the second ladle. Data indicating that the pouring ladle has been replaced is associated as a ladle serial number. In addition, an inoculant may be added from the emptying inoculation device K56 to the molten metal that is replaced from the processing ladle KL1 to the pouring ladle KL2. The molten metal transport unit control device K51 associates the type and weight of the added inoculant and the addition time with the ladle serial number as molten metal state data.

  When the molten metal is replaced with the pouring ladle KL2, the pouring ladle transporting carriage K54 transports the pouring ladle KL2 to the transfer position KL5. Pouring ladle KL2 is transferred from pouring position KP5 to pouring position KP6 by pouring ladle transport mechanism K58, and held by pouring machine K72. The molten metal transport unit control device K51 transmits the ladle serial number and the molten metal state data associated with the ladle serial number to the casting facility management computer K91. In addition, when a trouble occurs in the molten metal conveyance in the pouring and conveying unit K50, the information of the trouble is transmitted to the casting equipment management computer K91 in association with the serial number of the ladle.

  As shown in FIG. 154, the molten metal transport unit K50 moves the ladle KL1 or the pouring ladle KL2 at the charging position KP1, the receiving position KP2, the reaction position KP3, the emptying position KP4, and the transfer position KP5 to the ladle position. The detection is performed by the detection sensor K59 (or the encoders K523 and K543), and the ladle serial number is shifted. Then, the molten metal state data is associated with the ladle serial number. Therefore, the position of the processing ladle KL1 or the pouring ladle KL2 correctly corresponds to the ladle serial number, and the molten metal state data from different devices is correctly associated with the ladle serial number.

  When the mold KM is transported before the pouring machine K72, the mold transport unit control device K31 transmits the serial number of the mold KM to the pouring unit control device K71. Then, the pouring unit control device K71 receives the pouring plan data from the casting facility management computer K91, and further receives the ladle serial number of the pouring ladle KL2, the receiving weight, and the tolerance from the molten metal transport unit control device K51. The fading time, fading start time, fading elapsed time, and the like are received. It should be noted that pouring unit control device K71 may receive the fading start time and measure the fading elapsed time without receiving the fading elapsed time.

  The pouring unit control device K71 determines the material of the molten metal according to the pouring plan data corresponding to the mold serial number of the mold KM, that is, the type and weight of the alloy material, the weight of the molten metal, etc. No. is compared with the material of the molten metal according to the molten metal state data corresponding to No. When these two materials do not match, pouring unit control device K71 issues an error signal. In this case, the molten metal is returned to the melting furnace KF without pouring. Pouring ladle KL2 may be suspended by a crane or the like and returned to melting furnace KL. Alternatively, a transfer device (not shown) for returning the molten metal to the melting furnace KF may be provided, and the molten metal may be returned to the melting furnace KF.

  When the pouring ladle KL2 is received by the pouring machine K72, the weight of the molten metal in the pouring ladle KL2 is measured by the load cell K725 as the second weighing machine. The difference between the weight measured by the load cell K725 and the weight measured by the load cell K525 associated with the same ladle serial number is calculated, and when the difference is larger than a predetermined value, the pouring unit control device K71 issues an error signal. . This is because there is a high possibility that the molten metal has spilled or leaked during transportation.

  The pouring unit control device K71 pours the molten metal from the pouring ladle KL2 to the mold KM based on the pouring plan data. Therefore, first, the pouring ladle KL2 is moved to the mold KM side by the forward and backward moving mechanism K728 based on the height of the mold and the position of the gate associated with the serial number of the mold, and is moved up and down by the elevating mechanism K722. Then, the pouring ladle KL2 is tilted by the tilting mechanism K724 while the pouring port of the pouring ladle KL2 is moved by the elevating mechanism K722 and the front-back moving mechanism K728, and the molten metal is poured into the mold KM.

  Pouring unit control device K71 stores a pouring pattern, and performs pouring according to the pouring pattern applied to the mold associated with the mold serial number. During pouring, image data of the gate is acquired by the level detection camera K726. The pouring unit control device K71 calculates the level of the molten metal based on the image data and controls the tilting of the pouring ladle KL2 by the tilting mechanism K724. Also, during the pouring, the weight of the molten metal in the ladle KL2 is measured by the load cell K725, and the pouring unit controller K71 calculates the amount of the molten metal poured into the mold KM. When the weight of the poured molten metal approaches the target value, drain the molten metal. The mold KM is intermittently transported even before the pouring machine K72 as in other places. Therefore, if pouring to mold KM is not completed during the stopped time, pouring machine truck K720 runs at the same speed as conveyed mold KM, and continues pouring to mold KM. be able to. When the time for pouring from the pouring machine K72 is longer than the interval at which the mold is intermittently conveyed, two pouring machines K72 are used. That is, two pouring ladles KL2 are used.

  Pouring unit control device K71 appropriately compares the fading elapsed time with the allowable fading time. If the fading elapsed time exceeds the allowable fading time, an error signal is issued, and pouring from the pouring ladle KL2 is stopped even if the molten metal remains in the pouring ladle KL2. Therefore, spheroidization failure due to fading can be prevented. The molten metal remaining in the pouring ladle KL2 is returned to the melting furnace KF using a transport device that returns the molten metal to the melting furnace KF, and is reused.

  The TP collection unit K76 receives the molten metal from the pouring ladle KL2 and solidifies it as TP. The molten metal may be received before pouring from the processing ladle KL2 into the first mold, or after pouring into one mold and beginning to pour into the next mold, from the last pouring from the ladle KL2. It may be after pouring into the mold. When TP is collected, pouring unit control device K71 issues a test piece (TP) serial number. The TP serial number is associated with the ladle serial number. The TP is then subjected to a material inspection, and the inspection result is associated with the TP serial number and transmitted to the casting facility management computer K91. Note that the TP collection unit K76 may include a TP collection unit control device and issue TP serial numbers. In that case, the TP serial number is sent to the pouring unit control device K71, where it is associated with the ladle serial number. In this case, the TP sampling unit control device is regarded as a part of the pouring unit control device K71. If there is a material defect as a result of the TP inspection, the TP serial number is transmitted to the casting facility management computer K91. The ladle serial number is known from the TP serial number, is associated with the mold serial number, and the mold release device K48 described later processes the mold serial number as a defective product when the error signal is associated with the serial number.

  In the pouring unit control device K71, the number of the ladle, the pouring (casting) time, the pouring pattern number, the pouring (casting) weight, which is the number of the mold poured from the same pouring ladle KL2. Then, the time, the pouring temperature and the like are measured, and these data are associated with the ladle sequence number as molten metal state data. The ladle serial number of the pouring ladle KL2 poured into the mold KM is associated with the serial number of the mold KM. Pouring unit control device K71, after completing these associations, transmits data to casting facility management computer K91. If a problem occurs during pouring from the pouring ladle KL2 to the mold KM in the pouring unit K70, information about the problem is transmitted to the casting facility management computer K91 in association with the mold serial number.

  In the mold transport unit K30, the poured mold KM is transported in the cooling zone K34. In the cooling zone K34, the rail KRf is long, and it takes time to be transported. During that time, the molten metal in the mold KM is cooled and solidified. When the mold KM is transported to the mold release device K48 downstream of the cooling zone K34, the mold KM is disassembled, and the casting and sand are separated. The casting is sent to a post-process to produce a product. The sand is sent to the molding zone K10 via a sand recovery device (not shown). If the error signal and the TP inspection result associated with the mold serial number of the mold KM transported to the mold release device K48 are defective, the mold transport unit controller K31 does not send the separated casting to the subsequent process. To be distinguished. Therefore, defective products can be prevented from being shipped as products. The mold transport unit control device K31 associates a mold serial number with the casting sent to the subsequent process. Further, it transmits the mold serial number and the molding history data to the casting equipment management computer K91.

  The casting equipment management computer K91 stores a mold serial number, molding data, a ladle serial number, molten metal state data, and a TP inspection result. A mold serial number is associated with the mold manufactured by the casting facility K1. The ladle serial number is associated with the mold serial number. Therefore, the serial number of the mold and the serial number of the ladle are known from the casting product. The mold serial number is associated with mold molding data, and the ladle serial number is associated with molten metal state data. Therefore, all history data is associated with the casting product. Therefore, when there is a product defect, the manufacturing history can be confirmed. Here, since the molten metal state data having a large data amount can be managed for each ladle, and the data managed for each ladle can be extracted from the mold serial number for each mold, the amount of data to be stored can be reduced.

  In addition, when the individual identification serial number is issued corresponding to each space of the mold, the casting product can be specified by the individual identification serial number. Therefore, for example, if a defect is found by product inspection, the mold serial number is drawn using the individual identification serial number of the casting product, and based on the mold serial number, the mold history data and the molten metal state data can be known. it can. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine the cause of the failure.

  Here, with reference also to FIG. 155, the operation of performing data processing in units of molds and the operation of performing data processing in units of ladle will be described together. The molding is performed by the molding apparatus K14 using the sand that has been subjected to the sand treatment and whose properties have been measured based on the pre-molding sand characteristics. Here, a mold serial number is issued to the molded mold, and thereafter, data processing is performed for each mold using the mold serial number. Note that the exchange of the shape and the like of the mold is performed by exchanging a casting frame, a model, and the like used in the molding apparatus K14. Gas drilling, raising frame reversal, sand cutting, sluice cut, platen bogie set, core set, upper mold re-inversion, mold alignment, etc., as processes for processing into the molded mold, use the data of the mold unit, history Is recorded in the template unit.

  When the alloy material is put into the processing ladle KL1 placed on the hot water receiving cart K52 with an emptying function, a ladle serial number is issued to the processing ladle KL1. Thereafter, data processing is performed for each ladle using the ladle serial number. Movement of the processing ladle KL1 to the hot water receiving position KP2, the reaction position KP3, and the emptying position KP4, receiving the molten metal from the melting furnace KF, to the pouring ladle KL2 placed on the pouring ladle carrier K54. , Moving the pouring ladle KL2 to the transfer position KP5, transferring the pouring ladle KL2 to the pouring machine K72, pouring the mold in the pouring machine K72, and TP in the TP collecting unit K76. For collection, etc., data is used for each ladle, and a history (state data) is also recorded for each ladle.

  When the mold is poured into the mold by the pouring machine K72, the ladle serial number is associated with the mold serial number, and data associated with the ladle serial number can be extracted from the mold serial number. That is, since the cooling time of the mold in the cooling zone can be changed depending on, for example, the molten metal pouring weight, the pouring weight may be extracted from the serial number of the mold and the length conveyed in the cooling zone may be changed for each mold. Specifically, it is only necessary to change which traverser KT is used to transfer the mold to the adjacent mold rail KRf, or which mold rail KRf is used to transfer the mold. Further, when the mold is separated by the mold separating device K48, if the molten metal state data drawn from the serial number of the mold includes a defect, the separated casting is distinguished from the casting as a product, and, for example, is disposed. You can also.

Also in the casting facility of the present modification as described above, the control device of the facility corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting facility, as described above, measures the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, It is the same as the above embodiment in that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the paired upper mold and lower mold that have been matched.
Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Twenty-Seventh Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a twenty-seventh modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The twenty-seventh modification is a modification of the casting equipment 1, mainly the molding equipment 2, the core installation equipment 3, and the primary cooling and conveying device 5 of the cooling and conveying equipment 4, as in the above-mentioned twenty-sixth modification. . More specifically, the twenty-seventh modification is a further modification of the twenty-sixth modification.
Also in the twenty-seventh modification, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the twenty-seventh modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

  With reference to FIGS. 156 and 157, a description will be given of a casting facility K2 different from the casting facility K1 of FIG. In the casting facility K2, the hot water is received from the furnace KF to the pouring ladle KL2 and transferred to the pouring machine K72 without replacement. The other points are the same as those of the casting facility K1, and therefore, a duplicate description will be omitted, and only different points will be described. When the reaction between the molten metal and the alloy material is not so intense, it is not necessary to cause the reaction in the processing ladle KL1, and the reaction can be performed by receiving the molten metal in the pouring ladle KL2.

  The molten metal transport unit K50 includes an alloy material charging unit K60, a pouring ladle transport cart K84 for transporting the pouring ladle KL2 to the charging position KP1, the receiving position KP2, the reaction position KP3, and the transferring position KP4, and a pouring ladle. It has a rail KR on which the pot transport cart K84 runs and a pouring ladle transport mechanism K58 for transporting the pouring ladle KL2 from the transfer position KP4 to the pouring machine K72. When the reaction is mild, the reaction position KP3 is not particularly determined, and the molten metal and the reaction alloy material may be reacted during transportation.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the pouring ladle transport cart K84 is a traveling cart K840 traveling on the rail KR, a guide column K842 installed on the traveling cart K840, and extends horizontally from the guide column K842. An elevating frame K844 that can be moved up and down, a ladle moving mechanism K846 installed on the elevating frame K844 to move the pouring ladle KL2 in the horizontal direction, and an elevating frame elevating device K848 that elevates the elevating frame K844. The elevating frame elevating device K848 raises and lowers the elevating frame K844 by winding up the chain K848C by the rotation of the motor K848M. For example, even if the construction time of the melting furnace KF and the pouring unit K70 is different and the installation height is different, the pouring ladle transport cart K84 has a function of raising and lowering the pouring ladle KL2. Height differences can be absorbed. The pouring ladle transport cart K84 has a load cell (first weight scale) K845 for measuring the weight of the molten metal received from the furnace KF. In addition, it has a non-contact thermometer (not shown) for measuring the temperature of the received molten metal.

  The pouring ladle K84 is provided with a power receiving device K849 and a motor K848M, which receive power from the outside, at a high position and at a position away from the pouring ladle KL2, so that the pouring ladle should be used. When the molten metal leaks from KL2, these devices are not affected. The high position is a position higher than the bottom of the pouring ladle KL2 when the pouring ladle transport cart K84 travels, that is, when the lifting frame is lowered. The position distant from the pouring ladle KL2 is a position on the opposite side of the guide column K842.

  In the casting facility K2 as well, when the alloy material is charged into the pouring ladle KL2 from the alloy material charging unit K60, a ladle serial number is issued to the pouring ladle KL2. The molten metal state data is associated with the ladle serial number, and after pouring from the pouring machine K72 into the mold KM, the ladle serial number is associated with the mold serial number. Therefore, the same effect as that of the casting facility K1 can be obtained.

  It is needless to say that the present modification has the same effect as the twenty-sixth modification already described.

  The transfer of data between the unit controllers K11, K31, K51, K61, K71 and the casting facility management computer K91 described in the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh modifications is not limited to the above, and may be changed as appropriate. The data shown as each plan data, mold history data, and molten metal state data is an example, and other data may be used.

[Twenty-eighth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a twenty-eighth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment. The twenty-eighth modification is a modification of the casting equipment 1, mainly the molding equipment 2, the core installation equipment 3, and the primary cooling and transporting device 5 of the cooling and transporting equipment 4, and is a monitoring system for the casting equipment 1. .
Also in the twenty-eighth modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the twenty-eighth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 159 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a casting facility monitoring system according to the present modification. The casting equipment monitoring system L1 includes a kneading device L2, a main mold making device (corresponding to the molding device 2 in the above embodiment) L3, a core making device L4, a pouring device (corresponding to the pouring device 7 in the above embodiment) L5. , A cooling device (corresponding to the primary cooling and conveying device 5 of the cooling and conveying device 4 in the above-described embodiment) L6, and a casting device including a frame releasing device (corresponding to the mold releasing device 65 in the above-described embodiment) L7, and information collection. The apparatus includes a device L8 and a diagnostic device L9.

  A kneading device L2, which is one of the casting facilities, adds a binder and water to the green mold sand and kneads the mixture to produce kneaded sand. The kneading device L2 includes a control unit L12. The control unit L12 controls the operation of the kneading device L2. All the measurement data related to the kneading process in the kneading device L2 is collected in the control unit L12. The measurement data relating to the kneading process includes, for example, a CB value (compactability value) which is a property of the kneading sand, a temperature of the green sand and the kneading sand, a water content of the green sand and the kneading sand, and an operation sound (noise) of the kneading device L2. And the like. These measurement data are treated as items to be checked in the kneading process. The control unit L12 is a computer or a PLC.

  A main mold forming apparatus L3, which is one of the casting facilities, forms a main mold (upper mold and lower mold). The main mold making apparatus L3 includes a control unit L13. The control unit L13 controls the operation of the main mold making apparatus L3. All the measurement data relating to the main mold making process in the main mold making apparatus L3 are collected in the control unit L13. The measurement data relating to the main molding process includes, for example, mechanical vibration, actuator oil pressure, blowing air pressure (aeration internal pressure), sand tank air pressure, kneading sand temperature, sand tank sand amount, molten metal temperature, Examples include mold strength, compression ratio, dimensional displacement, and timing. These measurement data are treated as items to be checked in the main mold making process. The control unit L13 is a computer or a PLC.

  A core molding apparatus L4, which is one of the casting facilities, molds a core. The core molding apparatus L4 includes a control unit L14. The control unit L14 controls the operation of the core molding apparatus L4. All the measurement data relating to the core molding process in the core molding apparatus L4 is collected in the control unit L14. The measurement data relating to the core molding process includes, for example, the core sand blowing (blow) pressure, the blowing time, the air pressure in the blow tank, the air pressure in the blow head, the mold temperature, and the like. These measurement data are treated as items to be checked in the core molding process. The control unit L14 is a computer or a PLC.

  A pouring device L5, which is one of the casting facilities, injects a molten metal into a mold in which a main die and a core are matched. The pouring device L5 includes a control unit L15. Control unit L15 controls the operation of pouring device L5. All the measurement data related to the pouring step in the pouring device L5 are collected in the control unit L15. The measurement data relating to the pouring step includes, for example, pouring flow rate, pouring time, ladle tilting speed, and the like. These measurement data are treated as items to be checked in the pouring process. The control unit L15 is a computer or a PLC.

  A cooling device L6, which is one of the casting facilities, cools the poured mold. The cooling device L6 includes a control unit L16. The control unit L16 controls the operation of the cooling device L6. All the measurement data on the cooling process in the cooling device L6 is collected in the control unit L16. The measurement data relating to the cooling step includes, for example, a cooling start time, a cooling completion time, an ambient temperature, an air temperature, and the like. These measurement data are handled as items to be checked in the cooling process. The control unit L16 is a computer or a PLC.

  A frame release device L7, which is one of the casting facilities, separates the mold into a casting sand and a cast casting. The frame release device L7 includes a control unit L17. The control unit L17 controls the operation of the frame release device L7. All the measurement data related to the release process in the release device L7 are collected in the control unit L17. The measurement data relating to the unsealing process includes, for example, the noise of the unsealing device, the vibration amount of the vibration motor of the unsealing device, the temperature of the vibration motor of the unsealing device, and the molding sand after the mold is unsealed by the unsealing device. Moisture value and the like. Then, these measurement data are handled as items to be checked in the frame releasing process. The control unit L17 is a computer or a PLC.

(Information collection device)
The information collecting device L8 collects data measured by each device of the casting facility (kneading device L2, main mold making device L3, core making device L4, pouring device L5, cooling device L6, and unraveling device L7). Collect in real time. More specifically, the measurement data collected by the control unit L12 of the kneading device L2, the measurement data collected by the control unit L13 of the master molding device L3, and the measurement data collected by the control unit L14 of the core molding device L4. The measurement data collected by the control unit L15 of the pouring device L5, the measurement data collected by the control unit L16 of the cooling device L6, and the measurement data collected by the control unit L17 of the unpacking device L7. collect. The information collection device L8 is a data logger.

  In this modification, the data from the control unit of each device of the casting facility is collected by one information collecting device L8. However, as many information collecting devices L8 as the number of devices in the casting facility are provided. Data from the control unit of each device may be collected by a separate information collecting device L8.

(Diagnosis device)
The diagnostic device L9 diagnoses the state of each device of the casting facility and the quality of the casting manufactured by the casting facility from the collected measurement data. FIG. 160 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the diagnostic device. The diagnostic device L9 includes a receiving unit L21, a storage unit L22, a control unit L23, a display unit L24, and a transmitting unit L25.

  The receiving unit L21 receives the measurement data collected by the information collecting device L8 in real time. The storage unit L22 stores the received measurement data, and the storage unit L22 stores in advance a management value corresponding to the measurement data in each device of the casting facility and a method of coping with a deviation from the management value. ing. Further, the storage unit L22 stores the report created by the control unit L23.

  The control unit L23 compares the collected measurement data with the management value in real time, and, when determining that the collected data is out of the management value, displays a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur. L24 is displayed. Further, the control unit L23 causes the transmission unit L25 to transmit instruction data for changing the setting condition of the apparatus so that the apparatus of the casting facility that is out of the management value does not exceed the management value. Further, the control unit L23 periodically creates a report from the collected data.

  The display unit L24 displays the measurement data received by the receiving unit L21, the report created by the control unit L23, and the diagnosis result (alarm). The transmitting unit L25 transmits the instruction data to the apparatus of the casting facility that is out of the control value. The diagnostic device L9 is a computer. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an outline of the casting facility monitoring system L1.

(Method of monitoring casting equipment)
Next, a method for monitoring a casting facility using the casting facility monitoring system L1 according to the present modification will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart illustrating a method of monitoring a casting facility using the casting facility monitoring system L1 according to the present modification.

  First, the casting facility monitoring system L1 (each device of the casting facility) is operated (step LS101). Until the casting facility monitoring system L1 (each device of the casting facility) stops (step LS102: Yes), monitoring of the casting facility is continuously performed.

  Simultaneously with the operation of the casting equipment monitoring system L1, the information collecting device L8 is measured by the kneading device L2, the main molding device L3, the core molding device L4, the pouring device L5, the cooling device L6, and the unframe device L7. The collected data is collected in real time (step LS103).

  Next, the receiving unit L21 of the diagnostic device L9 receives the measurement data collected by the information collecting device L8 in real time (step LS104). FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example of the measurement data received by the diagnostic device L9. In this drawing, the measurement data collected from the master molding apparatus L3 is shown not in the form of raw data but in the form of edited data displayed on the display unit L24. It can be seen from the figure that the pressure in the aeration, which is one of the measurement data, is displayed.

  Next, the control unit L23 of the diagnostic device L9 compares the received measurement data with a management value stored in advance in the storage unit L22 of the diagnostic device L9 in real time (step LS105). When the control unit L23 determines that the measurement data does not deviate from the management value (step LS105: No), the data collection is continuously performed.

  Then, the control unit L23 periodically creates a report from the collected data (step LS106). FIG. 164 is a diagram illustrating an example of a report created by the control unit L23 of the diagnostic device L9. In this drawing, production information such as the number of moldings of the main mold, cycle time, and the like are summarized in a table and a graph in an easy-to-understand manner based on the measurement data transmitted from the main molding apparatus L3. The time for collecting information for creating a report is arbitrary. For example, a report is automatically created every 8 hours, and is stored in the storage unit L22 of the diagnostic device L9 so that an operator can confirm it later. 165 to 168 are diagrams illustrating another example of the report created by the control unit L23 of the diagnostic device L9.

  On the other hand, when the control unit L23 determines that the measured data is out of the management value (step LS105: Yes), the display unit L24 of the diagnostic device L9 has a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur. Is displayed (step LS107). For example, in the measurement data collected from the main molding apparatus L3, when the pressure value in the aeration falls below the lower limit of the control value, a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur in the main molding apparatus L3. Is displayed.

  Further, when a specific method for coping with the problem is known (step LS108: Yes), the control unit L23 determines the equipment (the kneading apparatus L2, the main mold making apparatus) in the casting equipment whose measured data is out of the control value. L3, core molding device L4, pouring device L5, cooling device L6, and / or unsealing device L7) are diagnosed with instruction data for changing the setting conditions of each facility so as not to exceed the control value. The data is transmitted from the transmission unit L25 of the device L9 (step LS109). For example, in the measurement data collected from the master molding apparatus L3, when the pressure value in the aeration falls below the lower limit of the control value, the air supply is performed so that the pressure in the aeration increases and returns to the range of the control value. Is transmitted to the control unit L13 of the main molding apparatus L3. Note that, depending on the type of the management value, instruction data for stopping each facility may be transmitted.

  Any of the control units L12, L13, L14, L15, L16, and L17 of the equipment that has received the instruction data from the diagnostic device L9 changes the equipment setting conditions based on the instruction data (step LS110). For example, the control unit L13 of the main mold making apparatus L3 increases the supply of air by a predetermined value based on the instruction data. As a result, the pressure value in the aeration falls within the range of the control value again, and it is possible to prevent a problem due to a decrease in the pressure in the aeration from occurring.

  If the control unit L23 does not know a specific method for dealing with the problem (step LS108: No), the problem is dealt with by the worker who has confirmed the diagnosis result (alarm) displayed on the display unit L24. Even after the setting conditions are changed, data collection is continuously performed (step LS103), and monitoring of the casting facility by the diagnostic device L9 is continued.

  As described above, this series of operations is performed until the casting facility monitoring system L1 (each facility of the casting facility) stops (step LS102: Yes). When the casting facility monitoring system L1 (each device of the casting facility) stops, the monitoring of the casting facility ends.

  In this modified example, when there is a possibility that a failure may occur, a diagnosis result (alarm) is displayed on the display unit L24. However, the diagnosis device has a speaker, and outputs the diagnosis result (alarm) as voice. The diagnosis may be issued, and the diagnosis result (alarm) may be issued by both the screen display and the voice.

  As described above, according to the casting equipment monitoring system according to the present modification, the information collection device collects data measured by each device of the casting equipment in real time, and the measurement data collected by the diagnostic device is used as a management value in real time. If a comparison is made and the collected data is determined to be out of the control value, a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur is displayed. Thereby, before the casting equipment breaks down, it is detected that the state of the casting equipment is deteriorating, or the quality of the casting is deteriorated before the casting manufactured by the casting equipment is found to be defective. Can be detected.

  Further, according to the casting equipment monitoring system according to the present modification, when it is determined that the data collected by the diagnostic device is out of the management value, the instruction data for changing the setting condition of the equipment is out of the management value. To the equipment that is located. This makes it possible to automatically stabilize the state of the casting equipment and the quality of the casting.

As described above, also in the casting equipment provided with the casting equipment monitoring system of the present modification as described above, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment converts the measured data and the like into one. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment in that it is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the mold of the frame, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold that have been matched.
Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Twenty-ninth modification of the embodiment]
Next, a 29th modified example of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The twenty-ninth modification is a modification of the casting equipment 1, mainly the molding equipment 2, the core installation equipment 3, and the primary cooling and transporting device 5 of the cooling and transporting equipment 4, as in the twenty-eighth modification. , A monitoring system for the casting equipment 1.
Also in the twenty-ninth modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the twenty-ninth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the present modification described below, the same components as those in the twenty-eighth modification are denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and description thereof will be omitted. In this modification, the diagnostic result created by the diagnostic device and the report are transmitted to the diagnostic result receiving device located at a location remote from the casting equipment monitoring system, and the diagnostic result receiving device sends the diagnostic result to the diagnostic device based on the diagnostic result. To make a change instruction.

  This modification will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 169 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a casting facility monitoring system according to the present modification. The casting equipment monitoring system L31 includes a kneading device L2, a main mold making device (corresponding to the molding device 2 in the above embodiment) L3, a core making device L4, a pouring device (corresponding to the pouring device 7 in the above embodiment) L5. , A cooling device (corresponding to the primary cooling and conveying device 5 of the cooling and conveying device 4 in the above-described embodiment) L6, and a casting device including a frame releasing device (corresponding to the mold releasing device 65 in the above-described embodiment) L7, and information collection. The apparatus includes a device L8, a diagnostic device L32, and a diagnostic result receiving device L33.

  The kneading device L2 adds a binder and water to the green mold sand and kneads the mixture to produce kneaded sand. The kneading device L2 includes a control unit L12. The control unit L12 controls the operation of the kneading device L2. All the measurement data related to the kneading process in the kneading device L2 is collected in the control unit L12. The control unit L12 is a computer or a PLC.

  The main mold forming apparatus L3 forms a main mold (upper mold and lower mold). The main mold making apparatus L3 includes a control unit L13. The control unit L13 controls the operation of the main mold making apparatus L3. All the measurement data relating to the main mold making process in the main mold making apparatus L3 are collected in the control unit L13. The control unit L13 is a computer or a PLC.

  The core molding device L4 molds a core. The core molding apparatus L4 includes a control unit L14. The control unit L14 controls the operation of the core molding apparatus L4. All the measurement data relating to the core molding process in the core molding apparatus L4 is collected in the control unit L14. The control unit L14 is a computer or a PLC.

  The pouring device L5 injects the molten metal into a mold in which the main mold and the core are matched. The pouring device L5 includes a control unit L15. Control unit L15 controls the operation of pouring device L5. All the measurement data related to the pouring step in the pouring device L5 are collected in the control unit L15. The control unit L15 is a computer or a PLC.

  The cooling device L6 cools the poured mold. The cooling device L6 includes a control unit L16. The control unit L16 controls the operation of the cooling device L6. All the measurement data on the cooling process in the cooling device L6 is collected in the control unit L16. The control unit L16 is a computer or a PLC.

  The unraveling device L7 separates the mold into casting sand and a cast casting. The frame release device L7 includes a control unit L17. The control unit L17 controls the operation of the frame release device L7. All the measurement data related to the release process in the release device L7 are collected in the control unit L17. The control unit L17 is a computer or a PLC.

  The information collecting device L8 is a device that collects data measured by each device (kneading device L2, main molding device L3, core molding device L4, pouring device L5, cooling device L6, and unraveling device L7) of the casting facility. Collect in real time. The information collection device L8 is a data logger.

(Diagnosis device)
The diagnostic device L32 diagnoses the state of each device of the casting facility and the quality of the casting manufactured by the casting facility from the collected measurement data. FIG. 170 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the diagnostic device. The diagnostic device L32 includes a receiving unit L34, a storage unit L35, a control unit L36, a display unit L37, and a transmitting unit L38.

  The receiving unit L34 receives the measurement data collected by the information collecting device L8 in real time, or receives instruction data from the diagnosis result receiving device L33. The storage unit L35 stores the received measurement data, and in the storage unit L35, a management value corresponding to the measurement data in each device of the casting facility is stored in advance. Further, the storage unit L35 stores the report created by the control unit L36.

  The control unit L36 compares the collected measurement data with the management value in real time, and if it determines that the collected data is out of the management value, creates the diagnosis result data and displays it on the display unit L37. Then, the control unit L36 causes the transmission unit L38 to transmit the diagnosis result data. When receiving the instruction data from the diagnosis result receiving device L33, the control unit L36 causes the transmission unit L38 to transmit the instruction data to the casting facility device that is out of the management value. Further, the control unit L36 periodically creates a report from the collected data, and causes the transmission unit L38 to transmit the report.

  The display unit L37 displays the measurement data received by the receiving unit L34 and the report created by the control unit L36, and also displays a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur. In the present modification, the display unit L37 may not be provided in the diagnostic device L32. In this case, the control unit L36 causes the transmission unit L38 to transmit the created diagnosis result data as it is.

  The transmitting unit L38 transmits diagnostic result data or a report to the diagnostic result receiving device L33, and transmits instruction data to a device of the casting facility that is out of the management value. The diagnostic device L32 is a computer.

  In this modification, when the diagnostic device L32 transmits diagnostic result data or a report to the diagnostic result receiving device L33, and when the diagnostic device L32 receives instruction data from the diagnostic result receiving device L33, an e-mail is sent. Is used, but other methods may be used.

(Diagnosis result receiving device)
The diagnostic result receiving device L33 receives diagnostic result data or a report from the diagnostic device L32. Then, a change instruction is issued to the diagnostic device L32 based on the diagnostic result data. The diagnosis result receiving device L33 is located at a location separated from the casting equipment, the information collecting device L8, and the diagnostic device L32. FIG. 171 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the diagnosis result receiving device. The diagnosis result receiving device L33 includes a receiving unit L39, a storage unit L40, a control unit L41, a display unit L42, and a transmitting unit L43.

  The receiving unit L39 receives diagnostic result data or a report from the diagnostic device L32. The storage unit L40 stores the received diagnosis result data or report, and the storage unit L40 stores in advance a measure to cope with a case where the measurement data from the apparatus of the casting facility deviates from the management value.

  The control unit L41 causes the display unit L42 to display a diagnosis result (warning) or a report indicating that a failure may occur based on the diagnosis result data. Further, based on the diagnosis result data, the transmitting unit L43 transmits instruction data for changing the setting condition of the apparatus to the apparatus of the casting facility which is out of the control value so as not to exceed the control value.

  The display unit L42 displays a diagnosis result (alarm) and a report. The transmitting unit L43 transmits the instruction data to the diagnostic device L32. The diagnosis result receiving device L33 is a computer.

  Note that, in this modified example, when the diagnostic result receiving device L33 receives diagnostic result data or a report from the diagnostic device L32, and when the diagnostic result receiving device L33 transmits instruction data to the diagnostic device L32, Although mail is used, other methods may be used. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a catalog describing the casting facility monitoring system L31.

(Method of monitoring casting equipment)
Next, a method of monitoring a casting facility using the casting facility monitoring system L31 according to the present modification will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart illustrating a method for monitoring a casting facility using the casting facility monitoring system L31 according to the present modification.

  First, the casting facility monitoring system L31 (each device of the casting facility) is operated (Step LS201). Then, the monitoring of the casting facility is continuously performed until the casting facility monitoring system L31 (each device of the casting facility) stops (step LS202: Yes).

  Simultaneously with the operation of the manufacturing equipment monitoring system L31, the information collecting device L8 is measured by the kneading device L2, the main molding device L3, the core molding device L4, the pouring device L5, the cooling device L6, and the unsealing device L7. The collected data is collected in real time (step LS203).

  Next, the receiving unit L34 of the diagnostic device L32 receives the measurement data collected by the information collecting device L8 in real time (Step LS204).

  Next, the control unit L36 of the diagnostic device L32 compares the received measurement data with a management value stored in advance in the storage unit L35 of the diagnostic device L32 in real time (step LS205). When the control unit L36 determines that the measurement data does not deviate from the management value (step LS205: No), the data collection is continuously performed.

  Then, the control unit L36 periodically creates a report from the collected data (step LS206). The created report is transmitted from the transmission unit L38 of the diagnostic device L32 (step LS207). The receiving unit L39 of the diagnostic result receiving device L33 receives the report (step LS208), and the report is displayed on the display unit L42 of the diagnostic result receiving device L33 so that the operator can confirm it.

  On the other hand, when determining that the measurement data is out of the management value (step LS205: Yes), the control unit L36 creates diagnosis result data and transmits it from the transmission unit L38 (step LS209). For example, when the pressure value in the aeration falls below the lower limit of the control value in the measurement data collected from the main mold making apparatus L3, diagnostic result data to that effect is transmitted.

  When the receiving unit L39 of the diagnostic result receiving device L33 receives the diagnostic result data (step LS210), the display unit L42 of the diagnostic device receiving device L33 displays a diagnostic result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur ( Step LS211). For example, a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that the pressure value in the aeration of the main molding apparatus L3 is below the lower limit of the control value and a problem may occur in the main molding apparatus L3 is displayed.

  Further, when the control unit L41 of the diagnosis result receiving device L33 knows a specific method for coping with the problem (step LS212: Yes), the equipment (kneading device) in the casting facility whose measured data is out of the control value is used. L2, the main molding apparatus L3, the core molding apparatus L4, the pouring apparatus L5, the cooling apparatus L6, and the unsealing apparatus L7). The instruction data to be changed is transmitted from the transmitting unit L43 of the diagnostic result receiving device L33 to the diagnostic device L32 (step LS213). For example, in the measurement data collected from the master molding apparatus L3, when the pressure value in the aeration falls below the lower limit of the control value, the air supply is performed so that the pressure in the aeration increases and returns to the range of the control value. Is transmitted to the diagnostic device L32 to increase by the predetermined value. Note that, depending on the type of the management value, instruction data for stopping each facility may be transmitted.

  When receiving the instruction data from the diagnostic result receiving device L33 (step LS214), the control unit L36 of the diagnostic device L32 transmits the instruction data from the diagnostic device L32 to the facility in the casting facility whose measured data is out of the control value. In response, the instruction data from the diagnosis result receiving device L33 is transferred (step LS215). For example, the instruction data is transferred to the control unit L13 of the main molding apparatus L3.

  Any of the control units L12, L13, L14, L15, L16, and L17 of the equipment that has received the instruction data from the diagnostic device L32 changes the equipment setting condition based on the contents of the instruction data (step LS216). . For example, the control unit L13 of the main mold making apparatus L3 increases the supply of air by a predetermined value based on the instruction data. As a result, the pressure value in the aeration falls within the range of the control value again, and it is possible to prevent a problem due to a decrease in the pressure in the aeration from occurring.

  When the control unit L41 of the diagnosis result receiving device L33 does not know a specific method for coping with the problem (step LS212: No), the coping with the problem is performed by checking the diagnosis result (alarm) displayed on the display unit L42. However, even after the setting conditions are changed, the data collection is continuously performed (step LS203), and the monitoring of the casting facility by the diagnostic device L32 is continued.

  As described above, this series of operations is performed until the casting facility monitoring system L31 (each facility of the casting facility) stops (Step LS202: Yes). When the casting facility monitoring system L31 (each device of the casting facility) stops, the monitoring of the casting facility ends.

  In this modification, when a failure may occur, the diagnosis result (alarm) is displayed on the display L42 of the diagnosis result receiving device L33, but the diagnosis result is also displayed on the display L37 of the diagnosis device L32. (Alarm) may be displayed, and the diagnostic device L32 and / or the diagnostic result receiving device L33 may have a speaker so that an alarm is issued as a sound. A result (alarm) may be issued.

  As described above, according to the casting equipment monitoring system according to the present modification, the information collection device collects data measured by each device of the casting equipment in real time, and the measurement data collected by the diagnostic device is used as a management value in real time. If it is determined that the collected data is out of the management value, the diagnostic result is transmitted to the diagnostic result receiving device, and the diagnostic result receiving device is informed that a failure may occur (alarm). Is displayed. Thereby, even if the distance from the casting equipment is long, before the casting equipment breaks down, it is detected that the state of the casting equipment is deteriorating, or that the casting manufactured by the casting equipment is defective. Before it becomes clear, it is possible to detect that the quality of the casting is deteriorating.

  Further, according to the casting equipment monitoring system according to this modification, the diagnosis result receiving device transmits instruction data for changing the setting conditions of the equipment to the diagnostic device, and the diagnostic device deviates the instruction data from the management value. Transfer to This makes it possible to automatically stabilize the state of the casting equipment and the quality of the casting even if the distance from the casting equipment is large.

As described above, also in the casting equipment provided with the casting equipment monitoring system of the present modification as described above, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment converts the measured data and the like into one. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment in that it is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the mold of the frame, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold that have been matched.
Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Thirty Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a thirtieth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. In the thirtieth modification, similarly to the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth modifications, the casting equipment 1 is mainly a molding equipment 2, a core installation equipment 3, and a modification relating to the primary cooling and conveying device 5 of the cooling and conveying equipment 4. This is an example, and is a monitoring system of the casting facility 1.
Also in the thirtieth modified example, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the thirtieth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the present modification described below, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the twenty-ninth modification, and the description thereof will be omitted. In this modified example, after adding the position information data to the diagnostic result and the report created by the diagnostic apparatus in the twenty-ninth modified example, the diagnostic result is transmitted to the diagnostic result receiving device located at a location remote from the casting equipment monitoring system. I have.

  This modification will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 174 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of a casting facility monitoring system according to the present modification. The casting equipment monitoring system L51 includes a kneading device L2, a main mold making device (corresponding to the molding device 2 in the above embodiment) L3, a core making device L4, a pouring device (corresponding to the pouring device 7 in the above embodiment) L5. , A cooling device (corresponding to the primary cooling and conveying device 5 of the cooling and conveying device 4 in the above-described embodiment) L6, and a casting device including a frame releasing device (corresponding to the mold releasing device 65 in the above-described embodiment) L7, and information collection. The apparatus includes a device L8, a diagnostic device L52, and a diagnostic result receiving device L53.

  The kneading device L2 adds a binder and water to the green mold sand and kneads the mixture to produce kneaded sand. The kneading device L2 includes a control unit L12. The control unit L12 controls the operation of the kneading device L2. All the measurement data related to the kneading process in the kneading device L2 is collected in the control unit L12. The control unit L12 is a computer or a PLC.

  The casting master molding apparatus L3 molds a main die (upper die and lower die). The main mold making apparatus L3 includes a control unit L13. The control unit L13 controls the operation of the main mold making apparatus L3. All the measurement data relating to the main mold making process in the main mold making apparatus L3 are collected in the control unit L13. The control unit L13 is a computer or a PLC.

  The core molding device L4 molds a core. The core molding apparatus L4 includes a control unit L14. The control unit L14 controls the operation of the core molding apparatus L4. All the measurement data relating to the core molding process in the core molding apparatus L4 is collected in the control unit L14. The control unit L14 is a computer or a PLC.

  The pouring device L5 injects the molten metal into a mold in which the main mold and the core are matched. The pouring device L5 includes a control unit L15. Control unit L15 controls the operation of pouring device L5. All the measurement data related to the pouring step in the pouring device L5 are collected in the control unit L15. The control unit L15 is a computer or a PLC.

  The cooling device L6 cools the poured mold. The cooling device L6 includes a control unit L16. The control unit L16 controls the operation of the cooling device L6. All the measurement data on the cooling process in the cooling device L6 is collected in the control unit L16. The control unit L16 is a computer or a PLC.

  The unraveling device L7 separates the mold into casting sand and a cast casting. The frame release device L7 includes a control unit L17. The control unit L17 controls the operation of the frame release device L7. All the measurement data relating to the release process in the release device L7 are collected in the control unit L17. The control unit L17 is a computer or a PLC.

  The information collecting device L8 collects data measured by each device of the casting facility (kneading device L2, main mold making device L3, core making device L4, pouring device L5, cooling device L6, and unraveling device L7). Collect in real time. The information collection device L8 is a data logger.

(Diagnosis device)
The diagnostic device L52 diagnoses the state of each device of the casting facility and the quality of the casting manufactured by the casting facility from the collected measurement data. FIG. 175 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the diagnostic device. The diagnostic device L52 includes a receiving unit L34, a position information storage unit L54, a storage unit L35, a control unit L55, a display unit L37, and a transmission unit L38.

  The receiving unit L34 receives the measurement data collected by the information collecting device L8 in real time, or receives instruction data from the diagnosis result receiving device L53.

  The position information storage unit L54 stores position information data of the casting equipment monitored by the casting equipment monitoring system L51. The position information data may be not only the position information of the entire casting facility but also the position information of each device of the casting facility. As the format of the position information data, a case where information on the latitude and longitude where each device is located is stored in advance, and a GPS (Global Positioning System) is incorporated in each device, and the GPS position of each device is Information may be stored.

  When the GPS is incorporated, the information collection device L8 may periodically collect the GPS position information of each device. This enables continuous monitoring even when the equipment of the casting facility has moved for some reason.

  Further, the GPS may be incorporated in the diagnostic device L52. Even if the diagnostic device L52 is stolen, the data in the diagnostic device L52 is set to be automatically erased if the diagnostic device L52 moves a predetermined distance (for example, 1 km), so that the data collected so far is stolen by another person. Can be prevented.

  The storage unit L35 stores the received measurement data, and in the storage unit L35, a management value corresponding to the measurement data in each device of the casting facility is stored in advance. Further, the storage unit L35 stores the report created by the control unit L55.

  The control unit L55 compares the collected measurement data with the management value in real time, and when it determines that the collected data is out of the management value, displays the diagnosis result on the display unit L37. Then, the control unit L55 adds the position information data of the casting facility to the created diagnosis result data, and causes the transmission unit L38 to transmit the result as diagnosis result data with position information. When receiving the instruction data from the diagnosis result receiving device L53, the control unit L55 causes the transmission unit L38 to transmit the instruction data to the casting facility device that is out of the management value. Further, the control unit L55 periodically creates a report from the collected data, adds location information data to the created report, and causes the transmission unit L38 to transmit the report.

  The display unit L37 displays the measurement data received by the receiving unit L34 and the report created by the control unit L55, and also displays a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur. In the present modification, the display unit L37 may not be provided in the diagnostic device L52. The transmitting unit L38 transmits diagnostic result data or a report to the diagnostic result receiving device L53, and transmits instruction data to a device of the casting facility that is out of the control value. The diagnostic device L52 is a computer.

  In this modification, the diagnostic device L52 transmits diagnostic result data with position information or a report to the diagnostic result receiving device L53, and the diagnostic device L52 receives instruction data from the diagnostic result receiving device L53. Uses e-mail, but other methods may be used.

(Diagnosis result receiving device)
The diagnostic result receiving device L53 receives the diagnostic result data with the positional information data or the report with the positional information data from the diagnostic device L52. Then, a change instruction is issued to the diagnostic device L52 based on the diagnostic result data. The diagnosis result receiving device L53 is located away from the casting facility, the information collecting device L8, and the diagnostic device L52. FIG. 176 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the diagnosis result receiving device. The diagnosis result receiving device L53 includes a receiving unit L39, a position information storage unit L56, a storage unit L40, a control unit L57, a display unit L42, and a transmission unit L43.

  The receiving unit L39 receives the diagnosis result data with position information data or the report with position information data from the diagnostic device L52.

  The position information storage unit L56 stores position information data of the casting equipment monitored by the casting equipment monitoring system L51.

  The storage unit L40 stores the received diagnosis result data with position information data or the received report with position information data, and the storage unit L40 deals with a case where measurement data from the casting facility apparatus deviates from the control value. The method is stored in advance.

  The control unit L57 causes the display unit L42 to display a diagnosis result (warning) indicating that there is a possibility that a failure may occur based on the diagnosis result data with position information data, or a report with position information data. Further, based on the diagnosis result data with position information data, the transmitting unit L43 transmits instruction data for changing the setting conditions of the casting equipment that is out of the control value so as not to exceed the control value. .

  The display unit L42 displays a diagnosis result (alarm) and a report. When displaying a diagnosis result (alarm) or a report, the diagnosis result data with position information data or the position information data included in the report with position information data and the position stored in the position information storage unit L56 are stored. The information data is collated and displayed together as map information. FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating an example of the map information displayed on the display unit L42. FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating another example of the map information displayed on the display unit L42. Here, FIG. 177 shows a case where the casting facility monitoring system L51 is constructed in Japan, and FIG. 178 shows a case where the casting facility monitoring system L51 is constructed worldwide.

  The transmitting unit L43 transmits the instruction data to the diagnostic device L52. The diagnosis result receiving device L53 is a computer.

  In this modification, the diagnosis result receiving device L53 receives the diagnostic result data with position information or a report from the diagnostic device L52, and the diagnostic result receiving device L53 transmits instruction data to the diagnostic device L52. Uses e-mail, but other methods may be used. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an outline of the casting facility monitoring system L51.

(Method of monitoring casting equipment)
Next, a method of monitoring a casting facility using the casting facility monitoring system L51 according to the present modification will be described. FIG. 180 is a flowchart illustrating a method for monitoring a casting facility using the casting facility monitoring system L51 according to the present modification.

  First, the casting facility monitoring system L51 (each device of the casting facility) is operated (step LS301). Until the casting facility monitoring system L51 (each device of the casting facility) stops (step LS302: Yes), the monitoring of the casting facility is continuously performed.

  Simultaneously with the operation of the casting equipment monitoring system L51, the information collecting device L8 is measured by the kneading device L2, the main molding device L3, the core molding device L4, the pouring device L5, the cooling device L6, and the unframe device L7. The collected data is collected in real time (step LS303).

  Next, the receiving unit L34 of the diagnostic device L52 receives the measurement data collected by the information collecting device L8 in real time (step LS304).

  Next, the control unit L55 of the diagnostic device L52 compares the received measurement data with the management values stored in advance in the storage unit L35 of the diagnostic device L52 in real time (step LS305). When the control unit L55 determines that the measurement data does not deviate from the management value (step LS305: No), the data collection is continuously performed.

  Then, the control unit L55 periodically creates a report with position information from the collected data (step LS306). The created report with position information is transmitted from the transmission unit L38 of the diagnostic device L52 (step LS307). The receiving unit L39 of the diagnostic result receiving device L53 receives the report with position information (step LS308), and the display unit L42 of the diagnostic result receiving device L53 displays both the report and a map indicating the location of the casting facility where the report was created. Is displayed. Thus, the operator can easily confirm the location of the casting facility where the report is created. FIG. 181 is a diagram illustrating an example of a report created by the control unit L55 of the diagnostic device L52.

  On the other hand, when determining that the measurement data is out of the management value (step LS305: Yes), the control unit L55 creates the diagnosis result data with position information and transmits it from the transmission unit L38 (step LS309).

  When the receiving unit L39 of the diagnostic result receiving device L53 receives the diagnostic result data with position information (step LS310), the display unit L42 of the diagnostic device receiving device L53 displays a diagnostic result (alarm) indicating that a failure may occur. Then, both of the maps showing the locations of the casting facilities where a failure may occur are displayed (step LS311). Thereby, the operator can easily confirm the location of the casting facility where a failure may occur.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed on the display unit L42. In this drawing, it can be seen at a glance that a problem has occurred in the main mold making apparatus of the casting facility LA. In this drawing, the position of the casting facility LA is displayed on the map of Japan, but it is also possible to specifically display a location where there is a problem with the casting facility. FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating another example of the screen displayed on the display unit L42. In this drawing, the place where the problem of the main mold making apparatus of the casting facility LA has occurred can be seen at a glance.

  Further, in FIGS. 182 and 183, the state of the casting facility is displayed in a different color, so that the state of the casting facility can be recognized at a glance. For example, when a problem occurs in the casting facility in FIG. 182, the mark indicating the position of the casting facility changes from green to red, thereby enabling the operator to quickly know the occurrence of the problem. Further, in FIG. 183, when a problem occurs in the casting facility, the mark indicating the location of the problem in the casting facility changes from green to red, whereby the operator can quickly know the occurrence of the problem and the location of the problem. It becomes possible.

  Further, when a specific method for coping with the problem is known (step LS312: Yes), the control unit L57 of the diagnosis result receiving device L53 determines the equipment (kneading device) in the casting facility whose measured data is out of the control value. L2, the main molding apparatus L3, the core molding apparatus L4, the pouring apparatus L5, the cooling apparatus L6, and the unsealing apparatus L7). The instruction data to be changed is transmitted from the transmitting unit L43 of the diagnostic result receiving device L53 to the diagnostic device L52 (step LS313). Note that, depending on the type of the management value, instruction data for stopping each facility may be transmitted.

  When receiving the instruction data from the diagnostic result receiving device L53 (step LS314), the receiving unit L34 of the diagnostic device L52 transmits the instruction data to the facility in the casting facility whose measured data is out of the control value. On the other hand, the instruction data from the diagnosis result receiving device L53 is transferred (step LS315).

  Any of the control units L12, L13, L14, L15, L16, and L17 of the equipment that has received the instruction data from the diagnostic device L52 changes the equipment setting conditions based on the contents of the instruction data (step LS316). . If the control unit L57 of the diagnosis result receiving device L53 does not know a specific method for coping with the problem (step LS312: No), the coping with the problem is performed by checking the diagnosis result (alarm) displayed on the display unit L42. However, even after the setting conditions are changed, data collection is continuously performed (step LS303), and monitoring of the casting facility by the diagnostic device L52 is continued.

  As described above, this series of operations is performed until the casting facility monitoring system L51 (each facility of the casting facility) stops (Step LS302: Yes). When the casting facility monitoring system L51 (each device of the casting facility) stops, the monitoring of the casting facility ends.

  In this modification, when there is a possibility that a failure may occur, both the diagnosis result (alarm) and the map indicating the location of the casting facility are displayed on the display unit L42 of the diagnosis result receiving device L53. The diagnostic result (alarm) may be displayed on the display unit L37 of the device L52, and the diagnostic device L52 and / or the diagnostic result receiving device L53 have a speaker so that the diagnostic result (alarm) is issued as sound. Alternatively, a diagnosis result (alarm) may be issued by both screen display and sound.

  As described above, according to the casting equipment monitoring system according to the present modified example, the diagnosis result receiving device gives a diagnosis result (alarm) indicating that there is a possibility that a failure may occur, and a location of the casting equipment where the failure may occur. Display with the map shown. This allows the operator to easily confirm the location of the casting facility where a failure may occur.

As described above, also in the casting equipment provided with the casting equipment monitoring system of the present modification as described above, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment converts the measured data and the like into one. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment in that it is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the mold of the frame, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold that have been matched.
Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

  In the twenty-eighth to thirtieth modified examples, the casting equipment is composed of a kneading device, a main mold making device, a core making device, a pouring device, a cooling device, and a frame releasing device. I can't. For example, a transfer device such as a conveyor that transfers a mold also constitutes a casting facility, and an information collection device may collect measurement data regarding a transfer process in real time, and a diagnosis device may perform diagnosis.

  In addition, in the 28th to 30th modifications, the information collection device collects each data measured in each casting facility in real time, but when an event occurs, for example, when the facility breaks down, or When trouble occurs in the equipment, additional data is collected from the equipment. This is the same when a failure occurs due to a human error, or when a trouble occurs due to a human error.

  Further, in the twenty-ninth and thirtieth modifications, the diagnostic device creates a diagnostic result and a report based on the measurement data collected by the information collecting device, and the diagnostic result receiving device receives the diagnostic result and the report. The diagnostic device may transmit the measurement data collected by the information collecting device to the diagnostic result receiving device as it is, and the diagnostic result receiving device may create a diagnostic result and a report based on the measured data.

  Further, in the thirtieth modified example, it is assumed that a GPS is incorporated in the diagnostic device. However, the GPS may be incorporated in the diagnostic devices of the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth modified examples. Even in this case, even if the diagnostic device is stolen, the data in the diagnostic device is automatically erased if the diagnostic device has moved a predetermined distance (for example, 1 km), so that the data collected so far can be stolen by another person. Can be prevented.

[Thirty-First Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a thirty-first modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The thirty-first modification is a modification of the casting facility 1 and describes a device inspection system provided in the casting facility 1.
Also in the thirty-first modification, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the thirty-first modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data of one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  This modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185 are perspective views showing a part of the device inspection system M10 according to the present modification. FIG. 186 is a block diagram showing a system configuration of the device inspection system.

(Overview of equipment inspection system)
As shown in FIG. 184, a bar code seal M12A is attached to a predetermined portion such as a device main body of the device M12 to be checked by the device checking system M10. Note that in FIG. 184, the device M12 is schematically illustrated. The barcode M12B is printed on the barcode seal M12A. The barcode M12B represents identification data of the device M12 to be inspected, and specifically codes device information by a combination of many black lines (bars) having different thicknesses. The barcode seal M12A is attached to the periphery of the device M12 when it cannot be directly attached to the device M12 to be inspected. Further, the barcode M12B may be provided in a form other than affixing the barcode seal M12A, such as being engraved on the device M12 or a peripheral portion thereof.

  Further, in the device M12 to be inspected by the device inspection system M10, barcode seals M16, M16A, and M16B are affixed to each component M14 to be inspected which is set in advance. Note that FIG. 184 also schematically illustrates the part M14. A barcode M18 as a component identification unit is printed on the barcode seal M16 attached to the uppermost part of the component M14, and is attached to the barcode seals M16A and M16B attached to the middle and lowermost parts of the component M14. Are printed with bar codes M18A and M18B as inspection item identification units. A bar code M18 pasted on the top of the component M14 represents identification data of the component M14 to be inspected, and the component information is represented by a combination of a number of black lines (bars) having different thicknesses. Is becoming On the other hand, the barcodes M18A and M18B attached to the middle and bottom rows of the component M14 represent identification data of inspection items in the component M14 to be inspected, and include many black lines having different thicknesses. The check item information is coded by the combination of (bar).

  These barcode seals M16, M16A, and M16B are attached to the periphery of the component M14 when it cannot be directly attached to the component M14 to be inspected. Further, the barcodes M18, M18A, and M18B may be provided in a form other than the sticking of the barcode seals M16, M16A, and M16B, such as engraved on the component M14 or the periphery thereof.

  The device inspection system M10 has a portable terminal M20 provided with a barcode reader M20A as a reading unit. The barcode reader M20A can recognize and optically read the barcode M12B of the device M12 to be inspected, the barcode M18 of the component M14 to be inspected, and the barcodes M18A and M18B of the inspection items. Has become.

  The mobile terminal M20 includes a CPU, a memory, and the like. As shown in FIG. 186, the mobile terminal M20 includes a control unit M20B connected to a barcode reader M20A. The input unit M20C is connected to the control unit M20B. The input unit M20C includes an array of keys and the like, and is a component for inputting data such as inspection results by an inspection operator and other instruction data. The storage unit M20D is connected to the control unit M20B. The storage unit M20D stores data such as a control program, an inspection part table, an inspection item table, and a criterion table, as well as inspection result data input from the input unit M20C. The inspection part table is a table in which data of inspection parts (inspection locations) corresponding to the identification data of the barcode M12B of the device M12 (see FIG. 184). The inspection item table is a table in which data of inspection items corresponding to the identification data of the barcode M18 of the component M14 (see FIG. 184) is tabulated. The criterion table is a table in which data of the criterion corresponding to the identification data of the barcodes M18A and M18B of the inspection items are tabulated.

  Further, a display unit M20E is connected to the control unit M20B. The control unit M20B refers to the inspection component table of the storage unit M20D with the identification data (data of the barcode M12B) of the device M12 (see FIG. 184) obtained from the barcode reader M20A as a key, and The corresponding inspection component data is displayed on the display unit M20E according to a predetermined display format. As described above, the display unit M20E displays the inspection component according to the identification data of the barcode M12B read by the barcode reader M20A. Further, the control unit M20B refers to the inspection item table of the storage unit M20D using the identification data (data of the barcode M18) of the component M14 (see FIG. 184) acquired from the barcode reader M20A as a key, and The data and the data of the inspection item corresponding to the data are displayed on the display unit M20E according to a predetermined display format. As described above, the display unit M20E displays the inspection screen according to the identification data of the barcode M18 read by the barcode reader M20A.

  Further, the control unit M20B refers to the determination criterion table of the storage unit M20D using the identification data of the inspection item (the data of the barcodes M18A and M18B) acquired from the barcode reader M20A as a key, and The corresponding criteria data is displayed on the display unit M20E according to a predetermined display format. As described above, the display unit M20E displays the inspection items and the respective criteria based on the identification data of the barcodes M18A and M18B read by the barcode reader M20A.

  The transmission unit M20F (interface) is connected to the control unit M20B. The transmission unit M20F has a data transmission function of transmitting and receiving data to and from an external device, and transmits information of an inspection result input for each inspection item from the input unit M20C according to an inspection screen to the transmitter M22F. Is to be transmitted via. As shown in FIG. 185, in this modification, the transmitter M22 also serves as a holder of the portable terminal M20 and is connected to the transmitting unit M20F (see FIG. 186). And a wiring M22B for connecting to a personal computer M24 as one computer.

  The personal computer M24 includes a CPU, a memory, and the like. As shown in FIG. 186, the personal computer M24 includes a receiving unit M24A connected to the transmitter M22. The receiving unit M24A receives the information on the inspection result transmitted from the transmitting unit M20F of the mobile terminal M20 via the transmitter M22.

  The personal computer M24 includes a control unit M24B connected to the receiving unit M24A. The input unit M24C is connected to the control unit M24B. The input unit M24C includes keys and the like arranged, and is a component for inputting instruction data and the like. The storage unit M24D is connected to the control unit M24B. The storage unit M24D stores, in addition to the control program (including programs for data transfer software and inspection report creation software to be described later) and various tables, the inspection result received by the receiving unit M24A and acquired through the control unit M24B. Information (data) and the like are stored. A part of the control unit M24B is a tabulation unit M24G. The tabulation unit M24G reads the inspection result information from the storage unit M24D, and displays the inspection result information for printing or display in a tabular form (at least the inspection location). And a list format of a predetermined format indicating the inspection result).

  Further, a display unit M24E is connected to the control unit M24B. The control unit M24B causes the display unit M24E to display a screen corresponding to the instruction data and the like from the input unit M24C. The output unit M24F (interface) is connected to the control unit M24B. The output unit M24F has a data transmission function of transmitting and receiving data to and from an external device. The output unit M24F transmits the tabulated inspection result information according to instruction data or the like from the input unit M24C via wiring. Output (transmission) to the printer M26.

  FIG. 187 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of the device inspection system M10. As shown in FIG. 187, a personal computer M24 as a first computer is connected to an in-house network M32A of a support center M32 in addition to the printer M26. The support center M32 is an organization for supporting the site where the device M12 is installed. Note that the personal computer M24 and the printer M26 may be installed at the support center M32, or may be installed at a place other than the support center M32. In the support center M32, a main server M32S and a personal computer M32B are connected to an in-house network M32A. That is, the main server M32S and the personal computer M32B installed in the support center M32 are connected to the personal computer M24 via the communication line.

  A management server M32C and a monitoring monitor M32D are connected to the personal computer M32B via a communication line. Note that the management server M32C may be directly connected to the in-house network M32A. The management server M32C stores data on inspections and the like as a database. The in-house network M32A is connected to a public line M34 (communication line network), and the personal computer M32B is connected to the public line M34 via the in-house network M32A. Further, to the public line M34, a system of a management company M36 that manages the management server M32C and the like is connected, and a personal computer M38 as a second computer is connected. The personal computer M38 is installed at the customer site. Then, the personal computer M32B installed in the support center M32 transmits the information of the inspection result received from the personal computer M24 to the personal computer M38 of the customer via the in-house network M32A and the public line M34 (communication line network). In FIG. 187, the transmission path from the personal computer M32B of the support center M32 to the personal computer M38 of the customer is indicated by a two-dot chain line. As described above, the inspection result information (output information of the personal computer M24) can be referred to the personal computer M32B of the support center M32, and can be provided from the personal computer M32B to the personal computer M38 of the customer via the in-house network M32A and the public line M34. ing.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 187, a sensor-equipped transmitter M42A is attached to at least one (particularly important) of the component M14 of the device M12 to be inspected. The sensor-equipped transmitter M42A is a transmitter that can detect vibration, noise, and temperature and can transmit the detected information wirelessly. The sensor-equipped transmitter M42A can transmit to a receiver (master) M42C via a relay M42B. In other words, the receiver M42C receives the detection information transmitted from the transmitter with sensor M42A. When the distance between the transmitter with sensor M42A and the receiver M42C is short, the repeater M42B is unnecessary.

  The receiver M42C is connected to a mobile router (conversion transmitter) M42D via a communication line, and the detection information received by the receiver M42C is transferred to the mobile router M42D. The mobile router M42D is a communication device for transmitting detection information received by the receiver M42C to a wireless base station M42E in a wireless network (not shown). The wireless base station M42E is connected to a public line M34 (communication line network). Then, the management server M32C installed in the support center M32 receives the detection information from the mobile router M42D via the wireless base station M42E and the communication line network (the public line M34 and the in-house network M32A).

  The transmitter with sensor M42A periodically transmits the above-described detection information. The detection information of the transmitter with sensor M42A is stored in the management server M32C of the support center M32. Thereby, the detection information stored in the management server M32C can be accessed from the personal computer M38 of the customer via the communication line network (the public line M34 and the in-house network M32A). The detection information stored in the management server M32C can be accessed from the personal computer M32B of the support center M32. For this reason, the detection information can be browsed from the personal computer M38 (terminal) of the customer and the personal computer M32B of the support center M32. In addition, the support center M32 collects and analyzes the detection information of the transmitter M42A with the sensor, and provides the customer (user) with information on the expected parts replacement time, and proposes a preventive maintenance plan.

(Processing procedure using the equipment inspection system)
Next, a processing procedure using the device inspection system M10 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (A), at the time of device inspection, first, the power of the mobile terminal M20 is turned on (MS1). Next, the barcode M12B of the device M12 to be inspected is scanned by the mobile terminal M20 (MS2). Then, on the portable terminal M20, the parts M14 to be inspected for the entire device M12 are displayed in a enumerated form (MS3). Next, the portable terminal M20 scans the barcode M18 of the component M14 to be inspected (MS4). Before the scanning process (reading process), various information (for example, information such as an ID code of an inspection worker, daily inspection, weekly inspection, and monthly inspection) is input to the mobile terminal M20. It may be in a form to perform.

  When the scanning process is performed, an inspection screen is displayed on the portable terminal M20 according to the identification data of the barcode M18. On this inspection screen, the inspection items are displayed in a enumerated form. The inspection worker scans the barcodes M18A and M18B of the inspection items in the part M14 to be inspected according to the inspection screen of the mobile terminal M20 (according to the display of the inspection screen), and inspects the inspection items (MS5). . At this time, on the inspection screen of the mobile terminal M20, the inspection items and their determination criteria are displayed, and the inspection result corresponding to the inspection items can be input (selection of options on the screen, etc.). Then, the inspection operator inputs an inspection result (for example, a determination result of 、, ×, etc.) according to the criterion to the portable terminal M20 (MS6). As information (data) indicating when the inspection date is, the system date of the mobile terminal M20 is automatically written as an example.

  Next, the inspection operator determines whether or not there is an unchecked item (MS7), and if there is, scans the barcodes M18A and M18B of the inspection item and checks the inspection item (MS5). Return to). If there is no unchecked item, the checker determines whether there is any unchecked part M14 (MS8). If there is an uninspected part M14, the inspection operator returns to the step (MS4) of scanning the barcode M18 of the part M14 to be inspected. If there is no uninspected part M14, the inspection operator determines whether there is a device M12 to be inspected (MS9), and if there is, scans the barcode M12B of the device M12 to be inspected. Return to the step (MS2). On the other hand, if there is no device M12 to be inspected, the inspection operator ends the inspection.

  As described above, according to the device inspection system M10, it is possible to reliably perform the inspection of the corresponding part at each inspection location of the device M12.

  When the inspection is completed, the inspection worker performs the data transfer process shown in FIG. 188 (B). As shown in FIG. 188 (B), at the time of data transfer, first, the portable terminal M20 is set to the transmitter 22 (MS11). Next, the power of the personal computer M24 is turned on (MS12), and the data transfer software is started on the personal computer M24 (MS13) to put the personal computer M24 in a standby state. Immediately after this, the inspection report creation software described later may be started.

  Next, the data of the mobile terminal M20 (information of the inspection result input for each inspection item according to the inspection screen) is transferred (transmitted) to the personal computer M24 by an operation from the screen of the mobile terminal M20 and the input unit M20C ( MS 14). Then, the transferred data is stored in the storage unit M24D of the personal computer M24 (MS15). Thereafter, the data transfer software ends (MS16). The data transfer software may be terminated immediately before turning off a personal computer M24 described later.

  FIG. 188 (C) shows a processing flow after saving the transfer data in the personal computer M24. As shown in FIG. 188 (C), in this processing flow, the operator first determines whether to print out the inspection report (MS21). If not, the power of the personal computer M24 is turned off (MS29), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when printing out, the inspection report creation software is started on the personal computer M24 (MS22). Next, the inspection data is fetched by the inspection report creation software (MS23). Then, a device to be printed out is selected from the inspected devices (MS24), an inspection date is input (MS25), an inspector, an inspection result, and the like are displayed on the display unit M24E (MS26), and a printing process is performed. Execution of the operation results in printing out to the printer M26 (MS27). Thereafter, the inspection report creation software is terminated (MS28), the power of the personal computer M24 is turned off (MS29), and the process is terminated.

(Inspection of molding machine)
Next, a case where the device to be inspected is the molding machine M50 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 189 shows the molding machine M50 in a front view, and FIGS. 190 to 192 show a hydraulic unit M56 constituting a part of the molding machine M50 in a plan view (FIG. 190) and a front view (FIG. 191). , And a side view (FIG. 192). The molding machine M50 is provided with a bar code (not shown) representing identification data of the molding machine M50 for device identification.

  As shown in FIG. 189, the molding machine M50 is an apparatus for molding molding sand in upper and lower molding flasks M52. In the molding machine M50 of FIG. 189, the upper and lower molding flasks M52 are arranged in two pairs of right and left, and in the molding flask M52 arranged on the left side in the figure, the molding sand is squeezed. In the molding frame M52 arranged on the right side in the drawing, the molded mold is extracted. These flasks M52 can be rotated around a rotation axis M59X in the vertical direction of the apparatus by a flask rotation mechanism M59, and the left and right positions in the figure can be switched. In addition, a sand blowing port is formed in a side wall of each of the flasks M52.

  The upper and lower flasks M52 can be moved up and down along a connecting shaft M51 whose axial direction is the vertical direction of the device by the operation of a cylinder M57. A match plate is sandwiched between the upper and lower flasks M52. A squeeze plate (also called a squeeze board) M55 can be inserted into each of the upper opening of the upper casting flask M52 and the lower opening of the lower casting flask M52. The squeeze plate M55 can be moved up and down by a hydraulic cylinder M54. That is, the hydraulic cylinder M54 is used for driving for squeezing the casting sand in the casting flask M52. The hydraulic cylinder M54 is connected to a hydraulic unit M56 shown in FIGS. The hydraulic unit M56 is a component to be inspected and set in advance in the molding machine M50, and a bar code (not shown) representing identification data of the hydraulic unit M56 is attached to the hydraulic unit M56.

  The hydraulic unit M56 includes a hydraulic tank M56A that stores oil to be supplied to the hydraulic cylinder M54 (see FIG. 189), and a hydraulic pump that pressurizes the oil in the hydraulic tank M56A to supply it to the hydraulic cylinder M54 (see FIG. 189). M56B is provided. The hydraulic unit M56 includes an oil cleaner M56C that filters oil pressurized by the hydraulic pump M56B. The oil cleaner M56C includes a housing provided in an oil supply path, and a filter element housed in the housing.

  When the bar code M18 read by the bar code reader M20A is the identification data representing the hydraulic unit M56 shown in FIGS. 190 to 192, the portable terminal M20 shown in FIG. 184 displays the display unit M20E (see FIG. 184). Displays the amount of oil in the hydraulic tank M56A, the pressure by the hydraulic pump M56B, the pressure acting on the oil cleaner M56C, and the temperature of the oil in the hydraulic tank M56A on the inspection screen.

  The oil amount in the hydraulic tank M56A is confirmed by visually checking an oil level gauge M56D provided in the hydraulic tank M56A. The inspection operator determines whether or not the oil in the hydraulic tank M56A has reached a predetermined reference oil level, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the mobile terminal M20 (see FIG. 184). The pressure by the hydraulic pump M56B is confirmed by operating the hydraulic pump M56B and visually reading a pressure gauge M56E provided on the hydraulic pump M56B. The inspection operator determines whether or not the value of the pressure gauge M56E indicates a preset pressure value, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the mobile terminal M20 (see FIG. 184).

  The pressure acting on the oil cleaner M56C is confirmed by operating the hydraulic pump M56B and visually checking the pressure gauge M56F provided on the oil cleaner M56C. The inspection operator determines whether or not the pressure gauge M56F is within a preset range, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the portable terminal M20 (see FIG. 184). Further, the temperature of the oil in the hydraulic tank M56A is confirmed by visually checking an oil temperature type M56G provided in the hydraulic tank M56A. The inspection operator determines whether or not the value of the oil temperature type M56G is equal to or lower than a preset temperature, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the portable terminal M20 (see FIG. 184).

  Here, the oil amount in the hydraulic tank M56A, the pressure by the hydraulic pump M56B, the pressure acting on the oil cleaner M56C, and the temperature of the oil in the hydraulic tank M56A are checked and maintained, so that the hydraulic cylinder M54 (see FIG. 189) is maintained. It works well and the foundry sand is squeezed well.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 189, the molding machine M50 includes a release agent tank M58 for storing the release agent, and a release agent for spraying the release agent stored in the release agent tank M58 into the casting flask M52. Agent spray M60 (see a partially enlarged view). The release agent tank M58 and the release agent spray M60 are parts to be inspected in advance in the molding machine M50. A bar code (not shown) representing identification data of the release agent tank M58 is attached to the periphery of the release agent tank M58, and identification data of the release agent spray M60 is provided around the release agent spray M60. (Not shown).

  When the bar code M18 read by the bar code reader M20A is the identification data representing the release agent spray M60 shown in FIG. 189, the mobile terminal M20 shown in FIG. 184 has the display unit M20E (see FIG. 184). Clogging of the release agent spray M60 and leakage of liquid from the release agent spray M60 are displayed as inspection items on the inspection screen.

  Clogging of the release agent spray M60 and leakage of liquid from the release agent spray M60 are visually confirmed. The inspection operator determines whether or not the release agent spray M60 is clogged and whether or not there is liquid leakage from the release agent spray M60, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the mobile terminal M20 (see FIG. 184). I do. Here, the clogging of the release agent spray M60 and the leakage of the liquid from the release agent spray M60 are checked and maintained, so that the release agent stored in the release agent tank M58 is excellent in the casting flask M52. And the mold is successfully removed from the flask M52.

  Further, when the bar code M18 read by the bar code reader M20A is the identification data representing the release agent tank M58 shown in FIG. 189, the portable terminal M20 shown in FIG. 184 displays the display unit M20E (see FIG. 184). ) Displays the amount of the release agent stored in the release agent tank M58 on the inspection screen as an inspection item.

  The amount of the release agent stored in the release agent tank M58 is confirmed by visually checking an inspection window (not shown) of the release agent tank M58. The inspection operator determines whether or not the amount of the release agent stored in the release agent tank M58 is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, and sends the determination result (inspection result) to the mobile terminal M20 (see FIG. 184). input. In addition, by checking and maintaining the amount of the release agent stored in the release agent tank M58, the release agent is satisfactorily supplied from the release agent tank M58 into the flask M52, and from the flask M52. The mold is successfully removed.

  Further, the molding machine M50 is provided with a sprue bar M62 which is used for forming a sprue in the molded mold and is made expandable and contractable inside the flask M52. The sprue bar M62 has a base end fixed to the squeeze plate M55 described above, is configured so that the vertical direction of the apparatus is the axial direction, and the distal end side is extendable. The gate is the first flow path for introducing the molten metal into the mold, and the gate is connected to a runner. The sprue bar M62 is a part to be checked in advance in the molding machine, and a bar code (not shown) representing identification data of the sprue bar M62 is attached around the sprue bar M62. .

  When the barcode M18 read by the barcode reader M20A is the identification data representing the sprue stick M62 shown in FIG. 189, the display unit M20E (see FIG. 184) displays the inspection screen of the mobile terminal M20 shown in FIG. The movement of the sprue bar M62 is displayed as an inspection item. The movement of the sprue bar M62 is visually confirmed. The inspection operator determines whether or not the sprue bar M62 moves smoothly, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the mobile terminal M20 (see FIG. 184). Here, by checking and maintaining the movement of the sprue bar M62, a proper sprue can be formed in the mold.

  Further, the molding machine M50 includes a punching pin M64 provided on the casting flask M52. The release pin M64 is mounted so as to be able to protrude and retract on the opposing portions of the upper and lower pair of molding flasks M52 (ie, the lower end surface of the upper molding flask M52 and the upper end surface of the lower molding flask M52). Thereby, it is possible to move relative to the flask M52 in the vertical direction of the apparatus. When the mold is removed after the molding is completed, a gap is formed between the mold plate M52 and the match plate, which are strongly adhered to each other, by pressing the match plate sandwiched between the mold frames M52 from above and below by the molding pins M64. After such a gap is formed, the mold is opened by raising the upper flask M52 or lowering the lower flask M52. The casting flask M52 provided with the die release pin M64 is a part to be set in advance for inspection, and a barcode (not shown) representing identification data of the casting flask M52 is attached to the casting flask M52. ing.

  When the barcode M18 read by the barcode reader M20A is the identification data representing the molding frame M52 shown in FIG. 189, the display unit M20E (see FIG. 184) displays the inspection screen of the mobile terminal M20 shown in FIG. The movement of the removal pin M64 is displayed as an inspection item. The movement of the ejection pin M64 is visually confirmed. The inspection operator determines whether or not the removal pin M64 moves smoothly, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the mobile terminal M20 (see FIG. 184). Here, the movement of the ejection pin M64 is checked and maintained, so that the ejection pin M64 operates properly after the molding, and the mold is opened favorably.

  Further, the molding machine M50 is provided with an aeration tank section M66 for filling molding sand into a mold molding space formed inside the casting frame M52. An aeration nozzle M68 is formed at the lower end opening of the aeration tank M66. Further, a slide gate M70 for opening and closing the upper end opening by sliding is provided at the upper end opening of the aeration tank portion M66 for charging casting sand. Although not described in detail, the molding machine M50 is configured to contact the aeration nozzle M68 with a sand blowing port on the side wall of the casting flask M52 to enable sand filling from the aeration nozzle M68 to the casting flask M52. , A mechanism for moving the flask M52 is provided. The aeration tank unit M66 is a part to be checked in advance in the molding machine M50, and a bar code (not shown) representing identification data of the aeration tank unit M66 is attached to the aeration tank unit M66. ing.

  In the portable terminal M20 shown in FIG. 184, when the barcode M18 read by the barcode reader M20A is identification data representing the aeration tank unit M66 shown in FIG. 189, the display unit M20E (see FIG. 184) checks. On the screen, wear and clogging of the aeration nozzle M68 and wear of the slide gate M70 are displayed as inspection items. Abrasion and clogging of the aeration nozzle M68 are visually confirmed. The inspection operator determines whether or not the aeration nozzle M68 has abrasion and clogging that exceed allowable limits, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the mobile terminal M20 (see FIG. 184). Further, the wear of the slide gate M70 is also visually confirmed. The inspection operator determines whether or not the slide gate M70 has worn beyond the allowable limit, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the mobile terminal M20 (see FIG. 184).

  Here, by checking and maintaining the abrasion and clogging of the aeration nozzle M68, the molding sand inside the aeration tank portion M66 is favorably filled in the mold molding space. In addition, since the slide gate M70 is inspected for wear and maintained, the slide gate M70 operates favorably, so that molding sand is favorably supplied into the aeration tank M66.

  The above-described molding machine M50 is provided with a barcode (not shown, see reference numerals M18A and M18B in FIG. 184, an inspection item identification unit) representing identification data of inspection items in a part to be inspected. Although a detailed description is omitted, these barcodes are provided on a component to be inspected corresponding to the inspection item or on a peripheral portion thereof. That is, in the molding machine M50, the barcodes representing the identification data of the inspection items are the barcodes M18A, M18B (see FIG. 184). As described above, by providing the barcode representing the identification data of the inspection item, the inspection result is input after the barcode is read by the barcode reader M20A of the portable terminal M20 shown in FIG. 184 for each inspection item. Therefore, it is possible to support steady inspection.

(Inspection of granulator)
Next, a case where the device to be inspected is the granulator M76 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 shows the granulator M76 in a front view. The granulator M76 is provided with a barcode (not shown) representing identification data of the granulator M76 for device identification.

  The granulator M76 shown in FIG. 193 is a device for compressing and solidifying the supplied raw material under pressure to form a granulated product (briquette). The granulator M76 includes a hopper M78, a feeder screw M80 provided inside the hopper M78, and a pair of rolls M82 provided below the hopper M78.

  Each of the pair of rolls M82 has a ring-shaped cross section orthogonal to the rotation axis thereof, and is arranged side by side in a horizontal direction and closely contacted with each other so that their rotation axes are parallel to each other. A plurality of concave pockets (not shown) are formed on the outer peripheral surface of each of the pair of rolls M82. The pockets formed on the respective outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of rolls M82 are formed at positions on the respective outer peripheral surfaces that are circumferentially aligned with each other.

  Further, the feeder screw M80 provided inside the hopper M78 is provided with a spiral fin (not shown) around its shaft (rotation shaft). A variable speed motor M86 for rotating the feeder screw M80 is connected to the shaft of the feeder screw M80 via a driving force transmission mechanism M84. The feeder screw M80 rotates with the rotational driving force of the variable speed motor M86, thereby pushing the raw material in the hopper M78 between the pair of rolls M82.

  On the other hand, a variable speed motor (not shown) for driving the rotation of the roll M82 is connected to the shaft portions of the pair of rolls M82 via a driving force transmission mechanism (not shown). Note that the driving force of the variable speed motor is converted into two outputs that are opposite to each other by the driving force transmission mechanism. The pair of rolls M82 are rotated in opposite directions by the rotational driving force of the variable speed motor to pressurize and solidify the raw materials supplied therebetween to compress and form granules.

  The pair of rolls M82 and the feeder screw M80 are parts that are preset inspection targets in the granulator M76. A bar code (not shown) representing identification data of the pair of rolls M82 is attached to the periphery of the pair of rolls M82, and a bar code representing identification data of the feeder screw M80 is attached to the periphery of the feeder screw M80. (Not shown).

  When the barcode M18 read by the barcode reader M20A is the identification data representing the pair of rolls M82 shown in FIG. 193, the display unit M20E (see FIG. 184) checks the portable terminal M20 shown in FIG. On the screen, the wear and abnormal noise of the pair of rolls M82 and the pressure between the pair of rolls M82 are displayed as inspection items. The wear and abnormal noise of the pair of rolls M82 are confirmed by viewing. The inspection operator determines the degree of wear and abnormal noise of the pair of rolls M82, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the portable terminal M20 (see FIG. 184). Further, the pressure between the pair of rolls M82 is confirmed by visually reading a pressure gauge (not shown). The inspection operator determines whether or not the indicated pressure value between the pair of rolls M82 is a pressure value assumed in advance, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the portable terminal M20 (see FIG. 184).

  Further, when the bar code M18 read by the bar code reader M20A is the identification data indicating the feeder screw M80 shown in FIG. 193, the display unit M20E (see FIG. 184) of the mobile terminal M20 shown in FIG. The inspection screen displays the wear and abnormal noise of the feeder screw M80 as inspection items. The wear and abnormal noise of the feeder screw M80 are confirmed by viewing. The inspection operator determines the degree of wear and abnormal noise of the feeder screw M80, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the mobile terminal M20 (see FIG. 184).

  Here, by checking and maintaining the wear and abnormal noise of the feeder screw M80, the raw material in the hopper M78 can be pushed into a suitable amount between the pair of rolls M82. As a result, a granulated material having an appropriate shape is formed with an appropriate amount of raw material. In addition, by checking and maintaining the pressure set value between the pair of rolls M82 and the indicated pressure value between the pair of rolls M82, the density of the granulated material is favorably maintained.

  The above-described granulator M76 is provided with a barcode (not shown, see reference numerals M18A and M18B in FIG. 184, an inspection item identification unit) representing identification data of inspection items in a part to be inspected. Although a detailed description is omitted, these barcodes are provided on a component to be inspected corresponding to the inspection item or on a peripheral portion thereof. That is, in the granulator M76, the barcodes representing the identification data of the inspection items are the barcodes M18A and M18B (described in the “Overview of the device inspection system” and the “Processing procedure using the device inspection system”). (See FIG. 184). As described above, by providing the barcode representing the identification data of the inspection item, the inspection result is input after the barcode is read by the barcode reader M20A of the portable terminal M20 shown in FIG. 184 for each inspection item. Therefore, it is possible to support steady inspection.

(Inspection of brush polishing equipment)
Next, a case where the device to be inspected is the brush polishing device M90 will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 and 195. FIG. 194 shows the brush polishing apparatus M90 in a front view, and FIG. 195 shows the brush polishing apparatus M90 in a side view. The brush polishing apparatus M90 is provided with a bar code (not shown) representing identification data of the brush polishing apparatus M90 for device identification.

  As shown in FIG. 195, the brush polishing apparatus M90 includes a revolution table M104 arranged in a range including the polishing chamber M102. The revolution table M104 is driven to rotate by a motor M106. A plurality (two in the present modified example) of rotation tables M108 are arranged on the revolution table M104 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. When the rotation table M108 is arranged at a predetermined position in the polishing chamber M102 (a position below a brush M96 described later), the rotation table M108 is driven to rotate by receiving the driving force of the motor M110.

  The rotation table M108 includes an installation section M92 in which an object to be processed is installed. The rotation table M108 is provided with a mounting jig M94 for mounting an object to be processed on the installation section M92. On the other hand, in the polishing area of the polishing chamber M102, a brush M96 is provided at a height above the revolution table M104 and the rotation table. The brush M96 is arranged with the bristle tip directed downward, and is driven to rotate by a drive motor M98 shown in FIGS. 194 and 195. As a result, the brush M96 shown in FIG. 195 polishes the surface of the processing target object by rotatingly contacting the processing target object attached to the installation portion M92 by the mounting jig M94. Further, the brush polishing apparatus M90 includes a mechanism (not shown) for spraying a coolant to a contact portion between the brush M96 and the object to be processed and a peripheral portion thereof, and further includes a coolant circulation portion M100 for circulating the coolant. .

  The drive motor M98 shown in FIG. 194 and FIG. 195 is a part to be inspected set in advance in the brush polishing device M90, and the periphery of the drive motor M98 represents identification data of the drive motor M98. A bar code (not shown) is provided. When the bar code M18 read by the bar code reader M20A is identification data representing the drive motor M98 shown in FIG. 195, the display unit M20E (see FIG. 184) displays an inspection screen of the mobile terminal M20 shown in FIG. The current value, abnormal noise and vibration of the drive motor M98 are displayed as inspection items.

  The current value of the drive motor M98 is confirmed by looking at the ammeter, and the abnormal noise and vibration of the drive motor M98 are confirmed by watching. The inspection operator determines whether or not the current value of the drive motor M98 is a current value assumed in advance, and determines the degree of abnormal noise and vibration of the drive motor M98, and reports the determination result (inspection result) to the mobile terminal M20 ( 184). Thereby, the presence or absence of a failure in the basic function of the brush polishing device M90 is confirmed in advance. Here, the current value, abnormal noise and vibration of the drive motor M98 are checked and maintained, so that the brush M96 shown in FIG. 195 rotates properly, and the surface of the object to be processed is polished well by the brush M96. Is done.

  The brush M96 shown in FIG. 195 is a part to be inspected and set in advance in the brush polishing device M90, and a bar code (shown in FIG. 195) representing identification data of the brush M96 is provided around the brush M96. (Omitted). When the bar code M18 read by the bar code reader M20A is the identification data representing the brush M96 shown in FIG. 195, the display unit M20E (see FIG. 184) displays the portable terminal M20 shown in FIG. 184 on the inspection screen. The wear of the brush M96 is displayed as a check item.

  The wear of the brush M96 is visually confirmed. The inspection operator determines the degree of wear of the brush M96, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the portable terminal M20 (see FIG. 184). Here, the surface of the object to be processed is precisely polished by the brush M96 by checking and maintaining the wear of the brush M96.

  The coolant circulating portion M100 is also a part to be checked in advance in the brush polishing device M90, and a bar code (identification data) of the coolant circulating portion M100 is provided around the coolant circulating portion M100. (Not shown). In the portable terminal M20 shown in FIG. 184, when the barcode M18 read by the barcode reader M20A is the identification data representing the coolant circulation unit M100 shown in FIG. 195, the display unit M20E (see FIG. 184) checks. The coolant circulation is displayed on the screen as a check item.

  The circulation of the coolant is confirmed by visually checking the operation state of the coolant circulation unit M100. The inspection worker determines whether or not the circulation of the coolant is performed normally, and inputs the determination result (the inspection result) to the mobile terminal M20 (see FIG. 184). Here, by checking and maintaining the circulation of the coolant, the coolant is favorably cooled when the object to be processed is polished by the brush M96.

  The mounting jig M94 is also a part to be inspected and set in advance in the brush polishing apparatus M90. A bar code (ID) representing identification data of the mounting jig M94 is provided around the mounting jig M94. (Not shown). When the barcode M18 read by the barcode reader M20A is the identification data representing the mounting jig M94 shown in FIG. 195, the display unit M20E (see FIG. 184) inspects the portable terminal M20 shown in FIG. On the screen, the wear of the mounting jig M94 is displayed as an inspection item.

  Wear of the mounting jig M94 is confirmed by visual inspection. The inspection worker determines the degree of wear of the mounting jig M94, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the portable terminal M20 (see FIG. 184). Here, the wear of the mounting jig M94 is inspected and maintained, so that the object to be processed is polished in a properly mounted state.

  The above-described brush polishing apparatus M90 is provided with a barcode (not shown, see reference numerals M18A and M18B in FIG. 184, an inspection item identification unit) representing identification data of inspection items in a part to be inspected. Although a detailed description is omitted, these barcodes are provided on a component to be inspected corresponding to the inspection item or on a peripheral portion thereof. That is, in the brush polishing apparatus M90, the barcodes representing the identification data of the inspection items are the barcodes M18A and M18B (described in the “Overview of the apparatus inspection system” and the “Processing procedure using the apparatus inspection system”). (See FIG. 184). As described above, by providing the barcode representing the identification data of the inspection item, the inspection result is input after the barcode is read by the barcode reader M20A of the portable terminal M20 shown in FIG. 184 for each inspection item. Therefore, it is possible to support steady inspection.

As described above, in the casting equipment including the apparatus inspection system of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment stores measured data and the like in one frame. Is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as in the above embodiment.
Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Third Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a thirty-second modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The thirty-second modification is a modification of the casting facility 1 similarly to the thirty-first modification, and describes a device inspection system provided in the casting facility 1.
Also in the thirty-second modification, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like to one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the thirty-second modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  Hereinafter, the device inspection system according to the present modification will be described with reference to the drawing showing the 31st modification. This modification has the same configuration as that of the thirty-first modification except for the points described below. Therefore, description of the same components as those of the thirty-first modification will be omitted.

  In this modification, a barcode M18 (component identification unit) indicating the identification data of the component M14 to be inspected shown in FIG. 184 is not provided. On the other hand, barcodes M18A and M18B (inspection item identification units) representing identification data of inspection items in the component M14 to be inspected are provided on the component M14 to be inspected preset in the apparatus M12 or a peripheral portion thereof. ing.

  In this modification, the control unit M20B shown in FIG. 186 uses the identification data (data of the barcode M12B) of the device M12 (see FIG. 184) acquired from the barcode reader M20A as a key to check the items in the storage unit M20D. Refer to the table and the criterion table. Then, the control unit M20B causes the display unit M20E to display the referred inspection item and the data of the determination criterion according to a predetermined display format. As described above, the display unit M20E displays the inspection items and the like according to the identification data of the barcode M12B read by the barcode reader M20A.

  The processing procedure using the device inspection system in this modification differs from the processing procedure in the thirty-first modification shown in FIG. 188 (A) in the following points. First, instead of the “process of displaying the inspection parts of the entire device on the mobile terminal” (MS3) shown in FIG. 188 (A), the “process of displaying the inspection items of the entire device on the mobile terminal” is applied. You. In addition, the “step of scanning the barcode of the inspected part with the mobile terminal” (MS4) and the “step of determining whether there is an uninspected part” (MS8) shown in FIG. 188 (A) are not applied.

  According to the above-described modified example, it is possible to reliably perform the inspection of the corresponding part at each inspection point of the apparatus.

As described above, in the casting equipment including the apparatus inspection system of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment stores measured data and the like in one frame. Is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as in the above embodiment.
Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

(Supplementary explanation of 31st and 32nd modifications)
In the above-mentioned 31st and 32nd modified examples, for those which are visually determined at the time of inspection, the inspection location may be photographed, and various determinations may be made using data of the photographed image.

  In the thirty-first modification, as shown in FIG. 184, the component identification unit is a barcode M18. However, the component identification unit may include, for example, characters including numbers, patterns, and QR codes (registered trademark). A component identification unit other than the barcode such as the above may be used. Similarly, in the thirty-first and thirty-second modifications, the check item identification unit is a bar code M18A or M18B. However, the check item identification unit may be, for example, a character including a number, a pattern, a QR code, or the like. An inspection item identification unit other than the barcode may be used. Further, the same applies to the device identification unit that represents the identification data of the device.

  In the 31st and 32nd modifications, the case where the computer (first computer) is the personal computer M24 shown in FIG. 185 has been described as an example, but the computer (first computer) is a large computer. You may. Similarly, the second computer may be a large-sized computer instead of the personal computer M38 shown in FIG. 187.

  In addition, devices including components to be inspected are, for example, devices other than the 31st and 32nd modifications, such as a centrifugal projection type shot processing device, an air injection type shot processing device, and a barrel polishing machine. May be.

  Further, as a further modified example of the 31st modified example, a configuration in which a bar code is not provided as an inspection item identification unit may be adopted. In the device inspection system according to this further modification, control unit M20B shown in FIG. 186 uses identification data (data of barcode M18) of component M14 (see FIG. 184) obtained from barcode reader M20A as a key. , The inspection item table and the criterion table in the storage unit M20D. Then, the control unit M20B causes the display unit M20E to display the referred inspection item and the data of the determination criterion according to a predetermined display format. In addition, the processing procedure using the device inspection system according to this further modification example is described in the processing procedure in the thirty-first modification example of FIG. 188 (A) by scanning the barcode of the inspection item according to the screen of the mobile terminal. Instead of the "step of performing inspection" (MS5), the "step of performing inspection according to the screen of the mobile terminal" will be applied.

  Further, as a further modified example of the 31st and 32nd modified examples, the transmitter with the sensor (see FIG. 187) detects any two of the vibration, noise, and temperature of the component and outputs the detected information. It may be transmitted wirelessly. Further, as another further modified example, the sensor-equipped transmitter may be one that detects any one of vibration, noise, and temperature of a component and wirelessly transmits the detected detection information.

  Further, as a further modified example of the 31st and 32nd modified examples, a configuration in which the transmitter M42A with sensor, the receiver M42C, and the mobile router M42D shown in FIG. 187 are not installed can be adopted.

  The above-mentioned thirty-first and thirty-second modifications and the above-mentioned plural further modifications can be implemented by being appropriately combined.

[Thirty-third Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a thirty-third modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The thirty-third modified example is a modified example of the casting equipment 1 and describes a device inspection system provided in the casting equipment 1.
Also in the thirty-third modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the 33rd modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

Hereinafter, an apparatus inspection system according to the present modified example will be described with reference to FIGS.
(Overview of equipment inspection system)
FIG. 196 is a block diagram showing an apparatus inspection system according to this modification. As shown in FIG. 196, the inspection system includes a customer, a cloud N34, a support promotion unit N32, and a management company N36. A device N12 to be checked is installed at the customer site. The cloud N34 has a function of storing applications and data for device inspection. The support promotion unit N32 supports the customer where the device to be checked is installed. The management company N36 signs a usage contract with the support promotion unit N32, and manages applications and data for device inspection stored in the cloud N34.

  A QR code is attached to each device to be inspected installed at the customer site. In addition, a QR code is also attached to each component to be inspected among the components constituting the apparatus. In the QR code affixed to each device, at least the name of a component to be inspected in the device is written as data. Further, at least a check item of the part is written as data in the QR code attached to each part.

  The inspection worker at the customer site logs in to the cloud N34 from the smartphone N20 or the like as a general-purpose terminal and downloads necessary applications and data. Thereby, the smartphone N20 can be used as an inspection terminal. That is, the smartphone N20 that downloads necessary applications and data from the cloud N34 captures a QR code attached to a device or component to be inspected, thereby acquiring an instruction on the content of the inspection. Then, the instruction is displayed on the smartphone N20 and a necessary check is performed. Thereafter, the inspection worker transmits the inspection result from the smartphone N20 to the cloud N34.

  Here, a tablet terminal may be used instead of the smartphone N20 as the general-purpose terminal. In addition, if the user has a shooting function, a function of connecting to a network (cloud), a function of displaying data, and the like, and a function of installing an application and storing data, a glasses-type terminal, a wristwatch-type terminal, or the like can be used.

  A personal computer N38 and a printer N39 can be installed at the customer site. Then, by connecting the personal computer N38 and the cloud N34, information on the inspection result can be obtained from the cloud. The acquired information can be printed by the printer N39.

  Here, the cloud refers to a cloud computing service. As a result, the services provided by the servers existing on the network can be used without being conscious of those servers.

  In the present modification, the cloud N34 stores applications and data required for the device inspection system. Then, in response to a request from the smartphone N20 as a general-purpose terminal possessed by the inspection worker, necessary applications and data are transmitted. After the inspection work is completed, the inspection data is received from the smartphone N20 and stored in the cloud N34.

  The inspection data stored in the cloud N34 can be referred to from the customer's personal computer N38 or printed by the customer's printer N39 as required. The inspection data can also be referred to from the support promotion section N32.

  By storing applications and data in the cloud N34, the data in the cloud N34 is preserved even if the server at the customer site goes down. Therefore, since there is no need for a backup server or the like, the capacity of the server at the customer's site can be reduced, or the server itself can be eliminated. As a result, the customer can reduce the equipment cost.

  The support promotion unit N32 supports the customer where the device to be checked is installed. The inspection data stored in the cloud N34 can be referred to from the personal computer N32A installed in the support promotion unit N32. Further, it is possible to transmit necessary information related to the device inspection to the cloud N34 and store the information in the cloud N34.

The management company N36 concludes a usage contract with the support promotion unit N32, and manages the device inspection system, that is, manages and updates information stored in the cloud N34.
(Processing procedure using the equipment inspection system)
Next, a processing procedure using the device inspection system N10 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 197 and 198.

  FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the overall processing flow of the device inspection system according to this modification. As shown in FIG. 197, first, a general-purpose terminal such as a smartphone connects to the cloud and logs in (NS1). Then, the data for maintenance and inspection of the device is downloaded from the cloud (NS2). When the data download is completed, the connection between the general-purpose terminal and the cloud is released and the user logs out (NS3). Next, an inspection category of daily or monthly inspection is input to the general-purpose terminal (NS4). Subsequently, the QR code attached to the inspection target device is photographed by the general-purpose terminal (NS5). Then, the component to be inspected in the device to be inspected is displayed on the general-purpose terminal (NS6). Inspection is performed on each of the displayed components (NS7). When the inspection of all parts is completed, the general-purpose terminal is connected to the cloud and the data acquired by the inspection is transferred (NS8).

  Next, a processing procedure for inspection of a component to be inspected will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing a processing flow for checking a component to be checked. That is, in FIG. 197, the steps (NS7 and NS8) of inspecting each of the displayed components are shown in detail. As shown in FIG. 198, first, the general-purpose terminal that has downloaded the necessary data from the cloud, that is, the general-purpose terminal that has completed steps NS1 to NS6, has the QR code attached around the target component. Photographing (NS11). Here, the general-purpose terminal determines whether or not the part to be photographed is to be inspected (NS12), and if it is not to be inspected, displays that fact (NS13). This is displayed to avoid unnecessary inspections because the inspection target differs depending on whether the inspection is a daily inspection or a monthly inspection. If the part to be photographed is to be inspected, the general-purpose terminal displays an inspection item corresponding to the part (NS14). The inspection items are described in the read QR code.

  The inspection worker performs an inspection for each inspection item and inputs an inspection result (for example, a determination result of normality, caution, abnormality, etc.) to the general-purpose terminal (NS15). Here, when the inspection result input by the inspection operator is not good, for example, when a judgment result of caution or abnormality is input (NS16), a display prompting the general-purpose terminal to photograph the part to be inspected. Is performed (NS17). By leaving the captured image as data, a third party can judge the target based on this image, so that individual differences among inspection workers are less likely to occur.

  In this manner, when the input of the inspection result for one item is completed, the general-purpose terminal determines whether the input (and / or imaging) has been completed for all the inspection items (NS18). If there is an unchecked item, the general-purpose terminal returns to the display of the check item corresponding to the part (NS14), and checks the unchecked item.

  When input (and / or photographing) is completed for all items, the general-purpose terminal determines whether or not inspection has been completed for all components (NS19). When the inspection has been completed for all parts, the inspection worker connects the general-purpose terminal to the cloud, logs in, and transmits inspection result data to the cloud (NS20). If there is an uninspected part, the QR code attached to the periphery of the part is photographed with a general-purpose terminal (NS11), and the above steps (NS12 to NS18) are repeated.

  Here, the QR code is used to identify the device, but a stack type two-dimensional code such as a PDF417 code may be used instead of a matrix type two-dimensional code such as a QR code. Also, by photographing the entire device with a general-purpose terminal or photographing a specific place of the device with a general-purpose terminal, it is possible to obtain the same operation and effect as capturing a QR code. It is. Similarly, a stack type two-dimensional code such as a PDF417 code may be used for inspection of each part. In addition, instead of capturing the QR code, the component may be captured by a general-purpose terminal.

Next, a case where this device inspection system is applied to each device will be described.
(Inspection of molding machine)
Here, a case where the device to be inspected is the molding machine N50 will be described with reference to FIG. 199 and FIGS. FIG. 199 shows the molding machine N50 in a front view, and FIGS. 200 to 202 show a hydraulic unit N56 constituting a part of the molding machine N50 in a plan view (FIG. 200) and a front view (FIG. 201). , And a side view (FIG. 202). The molding machine N50 is provided with a QR code (not shown).

  Prior to the inspection of the molding machine N50, the inspection worker logs in to the cloud N34 from the smartphone N20 as a general-purpose terminal and downloads necessary applications and data. When the data download is completed, the connection between the smartphone N20 and the cloud N34 is released and the user logs out. Next, an inspection category of daily or monthly inspection is input to the smartphone N20. Thereby, the smartphone N20 can be used as an inspection terminal. Here, the case of daily inspection will be described.

  In the molding machine N50, the hydraulic unit N56, the release agent tank N58, the release agent spray N60, the sprue bar N62, the casting frame N52, and the aeration tank portion N66 are parts to be inspected. When the inspection operator photographs the QR code attached to the molding machine N50 with the smartphone N20, a list of these parts to be inspected is displayed on the smartphone N20.

  That is, when the QR code attached to the hydraulic unit N56 is photographed, the smartphone N20 displays the oil amount and the oil temperature in the hydraulic tank N56A, the pressure by the hydraulic pump N56B, and the pressure acting on the oil cleaner N56C as inspection items. Is done. When the QR code attached to the release agent tank N58 is photographed, the amount of the release agent stored in the release agent tank N58 is displayed on the smartphone N20 as an inspection item. When the QR code attached to the periphery of the release agent spray N60 is photographed, clogging of the release agent spray N60 and leakage of liquid from the release agent spray N60 are displayed on the smartphone N20 as inspection items. . When the QR code attached to the periphery of the gate N62 is photographed, the movement of the gate N62 is displayed on the smartphone N20 as an inspection item. When the QR code attached to the flask N52 is photographed, the movement of the mold release pin N64 is displayed on the smartphone N20 as an inspection item. Then, when the QR code attached to the aeration tank portion N66 is photographed, the wear and clogging of the aeration nozzle N68 and the wear of the slide gate N70 are displayed on the smartphone N20 as inspection items.

  Here, the molding machine N50 will be described. As shown in FIG. 199, the molding machine N50 is a device for molding molding sand in the upper and lower molding flasks N52. The upper and lower flasks N52 are arranged side by side in two pairs. In the casting flask N52 arranged on the left side in the figure, the casting sand is squeezed. In the flask N52 arranged on the right side in the figure, the molded mold is extracted. These flasks N52 can be rotated around a rotation axis N59X in the vertical direction of the apparatus by a flask rotation mechanism N59, and the left and right positions in the figure can be switched. In addition, a sand blowing port is formed in a side wall of each of the flasks N52.

  The upper and lower flasks N52 can be moved up and down along a connection shaft N51 whose axial direction is the vertical direction of the device by the operation of a cylinder N57. A match plate is sandwiched between the upper and lower flasks N52. A squeeze plate (also called a squeeze board) N55 can be inserted into each of the upper opening of the upper casting frame N52 and the lower opening of the lower casting frame N52. The squeeze plate N55 can be moved up and down by a hydraulic cylinder N54. That is, the hydraulic cylinder N54 is used for driving for squeezing the casting sand in the casting flask N52. The hydraulic cylinder N54 is connected to a hydraulic unit N56 shown in FIGS. The hydraulic unit N56 is a part to be checked and set in advance in the molding machine N50, and a QR code (not shown) is attached to the hydraulic unit N56.

  The hydraulic unit N56 includes a hydraulic tank N56A for storing oil to be supplied to the hydraulic cylinder N54 (see FIG. 199), and a hydraulic pump that pressurizes the oil in the hydraulic tank N56A to supply the oil to the hydraulic cylinder N54 (see FIG. 199). N56B. The hydraulic unit N56 includes an oil cleaner N56C that filters oil pressurized by the hydraulic pump N56B. The oil cleaner N56C includes a housing provided in an oil supply path, and a filtration element housed in the housing.

  Since the hydraulic unit N56 is a component to be inspected, when the QR code attached to the hydraulic unit N56 is photographed, the smartphone N20 acts on the oil amount and oil temperature in the hydraulic tank N56A, the pressure by the hydraulic pump N56B, and the oil cleaner N56C. The displayed pressure is displayed as a check item.

  The oil amount in the hydraulic tank N56A is confirmed by visually checking an oil level gauge N56D provided in the hydraulic tank N56A. The inspection worker determines whether or not the oil in the hydraulic tank N56A has reached a predetermined reference oil level, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria. Here, when a judgment result of caution or abnormality is input, a display urging the photographing of the oil level gauge N56D is displayed on the smartphone N20, so that the inspection worker follows the display of the smartphone N20 to photograph the oil level gauge N56D. I do. The pressure by the hydraulic pump N56B is confirmed by operating the hydraulic pump N56B and visually reading a pressure gauge N56E provided on the hydraulic pump N56B. The inspection worker determines whether or not the value of the pressure gauge N56E indicates a preset pressure value, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria.

  The pressure acting on the oil cleaner N56C is confirmed by operating the hydraulic pump N56B and visually checking the pressure gauge N56F provided on the oil cleaner N56C. The inspection worker determines whether or not the meter of the pressure gauge N56F is within a preset range, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The temperature of the oil in the hydraulic tank N56A is confirmed by visually checking an oil temperature gauge N56G provided in the hydraulic tank N56A. The inspection operator determines whether or not the value of the oil thermometer N56G is equal to or lower than a preset temperature, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria.

  The oil amount in the hydraulic tank N56A, the pressure by the hydraulic pump N56B, the pressure acting on the oil cleaner N56C, and the temperature of the oil in the hydraulic tank N56A are checked and maintained, so that the hydraulic cylinder N54 (see FIG. 199) operates well. And it can be expected that the molding sand is squeezed well. Also, by leaving the photographed image as data as needed, a third party can judge an object based on this image, so that individual differences among inspection workers are less likely to occur.

  As shown in FIG. 199, the molding machine N50 includes a release agent tank N58 for storing the release agent, and a release agent for spraying the release agent stored in the release agent tank N58 into the flask N52. Agent spray N60 (see a partially enlarged view). The release agent tank N58 and the release agent spray N60 are parts to be inspected in advance set in the molding machine N50. Accordingly, a QR code (not shown) is provided around the release agent tank N58, and a QR code (not shown) is also provided around the release agent spray N60.

  Since the release agent tank N58 is a part to be inspected, when the QR code attached to the release agent tank N58 is photographed, the amount of the release agent stored in the release agent tank N58 is displayed as an inspection item on the smartphone N20. Is done. Further, since the release agent spray N60 is also a part to be inspected, when the QR code attached to the periphery of the release agent spray N60 is photographed, the clogging of the release agent spray N60 and the release agent spray N60 are displayed on the smartphone N20. Is displayed as a check item.

  The amount of the release agent stored in the release agent tank N58 is confirmed by visually checking an inspection window (not shown) of the release agent tank N58. The inspection operator determines whether or not the amount of the release agent stored in the release agent tank N58 is equal to or more than a predetermined amount, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria. Here, if a judgment result of caution or abnormality is input, a display prompting the photographing of the inspection window of the release agent tank N58 is displayed on the smartphone N20, so that the inspection worker follows the display of the smartphone N20. Take a photo. By checking and maintaining the amount of the release agent stored in the release agent tank N58, the release agent is satisfactorily supplied from the release agent tank N58 into the flask N52, and the mold is released from the flask N52. It can be expected that the mold will be successfully removed. Also, by leaving the captured image as data, a third party can determine the amount of the release agent based on this image, so that individual differences among inspection workers are less likely to occur.

  Clogging of the release agent spray N60 and liquid leakage from the release agent spray N60 are visually confirmed. The inspection operator determines whether or not the release agent spray N60 is clogged and whether or not there is liquid leakage from the release agent spray N60, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria. Here, when a judgment result of caution or abnormality is input, a display is displayed on the smartphone N20 prompting the photographing of the situation of clogging and liquid leakage. To shoot. The clogging of the release agent spray N60 and the leakage from the release agent spray N60 are checked and maintained, so that the release agent stored in the release agent tank N58 is satisfactorily supplied into the flask N52. It can be expected that the mold is properly removed from the flask N52. Also, by leaving the captured image as data, a third party can judge the state of clogging and liquid leakage based on this image, so that individual differences among inspection workers are less likely to occur.

  Further, the molding machine N50 is provided with a sprue bar N62 which is used for forming a sprue in the molded mold and which is capable of expanding and contracting inside the flask N52. The gate end of the sprue rod N62 is fixed to the squeeze plate N55 described above, and the axial direction is the vertical direction of the apparatus, and the distal end side is configured to be expandable and contractible. The gate is the first flow path for introducing the molten metal into the mold, and the gate is connected to a runner. The sprue bar N62 is a component to be inspected and set in advance in the molding machine, and a QR code (not shown) is attached around the sprue bar N62.

  Since the sprue bar N62 is a part to be inspected, when the QR code attached around the sprue bar N62 is photographed, the movement of the sprue bar N62 is displayed on the smartphone N20 as an inspection item.

  The movement of the sprue bar N62 is visually confirmed. The inspection operator determines whether or not the sprue bar N62 moves smoothly, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria. By checking and maintaining the movement of the sprue bar N62, it can be expected that a proper sprue is formed in the mold.

  Further, the molding machine N50 includes a punching pin N64 provided on the flask N52. The release pin N64 is mounted so as to be able to protrude and retreat from the opposite portions of the upper and lower pair of flasks N52 (that is, the lower end surface of the upper flask N52 and the upper end surface of the lower flask N52). (Omitted) enables relative movement in the vertical direction of the apparatus with respect to the flask N52. When the mold is removed after the completion of molding, a gap is formed between the mold plate N52 and the match plate, which are strongly adhered to each other, by pressing the match plate sandwiched between the mold frames N52 from above and below by the molding pins N64. After forming such a gap, the mold is opened by raising the upper flask N52 or lowering the lower flask N52. The casting flask N52 provided with the die release pin N64 is a part to be checked and set in advance, and a QR code (not shown) is attached to the casting flask N52.

  Since the flask N52 is a part to be inspected, when the QR code attached to the flask N52 is photographed, the movement of the mold release pin N64 is displayed on the smartphone N20 as an inspection item.

  The movement of the ejection pin N64 is visually confirmed. The inspection worker determines whether or not the removal pin N64 moves smoothly, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria. By checking and maintaining the movement of the ejection pin N64, it can be expected that the ejection pin N64 operates properly after the molding, and the mold is opened properly.

  Further, the molding machine N50 is provided with an aeration tank portion N66 for filling molding sand into a mold molding space formed inside the casting frame N52. An aeration nozzle N68 is formed at the lower end opening of the aeration tank portion N66. Further, a slide gate N70 for opening and closing the upper end opening by sliding is provided at the upper end opening for casting sand of the aeration tank portion N66. Although not described in detail, the molding machine N50 is designed to allow the aeration nozzle N68 to contact the sand blowing port on the side wall of the casting flask N52 with the aeration nozzle N68 so that sand can be filled into the casting flask N52 from the aeration nozzle N68. , A mechanism for moving the flask N52 is provided. The aeration tank portion N66 is a component to be inspected and set in advance in the molding machine N50, and a QR code (not shown) is attached to the aeration tank portion N66.

  Since the aeration tank portion N66 is a part to be inspected, when the QR code attached to the aeration tank portion N66 is photographed, the smartphone N20 displays the abrasion and clogging of the aeration nozzle N68 and the abrasion of the slide gate N70 as inspection items. You.

  Abrasion and clogging of the aeration nozzle N68 are visually confirmed. The inspection operator determines whether or not the aeration nozzle N68 has abrasion and clogging that exceed allowable limits, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria. Here, when a judgment result of caution or abnormality is input, a display is displayed on the smartphone N20 prompting the photographing of the state of clogging and the state of the clogging. Shoot. Further, the wear of the slide gate N70 is also visually confirmed. The inspection operator determines whether or not the slide gate N70 has worn beyond the allowable limit, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria. Here, when the result of the judgment of caution or abnormality is input, a display urging the photographing of the situation of the wear is displayed on the smartphone N20, and the inspection worker photographs these situations according to the display of the smartphone N20.

  By checking and maintaining the aeration nozzle N68 for abrasion and clogging, the molding sand inside the aeration tank portion N66 is favorably filled in the mold molding space. In addition, since the slide gate N70 operates satisfactorily by checking and maintaining the wear of the slide gate N70, it is expected that a good supply of molding sand into the aeration tank portion N66 can be expected.

  When the inspection of all the parts to be inspected with respect to the molding machine N50 is completed, the inspection worker connects the general-purpose terminal to the cloud, logs in, and transmits inspection result data to the cloud.

Here, a molding machine with a frame for molding molding sand in a molding flask has been described, but the same inspection is performed on a molding machine without a frame.
(Inspection of granulator)
Subsequently, a case where the device to be inspected is the granulator N76 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 shows the granulator N76 in a front view. The granulator N76 is provided with a QR code (not shown).

  Prior to the inspection of the granulator N76, the inspection operator logs in to the cloud N34 from the smartphone N20 as a general-purpose terminal and downloads necessary applications and data. When the data download is completed, the connection between the smartphone N20 and the cloud N34 is released and the user logs out. Next, an inspection category of daily or monthly inspection is input to the smartphone N20. Thereby, the smartphone N20 can be used as an inspection terminal. Here, the case of daily inspection will be described.

  In the granulator N76, the pair of rolls N82 and the feeder screw N80 are parts to be inspected. When the inspection operator photographs the QR code attached to the granulator N76 with the smartphone N20, a list of these parts to be inspected is displayed on the smartphone N20. Further, a QR code is attached to the periphery of the pair of rolls N82 and the feeder screw N80.

  That is, when the QR code attached to the peripheral portion of the pair of rolls N82 is photographed, the smartphone N20 indicates that the wear and abnormal noise in the pair of rolls N82 and the pressure between the pair of rolls N82 are the inspection items. Will be displayed as When the QR code attached to the periphery of the feeder screw N80 is photographed, the smartphone N20 displays wear and noise (abnormal noise) of the feeder screw N80 as inspection items.

  Here, the granulator N76 will be described. The granulator N76 shown in FIG. 203 is a device for pressurizing and solidifying a supplied raw material to compress and form a granulated material (briquette). The granulator N76 includes a hopper N78, a feeder screw N80 provided inside the hopper N78, and a pair of rolls N82 provided below the hopper N78.

  The pair of rolls N82 are each formed in a ring shape in a cross section orthogonal to the rotation axis, and are arranged side by side in a horizontal direction and closely contact with each other so that their rotation axes are parallel to each other. A plurality of concave pockets (not shown) are formed on the outer peripheral surface of each of the pair of rolls N82. The pockets formed on the respective outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of rolls N82 are formed at positions that are circumferentially aligned with each other on the respective outer peripheral surfaces.

  Further, the feeder screw N80 provided inside the hopper N78 is provided with a spiral fin (not shown) around a shaft portion (rotation shaft). A variable speed motor N86 for driving the rotation of the feeder screw N80 is connected to a shaft portion of the feeder screw N80 via a driving force transmission mechanism N84. The feeder screw N80 rotates with the rotational driving force of the variable speed motor N86, thereby pushing the raw material in the hopper N78 between the pair of rolls N82.

  On the other hand, a variable speed motor (not shown) for driving the rotation of the roll N82 is connected to the shafts of the pair of rolls N82 via a driving force transmission mechanism (not shown). Note that the driving force of the variable speed motor is converted into two outputs that are opposite to each other by the driving force transmission mechanism. The pair of rolls N82 are rotated in opposite directions by the rotational driving force of the variable speed motor to pressurize and solidify the raw materials supplied therebetween to compress and form granules.

  Since the pair of rolls N82 is a part to be inspected, when the QR code attached to the periphery of the pair of rolls N82 is photographed, the smartphone N20 shows the wear and abnormal noise of the pair of rolls N82 and the pair of rolls N82. The pressure between the rolls N82 is displayed as a check item. Wear and abnormal noise of the pair of rolls N82 are confirmed by viewing. The inspection operator determines the degree of wear and abnormal noise of the pair of rolls N82, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria. When the result of the determination that the caution is required or the abnormality is input, a display is displayed on the smartphone N20 to prompt the photographing of the situation of the wear, and the inspection worker photographs these situations according to the display of the smartphone N20. When the result of the determination that the caution or abnormality is required for the sound (abnormal noise) is input, a display prompting the smartphone N20 to record the abnormal noise is displayed, and the inspection worker performs the recording according to the display on the smartphone N20. By leaving the recorded data, a third party can judge the situation based on the recorded data, so that individual differences among inspection workers hardly occur. The pressure between the pair of rolls N82 is confirmed by visually reading a pressure gauge (not shown). The inspection operator determines whether or not the pressure display value between the pair of rolls N82 is a pressure value assumed in advance, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria.

  In addition, since the feeder screw N80 is a part to be inspected, when a QR code attached to the periphery of the feeder screw N80 is photographed, the wear and abnormal noise of the feeder screw N80 are displayed on the smartphone N20 as inspection items. The wear and abnormal noise of the feeder screw N80 are confirmed by viewing. The inspection operator determines the degree of wear and abnormal noise of the feeder screw N80, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria. When the result of the judgment that the caution is required or the abnormality is input is displayed on the smartphone N20, a display is displayed on the smartphone N20 to prompt the photographing of the situation of the wear, and the inspection worker photographs these situations according to the display of the smartphone N20. When a judgment result of a caution or an abnormality is input for the sound (abnormal noise), a display prompting recording of the abnormal noise is displayed on the smartphone N20. Therefore, the inspection worker performs recording according to the display of the smartphone N20.

  By checking and maintaining the wear and abnormal noise of the feeder screw N80, the raw material in the hopper N78 can be pushed into a suitable amount between the pair of rolls N82. As a result, a granulated material having an appropriate shape is formed with an appropriate amount of raw material. In addition, by checking and maintaining the set pressure value between the pair of rolls N82 and the indicated pressure value between the pair of rolls N82, it can be expected that the density of the granulated material can be favorably maintained.

When the inspection of all the parts to be inspected for the granulator N76 is completed, the inspection worker connects the general-purpose terminal to the cloud, logs in, and transmits the inspection result data to the cloud.
(Inspection of brush polishing equipment)
Next, a case where the device to be inspected is the brush polishing device N90 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 204 shows the brush polishing apparatus N90 in a front view, and FIG. 205 shows the brush polishing apparatus N90 in a side view.

  Prior to the inspection of the brush polishing device N90, the inspection operator logs in to the cloud N34 from the smartphone N20 as a general-purpose terminal and downloads necessary applications and data. When the data download is completed, the connection between the smartphone N20 and the cloud N34 is released and the user logs out. Next, an inspection category of daily or monthly inspection is input to the smartphone N20. Thereby, the smartphone N20 can be used as an inspection terminal. Here, the case of daily inspection will be described.

  In the brush polishing device N90, the drive motor N98, the brush N96, the coolant circulation portion N100, and the mounting jig N94 are parts to be inspected. When the inspection worker photographs the QR code attached to the brush polishing device N90 with the smartphone N20, a list of these parts to be inspected is displayed on the smartphone N20.

  As shown in FIG. 205, the brush polishing apparatus N90 includes a revolution table N104 arranged in a range including the polishing chamber N102. The revolution table N104 is driven to rotate by a motor N106. On the revolving table N104, a plurality (two in the present modified example) of rotating tables N108 arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction are arranged. When the rotation table N108 is disposed at a predetermined position (a position below a brush N96 described later) in the polishing chamber N102, the rotation table N108 is driven to rotate by receiving the driving force of the motor N110.

  The rotation table N108 is provided with a mounting jig N94 for mounting an object to be processed on the installation portion N92. On the other hand, in the polishing area of the polishing chamber N102, a brush N96 is provided at a height above the revolution table N104 and the rotation table. The brush N96 is arranged with the bristle tip directed downward, and is driven to rotate by a drive motor N98 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205. Thus, the brush N96 shown in FIG. 205 polishes the surface of the object to be processed by rotatingly contacting the object to be mounted attached to the installation portion N92 by the attachment jig N94. Further, the brush polishing apparatus N90 includes a mechanism (not shown) for spraying a coolant to a contact portion between the brush N96 and the object to be processed and a peripheral portion thereof, and further includes a coolant circulation portion N100 for circulating the coolant. .

  Since the drive motor N98 is a component to be inspected and set in advance in the brush polishing apparatus N90, a QR code (not shown) is provided around the drive motor N98. When the QR code attached to the periphery of the drive motor N98 is photographed, the current value, abnormal noise, and vibration of the drive motor N98 are displayed on the smartphone N20 as inspection items.

  The current value of the drive motor N98 is confirmed by looking at the ammeter, and the abnormal noise and vibration of the drive motor N98 are confirmed by watching. The inspection operator determines whether or not the current value of the drive motor N98 is a current value assumed in advance, and the degree of abnormal noise and vibration of the drive motor N98, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. I do. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria. When a judgment result of a caution or an abnormality is input for the sound (abnormal noise), a display prompting recording of the abnormal noise is displayed on the smartphone N20. Therefore, the inspection worker performs recording according to the display of the smartphone N20.

  Thus, the presence or absence of a failure in the basic function of the brush polishing device N90 is confirmed in advance. Here, by checking and maintaining the current value, abnormal noise, and vibration of the drive motor N98, the brush N96 shown in FIG. 205 is appropriately rotated, and the surface of the object to be processed is satisfactorily polished by the brush N96. Can be expected. Also, by leaving the recorded data, a third party can judge the situation based on the recorded data, so that individual differences among inspection workers hardly occur.

  Further, the brush N96 shown in FIG. 205 is a part to be inspected set in advance in the brush polishing apparatus N90, and therefore, a QR code (not shown) is attached around the brush N96. . Then, when the QR code attached to the periphery of the brush N96 is photographed, the wear of the brush N96 is displayed on the smartphone N20 as an inspection item.

  The wear of the brush N96 is visually confirmed. The inspection operator determines the degree of wear of the brush N96 and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria. When a caution is required for the degree of abrasion or a result of the determination of an abnormality is input, a display prompting the smartphone N20 to capture an image of the abrasion state is displayed, and the inspection worker captures the state according to the display on the smartphone N20. By checking and maintaining the wear of the brush N96, it can be expected that the surface of the object to be processed is precisely polished by the brush N96. Also, by leaving the captured image as data, a third party can determine the amount of the release agent based on this image, so that individual differences among inspection workers are less likely to occur.

  Since the coolant circulating portion N100 is also a part to be inspected and set in advance in the brush polishing device N90, a QR code (not shown) is provided around the coolant circulating portion N100. Then, when the QR code attached to the periphery of the coolant circulation part N100 is photographed, the coolant circulation is displayed on the smartphone N20 as an inspection item.

  The circulation of the coolant is confirmed by visually observing the operation state of the coolant circulation part N100. The inspection worker determines whether or not the circulation of the coolant is performed normally, and inputs the determination result (the inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria. When the result of the determination that the operation state requires attention or an abnormality is input, a display urging the photographing of the operation state is displayed on the smartphone N20. Therefore, the inspection worker photographs the operation state according to the display of the smartphone N20. By inspecting and maintaining the circulation of the coolant, the coolant is favorably cooled when the object to be processed is polished by the brush N96. Also, by leaving the captured image as data, a third party can determine the amount of the release agent based on this image, so that individual differences among inspection workers are less likely to occur.

  Also, since the mounting jig N94 is also a part to be inspected set in advance in the brush polishing apparatus N90, a QR code representing identification data of the mounting jig N94 is provided around the mounting jig N94. (Not shown). Then, when the QR code attached to the periphery of the mounting jig N94 is photographed, the wear of the mounting jig N94 is displayed on the smartphone N20 as an inspection item.

  Wear of the mounting jig N94 is confirmed by visual inspection. The inspection worker determines the degree of wear of the mounting jig N94, and inputs the determination result (inspection result) to the smartphone N20. The input to the smartphone N20 is divided into three categories of normal, cautionary, and abnormal based on the determination criteria. When the result of the determination that the degree of wear requires attention or an abnormality is input, a display is displayed on the smartphone N20 to prompt the photographing of the situation of the wear, and the inspection worker photographs the situation according to the display on the smartphone N20. Here, by checking and maintaining the wear of the mounting jig N94, it can be expected that polishing is performed in a state where the object to be processed is properly mounted. Also, by leaving the captured image as data, a third party can determine the degree of wear based on this image, so that individual differences among inspection workers are less likely to occur.

  When the inspection of all the inspection target parts of the brush polishing device N90 is completed, the inspection worker connects the smartphone N20 to the cloud, logs in, and transmits the data of the inspection result to the cloud.

  Here, one inspection is completed for each device. In other words, before starting the inspection for each device, the inspection worker logs in to the cloud N34 from the smartphone N20 or the like as a general-purpose terminal, downloads necessary applications and data, and checks all the inspection target parts of the device. At the time of completion, the smartphone N20 is connected to the cloud, logs in, and transmits inspection result data to the cloud.

  However, for example, when there are a plurality of devices in one site, a plurality of necessary applications and data are collectively downloaded from the cloud N34, and when the inspection of the plurality of devices is completed, the smartphone N20 is transferred to the cloud. It is also possible to connect, log in, and send inspection result data to the cloud.

As described above, in the casting equipment including the apparatus inspection system of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment stores measured data and the like in one frame. Is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as in the above embodiment.
Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Thirty-Fourth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a thirty-fourth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The thirty-fourth modified example is a modified example relating to the configuration of the periphery of the mold separating device 65 and the mold sand removing device 68 in the casting equipment 1. More specifically, in the thirty-fourth modification, the configurations of the mold releasing device 65 and the mold sand removing device 68 in the above embodiment are realized in more detail.
Also in the thirty-fourth modification, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the thirty-fourth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data of one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

The mold release device in this modification is to separate the casting and the mold in which the casting having the hanger portion is formed from the casting. explain. FIG. 206 and FIG. 207 are a vertical sectional view and a plan sectional view of a mold and a casting. In FIGS. 206 and 207, the casting formed inside the mold is indicated by hatching.
The mold O102 includes an upper mold O103 and a lower mold O104, and a casting O101 is formed in a cavity formed between the upper mold O103 and the lower mold O104.

  The casting O101 is provided with castings O105, O105 as products, hangers O106, O106, protrusions O107, O107, ‥, and a pouring unit O108. The castings O105, O105, and the hanger portions O106, O106 are connected by a connecting portion O109, and the protruding portions O107, O107,... And the pouring portion O108 are provided on the connecting portion O109.

  As shown in FIG. 207, the hanger portion O106 is connected to the connecting portion O109 in a T-shape, and a hanger hook O31 (described later in detail) is hooked on the hanger portion O106. Further, the hanger portion O106 constitutes a contact portion such as a vibration device when vibration is applied to the casting O101 as described later. In FIG. 207, the hanger portion O106 is T-shaped, but the shape of the hanger portion O106 may be H-shaped, or may be a cross shape as described later. The projection O107 constitutes a grasped portion when the robot arm grasps the casting, and constitutes a contacted portion such as the above-described vibration device. The pouring part O108 is a part that is used as a gate when pouring.

  FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram showing a casting line including the mold separating device according to the present modification. The casting line O20 shown in FIG. 208 includes a mold making apparatus (corresponding to the molding equipment 2 in the above embodiment) O21, a pouring apparatus (corresponding to the pouring equipment 7 in the above embodiment) O22, and a first transport unit (the above). O23, a second transport unit (corresponding to the secondary cooling and transporting device 6 of the cooling and transporting device 4 in the above-described embodiment) O24, and a mold release device (as described above). O30) (corresponding to the mold release device 65 in the embodiment).

  The mold molding apparatus O21 molds the mold O102 by molding the mold sand. Here, as described with reference to FIG. 206 and FIG. 207, the casting O101 formed by the mold has a shape including the casting O105 as a product, the hanger portion O106 and the protrusion O107 used in separating the mold. It is. The pouring device O22 performs pouring of molten metal into the mold O102 molded by the mold molding device O21.

  The first transport unit O23 transports the mold O102 in which the molten metal is cast by the pouring device O22 to form a casting to the unstacking unit O30A of the mold unpacking device O30. The separating unit O30A separates the mold O102 and the casting O101 conveyed by the first conveying unit O23, separates the mold O102, collects the generated mold sand, and discharges the casting O101. The second transport unit O24 removes the remaining mold sand from the casting mold O101 discharged from the mold separating device O30 by the mold sand removing device O30B of the mold removing device O30 (corresponding to the mold sand removing device 68 in the above embodiment) O30B. Then, the casting O101 from which the mold sand has been removed is transported to a place for a next step (not shown) such as an inspection step.

FIG. 209 (a) is a side view of the separating portion O30A of the mold separating device O30, and FIG. 209 (b) is a portion OB-OB of FIG. 209 (a) illustrating the relationship between the hanger hook, the mold and the casting. FIG.
The separation unit O30A includes a table O32 and a pusher O33.
The table O32 is provided adjacent to the traveling direction of the first transport unit O23 indicated by a white arrow in FIG. The mold O102 on which the casting O101 is formed is pushed out by a pusher O33 that pushes the mold O102 from the first transport unit O23 toward the table O32, and is transported and placed on the table O32.
The table O32 has an end on the first transport unit O23 side rotatably supported about a rotation axis O34. For this reason, by rotating the end O32a of the table O32 on the opposite side to the rotation axis O34 in the lower direction OD1, and moving the table O32 to the position indicated by O32A, the table O32 is moved. , Is detachable from the mold O102 placed on the table O32.

The separation part O30A includes a rail O35, a suspension device O36, an engagement member O37, and a hanger hook O31.
The rail O35 is disposed above the edge O32a of the table O32 in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface. The suspension device O36 is suspended on a rail O35.

At the lower end O36a of the suspension device O36, a hanger hook O31 is provided.
The hanger hook O31 is a bar having a rectangular cross section and having one end O31a side of a bar formed of, for example, stainless steel or the like having a curved shape. The one end O31a is disposed so as to face the table O32. I have. The tip O31a is located below the hanger portion O106 of the casting O101 when the mold O102 is pushed out by the pusher O33 and transported to the position indicated by O102A drawn by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 209 (a). . The hanger hook O31 can freely rotate about a rotation axis O39 provided near the other end O31c, so that the tip O31a side approaches or separates from the hanger portion O106 of the mold O102 located at the position O102A. It is possible.

When the mold O102 is pushed out to the position O102A by the pusher O33, the tip end O31a of the hanger hook O31 contacts the mold sand forming the mold O102. In this case, even if the hanger hook O31 is pushed by the mold O102, it comes into contact with the engagement member O37 and stops at that position.
The engaging member O37 is connected to the extruding device O38, and the extruding device O38 pushes the engaging member O37 in the direction of the hanger hook O31, and the hanger portion O106 of the mold O102 located at the position O102A with the tip O31a of the hanger hook O31. Can be approached.

In this modification, a pair of hanger hooks O31 are provided at both ends of the rotation shaft O39.
Each of the pair of hanger hooks O31 can be hooked on each of two ends O106a of the hanger part O106 shown in FIGS. 207 and 209 (b).
Under the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 209 (a), when the mold O102 is transported to the position O102A and the table O32 is rotated in the direction of the arrow OD1 to be separated from the mold O102, the mold O102 is removed from the table O32. Falls under its own weight, a pair of hanger hooks O31 is hooked on the hanger portion O106 in the mold O102, and the casting O101 is hung on the hanger hook. Most of the mold sand forming the mold O102 is separated from the casting O101 by the impact due to the drop at this time.

The casting O101 from which much of the mold sand has been removed by the unraveling unit O30A is sent to the second transport unit O24 shown in FIG. 208, and is sent to the mold sand removal device O30B provided in the second transport unit O24.
FIG. 210 is a side view of the mold sand removing device O30B. As shown in this figure, the mold sand removing device O30B is placed in a state where the casting O101 is suspended from the hanger hook O31, and the casting O101 is placed at a position facing the hanger portion O106 located below the casting O101. A vibration device O41 (first vibration device) for applying vibration and a casting receiver O42 for receiving the vibrating casting O101 are provided.

FIG. 211 is an enlarged plan view showing details of the mold sand removing device O30B. As shown in this figure, the vibration device O41 includes a hydraulic cylinder O43, a vibrator O44, and a contact member O45.
The hydraulic cylinder O43 is attached to a frame O46 supported at a fixed position in a positional relationship with the casting O101. A plate O48 is fixed to the tip of the rod O47 of the hydraulic cylinder O43, and the plate O48 can move forward and backward while maintaining a fixed posture by a holding mechanism O49 provided on the frame O46.

A contact member O45 is provided on a front surface of the plate O48 via air springs O50 and O50, and a vibrator O44 is fixed on a back surface of the contact member O45.
The vibrator O44 is configured such that the device itself becomes a vibration source, for example, a Eurus vibrator. The vibrating device O41 having the above configuration drives the hydraulic cylinder O43 to move the rod O47 forward and backward, thereby causing the plate O48, the air springs O50, O50, the contact member O45, and the vibrator O44 to advance toward the casting O101, Further, it can be retracted from the advanced position.
The vibrator O44 can apply vibration to the casting O101 when the contact member O45 is brought into contact with a hanger portion of the casting O101.

The casting receiver O42 includes a hydraulic cylinder O55 and a contact member O56.
The hydraulic cylinder O55 is attached to a frame O57 supported at a fixed position in relation to the casting O101, similarly to the vibration device O41. A plate O59 is fixed to the tip of a rod O58 of the hydraulic cylinder O55, and the plate O59 can move forward and backward while maintaining a fixed posture by a holding mechanism O60 provided on the frame O57.

A contact member O56 is fixed to the front surface of the plate O59 via air springs O65 and O65.
The casting receiver O42 having the above structure drives the hydraulic cylinder O55 to move the rod O58 forward and backward, thereby causing the plate O59, the air springs O65, O65, and the abutting member O56 to advance toward the casting O101, and the advanced positions. Can be retreated.
The casting receiver O42 acts to repel the casting O101 toward the vibrating device O41 when vibration is applied to the casting O101 and a hanger portion or the like of the casting O101 comes into contact with the contact member O56.

As shown in FIG. 212, the mold sand removing device O30B includes an optical sensor O70 for detecting the presence or absence of the remaining mold sand adhered to the casting O101.
FIG. 212 is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the optical sensor O70, the casting O101, and the mold sand O102a. As shown in FIG. The light-emitting device O71 and the light-receiving device O72 are provided at positions facing each other with the.
In FIG. 212, the light-emitting device O71 and the light-receiving device O72 are drawn so as to be obliquely opposed to each other. Are arranged as follows.

The light-emitting device O71 and the light-receiving device O72 are shown as a set in FIG. 212. A plurality of sets may be provided.
In this modification, the optical sensor O70 is of a type in which the light from the light emitter O71 is received by the light receiver O72. However, the optical sensor O70 measures the distance with a laser like a laser range finder. It may be of a reflective type. In this case, when the distance is detected shorter than a certain value, it is determined that there is sand. When the distance is detected longer than that or when the distance cannot be measured, it is determined that there is no sand.

  The output of the optical sensor O70 is input to the control unit O73. The control unit O73 controls the driving of the vibration device O41 based on the output of the optical sensor O70. That is, the control unit O73 determines that the mold sand O102a remains in a state where the light receiver O72 cannot detect the light of the light emitter O71, and continues the vibration of the vibration device O41. When the light is detected, it is determined that the remaining mold sand O102a has been removed, and the driving of the vibration device O41 is stopped.

  In the mold separating apparatus O30 configured as described above, as described above, most of the mold sand forming the mold O102 is removed from the casting O101 at the separating section O30A illustrated in FIGS. 208 and 209. In the mold sand removing device O30B shown in FIGS. 208 and 210, the remaining mold sand O102a attached to the casting O101 is removed.

  In this case, the mold sand removing device O30B shown in FIG. 211 previously sets the positions of the contact member O45 of the vibration device O41, the contact member O56 of the casting receiver O42, and the hanger portion of the casting O101 in the size and shape of the casting O101. Adjust according to etc. This adjustment is performed by driving the hydraulic cylinders O43 and O55. It is preferable to slightly separate the contact members O45 and O56 from the hanger portion and the like.

When the vibration device O41 is driven in this state, the vibration device O44 vibrates, vibration energy is transmitted to the hanger portion O106 via the contact member O45, and the casting O101 vibrates. At this time, the casting O101 is pushed out by the contact member O45, moves toward the casting receiver O42, collides with the contact member O56, and is rebounded. The casting O101 that has returned to the contact member O45 further moves toward the contact member O56, and this operation is repeated.
The vibration of the casting O101 here is a regular vibration in which a regular rebound is made between the contact member O45 and the contact member O56, and the vibration energy of the vibrator O44 is effectively transmitted to the casting O101. Will be.
Therefore, in the mold sand removing device O30B, the remaining mold sand O102a attached to the casting O101 can be efficiently removed.

On the other hand, the mold sand removing device O30B includes a sensor O70 shown in FIG. 212. When the light receiver O72 does not receive light from the light emitter O71, the controller O73 causes the mold sand O102a to adhere to the casting O101. And the operation of the vibration device O41 is continued.
When the light receiver O72 receives the light from the light emitter O71, the controller O73 determines that the mold sand O102a has been removed, and stops the operation of the vibration device O41.
Thus, the mold sand O102a attached to the casting O101 can be accurately removed.

In the casting O101 from which the mold sand O102a has been removed as described above, the hanger part O106, the protruding part O107, the pouring part O108, and the connecting part O109 are cut off in the next step (not shown) of the second transport unit shown in FIG. The casting O105 is transported as a product to the next process such as an inspection process.
In this modification, the contact member O45 of the vibration device O41 and the contact member O56 of the casting receiver O42 are brought into contact with the hanger portion O106 of the casting O101, but the hanger portion O106 is cut off as described above. It is. Therefore, the mold sand removing device O30B includes a step of applying vibration to the casting O101, but it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as dents on the casting O105 as a product.

In this modification, vibration is applied to the hanger portion O106 of the casting O101 by the vibration device O41, and the hanger portion O106 is brought into contact with the casting receiver O42. The contacting portion may be another portion of the casting O101, for example, the protrusion O107, the pouring port O108, the connecting portion O109, or the like.
As described above, the hanger portion O106, the protruding portion O107, the pouring portion O108, the connecting portion O109, and the like constitute a contacted portion that comes into contact with the vibration device O41 and the casting receiver O42.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 210 and FIG. 211, the vibration device O41 and the casting receiver O42 are arranged at positions facing each other across the casting O101.
Instead of this configuration, even if the first vibrating device O41 and the second vibrating device (the same configuration as the first vibrating device O41) are arranged at positions facing each other with the casting O101 interposed therebetween, The same operation and effect as those of the modification can be obtained, and further, the molding sand O102a can be removed with higher efficiency by imparting stronger vibration energy to the casting O101.
In this case, both the first vibrating device O41 and the second vibrating device have a function of applying vibration to the mold sand O102a, and at the same time, have a function of the above-mentioned casting receiver.

213 to 217 (a) and 217 (b) are explanatory diagrams showing how to give vibration to the casting O101.
FIG. 213 shows how to give a vibration considering that the casting O101 does not come off the hanger hook and that the mold sand is efficiently removed.
The vibration device O200 is located on one side of the casting O101, the vibration device O201 is located on the other side of the casting O101, and the vibration device O202 is located below the casting O101 to apply vibration to the casting O101.
Each of the vibration devices O200 to O202 includes a hydraulic cylinder O43 and a vibrator O44, and has the same configuration as that shown in FIG. 211 described above.

  In the figure, (O1) to (O6) indicate positions at which vibration is applied to the casting O101, (O1) indicates a hanger portion O106 located below, (O2) indicates a projection O107 portion located below, and ( O3) is a pouring portion O109, (O4) is an upper protruding portion O107, (O5) is an upper hanger portion O106, and (O6) is a bottom surface of the lower hanger portion O106.

(Vibration imparting example 1)
The vibration device O200 is brought into contact with (O1), and the vibration device O201 is brought into contact with the opposite side of (O1).
In this case, a horizontal force acts on the upper hanger portion O106 and the hanger hook O31 as indicated by an arrow Oa.
(Vibration imparting example 2)
The vibration device O201 is brought into contact with the opposite side of (O1), and the vibration device O200 is brought into contact with any of (O2) to (O5).
In this case, a diagonally downward force acts on the hanger portion O106 and the hanger hook O31 as indicated by the arrow indicated by Ob.
(Vibration imparting example 3)
The vibrating devices O200 and O201 are brought into contact with both sides of (O1) and (O2), respectively, and the vibrating device O202 is brought into contact with (O6).

  In each of the above-described vibration applying examples 1 to 3, the hanger portion O106 does not come off from the hanger hook O31, and in the vibration applying examples 2 and 3, strong vibration energy can be applied to the casting O101. Can be removed.

In FIG. 214, a vibration device (or casting receiver) O203 is arranged on one side of the casting O101. The vibrating device O203 is such that vibrators O204 and O204 are brought into contact with hangers O106 and O106 above and below the casting O101.
On the other side of the casting O101, the vibration device O201 is in contact with the lower hanger portion O106.
Also in this configuration, it is possible to hold the casting O101 to prevent the casting from dropping and to apply strong vibration energy to the casting.

FIG. 215 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a contact member that contacts the casting O101 in the vibration device.
The casting O101 hung on the hanger hook has, for example, the pouring portion O108 on one side in the example shown in FIG.
In order to make the vibration device contact the lower hanger portion O106 in this state, it is preferable that the shape of the contact member of the vibration device be adapted to the posture of the hanger portion O106.

In FIGS. 215 (a) and (b), the vibrating device O205 of (O1) has an abutting member O205a having an L-shaped cross-sectional shape, and the vibrating device O206 of (O2) has a cross-sectional shape obtained by rotating the abutting member O206a in an L-shape. The vibrating device O207 of (O3) has a contact member O207a having a C-shaped cross-sectional shape.
FIG. 215 (b) is a diagram illustrating a usage example of the vibration device including the above-described contact member.
As shown in this figure, when the casting O101 is hung on the hanger hook O31 to spread the mold, a lot of mold sand O102a may remain below the casting O101, particularly near the hanger portion O106 below.
In this case, the mold sand O102a can be efficiently removed by using vibrating devices O205 and O206 having an L-shaped cross-sectional shape or a cross-sectional shape obtained by rotating the L-shape as shown in the drawing.

216 and 217 (a) and (b) are diagrams showing another example of the contact member of the vibration device.
In FIG. 216, the hanger part O106 of the casting is formed by assembling a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section in a cross shape.
The contact member O209a of the vibrating device O209 that applies vibration to the casting has a vibrator O209b at the rear end and an engagement hole O210 that is recessed from the front end surface to the back in the axial direction.
The engagement hole O210 is a hole provided with a taper which can be relatively inserted with the hanger portion O106 and which expands outward to facilitate insertion.
In this example, since the vibration device O209 and the hanger portion O106 are engaged with each other to transmit the vibration, the vibration energy of the vibration device O209 can be accurately transmitted to the casting without waste.

FIGS. 217 (a) and 217 (b) show another example of the contact member of the vibration device O209 of FIG. 216. The contact member O211 shown in FIG. 217 (a) has an opening O213 which communicates outward from the engaging hole O212. , O213}, and the contact member O214 shown in (b) is provided with grooves O216, O216 for opening the engaging holes O215 outward.
These abutment members O211 and O214 can discharge the mold sand to the outside from the opening O213 and the groove O216 when the mold sand adheres to the hanger portion O106.

FIG. 218 is a diagram showing a further modification of the above-described thirty-fourth modification. In a state where the casting O101 is hung on the hanger hook O31, the hanger portion O106 is hung above the hanger portion O106 hung on the hanger hook O31. A locking member O220 for preventing O106 from dropping is disposed.
The engaging member O220 is fixed to the holder O221, and the holder O221 can be advanced and retracted by the hydraulic cylinder O222.
In this configuration, when the casting O101 is hung on the hanger hook O31, the control unit (not shown) drives the hydraulic cylinder O222 to move the locking member O220 above the hanger portion O106. Even if vibration is applied to O101, the hanger portion O106 does not fall off the hanger hook O31.

Even in the casting facility equipped with the mold release device and the mold sand removing device of the present modified example as described above, the control device of the facility corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, as described above, uses the measured data. The same as in the above embodiment, in that, for example, one frame of the mold, that is, as unique data corresponding to the paired upper mold and lower mold matched, is transmitted to the control device of the casting equipment. . Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[35th Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a thirty-fifth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment. Similar to the thirty-fourth modification, the thirty-fifth modification is a modification relating to the configuration around the casting apparatus 1, particularly, around the mold release device 65 and the mold sand removal device 68. More specifically, the 35th modification is a further modification of the 34th modification.
Also in the thirty-fifth modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the thirty-fifth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

FIG. 219 is a diagram illustrating the present modification.
In this modification, the configuration up to the step of the separation unit O30 provided in the first transport path O23 is the same as that of the 34th variation, and the configuration of the mold sand removing device provided in the second transport path O24 is the same as that of the 34th variation. 34 different from the modification.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 219, two mold sand removing devices O30C and O30D are provided in the second transport path O24.
Each of the mold sand removing devices O30C and O30D includes a first vibrating device O41 and a casting receiver O42 at positions facing each other across the casting.
The mold sand removing devices O30D and O30D have (1) different positions where the vibration device O41 and the casting receiver O42 are in contact with the casting, (2) different vibration magnitudes applied to the casting, (3) Or (3) different frequencies of vibration applied to the casting, or a combination of any of these (1) to (3).

Therefore, in this configuration, vibrations suitable for the casting can be given based on the mold data including the size, shape, and the like of the casting, and the molding sand can be accurately removed from various castings.
In this modification, the vibration device O41 can be changed to a first vibration device, and the casting receiver O42 can be changed to a second vibration device. In this modification, stronger vibration energy can be imparted to the casting.

[Thirty-Sixth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a thirty-sixth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment. The thirty-sixth modified example is a modified example relating to the configuration around the mold unpacking device 65 and the mold sand removing device 68, in particular, in the casting facility 1 as in the thirty-fourth modified example. More specifically, the thirty-sixth modification is a further modification of the thirty-fourth modification.
Also in the thirty-sixth modification, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like to one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the thirty-sixth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data of one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the present modification. This modified example has the same configuration as that of the thirty-fourth modified example up to the step of the separating portion O30 provided in the first transport path, similarly to the thirty-fifth modified example described above, and the mold sand provided in the second transport path O24. The configuration of the removing device O30E is different from that of the thirty-fourth modification.
In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 220, in a state where the casting O101 is hung on a plurality of hanger hooks, the casting sand removal device O30E transfers each casting O101 to one vibration device O300 and a casting receiver O301 ( Or a vibration device).
In this configuration, the mold sand can be collectively removed from a plurality of castings by one mold sand removal device O30E, and the mold sand can be efficiently removed.

[37th Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a thirty-seventh modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The thirty-seventh modified example is a modified example relating to the configuration of the stamping device 84 in the casting equipment 1. More specifically, in the thirty-seventh modified example, the configuration of the marking device 84 in the above embodiment is realized in more detail, and the configuration of the other parts is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the thirty-seventh modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the thirty-seventh modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

FIG. 221 is a schematic plan view of a casting facility P1 including the marking device of the present modification.
In the casting facility P1, a plurality of steps including a molding step, a core setting step, a cooling and conveying step, a pouring step, a post-processing step, and a sand processing step are performed when casting a casting. The casting facility P1 is a molding facility (corresponding to the molding facility 2 in the above embodiment) P2, a core installation facility (corresponding to the core installation facility 3 in the above embodiment) P3, and a cooling transfer facility corresponding to each of these steps. P4 (corresponding to the cooling and conveying equipment 4 in the above embodiment), pouring equipment (corresponding to the pouring equipment 7 in the above embodiment) P7, post-processing equipment (corresponding to the post-processing equipment 8 in the above embodiment) P8, and sand A processing facility (corresponding to the sand processing facility 10 in the above embodiment) P10 is provided.

  The molding facility P2 molds a mold from the mold sand processed by the sand processing facility P10. The core installation facility P3 installs a core in a mold. The pouring equipment P7 produces the molten metal and pours it into the mold. The cooling and conveying facility P4 conveys the mold molded in the molding facility P2 to the pouring facility P7. The cooling / transporting facility P4 also transports the mold in which the molten metal has been cast in the pouring facility P7 while cooling, removes the casting by separating the mold, and further cools the removed casting while further processing the post-processing facility P8. Conveyed to. The post-processing equipment P8 performs post-processing such as engraving on the casting and separation of the casting from the weir. The sand processing facility P10 processes the mold sand used for molding the mold.

The cooling and transporting facility P4 includes a primary cooling and transporting device P5, a secondary cooling and transporting device P6, and a mold releasing device P65. The primary cooling and conveying device P5 receives the mold molded by the molding equipment P2, and conveys the mold to the pouring equipment P7. The cast product thus conveyed is transported to the secondary cooling transport device P6.
The secondary cooling transport device P6 transports the casting in which the mold has been separated to the post-processing equipment P8. The post-processing equipment P8 includes a shot blast device P82, a conveyor P83, a marking device P84, and a casting and weir separating device P85. In the post-processing facility P8, the shot blasting device P82 performs a shot blasting process on the casting transferred from the secondary cooling device P6. Thereafter, the casting is conveyed to the marking device P84 by the conveyor P83.

The marking device P84 performs a predetermined marking on the casting as described later, and the casting / weir separating device P85 separates the casting from the weir. After the casting is separated from the weir, the casting is transported to a machining facility P86 existing on another site, and a required portion of the casting is subjected to mechanical processing such as removal of foreign matter, cutting, grinding, polishing, and the like, to be a product.
Drawing 222 (a) and (b) is a figure showing casting P19F conveyed to marking device P84, (a) is a top view and (b) is a front view.
The casting P19F is composed of two castings P100, P100 that will eventually be products, connecting portions P101, P101 (weirs) connecting these castings P100, P100, hanger portions P102, P102, and hanger portions P102, P102. The connecting portions P103, P103 (runners) connected to and connected to the connecting portions P101, P101, and the pouring portion P104 (gate) connected to the connecting portions of the connecting portions P101, P101, P103, P103 are connected. Protrusions P105, P105 provided on the portions P103, P103.

The connecting portions P101 and P101 are portions where the molten metal reaches the castings P100 and P100 via the pouring portion P104.
The casting P19F is hung by a hanger hook (not shown) when the casting P19F is separated from the casting mold or when the casting is carried out.
The protrusions P105, P105 are parts that are gripped by the robot when the casting P19F is transferred between processes by a robot (not shown).

FIG. 223 is a block diagram of the marking device P84.
The marking device P84 includes a foreign matter detection device P110, a marking control device P111, and a marking mechanism P112.
The foreign matter detection device P110 receives the casting mold data P113 and the output of the imaging device P114. The casting mold data P113 is data relating to the casting, such as the shape, plan, and weight of the casting P100 shown in FIG. A regular marking place is set at this mold data, that is, at a predetermined position of the shape of the designed casting P100. The imaging device P114 is provided in the marking device P84, captures an image of the casting P100 conveyed by the casting conveyor P83, and supplies the output to the foreign matter detection device P110.
The foreign substance detection device P110 compares the mold data P113 with the casting P100 to detect the presence or absence of a foreign substance at a regular marking location of the casting P100.

FIG. 224 (a) is a diagram showing an example in which foreign matter has adhered to the casting P100. In this figure, reference numeral P115 denotes casting sand adhered to the casting P100, and P116 denotes burrs generated on the casting P100.
In FIG. 223, the output of the foreign matter detection device P110 is sent to the marking control device P111.
The marking control device P111 controls the marking mechanism P112 according to the presence or absence of foreign matter in the casting P100.
The marking control device P111 sets the alternative marking location together with the priority when there is a foreign substance at the regular marking location of the casting P100.
FIG. 224 (b) is an example in which, when foreign matter has adhered to the regular marking place P118 of the casting P100, alternative marking places P120-1 and P120-2 are set.
A plurality of alternative engraving locations, such as P120-1, P120-2,..., Are determined in advance by setting the priority of selection, and finally the location having the highest priority without foreign matter is selected.
The marking control device P111 controls the driving of the marking mechanism P112 based on the presence or absence of foreign matter in the casting P100. If foreign matter is detected in all of the preset alternative marking locations, it is determined that the process is abnormal, and a warning is issued by the marking control device P111.

The control of the marking mechanism P112 by the marking control device P111 can be performed by making the marking method by the marking mechanism P112 variously different. FIG. 225 and FIG. 226 are flowcharts showing the control of the stamp location and the stamp of the casting. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIG.
First, referring to FIG. 225, the marking cycle starts in PS000. The foreign matter detection device P110 confirms the foreign matter at the regular marking place P118, and sends the result to the marking control device P111. (PS001) When it is determined that there is no foreign matter in the regular marking place P118, the marking control device P111 checks whether the regular marking place P118 is a surface that requires machining. (PS004) If the regular marking place P118 is not a surface requiring machining, the regular marking is performed on the regular marking place P118 by the marking mechanism P112. (PS009) Next, the casting P100 and the weir are separated by the casting and weir separating device P85, and the casting P100 is transported to the machining equipment P86 existing on another site, and the necessary parts of the casting are machined (PS010). ) The cycle ends. (PS008)

  In PS004, when it is determined that the regular marking place P118 is a surface that requires machining, a regular or temporary marking is performed on the regular marking place P118. (PS005) Next, the casting P100 and the weir are separated by the separating device P85 for the casting P100 and the weir, and the casting P100 is transported to a machining facility P86 located on another site, and the required portion of the casting is machined. (PS006) Then, the regular marking is performed on the regular marking place P118 (PS007), and the cycle ends. (PS008) In this case, the same engraving place P118 is engraved before and after machining, but the engraving before machining is completely scraped off by machining, so it is engraved again in the same place after machining. Is performed, it is possible to identify the engraving.

  In FIG. 225, PS001, when it is determined that there is a foreign matter at the regular marking place P118, the marking control device P111 selects a high-priority alternative marking place without foreign matter. (PS002) Then, the subsequent cycle starts from PS100 in FIG. The marking control device P111 checks whether the alternative marking location P120-1 or P120-2 is a surface that requires machining. (PS101) When it is determined that the substitute stamping place P120-1 or P120-2 is a surface that requires machining, the substitute stamping place P120-1 or 120-2 performs regular or temporary stamping. (PS102) Next, the casting P100 and the weir are separated by the apparatus P85 for separating the casting P100 from the weir, and the casting P100 is transported to a machining facility P86 located on another site, and the required portion of the casting is machined. (PS103) Thereafter, the regular marking is performed on the regular marking location P118 or the alternative location P120-1 or P120-2 (PS104), and the cycle ends. (PS105)

  When it is determined in PS101 that the alternative stamping place P120-1 or P120-2 is not a surface requiring machining, the stamping control device P111 determines whether the regular stamping place P118 needs regular stamping. Check. (PS106) When a regular marking is required at the regular marking place P118, regular or temporary marking is performed at the alternative marking place P120-1 or P120-2. (PS107) Next, the casting P100 and the weir are separated by the separating device P85 for the casting P100 and the weir, and the casting P100 is transported to a machining facility P86 located on another site, and the required portion of the casting is machined. (PS108) Thereafter, the regular marking is performed on the regular marking place P118 (PS109), and the cycle ends. (PS105)

  In PS106, when the regular marking place is not required at the regular marking place P118, the regular marking is performed at the alternative marking place P120-1 or P120-2. (PS110) Next, the casting P100 and the weir are separated by the separating device P85 for the casting P100 and the weir, and the casting P100 is transported to the machining equipment P86 existing on another site, and the required portion of the casting is machined ( PS111) The cycle ends. (PS105)

The marking mechanism P112 performs marking on the casting P100 based on a command from the marking control device P111.
In this case, the marking mechanism P112 includes a positioning unit P125 and a marking unit P126 as shown in FIG. 223, and based on a command from the marking control unit P111, the positioning unit P125 causes the marking unit P126 to have a regular shape of the casting P100. The engraving part P126 performs a predetermined engraving facing the engraving location and the alternative engraving location.

As described above, according to the marking device P84, by performing the marking on the casting P19F as described above, reliable marking can be performed regardless of the presence or absence of foreign matter in the casting P19F. The traceability of the casting P100 can be ensured. In addition, when a foreign substance is detected or the like, a temporary marking such as a landmark is made at the alternative marking place, so that a regular marking, for example, a marking with a large amount of data such as a QR code (registered trademark) is performed. Work time can be shortened, and efficient engraving can be performed.
Further, if the marking device P84 is configured to issue a failure countermeasure signal for the casting facility P1 when the number or ratio of detecting foreign matter in the casting P19F exceeds a certain value, the surface of the casting may have burrs or residue. Quick measures can be taken for problems such as sand and seizure.

Thus, in the marking device P84, information on the casting P19F from the manufacturing condition of the casting P19F to the end of the machining can be linked, and reliable traceability can be secured.
In the marking device P84, as the imaging device P114, various shape imaging devices such as an in-line profile measuring device can be selected. Further, in the present modification, the control of the marking place and the marking is performed on the casting P100, but it is also possible to control the casting P100 of the casting P19F and the entire casting P19F including other parts.

As described above, in the casting equipment including the engraving device of the present modification as described above, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment, measures the measured data and the like in one frame. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment in that it is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold that have been matched.
Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Thirty-eighth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a thirty-eighth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The thirty-eighth modification is a modification relating to the configuration of a separation device for separating a casting from a weir in the casting facility 1. More specifically, in the thirty-eighth modification, the configuration of the separation device is realized in more detail, and the configuration of the other parts is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the thirty-eighth modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the pair of the upper mold and the lower mold that have been matched. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the thirty-eighth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

227 to 233 are diagrams illustrating the present modification. 227 to 231 are views showing the casting Q19F. FIG. 227 is a plan view, FIG. 228 is a front view, FIG. 229 is a view taken along the line QB-QB of FIG. 227, and FIG. 227 is a QC-QC diagram).
As shown in these figures, the casting Q19F is composed of four castings Q100, which are ultimately products, a connecting portion Q101 (weir) connecting the castings Q100, and two whole suspensions connected to the connecting portion Q101. Lower hanger part Q102, connecting part Q103 (runner) connecting two whole hanging hanger parts Q102, pouring part Q104 (gate) connected to connecting part Q103, connecting parts Q101, Q103 And the four casting storage hanger portions Q106 provided near the casting Q100 of the connecting portion Q101.

The connecting portion Q101 is a portion that forms a so-called runner from the pouring portion Q104 to the casting Q100 together with the connecting portion Q103. , Which constitute a so-called weir.
The casting Q19F is hung by a hanger hook as described later, and the hanger portion Q102 is a locking portion for hanging by the hanger hook.
The protrusion Q105 is a portion that is gripped by the robot when the casting Q19F is transferred by the robot.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing a region of a main part of the casting Q19F. In this drawing, a hatched region is a casting Q100, a region indicated by a + point is a whole hanging hanger portion Q102, and is shown by a mesh. The area is the casting storage hanger part Q106.
As shown in this figure, when the casting Q19F sets a reference line QX-QX and two reference lines QY1-QY1 and QY2-QY2 orthogonal to the reference line QX-QX, the reference line QX-QX Two castings Q100 are arranged on the reference lines QY1-QY1 and QY2-QY2, respectively.
The overall suspension hanger part Q102 is formed by joining two rod-shaped parts Q102a and Q102b in a T-shape. The connecting portion Q103 is located between the bar-shaped portions Q102a and Q102a.

The casting storage hanger part Q106 is formed by joining rod-shaped parts Q106a and Q106b in a T-shape, and the rod-shaped part Q106a is a part of the connecting part Q101 and constituting the weir.
One pair of the hanger portions Q106 for storing a casting has the bar-shaped portion Q106a positioned on the reference line QY1-QY1, and the bar-shaped portions Q106a, Q106a are arranged to face each other.
Similarly, the other pair of casting storage hanger portions Q106 is disposed on the reference line QY2-QY2.
The rod-shaped portions Q102a of the two entire hanging hangers Q102 are connected to the connecting portion Q101, respectively.

Next, for the casting Q19F having the entire hanging hanger portion Q102 and the casting storage hanger portion Q106, a casting facility using each hanger portion will be described.
FIG. 232 is a schematic plan view showing the casting facility Q1, and the casting facility Q1 is, similarly to the above embodiment, a molding facility Q2, a core installation facility Q3, a cooling and conveying facility Q4, a pouring facility Q7, A processing facility Q8 and a sand processing facility Q10 are provided.

  The molding equipment Q2 molds a mold from the mold sand processed by the sand processing equipment Q10. The core installation facility Q3 installs a core in a mold. The pouring equipment Q7 produces the molten metal and pours it into the mold. The cooling and transporting facility Q4 transports the mold molded in the molding facility Q2 to the pouring facility Q7. The cooling / conveying facility Q4 also conveys, while cooling, the casting mold into which the molten metal has been cast in the pouring facility Q7, removes the casting to take out the casting Q19F, and further cools the taken-out casting Q19F for post-processing while further cooling It is transported to equipment Q8. The post-processing equipment Q8 performs post-processing such as engraving on the casting Q19F, separation of the casting and dam from the casting Q19F, and machining, and obtains a casting Q100 as a final product from the casting Q19F. The sand processing facility Q10 processes the mold sand used for molding the mold.

The cooling and transporting facility Q4 includes a mold release device Q65. The post-processing equipment Q8 is provided with a marking device Q84 and a casting / weir separating device Q85. After marking the casting Q19F by the marking device Q84, the casting Q19F is subjected to the casting Q100 and the weir separating device Q85. The casting Q100 and the weir are separated. After the casting Q100 is separated from the weir, each casting Q100 is mounted on a storage body and transported to a machining facility Q86 located on another site.
Each casting Q100 becomes a product by performing machining such as removal of foreign matter, cutting, grinding, and polishing at a necessary location in a machining facility Q86.

Hereinafter, a process of using each hanger part of the casting Q19F in each of the above apparatuses and equipment will be described.
FIG. 233 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which the mold separating device Q65 performs the mold separation.
In FIG. 233, reference numeral Q110 denotes a mold in which a casting Q19F is formed, Q111 denotes a conveyance path of the mold Q110, Q112 denotes a suspension device having a hanger hook Q113 provided in a direction crossing the conveyance path Q111, and Q114. Is a pusher provided on the transport path Q111. Q115 is a table connected to the transport path Q111. One end Q115a is rotatably supported, and is normally supported at the same height as the transport path Q111. The support is released to rotate in the arrow QR1 direction.
The mold Q110 conveyed on the conveyance path Q111 is pushed by the pusher Q114 and placed on the table Q115. At this time, the hanger hook Q113 of the suspension device Q112 has been moved to the position shown in FIG. 233 in advance by a drive mechanism (not shown), and the casting Q19F in the casting mold Q110 is entirely moved by driving the pusher Q114. The hanging hanger portion Q102 is moved to a position where it hangs on the hanger hook Q113.

When the support of the table Q115 is released and the table Q115 is rotated in the direction of the arrow QR1, the entire suspension hanger portion Q102 is hooked on the hanger hook Q113, while the mold Q110 and the casting Q19F are dropped while rotating. By this drop, most of the mold sand constituting the mold Q110 is separated from the casting Q19F and falls downward.
Thus, the casting Q19F is provided with the entire hanging hanger portion Q102, so that the mold can be separated smoothly, and the casting Q19F is prevented from being scratched when the mold is separated. Can be.

On the other hand, the casting Q19F stamped by the marking device Q84 is separated from the casting Q100 shown in FIGS. 227 to 231 by the casting Q100 and the weir separating device Q85.
At this time, the cut portion when separating each casting Q100 is a boundary portion Q107 between the casting storage hanger portion Q106 and the connecting portion Q101 shown in FIG. 231, and the casting storage hanger portion Q106 is left in each casting Q100. It is in the state of having been.
The cutting location at this time is input in the mold data of the mold in advance, and cutting is performed by a processing machine based on the mold data. This type data corresponds to, for example, the type data P113 described in the thirty-seventh modification.

Each casting Q100 thus obtained is mounted on a storage body and transported to a machining facility Q86 located on another site.
FIG. 234 and FIG. 235 are views showing a state where the casting Q100 is mounted on a storage body. In these figures, reference numeral Q120 is a storage body. The storage body Q120 is a member extending in one direction with a C-shaped cross-sectional shape, and has a main wall portion Q120a, side wall portions Q120b, Q120b, and lower wall portions Q120c, Q120c. It is provided so as to be suspended.

Since the casting Q100 has a casting storage hanger part Q106 in a part thereof, the rod-shaped part Q106b of the casting storage hanger part Q106 is inserted into the storage body Q120, and the rod-shaped part Q106b is placed on the upper surface of the lower wall parts Q120c and Q120c. Can be hung from the storage body Q120 in a fixed posture. In addition, since the storage body Q120 is configured to extend in a certain direction, a large number of castings Q100 can be mounted on the storage body.
When the casting Q100 is mounted on the storage body Q120, the rod-shaped portion Q106a of the casting storage hanger portion Q106 is gripped by a robot and mounted on the storage body Q120.

The casting Q100 mounted on the storage body in this way is transported to the machining equipment Q86 existing on another site, where the hanger portion Q106 for casting storage is separated from the casting Q100 by an NC lathe or the like. Processing, finishing processing, etc. are performed.
At this time, the casting Q100 is supplied from the storage body Q120 to the processing machine by gripping the rod-shaped portion Q106a of the casting storage hanger portion Q106 by the robot. Therefore, picking by the robot can be easily and reliably performed, and inconveniences such as failure of picking and dropping of the casting Q100 can be prevented.

As described above, if the casting provided with the casting storage hanger portion Q106 is hung from the storage body Q120, the casting Q100 is mounted on the storage body Q120 in the same posture each time regardless of the shape and size of the casting Q100. be able to.
Also, when automating the picking of the casting Q100 by the robot in the next process, since the castings Q100 mounted in the storage body Q120 are all stored in a fixed posture, the operator is required There is an advantage that teaching is not required.
In addition, since the picking of the casting Q100 by the robot can be configured to succeed with a probability of almost 100%, it is possible to realize an unmanned picking process.

Further, even if the robot is not an expensive robot having a deep learning function, it is possible to reliably pick the casting Q100 with an inexpensive robot having only a function of repeating a substantially constant operation every time. It can be kept low.
In addition, since the castings are sequentially mounted on the storage body, traceability can be ensured even if there is no identifier such as a stamp on the product.
In addition, since there is no possibility of being piled up in the storage body (pallet), the product is not damaged such as being beaten.

As described above, even in the casting facility including the separation device of the present modification as described above, the control device of the facility corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility converts the measured data and the like into one frame. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment in that it is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold that have been matched.
Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[Thirty-ninth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a thirty-ninth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment. The thirty-ninth modified example is a modified example relating to the configuration of a separation device that separates a casting from a weir in a casting facility 1. More specifically, the 39th modification is a further modification of the 38th modification.
Also in the thirty-ninth modification, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also, in the thirty-ninth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data of one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. Furthermore, it is the same as in the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame for one template.

FIG. 236 to FIG. 240 are diagrams showing this modification.
This modification differs from the thirty-eighth modification in the shape of the casting storage hanger provided on the casting Q100.
In this modification, the casting storage hanger portion Q106A projects from the casting Q100 with a width dimension Qt1 corresponding to the length dimension of the rod-shaped portion Q106b of the casting storage hanger portion Q106 in the thirty-eighth modification example, as shown in FIG. And the protrusion is directly joined to the connecting portion Q102a.

The protruding portion is a hooking surface that is inclined in a direction in which one side surface Q130a and the opposite side surface Q130b are separated from each other in the protruding direction.
In this modification, the storage body Q120A that hangs the casting Q100, as shown in FIG. 240, can hook the inner surfaces of the lower wall portions Q120c and Q120c with the side surfaces Q130a and Q130b of the casting storage hanger portion Q106A. It is formed on an inclined surface corresponding to the side surfaces Q130a and Q130b.

In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 240, in the casting Q100, the casting storage hanger portion Q106A is inserted into the storage body Q120A, and the side surfaces Q130a and Q130b, which are the hooking surfaces, are hooked on the lower wall portions Q120c and Q120c. And is hung.
According to the configuration of this modified example, the joint area between the casting Q100 and the hanger part Q106A for storing the casting can be increased, and there is an advantage that the casting Q100 can be suspended without difficulty even when the weight of the casting Q100 is large.
In this modified example, each casting Q100 is cut off at a boundary Q131 between the connecting portion Q103 and the rod-shaped portion Q102a of the entire suspension hanger portion Q102 and the casting storage hanger portion Q106A as shown in FIG. 236.

Two examples of the thirty-eighth modified example and the thirty-ninth modified example are given as examples of the configuration of the hanger part for casting storage and the storage body corresponding to the hanger part. In other words, it is only necessary that the shape be such that the castings can be individually stored in a fixed posture.
In the above two modified examples, the casting Q100 is housed in the housings Q120, Q120A so as to be hung by the hanger portions Q106, Q106A for casting storage, but is not limited thereto. The storage bodies Q120 and Q120A are members extending in one direction with a C-shaped cross-section, but the storage bodies Q120 and Q120A are positioned so that the axis in the extending direction is perpendicular to the ground, and the casting Q100 is used for storing castings. The hangers Q106 and Q106A may be locked in the storage bodies Q120 and Q120A, and the castings Q100 may be stored in a stacked manner.

[Fortieth Modification of Embodiment]
Next, a fortieth modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The fortieth modification is a modification of the casting equipment 1 relating to the molding equipment 2. More specifically, the fortieth modification is one in which the configuration of the casting equipment 1 in the above-described embodiment, particularly, the configuration of the molding equipment 2 is realized in more detail, and the configuration of the other parts is the same as that of the above-described embodiment. .
In the fortieth modification also, the control device of the equipment corresponding to each of the plurality of steps of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the fortieth modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data of one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. In addition, it is the same as the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame of one frame.
Here, differences from the above embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 241 is a longitudinal sectional view of a mold molding apparatus (corresponding to the molding equipment 2 in the above embodiment) R100 according to the present modification. In this figure, frame set cylinders R102, R102 are erected on the left and right sides on the molding base R101 with the upwards facing upward, and a lifting support frame R103 is provided between the ends of the piston rods R102A, R102A of the frame set cylinders R102, R102. It is erected. That is, the frame set cylinders R102, R102 are erected upright with the molding base R101 side as a contraction end.

  The lower part of one of the frame setting cylinders R102, R102 (the left side in FIG. 241) supports a central portion of the pattern exchange device R104 so as to be rotatable in a horizontal plane. Is set with the pattern carriers R106 and R106A (on which the pattern plates R105 and R105A (upper and lower pattern plates) are placed) lifted by about 5 mm by a spring (not shown), and the pattern plates R105 and R105A are placed on the upper center of the molding base R101. Are carried in and out alternately.

  Below the four corner outside positions of the pattern plates R105 and R105A in the pattern carriers R106 and R106A, pull-out cylinders R107 and R107A are buried in the molding base R101 with their upwards facing, and the tips thereof are pins in the pattern carriers R106 and R106A. R124 and R124A can be pressed. Also, frame-shaped leveling frames R108 and R108A that slide up and down around the outer circumferences of the pattern plates R105 and R105A are supported. Note that the leveling frames R108 and R108A project slightly upward from the parting surfaces of the pattern plates R105 and R105A at the extended ends of the lifting cylinders R107 and R107A (see FIG. 242), and the parting surfaces of the pattern plates R105 and R105A at the contracted ends. 243 (see FIG. 243). The lifting cylinders R107 and R107A have the output of lifting the leveling frame R108 and the casting frame R120 as a frame member containing the mold and removing the mold. This output is the output of raising the frame setting cylinders R102 and R102. Absent. Furthermore, a clamp member (not shown) is provided on the pattern carrier R106, and a clamp device (not shown) for clamping the clamp member is provided on the molding base R101. The pressure bonding of the pattern carrier R106 onto the molding base R101 is performed by pulling and clamping the clamp member by the clamp device.

  The lifting support frame R103 is provided at its upper end with a sand inlet R110 opened and closed by a slide gate R109, and communicates an air supply pipe R111 for introducing low-pressure air through a switching valve (not shown) on the upper side. A sand hopper R112 provided with a number of air ejection chambers (not shown) communicating with a compressed air source (not shown) through one switching valve (not shown) is suspended in the lower part. It should be noted that a large number of air ejection chambers are configured so that low-pressure air is ejected into the sand hopper R112 to perform aeration for floating and fluidizing the mold sand RS. Further, at the lower end of the sand hopper R112, segment type squeeze feet R113, R113 as squeeze means and sand filling nozzles R114, R114 are arranged around the squeeze feet R113, R113.

  In addition, a squeeze frame in which the outside of the group of the segment type squeeze feet R113, R113 and the sand filling nozzles R114, R114 is vertically movable so as to surround and vent holes R115, R115 leading to an exhaust control chamber (not shown). R116 is disposed so as to be connected to the filling frame cylinders R117, R117 provided downward on the lower side of the sand hopper R112. Further, at the left and right outer positions of the sand hopper R112 in the elevating support frame R103, a carry-in / out conveyor R119 for the casting frame R120 is suspended via frames R118, R118 extending to positions below the squeeze feet R113, R113 of the segment type. ing.

As shown in FIG. 241, on the surfaces of the pattern plate R105 and the squeeze feet R113, R113 #, which are in contact with the mold sand, molding sensors R201A, R201B for measuring the pressure of the mold sand applied to these surfaces are provided. . FIG. 244 shows details of the molding sensor R201A provided on the pattern plate R105.
As shown in this figure, the molding sensor R201A includes sensors (R1) to (R10) arranged on the outer periphery of the pattern plate R105 and a sensor (R11) arranged around the model (product part) R105-1. ) To (R18). On the squeeze feet R113, R113 # located above the pattern plate R105, 18 sensors (not shown) are provided so as to face the sensors (R1) to (R18) provided on the pattern plate R105, respectively. Have been.
The outputs of the sensors (R1) to (R18) of the pattern plate R105 and the squeeze feet R113 and R113 # are output from the sensors (R1) to (R10) as outputs of the outer peripheral portion of the pattern plate. The output of (R18) is the output of the product section, the output of the sensors (R1) to (R18) is the output of the entire pattern plate, and the output of the sensors (R1) to (R18) is the output of each sensor (R1). The output of the variation of (R18) is sent to the intensity calculator R2A shown in FIG. The output of the intensity calculator R2A is sent to the control device R2B and the display device R2C.

  Next, the operation of the thus configured device will be described. The state of FIG. 241 is a state in which the mold sand RS is put into the sand hopper R112, and the empty casting frame R120 is carried into the carry-in / out conveyor R119. The pattern carrier R106 is set on the pattern exchange device R104 while being lifted by about 5 mm by a spring (not shown), and has a gap of about 5 mm between the pattern carrier R106 and the molding base R101. Next, as shown in FIG. 242, the entire squeeze foot R113 of the segment type forms unevenness relative to the unevenness of the lower pattern plate R105. Here, the leveling frame R108 is in a state of being protruded upward from the parting surface of the pattern plate R105 by the lifting cylinders R107 and R107A. Then, the pattern carrier R106 is crimped on the molding base R101 by a clamp device (not shown).

  Next, after the sand gate R110 is closed by operating the slide gate R109, the filling frame cylinders R117, R117 are extended to lower the filling frame R116 to press and adhere to the upper surface of the casting frame R120 and to set the frame setting cylinder R102. , R102 are contracted, and the casting frame R120 is pressed onto the leveling frame R108 protruding upward from the outer periphery of the pattern plate R105.

  Next, low-pressure air is blown out from the air supply pipe R111 through a switching valve (not shown) while aerating the low-pressure air into the sand hopper R112 from a number of air blowing chambers to make the mold sand RS in the sand hopper R112 float and fluidize. Is supplied to the sand hopper R112, and the molding sand S is aerated with low-pressure air through the sand filling nozzles R114 and R114.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 243, the frame set cylinders R102, R102 are further contracted to contract the ascending frame cylinders R117, R117 while lowering the elevating support frame R103 and the members supported thereby. Then, primary squeezing is performed as a first compression step of the mold sand RS until the entire lower surface of the segment type squeeze feet R113, R113 is flat, and the slide gate R109 is operated in reverse to open the sand inlet R110.

  Next, by switching to a state of relieving the oil in the withdrawal cylinders R107 and R107A, the frame setting cylinders R102 and R102 perform a contraction operation at a pressure higher than the primary squeeze, thereby forming the casting frame R120, the filling frame R116, and the squeeze. The feet R113, R113 are integrally lowered and the entire mold sand RS is subjected to a secondary squeeze as a second compression step. As a result, the leveling frame R108 is lowered via the pins R124 and R124A due to the contraction of the pull-up cylinders R107 and R107A, so that the leveling frame R108 is substantially at the same level as the parting surface of the pattern plate R105.

  At this time, if the leveling frame R108 has not reached the descending end, the parting surface correction is performed. This is performed by extending the filling frame cylinders R117, R117 to lower the filling frame R116 and pushing down the casting frame R120 until the leveling frame R108 reaches the lower end, whereby the lower surface of the casting frame R120 and the lower surface of the mold are separated. It can be almost the same every time.

In order to remove the mold-molded casting frame R120 molded in this manner, the frame setting cylinders R102, R102 are raised at a low speed, and the lifting cylinders R107, R107A are removed at a speed not slower than the frame setting cylinders R102, R102. To raise.
Here, the squeeze feet R113, R113 and the filling frame R116 rise integrally as the frame setting cylinders R102, R102 rise, and at the same time, the lifting cylinders R107, R107A are removed at a speed not slower than the frame setting cylinders R102, R102. Since it is about to be raised, the casting frame R120 is pressed against the filling frame R116 via the leveling frame R108 by the extension operation of the pull-out cylinders R107 and R107A, and is integrally lifted, thereby being separated from the pattern plate R105.

  Thereafter, the filling frame R116 and the segment type squeeze feet R113, R113 are integrally lifted, and on the way, the mold-molded casting frame R120 is scooped up by the carry-in / out conveyor R119 and completely separated from the pattern plate R105. And the mold sand RS is supplied into the sand hopper R112.

  Next, the cast mold frame R120 is carried out via the carry-in / out conveyor R119, the empty cast frame R120 is carried in, and the pattern exchange device R104 is rotated by 180 degrees to exchange the pattern plate R105 with the pattern plate R105A. The above operation is repeated.

  The strength calculation unit R2A converts the outputs of the sensors (R1) to (R18) into mold strength and supplies the result to the control device R2B in the operation of the mold making apparatus R100. From the strength calculation unit R2A, the outputs of the sensors (R1) to (R10) are used as the strength A of the outer periphery of the mold, and the outputs of the sensors (R11) to (R18) are used as the strength B of the mold product part. The output of (R18) to (R18) is calculated as the strength C of the entire mold, and the output of the sensors (R1) to (R18) is calculated as the variation D of the strength of each part of the mold.

The control device R2B includes first to sixth control units R202 to R207, and these control units R202 to R207 control each unit of the molding device based on the outputs of the molding sensors (R1) to (R18). I do. Here, the output values of the molding sensors (R1) to (R18) may be pressure values or mold strength values obtained by converting the pressure values. Hereinafter, the case where the output values of the molding sensors (R1) to (R18) are mold strength values obtained by converting pressure values will be described.
In this case, in the mold making apparatus R100, the reason that the strength of each part of the mold calculated from the outputs of the sensors (R1) to (R18) and the strength calculation unit R2A does not fall within the specified range is caused by (a) aeration pressure, (b) ) Aeration time, (c) board set position, (d) squeeze pressure, (e) use / non-use of segment / preset, (f) operation timing of segment / preset, (g) operation timing of leveling frame. And (a) aeration pressure, (b) aeration time, (c) board set position, (d) squeeze pressure, and (e) based on the output of each sensor (1) to (18). Use / non-use of segment / preset, (f) Operation timing of segment / preset, (g) Operation type of leveling frame Ring, over the feedback To strength required for mold each part is obtained.

In this case, (a) aeration pressure, (b) aeration time, (c) board set position, (d) squeeze pressure, (e) use / non-use of segment / preset, (f) operation timing of segment / preset, (G) Depending on the cause of the operation timing of the leveling frame, a case where feedback is applied in a cycle during manufacturing and a case where feedback is applied in the next cycle are selected.
Therefore, the measurement timing of the molding sensor may be in the middle of molding or at the time of completion of molding, and is selected in consideration of the point of time when feedback is applied. However, when measuring at the time of completion of molding, no real-time measures are taken in the cycle currently in progress.

In the above control, the measurement result of the strength A of the outer peripheral portion of the mold is obtained as needed, and is used for (g) controlling the operation timing of the leveling frame. (G) The control of the operation timing of the leveling frame is performed both in real time and in the next cycle, but is preferably performed in real time.
When the strength A of the outer periphery of the mold is insufficient, an operation change instruction is given to (g) the operation timing of the leveling frame while monitoring the (d) squeeze pressure in real time during the molding. In addition, the results of the measures taken in the current cycle with respect to the next cycle are also taken in, and (g) an operation change instruction of the operation timing of the leveling frame, and (a) the aeration pressure, b) Aeration time, (c) Board setting position, (d) Squeeze pressure, (e) Use / non-use of segment / preset, (f) Operation timing of segment / preset, and perform operation change instruction.

In the above control, the measurement result of the strength B of the mold product part is obtained at any time and used for controlling the next cycle for (a) aeration pressure, (b) aeration time, and (c) board set position. Can be Regarding (d) squeeze pressure, (e) use / non-use of segment / preset, (f) operation timing of segment / preset, and (g) operation timing of leveling frame, with respect to the cycle currently in progress and the next cycle Used for control.
If the strength B of the mold product part is insufficient, (d) squeeze pressure, (e) use / non-use of segment / preset, (f) operation timing of segment / preset for the mold in the middle of molding in real time , An operation change instruction. In addition, the results of the measures taken in the current cycle for the next cycle are also taken in, and (d) squeeze pressure, (e) use / non-use of segment / preset, (f) operation timing of segment / preset, And an operation change instruction relating to (a) aeration pressure, (b) aeration time, and (c) board set position, which are related to the insufficient strength.

  When the strength C of the entire mold is insufficient, (d) squeezing pressure, (e) use / non-use of segment / preset, (f) operation timing of segment / preset, for the mold in the middle of molding in real time, (G) An operation change instruction is issued at the operation timing of the leveling frame. In addition, the results of the measures taken in the current cycle for the next cycle are also taken in, and (d) squeeze pressure, (e) use / non-use of segment / preset, (f) operation timing of segment / preset, (G) An operation change instruction for the operation timing of the leveling frame and an operation change instruction for (a) aeration pressure, (b) aeration time, and (c) board set position, which are related to the insufficient strength.

  In addition to the case where the control is automatically performed in the mold making apparatus R100, the cause and the countermeasure when the required strength is not obtained are displayed on the display device R2C, and the operator sets the mold making apparatus R100. To do the same.

  The first control unit R202 controls the squeeze pressure when compacting the mold sand. The second control unit R203 and the third control unit R204 respectively control the aeration pressure and the aeration time for floating the mold sand when filling the mold sand into the mold molding space. The fourth control unit R205 controls a squeeze foot set position or a squeeze board set position for determining the mold thickness. The fifth control unit R206 controls the operation timing of the leveling frame that greatly affects the strength of the outer periphery of the mold. The sixth control unit R207 controls the operation of the squeeze foot that contributes to the variation in the strength of each part of the mold.

If the variation D of the strength of each part of the mold is larger than a specified value, it is an abnormality of the mold making apparatus, that is, the clogging of the aeration nozzle or the filter, or the deviation of the sand in the mold sand hopper (shelf hanging). Therefore, a warning is displayed on the display device R2C, and each part is inspected.
In this case, the possibility of the variation D in the strength of each part of the mold is defined by, for example, a standard deviation. Specifically, the sensor output of the sensor (1) to (18) shown in Figure 244, when the mold strength of each portion calculated by the strength calculating unit R2A and _X 1 _{to X 18,} the standard deviation s It is calculated by the following equation, and it is determined whether the value is equal to or less than a predetermined value.

Here, n is the number of samples, in this case n = _{18, X avg} is the average value of the mold strength _X i (i = _1~18) of each measuring point (R1) ~ (R18).

As the management of the variation D in the strength of each part of the mold, a predetermined first prescribed value (K1) and a second prescribed value (K2) smaller than the first prescribed value are used.
When the variation D (s) of the strength of each part of the mold is larger than the first specified value (s> K1), as described above, the clogging of the aeration nozzle, the hanging of the sand tank shelf, and the clogging of the aeration filter are checked. This is performed in the next cycle.
When the variation D (s) of the strength of each part of the mold is equal to or smaller than the first specified value (K1) and equal to or larger than the second specified value (K2) (K2 ≦ s ≦ K1), the mold in real-time On the other hand, an operation change instruction is given to (e) use / non-use of segment / preset and (f) operation timing of segment / preset. In addition, for the next cycle, the results of the measures performed in this cycle are also taken in, and an operation change instruction of (e) use / non-use of segment / preset, (f) operation timing of segment / preset, and An instruction is issued to change (a) the aeration pressure, (b) the aeration time, (c) the board setting position, (d) the squeeze pressure, and (g) the operation timing of the leveling frame.

Here, since the mold sand is kneaded by a kneading machine for each predetermined amount in batch units, it is considered that the sand properties in the same batch are relatively constant. Therefore, when the mold strength calculated from the measurement value of the molding sensor does not fall within the specified range, the subsequent molding can be performed with the changed set value obtained by performing the above control, and this can be performed for one batch. Can be applied to mold sand.
In the above control, the order in which feedback to each part to be controlled and the order in which the operator corrects settings in the mold making apparatus, and the number of items to be dealt with at a time are one by one or two or more. Any countermeasures such as countermeasures may be used.

In each of the case where the sensor is attached to the squeeze board or the squeeze foot side and the case where the sensor is attached to the pattern plate side, a sensor to be used and a sensor not to be used are selected by the strength calculation unit R2A according to the shape of the product. This is because the sensor output irrespective of the product shape becomes noise in the measurement of the mold strength and is removed. The method of selecting a sensor is to optimize the mold strength of the product according to the product shape taken from a database or the like, for example, using a sensor near the product section and not using a sensor far from the pattern. Sensors that can be evaluated reliably can be selected.
Here, in the above-described series of control settings, when the preconditions for constant control feedback such as product change are changed, each control value is initialized and learning and analysis by data collection are repeated. Will be tried. Here, each control value is stored in a database or the like, and when each control value has already been stored when a product is changed, the control value is adopted as an initial value.

FIGS. 245 and 246 are flowcharts showing the control of the operation of the leveling frame in the squeezing step of the mold making apparatus according to the present modification.
In this flowchart, the starting point is a state in which the mold sand is filled in the mold forming space. First, a squeeze cycle is started in RS601. The intensity of each unit is calculated by the intensity calculation unit R2A based on the signals from the sensors at the positions (R1) to (R10) shown in FIG. 244, and the data is sent to the fifth control unit R206 of the control device R2B. (RS602) The fifth control unit R206 monitors whether or not a predetermined leveling frame start strength has been reached, and if not, continuously monitors the strength. (RS603) When the set intensity has been reached, the lowering of the leveling frame is started, and the second squeeze is started. (RS604) After the completion of the second squeeze, the mold strength at the time of completion of molding is calculated. (RS605) In the squeeze cycle, it is checked whether or not the parting surface correction is performed. (RS606) If the parting surface correction is performed, it is checked whether or not the mold strength at the time of completion of molding is within a specified range. (RS607) If it is within the specified range, the start intensity of the leveling frame in the next squeeze cycle is reduced from the situation in which the parting surface correction has been performed, and (RS608) the start of the leveling frame is advanced earlier than this cycle. To end the squeeze cycle. (RS611)

  In RS607, if the mold strength is not within the specified range, it is checked whether the strength is out of the larger or smaller one. (RS609) If the strength is out of the smaller one, the mold strength is within the specified range. As in the case of entering the step, the setting of the start intensity of the leveling frame in the next squeeze cycle is reduced, and (RS608) the start of the leveling frame is set earlier so as to end the squeeze cycle. (RS611) If the strength deviates to the higher one, it is determined that a mechanical failure has occurred, a warning is issued to the display device R2C, and the squeeze cycle is terminated. (RS610)

  If the parting plane correction has not been performed in RS606, the process is started from RS701 in FIG. 246, and it is checked whether the mold strength is within the specified range. If it is within the specified range (RS702), the squeeze cycle ends. . (RS706) If the intensity is not within the specified range, it is checked whether the intensity has deviated to the higher side or to the lower one. (RS703) If the intensity deviates to the higher side, the start intensity of the leveling frame in the next cycle , The start timing of the leveling frame is delayed, and the cycle ends. (RS704) If the strength deviates to the smaller one, the setting of the start strength of the leveling frame in the next cycle is reduced, the start timing of the leveling frame is advanced, and the cycle is ended. (RS705)

The mold making apparatus R100 in this modification detects the pressure of the mold sand in each part of the mold as described above, converts the detected output into the strength of each part of the mold, and feeds back this strength output to each part of the mold making apparatus R100. Therefore, since the mold is manufactured, a mold having a necessary mold strength can be continuously formed.
In addition, although the sanding method of this modification uses the aeration method, it is not limited thereto. For example, a gravity drop method may be used as a sanding method. Further, as a mold making apparatus of the present modification, for example, a mold making apparatus with a frame can be cited, but the mold making apparatus is not limited thereto, and may be used, for example, as a blanking mold making apparatus.

As described above, even in a casting facility including the mold molding apparatus of the present modification as described above, the control device of the facility corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility stores measured data and the like in one frame. Is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as unique data corresponding to the pair of upper molds, that is, the paired upper mold and lower mold, as in the above embodiment.
Further, the control device acquires the unique data for one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility, and collects the unique data of each of these processes based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. It is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment also in that the correspondence is made for each mold of the frame.
Therefore, it is needless to say that the present modified example has the same effect as the above embodiment.

[A 41st Modification of the Embodiment]
Next, a forty-first modification of the casting facility 1 shown as the above embodiment will be described. The forty-first modification is a modification of the casting equipment 1 relating to the molding equipment 2. More specifically, the 41st modification is a further modification of the 40th modification.
Also in the forty-first modification, the equipment control device corresponding to each of the plurality of processes of the casting equipment 1 transmits the measured data and the like for one frame of the mold, that is, the paired upper mold and the lower mold. The point that the data is transmitted to the control device of the casting facility as the unique data corresponding to the mold is the same as in the above embodiment.
Also in the forty-first modification, the control device 11 acquires the unique data of one frame of the mold from each of the plurality of processes of the casting facility 1, and based on the unique mold identification number for the molded mold. In addition, it is the same as the above embodiment in that the unique data of each of these steps is associated with each frame of one frame.

FIG. 247 is a longitudinal sectional view of a mold making apparatus according to this modification. In the figure, reference numeral R250 is a filling frame, R251 is a casting frame, R252 is a leveling frame, and R300 is a squeeze board.
The modification shown in this drawing is different from the above-described forty-third modification in that a squeeze board R300 is used as an element for performing a squeeze operation.
In this modified example, except for performing the squeezing operation by the squeeze board R300, the molding is performed by the same operation as that of the above-mentioned forty-third modified example.

  In addition, the casting equipment and the casting method of the present invention are not limited to the above-described each embodiment and each of the modified examples described with reference to the drawings, and other various modified examples can be considered in the technical scope. .

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, each equipment is controlled by a control device provided in each of the equipments, and the control device 11 of the casting equipment 1 communicates with and controls the control device of each equipment. However, it is not limited to this. For example, each equipment may not be provided with a control device individually, and the control device 11 of the casting equipment 1 may be configured to control all the equipment.

  In addition, the configurations described in the above embodiments and modifications can be selected or combined with each other and appropriately changed to other configurations without departing from the gist of the present invention. .

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Casting equipment 2 Molding equipment 3 Core installation equipment 4 Cooling transfer equipment 5 Primary cooling transfer equipment 6 Secondary cooling transfer equipment 7 Pouring equipment 8 Post-processing equipment 10 Sand processing equipment 11 Controller 50 First line 51 Second line 52 Surface plate carriage 58 Weight transfer device 65 Mold unpacking device 68 Mold sand removal device 70 Furnace 71 Ladle 72 Automatic pouring device 82 Shot blast device 84 Marking device 129 Sand property measuring instrument

Claims (20)

  A casting facility, comprising: a control device that acquires unique data for one frame of a mold for a plurality of processes of the casting facility, and associates the unique data of each process for each mold of one frame.   The control device, for one of the plurality of steps, for two steps after the one step, based on the processing time in the two steps, the processing time in the one step 2. The casting facility according to claim 1, wherein the unique data of the one step is associated with the unique data of the second step based on the estimation result. 3. The plurality of steps include a molding step of molding a mold,
The casting equipment according to claim 1, wherein the control device issues a mold identification number to each of the molded molds and associates the unique data of the molding process with the mold identification numbers.   The casting equipment according to claim 3, wherein the specific data of the molding process includes any one or a combination of a mold thickness, a mold compression ratio, a squeeze pressure, an aeration pressure, and a sand tank pressure. The plurality of steps include a sand treatment step of treating mold sand used for molding of a mold,
The casting apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the control device associates the unique data of the sand processing step with the unique data of another of the steps. The sand processing equipment that performs the sand processing step is a method for measuring sand properties, measuring any or any combination of the temperature of the mold sand, the compactibility value, the moisture, the air permeability, the air pressure, and the compressive strength as sand properties. Equipped with
The casting equipment according to claim 5, wherein the unique data of the sand treatment step includes the sand property.   The casting facility according to claim 6, wherein the control device associates the unique data of the sand treatment process with the unique data of another process based on a time measured by the sand property measuring device. The plurality of steps include a core setting step of setting a core in a mold,
The casting equipment according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the control device associates the unique data of the core installation step with the unique data of another step. The unique data of the core installation step includes a core installation time,
The casting apparatus according to claim 8, wherein the control device associates the unique data of the core installation process with the unique data of another process based on the installation time. The plurality of steps includes a pouring step of producing a molten metal and pouring the molten metal into a mold,
The casting equipment according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the control device associates the unique data of the pouring step with the unique data of another step.   The casting equipment according to claim 10, wherein the unique data of the pouring step includes any one or a combination of a ladle number, a casting weight, a casting time, and a casting temperature associated with each ladle.   The casting equipment according to claim 10, wherein the control device associates the unique data of the pouring step with the unique data of another of the steps based on a casting time at which the molten metal is cast into the mold. . The plurality of steps, a mold, a mold into which the molten metal is cast, and a casting, and cooled, including a cooling and transporting step,
The casting apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the control device associates the unique data of the cooling and conveying process with the unique data of another of the processes.   The casting facility according to claim 13, wherein the specific data of the cooling and conveying step includes a cooling time. The cooling and transporting equipment that performs the cooling and transporting step,
A primary cooling and conveying device that conveys and cools the mold into which the molten metal is cast,
A mold separating device that separates the mold from the casting by separating the mold,
A secondary cooling and conveying device that conveys and cools the casting where the mold has been separated,
The casting facility according to claim 13 or 14, comprising: The plurality of steps include a post-processing step of performing post-processing,
The casting equipment according to any one of claims 1 to 15, wherein the control device associates the unique data of the post-processing step with the unique data of another step.   17. The casting facility according to claim 16, wherein the specific data of the post-processing step includes one or both of a stamping time of the casting and a weir folding time.   A casting method in which, for a plurality of steps of a casting facility, unique data for one frame of a mold is obtained, and the unique data of each step is associated with each frame of one mold.   Estimating the processing time in the one step based on the processing time in the two steps with respect to one step of the plurality of steps and two steps subsequent to the one step, 19. The casting method according to claim 18, wherein the unique data of the one step is associated with the unique data of the second step based on the estimation result.   The plurality of steps are a molding step of performing molding of a mold, a sand processing step of treating mold sand used for molding of the mold, a core setting step of installing a core in the mold, and a method of manufacturing a molten metal and forming the molten metal in the mold. Is a combination of two or more steps of a pouring step of pouring into the mold, a mold, a mold in which the molten metal is cast, and a cooling and conveying step of conveying and cooling the casting, and a post-processing step of performing post-processing. The casting method according to claim 18.

Images